You are on page 1of 0

Online help

ToPs 300
Use the functions of Acrobat Readers to look for a word.

Instructions for Acrobat Reader

The "Find" function" corresponds to the binocular in der icon


bar.

"Find next" can be activated with the F3 key.

Online help

You can find the "Find" function under Edit in the 4.0 version of
Acrobat Reader.

You can use the cursor keys in the icon bar alongside the
bookmark for the navigation of the document.

Ordering information

Please state the title of the document, the language required


and the date of issue.

TRUMPF GmbH + Co.


D-71254 Ditzingen
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
Telephone (07156)303-0
Fax (07156)303-309, Telex 7245201
Internet: http://www.trumpf.com
E-mail: help@trumpf.com

This document was drawn up in the Technical Documentation of TRUMPF GmbH + Co.
All rights to this documentation, especially the rights of reproduction and distribution
as well as that of translation are retained by TRUMPF GmbH + Co., even in the case
of notifications of protective privilege. Without previous written consent of TRUMPF
GmbH + Co., no part of the documentation, no matter in which form, may be
reproduced or processed, copied or distributed using electronic systems. We reserve
the right to make technical alterations and accept no liability for errors.
TRUMPF GmbH + Co.

TRUMPF GmbH + Co. accepts no liability for any errors arising in this
documentation. Liability for direct and indirect damage or injury, resulting from the
delivery or use of this documentation is excluded, in so far as this is legally
admissible.

Before reading any further ...


ToPs 300

ToPs 300 is a programming system which has been conceived for


punching and combined machines. These machines can punch,
nibble, and form as well as carry out combined punching and laser
processing.
ToPs:

Manual

Contents

Technologyorientated
Programming
system

The manual should explain operation of the ToPs 300 programming system and also serve as a reference work.

Chapters 1 and 2: Overview of the whole system and its operation.


Chapters 3 to 7 describe the functions of the individual modules.
One module will be explained per chapter. In particular:
Chapter 3: DRAWING module
Chapter 4: NEST module
Chapter 5: TECHNOLOGY module
Chapter 6: DATA module
Chapter 7: INFO module
Chapter 8 describes the automation components and their configuration for the DATA and TECHNOLOGY modules.

Complementary
Documentation

Further information can be found in the documentation which you


received with your machine:

Conventions

S354E0.DOC

Operators manual
Programming manual
Data collection

Certain formats and terms are used throughout this manuals text.
Familiarize yourself with the "Explanation of format" and the
"Explanations on terminology" (see following pages) in order to
avoid misunderstandings.

Before reading any further...

0-5

Explanation of format
Buttons

Button symbols are represented as capitals and are always in


pointed brackets.
Example <SHIFT>

Screen menus

Functions from the screen menus are highlighted by capitalisation.


Example: Select the function LINE, PARALLEL from the CREATE
control function menu.

Main menu bar

Functions from the main menu bar are written in bold capitals.
Example Select the function FILE, LOAD.

Function buttons

System requirements

Files
Directories

Variables

Terms in masks

0-6

Contents

Function buttons are highlighted by capitalisation.


Example Select OK.

System requirements and entries which the system expects are


indicated by a different font.
Example Zoom factor? 0.5

Files and directories are written in single quotes.


Example c:\trumpf\users\gtest

Variable descriptions and values are shown in brackets.


Example (name to be input).geo

Reference to input fields and mask titles are indicated by double


inverted commas.
Example Enter "Part name".

S354E0.DOC

1.

The concept

ToPs 300 a Technology orientated Programming System, for


complete punch machining as well as for complete combined
machining.
With ToPs, TRUMPF gives you the complete sheet processing
know-how. ToPs is modular and thus comprehensible in construction. ToPs takes the specific possibilities of your machine into
account in every phase of programming and guarantees the
process-safe creation of a finished NC program and its data
transfer.
ToPs is an open system which ensures a close connection to the
design work.

Closed process chain, sheet

ToPs is the connecting element between the construction and


manufacturing areas.

Programming is technology orientated and via a unified data


base (laser tables, processing rules, machine data, tool data,
material data, NC components), which ToPs accesses.

1-2

Construction takes manufacturing interests into account.

The entire machine technology is used in manufacturing.

Introduction to ToPs 300

S354E11.DOC

Construction
2D/3D-CADSystems

IGES 2D
+3D,
STEP, STL

IGES, MI,
DXF

Programming
ToPs 300
Punching and
combined
machining

NC program

SolidDesigner/
SheetAdvisor
3D-CAD-System
for sheet
processing

MI,
Developed view

Developed view
2D
GEO

ToPs 600
bending
technology

NC program

Production
TC 260L
TC 600L
TC 500R
TC 2000R

Platform

S354E11.DOC

TrumaBend

ToPs 300 can run on a PC with a Windows 95 or Windows NT


system.

Introduction to ToPs 300

1-3

Machines and components supported


Machine

Control system

Automated

Explanations

(Machine software)

TC 120R

Bosch CC 220

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1000 all automation components

TC 160R

Bosch CC 220

TC 190R

Bosch CC 220

TC 200R

Bosch CC 220

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 200

all automation components

TC 180 K/W

Bosch M5TC

only Bosch M5TC, without: laser, thread,


Multitool, Swift

TC 180.2 K/W

Bosch M5TC

only Bosch M5TC, without: laser, thread,


Multitool, Swift

TC180 K/W

Fanuc 6MB

only rotation, without: Laser, thread,


Multitool

TC180 K/W

Sinumerik 8N

only non-rotation, working

TC 235

Bosch CC 200

TC 235

Sinumerik 3 N

TC 240

Bosch CC 200 (T19)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TC 240

Bosch CC 200 (>= T21)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TC 240L

Bosch CC 200 (< T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TC 240L

Bosch CC 200 (>= T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TC 240R

Bosch CC 300

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TC 260

Bosch CC 300 (< T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C


+ TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB

TC 260

Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C


+ TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB

TC 260L

Bosch CC 300 (< T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C


+ TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB

TC 260L

Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C


+ TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB

TC 500R

Bosch CC 220

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
1000, 1250, 1300, 1600

all automation components

TC 600L

Sinumerik 840 D

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
1306, 1606

all automation components

TC 2000 R

Bosch Type 3

Machines with plasma devices are not supported by ToPs 300.

1-4

Introduction to ToPs 300

S354E11.DOC

2.
Modular Construction

Brief description of the modules

ToPs has a modular design: The various functional groups of ToPs


have been allotted to different software modules. The modules are
reflected in the initial screen which appears when ToPs is started.

Initial screen

Fig. 18331

DRAWING module
In the DRAWING module you create the drawing of a single part,
i.e. you draw the geometrical shape of the single part. The drawing
of a single part is the basis for all subsequent work such as the
positioning of the sheet, definition of the processing or creation of
the NC program. These procedures are carried out in the
TECHNOLOGY module.

S354E11.DOC

Introduction to ToPs 300

1-5

NEST module
In the NEST module, the tasks are determined and the parts nested
as single parts or mini nests. Two nesting processors are available
for this. Choose the appropriate nest processor according to the
part geometry: The extended rectangle nest processor and the free
geometry nest processor.

TECHNOLOGY module
The TECHNOLOGY module is the core of the programming
system. Here the sheet layout is determined, processing defined
and the NC program generated. The basis for these work steps is
the single part drawing. You create the drawing of a single part in
the DRAWING module.
ToPs automatically generates the NC program. To do this, it refers
to NC components stored in the data base. You can simulate
processing of a sheet on the screen.
ToPs also creates a processing plan containing all information
relevant to machining.
The NC program, the processing plan and the screen display of the
sheet can be printed out if your PC is connected to a printer or a
plotter.

1-6

Introduction to ToPs 300

S354E11.DOC

DATA module
In this module, data from TRUMPF is made available to you in
the form of a database which the system uses in the various
programming phases.
The database contains various data depending upon the machine:
Machine data, material data, tool data, laser data, NC modules,
machining rules, system data and other data.
You can view and manage some data in this module using masks.

INFO module
The four index cards enable you to

interrogate the software and


data base version,
change the language setting and
delete files

Ending ToPs
Selecting this button opens the door to leave the ToPs 300
programming system.

S354E11.DOC

Introduction to ToPs 300

1-7

3.
DATA
module

Overview of programming sequence

Precondition:
In the DATA module, the machine data must be set correctly
according to your machine and possible options should be
activated. Check the available settings.
Also check whether the tool sets used on the machine are defined
in the ToPs database. If there are deviations, then input the correct
tool data and save the changes.
In the DATA and TECHNOLOGY modules, masks support these
actions.
see: TECHNOLOGY module, tool management
see: DATA module description.
As a rule, configuration of your machine has to be carried out only
once.
Afterwards you will mainly use only the DRAWING, NEST and
TECHNOLOGY modules.

With ToPs 300, there are only a few steps from drawing the
component part up to creation of the NC program.

Procedure:
DRAWING
Module

NEST
module

1-8

In the DRAWING module:


1. Create drawings of single parts or read in a drawing from
another source and process it.

In the NEST module:


2. Define job
3. Nest parts and mini nests of a defined job.

Introduction to ToPs 300

S354E11.DOC

TECHNOLOGY
module

In the TECHNOLOGY module, several procedures are possible.


The following three varieties describe possible examples.
Select that variant suitable to your job or define your own
procedure.

Variant 1

Variant 2

Variant 3:

Load part or sheet without


processing

Load part or sheet with


processing

Load part or sheet with or


without processing

4. Load single parts without


processing or nested
sheets without processing.

4. Load single parts with


processing or nested
sheets with processing.

4. Load single parts or


nested sheets with or
without processing.

5. Create processing of
single parts or of nested
sheets.

5. Change processing of
single parts or of nested
sheets.

5. Create or change processing of single parts or


of the nested sheet.

6. If single parts are loaded:


Specify the sheet layout as
simple or specific
versatility.

6. Change the sheet layout as


simple or sectional multcopy machining.

6. Specify or change the


sheet layout as simple or
specific versatility.

7. Optimize sheet processing.

7. Optimize sheet processing.

8. Simulate sheet processing


and check it.

8. Simulate sheet processing


and check it.

9. Generate NC program.

9. Generate NC program.

7. Optimizing sheet
processing.
8. Simulate sheet processing
and check it.
9. Generate NC program.

Result:

S354E11.DOC

The created NC program can now be made ready for part


production, e.g. copied or transferred to the appropriate directory
via FILE, TRANSFER.

Introduction to ToPs 300

1-9

1.

Operating ToPs with a mouse and


keyboard

You are provided with a keyboard with a mouse pointer (cursor) to


select functions and enter data. The calculator is displayed for
entering numerical values and coordinates if you double click on
the entry field.

1.1
Appearances

Mouse pointer (cursor)

The appearance of the mouse pointer on the screen varies.


Arrow: Select menu functions and function buttons.

Position the mouse pointer on the desired function.


Press the left mouse button briefly.
The selected function is executed.

Cross: The mouse pointer is displayed as a cross in the drawing


window.To select geometric elements or any random point, first
position the cursor and click the left mouse button.
Clock: This symbol means: "Please wait". The system is carrying
out computations during this time. Activation of functions or
selection of geometry elements using the mouse is not possible at
the moment.
Text cursor: Within a mask, the mouse pointer is depicted as a text
cursor. To enter data:

Left mouse button

2-2

Operating ToPs 300

Click the entry field. The text cursor appears.


Move the cursor to the exact position where the entries will be
made.
Press the left mouse button.
Enter the data using the keyboard.

The left mouse button can only be used for selecting and clicking
on a position or function.

S354E21.DOC

Right mouse button:


Preview window for drawing
geometry

A preview window is integrated into the file selection masks. The


drawing for the selected file is displayed by clicking the file with the
right mouse button or by activating the "Preview" check button (and
clicking the file with the left mouse button). The parts size will
appear underneath the drawing. The current coordinates will be
displayed when you move the mouse pointer inside the preview
window.

Right mouse button:

Preview window for tool and part geometry for nesting.


You have a tool list activated. Right click on the tool data block.
The system shows you the tool geometry for the selected tool.
Right click in the order list in NEST mode. The part geometry will
be displayed.

Zooming in the graphics


screen using the right
mouse button

Clicking on a point in the graphics screen will enlarge the screen


section around the point three times. Select the TOTAL option to
display the contents of the drawing window in the original size
again.

1.2

Keyboard

Enter text and numerals using the keyboard.


Entering numerical values

Numerical values are entered in the input line or in masks.


Example:
Decimal entries:
30.5
Coordinate entries:
10,20.5

Text entries in masks

The text cursor (vertical line) must be positioned in the entry field
(click with the mouse) before any characters can be entered in the
mask. The character entered appears to the left of the text cursor.
The text cursor is moved to the next entry field by pressing the
<RETURN> button. Display fields (which are those without text
lines) are automatically skipped.

S354E21.DOC

Operating ToPs 300

2-3

Entering commands and


actions

Commands and actions are entered using function and special


keys:
Key
<RETURN>

Confirm entry and jump to the next entry field.

<TAB>

In masks: Jump to the next entry field.

<BACKSPACE>

To delete the character preceding the cursor

<Direction keys>

In masks: Select data block.

<ESC>

Using F-keys as hotkeys

Function

In masks: Delete characters in the entry field.

Menus and functions can also be called up using the keyboard.


The following keys are used:
Key
<F key>
<CNTR>+<F key>
<Direction keys>
<RETURN>

Repeating entries and


functions

Function
Select function (hotkey)
Select function (hotkey)
Select
Confirm selection

You need not always repeat the same inputs and functions again
and again. Use the keyboard buffer instead. Functions executed in
the background or inputs in the command line while working with
the graphic screen are saved.

Procedure

2-4

Operating ToPs 300

Click on the command line with the mouse pointer if it is not


positioned there. Then scroll through the keyboard buffer using
the cursor keys (<cursor down>, <cursor up>) until the desired
command or entry appears.
Press <RETURN> to confirm.
The command or entry will be repeated.

S354E21.DOC

1.3

The calculator

The calculator is displayed for entering numerical values and


coordinates.
By using the calculator, you can carry out calculations and
simultaneously enter the result as a number.
Entry field

You can select the calculator by double clicking in any entry field
for numbers.
Simply enter the value in the entry field or calculate a value.

Entry field Selecting the calculator

Command line

Fig. 20085

Click on the command line several times for entries of numbers or


coordinates which you must enter in the command line.

Command line Selecting the calculator

Fig. 20086

Here, the calculator is displayed with an expanded entry area for


coordinates. Enter the values for the X and Y coordinates at the
top of the entry field. When the function button X or Y is
pressed, the value is adopted as a coordinate in the appropriate
field.

S354E21.DOC

Operating ToPs 300

2-5

Configuring the calculator

You can select whether you wish to work with the calculator or
whether it should not be displayed during operation of ToPs.

Procedure:

Select the INI file for ToPS 300.


Change the values for the following variables from 1 to 0:
Value 1= calculator can be selected with the mouse
Value 0= calculator can not be selected with the mouse.
Excerpt from the Tops300.ini file:
;; -----------------------------------;;activates number entry using the mouse
ST_NumInputWithMouse = 1

2-6

Operating ToPs 300

S354E21.DOC

2.

User interface

2.1

Initial screen

The modular design of ToPs 300 is reflected in the initial screen.


This is the centre from which each module can be called up.
Initial screen: central position in ToPs 300

Initial screen in ToPs

Fig. 18331

Select the function button whose module you wish to open. The
modules user interface is set-up. You can now select the
corresponding functions: Depending upon the selected module, a
graphic screen or a mask screen is offered to you as the user
interface.
Closing the module

You should first quit the selected module via the FILE, CLOSE
function in order to move to the initial screen. You can now call up
a different module.
Changing between the individual modules is possible only
via the initial screen. Direct switching is not possible.

S354E21.DOC

Operating ToPs 300

2-7

2.2

Graphic display

The screen appears as a graphic screen when graphic


representations are necessary. This is the case for example in the
DRAWING module when creating a single part drawing. The
assigned sheets with machining are represented as a drawing also
for the machining definition and simulation.
Mask header

Screen menu
with

Main menu bar


Information and
selection bar

Control field

Working area
of the graphics
screen

Menu field

Maskenfu

fixed functions
Example Graphics screen in the TECHNOLOGY module

Mask header

All general information, e.g. the product name on the left and some
WINDOWS functions to the right, can be found in the mask header.

TRUMPF logo
with functions

To move ToPs to the


Windows start-bar

Product name

Operating ToPs 300

Quit ToPs

No function is assigned
to this button
Mask header

2-8

Fig. 19831

Fig. 19337

S354E21.DOC

Main menu bar, info


and selection bar

Main menu bar


The main functions of the active module are displayed in the main
menu bar. The subfunctions to these main functions appear as
pull-down menus. Select the main function with the mouse so that
the subfunctions become visible.
Call up online
documentation

Main menu bar

Pull-down
menus with
information and
selection
possibilities

Active
machine

Active
material

Active
tool

Activate
used tool

TRUMPF
logo

Fig. 19338

TRUMPF logo
Information regarding the software version appears by clicking on
the logo.

Information and selection bar


Three display fields represented by windows are located below the
main menu bar and are opened as pull-down menus. A selection
box or a selection window is opened if you select an arrow
(symbol), or if you click directly in the display field. The selected
data appears in the display fields and remains as active
information during a ToPs session.
The contents of the three fields depend upon the current module
and the current settings. The "previous file", "drawing color" (line
color) and "solid" (line type) information are displayed in the
DRAWING module.

S354E21.DOC

Operating ToPs 300

2-9

Two different symbol switch surfaces which are independent from


each other are located in the right area of the mask header:
Question mark: This function is not yet supported in this version of
ToPs.
In the future, the online help will be activated by clicking this button.
The punching tool operating surface: an icon for rapid activation of
a tool that is already being used.

Working area

Mask footer

The information in the graphics mask Working area is represented


as a drawing: single piece and sheet drawing, processing in the
form of tool geometry. In addition, the machines environment i.e.
working area and overrun area, as well as transverse rails with
positions for tool and clamps are also displayed.

The mask footer is subdivided into four lines:

Status line with icon bar


Command line
Entry line
Message line
Variable
icon buttons

Status line
Command line
Input line
Message line
Fixed icon buttons
Example Mask footer in the DRAWING module

Fig. 19339

Status line with icon bar


Status line The current cursor position (coordinates) is displayed.
Divided icon bar: The left part of the icon bar can take different
forms: The number and content of the displayed icons depends
upon the selected module. The right section of the icon bar always
contains the same symbols (= fixed icons), regardless of which
module is open.

2-10

Operating ToPs 300

S354E21.DOC

What is hidden behind the symbol switch surfaces (icons)?


Icons with text labels
Move the mouse (arrow) to one of the icons without clicking with
the mouse. An icons caption appears. Have you found the function
TOTAL?
The following functions are covered by the fixed icon buttons:
Symbol

Function
TOTAL function.
Displays entire drawing in the masks working
area.
DETAIL function.
Displays a detailed view of the drawing in the
mask working area. You should frame the area
you wish to view in detail, in a box. The marking
box is a rectangle.
Click on the first point of the rectangle.
Click on the second opposite point.
OFFSET function.
Moves the drawing in the working area of the
mask. Click on the reference point and the
target point.
ZOOM function
Changing the display in the working area:
Enlarging or reducing the drawing.
Procedure: Input a factor and confirm your input
with <RETURN>. Examples:
To reduce the display by half: Input 0.5.
To enlarge the display by a factor of 2: Enter 2.
PREVIOUS ZOOM function.
Restores previous representation size of the
drawing.
DRAW function
The drawing window is restored.

S354E21.DOC

Operating ToPs 300

2-11

In addition, further variable icon surfaces appear in the footer and


vary with the selected module.

DRAWING module
Symbol

Function
OPEN CONTOUR POINTS function.
Makes all open points within a drawing appear
or disappear.
DISPLAY POINTS function.
Makes contour points appear or disappear.
A drawing contains various contour points
which are represented in different colors when
this function is selected:
Cross, red: Start and end point of a contour.
Green square: Contour linking points.
Cyan cross: Centre point of circles or partial
circles.

TECHNOLOGY module
Symbol

Function
DISPLAY POINTS function.
Makes contour points appear or disappear.
A drawing contains various contour points
which are represented in different colors when
this function is selected:
Red cross:Start and end point of a contour.
Green square: Contour linking points.
Cyan cross: Centre point of circles or partial
circles.

GEOMETRY function.
To make geometry of single parts/initial blank
appear or disappear.

OPERATIONS function.
To make all operations in the current display
appear or disappear.

2-12

Operating ToPs 300

S354E21.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module (continuation)


Symbol

Function
SYMBOL function.
To select or deselect symbolic display of the
single parts.
Single parts are represented symbolically on
the sheet as a circumscribed rectangle.

POSITIONING.
To make only positioning motions in the current
display appear or disappear.

ACTIVE TOOL ONLY function.


To make only active tool appear / disappear in
the display.

Command line
You should keep this line in view: The system issues instructions in
this line which explain procedures to you.

Input line
Data which you input via the keyboard appears in the input line.

Message line
The ToPs working method is transparent. The system information
appears in the message line. This information is as follows:
Information on current operations in ToPs.
Information about the successful or unsuccessful completion
of an arithmetical operation.

S354E21.DOC

Operating ToPs 300

2-13

Screen menu:

6FUHHQ PHQX GLYLVLRQ


DUHDV

The screen menu in the graphic screen can be subdivided into:


Control field
Menu field
Fixed functions

'HVFULSWLRQ RI LQGLYLGXDO
VFUHHQ PHQX DUHDV

Control field
with
control functions

Select your procedure with pull-down


menus and control functions. It depends
upon the control function as to which
functions you receive in the menu field.

Menu field
with variable
menu functions

Content and number of functions is


variable. According to which module you
are in and which control function you
have selected.

Fixed functions

You always find these four functions at


this location

Example Screen menu in the TECHNOLOGY menu

2-14

Operating ToPs 300

Fig. 19340

S354E21.DOC

Graphics screen: Operation sequence


The design of the user interface allows quick, convenient
programming: Functions which can be selected are readable, and
inactive functions have a gray background. They cannot be
selected. This type of display is self explanatory and follows you
wherever you go in the programming system.

The general recommendation: Work within the module in the main


menu bar from left to right and within the screen menu from top to
bottom. The function buttons marked in green and the standard
settings help you to achieve secure programming results.
Example: Graphics screen in the TECHNOLOGY module

Select file

Nesting
the sheet

Process individual
part or sheet

Optimize
processing

Generate
NC-program
Select
technology:
Punch or laser
processing
How to define?
automatic or
manual

Start action:
Select control
function;
Check settings,
select menu
functions

Procedure during operation

S354E21.DOC

Fig. 18616

Operating ToPs 300

2-15

2.3

Mask display

A mask screen is displayed when data or settings can be selected.

Heading

Working range in
the mask screen

Mask footer

Example Mask screen

Fig. 18337

Heading

Working area

As a rule, the working range consists of index cards which you


select by clicking on the index card heading.

Mask footer

2-16

The heading always indicates where you are within the programming system.

In general, the mask footer contains the OK and CANCEL function


buttons. You will always find these buttons in the same place.

Operating ToPs 300

S354E21.DOC

2.4

Operating devices

General rule:
ToPs 300 can usually be operated both with the mouse and with
the keyboard. Exceptions prove the rule: check boxes, buttons with
color identification or data blocks in selection fields can only be
selected with the mouse.
All fields and buttons which can be read are applicable for the
active mask. Functions which cannot be selected have a gray
background or are shown hatched.

Pull-down menu

You will find pull-down menus in places where e.g. several


functions can be selected: within the mask and in the screen menu.

Radio button

Buttons with color identification, also called "Radio buttons", enable


you to select an individual possibility. Each radio button excludes
the others.

Example of button with colour identification

Check button

Check boxes are also called "check buttons". You can select
several of the possibilities on offer with these buttons. The field
which you click on is provided with a cross. The option is thus
selected.

Example of a check button

S354E21.DOC

Fig. 18589

Fig. 18588

Operating ToPs 300

2-17

Selection window

As before, many data records are available for selection in the form
of selection windows with the possibility of scrolling.
Example

Selection window: Select punching tools

Index cards

Fig. 19553

When the system offers various possibilities to start certain actions,


e.g. to carry out the optimization process, then the possibilities are
not offered as function buttons but as index cards. A mask within
which you can determine the frame requirements, or select data
from selection window formats, is opened by selecting an index
card.

Index card principle:

Fig. 19343

There are several selection possibilities in the form of index cards

2-18

Operating ToPs 300

S354E21.DOC

2.5

Standard masks

Standard masks are masks which occur at different points in the


programming system, but which are principally set up in the same
way. ToPs 300 recognises the following types of standard masks:

Data manager (file selection mask) and part manager in the


form of index cards which can be selected.

The confirmation and message masks as sub-masks which


can be displayed.

Data manager: Load files


Files are always loaded in the same manner. ToPs helps you to
carry out these procedures via a mask: Enter the path (directory)
and name of the file which is to be loaded. The easier procedure is
to select the desired file in the selection window. This will save you
having to type everything in.
The file name which was last input or selected is always displayed
with the accompanying path specifications.

File selection mask

Fig. 19344

Path specification
"Search in:" In which directory the system should look for files.
Input the complete path or select a path. All "Previous directories"
which you have already selected once are shown by pressing the
"" (arrow) button.
Select the function button with the symbol "*" (asteriks) to jump
back a directory level.

S354E21.DOC

Operating ToPs 300

2-19

File formats
The radio buttons (buttons with color identification) show you which
file formats can be selected. You can also control the display in the
left of the selection window via the file format. Example: "*.GEO"
button activated. All files with the extension GEO available in the
current directory will be shown in the selection window. With the
function button * (symbol: asterisk), you can change the directory.
You return to a previous directory level.
The switches which have a gray background cannot currently be
selected.

Preview window
Select the "Preview" check box.
The drawings for the affiliated file are displayed in the preview
window. In this way you can check whether you have also selected
the desired drawing.
The dimensions of the part are displayed below. The coordinate
details change as soon as you move the mouse within the preview
window.
If you wish to view the geometry of a file only occasionally, then
deactivate the "Preview" control field and click directly on the file
names in the selection window with the right mouse button. The
geometry is displayed in the preview window only for this particular
occasion.

File name with path specification


The name of the selected file is automatically input and displayed
below the selection window as soon as you have clicked on the
file.

Using the function buttons


OK

Cancel

Confirms input.

Cancels selection procedure.

Symbols in the selection window


In the selection window, directory names are indicated with "*"
(symbol: asterisk) and file names are indicated with "-" (symbol:
dash). Example:
- 6378.GEO file name
* USER_JO2 Directory

Limit values
A maximum of 200 data records can be displayed in the selection box.

2-20

Operating ToPs 300

S354E21.DOC

Changing directories
In order to change to another directory in the selection window,
select the * (asterisk) symbol above the window scrolling bar.

Wildcards
Wildcards serve as place holders in a file name, standing for a
certain number of characters or a string of characters.
Please note: It is important to have selected the appropriate radio
button for the desired file format. Example: If you wish to use the
*.GEO file format with wild cards, but the radio button for the *.TMT
file format is selected, you will always be shown files with the TMT
extension.

Application:
Use wildcards to reduce the number of files in the selection box.
Proceed as follows:

Enter the file name, with wildcards, in input field "File name" in
the initial mask.
Select OK. The files are offered in the file selection mask
window. The selection criterion, incl. path name, also appears
in the first line of the mask.

The following wildcards may be used:


?

Question mark: Replaces any character. Example:

*test?.geo

replaces e.g.
test1.geo
test2.geo
testa.geo

Asterisk: Replaces any string of characters. Example:

*.geo

replaces e.g.
test1.geo
test2.geo
tresta.geo

Wildcards can be combined. Example:


*test?.geo

replaces e.g.
1test1.geo
P1testx.geo

S354E21.DOC

Operating ToPs 300

2-21

Part management
File

Load

The "Part management" index card allows you to mange your


files in the database; i.e. to load or delete files.
You are shown the masks in each module whenever you select the
function FILE, LOAD. "Part management" is offered as a second
index card in addition to the standard mask "Data manager".
The following masks help you in part management:

Part management in ToPs

Import files

Fig. 19917

Precondition:
You must first import the files to the database to be able to manage
files in the database.
Procedure:

IMPORT function

Start import procedure.

Select the IMPORT function.


The file selection mask is opened. Select which files you wish to
import using the file extensions. Click on the appropriate file.
Confirm your choice with OK.
In the subsequent mask, you will be asked whether you wish to
import all files with this extension.
YES: All of the files in the selection window are added to
the database.
NO: Only the selected file is added to the database.
The imported files are displayed in the selection window.

2-22

Operating ToPs 300

S354E21.DOC

File display

Note: Only those files which have the extension of the activated
radio button are displayed.
Proceed in the same way for all file types which you wish to import
to the database.

Part management tasks

Sort or search for files

After files have been imported, you can carry out the following
activities:
Sort or search for files.
View file information.
Carry out file management.

Procedure:
Specify criteria for file selection by clicking the appropriate check
buttons. The corresponding entry field is activated. Enter the
search criterion or select a property with the > (arrow) icon:
"File name"
"Drawing number"
"Drawing name"
"Processed by"
"Customer name"
"Machine"
"Material"
These criteria can already be stored as properties as part of
drawing creation.

Drawing number as search criterion

S354E21.DOC

Fig. 19918

Operating ToPs 300

2-23

Input rules

The percent sign (%) is interpreted as a placeholder. The number


and date specification is the default setting for the maximum entry
possibility.
Year specification: Year (four digit), month (two digit), day
(two digit). Example: December 9th, 1998 is entered as follows
19981209.

UPDATE function

Update the display in the selection window of the index card


"Part management".
The display is updated according to the criteria after they have
been entered. Only those files which fulfill the criteria are
displayed.

Call up information on part


FULL INFO function

View complete information on part.

Procedure

First select the file in the selection window whose information


you would like to view.
Click on the FULL INFO function.
The following mask appears:

Display of the complete part information

Fig. 19919E

In addition to the information which you already know about from


part management mask, this mask contains further information on:

2-24

Operating ToPs 300

"Table": Laser table number


"Rule group": Number of the rule group

S354E21.DOC

"Creation date from to:": Entry of the time period when the file
was created.
"Last change from to:": Entry of the time period when a
change was made. "Order": Order in which the part was used.
"Area": Area of the part.
"Length": Length of the part.
"Width": Width of the part.
"File name": Name of the file.

At the right of the mask, you can find information on:

S354E21.DOC

"Mini-nest": Does a mini nest exist for this individual part


drawing?
"Rotatable": Can this individual part be rotated during sheet
nesting?
"Rolling direction" means that the rolling direction of the sheet
must be taken into account during sheet nesting.
"Dimension system": In which dimension system was the
drawing created?
OK function: You leave the mask and return to the previous
mask.

Operating ToPs 300

2-25

Managing parts

PART MANAGEMENT
function

Part management means deleting files from the database and the
hard disk using a mask.
The following masks help you in this activity:

"Part management" mask

Fig. 19920

You specify whence you would like to delete the file from in the
"Mode" area:

2-26

Operating ToPs 300

"Delete files from DB only": The files are deleted from the
database but not from the directory on the hard disk.
"Delete files which no longer exist from the database":
You delete files, e.g. parts, from the corresponding directory
on the hard disk using the Explorer. If you have managed
these files in the database, however, they still exist in the
database. You can delete any of these files by using this radio
button.
"Delete files from database and hard disk!":
Here it is important to note which deletion mode you have
activated in the following area "Deletion mode for files on the
hard disk".
"Use recycle bin (if possible)": The files are not deleted
from the hard drive but are placed in a "recycle bin".
The data can be retrieved at any time.
"Only delete to the recycle bin".

S354E21.DOC

Quit part management

Function button OK

"Delete files completely (free up hard disk space)"


In part management, the entire path for each file is
managed along with it (in the display field "File path" in the
mask).
This combination of radio buttons deletes the files both from
the database and from the directory on the hard disk. These
files are lost if you have not made a backup copy of them.
Recommendation: Ensure that you are deleting the correct
files before you delete them.

"Update file information": If you activate this check button, the


data is read in again from the files.
You confirm the settings in the mask with OK. The deletion
procedure is carried out.
The deletion procedure is aborted with CANCEL. You return to
the previous mask.

You quit the "Part management" index card with the two function
buttons at the bottom right of the mask.
The file you activated is loaded and displayed on the screen.
Result You have loaded a file using part management.

Function button CANCEL

S354E21.DOC

The procedure is aborted. You return to the screen display from


which you selected part management.

Operating ToPs 300

2-27

Confirmation and message masks


Informative system messages appear in the confirmation or
message masks. Message masks must be confirmed by clicking
on OK. The system expects you to make a decision in confirmation
masks: If you select YES, you accept the entry in the mask, and
with NO you do not confirm it.

Example of a confirmation mask

2-28

Operating ToPs 300

Fig. 20087

S354E21.DOC

3.
File name structure

Files in ToPs

The full file name consists of two parts:


(name to be entered) . (extension)
Example: TEST1.GEO

Extension

Various types of files are generated during ToPs programming.


They can be differentiated by the extension in the file name. The
extension is either assigned automatically by ToPs at each storage
procedure, or you enter a file name.

Rules:
The following may be used as characters: a string of numerals,
a string of letters or a combination of both.
Special symbols, spaces and full stops may not be used.
Recommendation: Think up a rational system for assigning
file names. Two examples are given in the description of file
names.
The individual file types which can be created in ToPs are
described in the following.
Module
DRAWING

Single part drawing

Example:

test.GEO
P4711.GEO

Example:

arc.WZG

Example:

polygon.VLG

(file name).GEO
Enter the file name. The extension is
assigned automatically.

Drawing of a tool geometry


(file name).WZG
Enter the file name. The extension is
assigned automatically.

Drawing of a macro template


(File name).VLG
Enter the file name. The extension is
assigned automatically.

S354E21.DOC

Operating ToPs 300

2-29

Module
NEST

Mini-nest
(single part name).MTL

Example: test.MTL
P4711.MTL

The file name and extension are


assigned automatically.

Nesting order in database


(File name)

Example: test company


P4711

Enter the file name: The order is


stored in the database.

Nesting order in file


(file name).DAT
Store order in a file.
The file name and extension are
assigned automatically by the system.

Sheet name
(file name_consecutive
number).TAF
Enter the file name. The consecutive
number (number of sheets created)
and the extension are assigned
automatically by ToPs.

Nesting result
(sheet name) ERG

Example: test
company.DAT
P4711.DAT

Example: test
company_1.TAF
test
company_2.TAF
etc.
P4711_1.TAF
P4711_2.TAF
etc.

The file name and extension are


assigned automatically.

Example: test
company.ERG
P4711.ERG

2-30

Operating ToPs 300

S354E21.DOC

Module
TECHNOLOGY

Example:

test.gmt
P4711.gmt

Example:

test.tmt
P4711.tmt

Example:

test.Ist
P4711.lst

Example:

test.EIN
P4711.EIN

Example:

Single part with processing:

WZG.TAB

(file name.GMT)
Storing selected screen contents: Enter
the file name; the extension is assigned
automatically.

Machined sheet
(file name).TMT
Store complete screen contents (sheet
and external area): Enter the file name;
the extension is assigned automatically.

NC program
(Sheet name).LST
Generate NC program. Enter the
program number; the extension is
assigned automatically.
Files which are processed on the
machine control system must have the
following format:
P(program number)
The letter P is automatically placed in
front of the program number when the
program is transferred from the PC to
the machine control system.
Example 4711 becomes P4711.
General rule: The program number can
have a maximum of 9 digits. The
number range from 999 990 000 to
999 999 999 is reserved for TRUMPF.

Machining plan
(single part/sheet name).ON
The file name and extension are
assigned automatically.

Tool master data


(file name).TAB
The tool master data administered in
the database are stored in the form of a
table (purpose: table comparison).
The file name is entered or you accept
the default file name. The extension is
generated automatically.

S354E21.DOC

Operating ToPs 300

2-31

Laser technology table

Example:

LTT.TAB

(file name).TAB
The laser technology tables
administered in the database are stored
in the form of a table (purpose: table
comparison).
The file name is entered or you accept
the default file name. The extension is
generated automatically.

Deleting files

2-32

Operating ToPs 300

You have the following options for deleting files:


The "Part management" index card which you can select in
each module when loading a file ( see: the explanation
"Standard masks: Part management".
The "File management" index card in the INFO module
( see: explanation of "INFO module").

S354E21.DOC

1.

Working in the DRAWING module

All the functions required for the creation of drawings of single parts
are collected in the DRAWING module.
The drawing of a single part is the basis for all further working
steps. You can create drawings in ToPs itself or load them from
another system.
A multitude of functions are offered for creating a drawing: Different
types of geometric elements can be generated and modified. Help
functions facilitate construction.
If you wish to import drawings instead of creating them directly,
ToPs offers four standard interfaces to CAD systems:
Files in
DXF:
IGES:
MI and
GRA
format can be loaded (optional). It goes without saying that these
drawings can be edited or supplemented with the drawing functions
in ToPs.

3-4

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

1.1
Select DRAWING module

The basics - creating a drawing

The user interface is displayed after the DRAWING module has


been selected.

User interface in DRAWING module with zero point display

Fig. 18332

Starting single part drawing

The zero point is displayed in the DRAWING module initial mask for
your orientation. It is shown as the intersection point of two vertical
construct lines one on top of the other (Construct line: red colored,
dashed line type).

Interrogation cycle

An interrogation cycle is initiated when you call up a function. This


system supports you at every step with questions and instructions
in the command line.

To cancel a cycle
To end a cycle

Activate menu function CANCEL to cancel execution of a function.


The cycle restarts from the beginning until you terminate it with END.

Application of functions

General rule: Draw as neatly and as correctly as possible. Example


Make extensive use of the drawing functions. To draw a horizontal
line, you should select the function CREATE LINE, HORIZONTAL
to make sure that the line will actually be drawn horizontally and not
only appear horizontal on the screen.

Drawing contours

Drawing elements may have a maximum of one connection


element at the element start point and the element end point regardless of the selected colour of the drawn elements.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-5

Defining geometric
elements and modifications

Geometric elements and modifications are defined by determining


points, lengths, angles and radii.
Point
Click on the point with the mouse cursor
or
Use the keyboard to key in the coordinates.
Example: 20,20.5
Length, angle, radius
The values for length, angle and radius are normally entered via the
keyboard.

Keyboard
Input via the keyboard, e.g.:
Point: 20, 20.2
Length: 20.2
Input via the keyboard must be terminated with <RETURN>.

3-6

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

1.2

Overview of functions

Select the DRAWING module. The graphic display user interface


will appear with the main menu bar, screen menu and work area.
DRAWING module

User interface in DRAWING module

Fig. 18332

Main menu bar functions


The main menu bar has a single function available: FILE. A pulldown menu opens by selecting this function. The subfunctions can
be seen and can be activated.
Function scope:

FILE, LOAD: Load drawings of various formats.

FILE, STORE: Store drawings.

FILE, STORE AS...: drawings under details of file name,


directory etc.

FILE, WORKFILE: Store workfile.

FILE, PRINT: Print drawing.

FILE, PROPERTIES: Specify file information.

FILE, TRANSFER: Data transfer

S354E31.DOC

FILE, NEW: Create a new drawing.

FILE, BACK: Exit DRAWING module.

DRAWING module

3-7

Screen menu functions


The screen menu fields are collected together in different screen
menus.
Select the DRAWING module to obtain an overview of the functions
in the individual screen menus. Then click on the control functions:
The individual screen menus will appear depending upon the
selected control function:
Following is an overview of the DRAWING module control
functions:

control function MODIFY, modify drawings, e.g. move, rotate,


mirror or stretch geometries or geometric elements or create
copies.

Control function MODIFY 2: change curves, elements, line


colour or line type.

MACROS control function: Create macros.

TEXT control function: insert text in a drawing.

DRAWING module

CREATE 2 control function: creates notches, bezels and


curves.

3-8

CREATE control function: creates lines, circles or arcs.

DRAWING TOOLS control function Create help geometries


and use measurement functions.

S354E31.DOC

Loading and importing a drawing

Loading a drawing

File
Load

Fig. 18332

With the function FILE, LOAD, different drawing formats can be


loaded or imported. The procedure is always the same:

Select the LOAD subfunction.


Select the drawing file with the file selection mask.
The drawing is loaded (note messages in the message line).

If the drawing is not displayed immediately, activate the


TOTAL symbol at the foot of the mask. The screen is set up
a new.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-9

File selection mask/file


manager

In the file selection mask are defined:


Path specification
"Search in:" In which directory the system should look for files.
Input the complete path or select a path. Via the symbol " >" (arrow),
the "previous directories" are presented from which files have
already been loaded.
File formats
The radio buttons (buttons with color identification) show you which
file formats can be selected. You can also control the display in the
left of the selection window via the file format. Example: "*.GEO"
button activated. All files with the ending GEO which are available
in the current directory will be shown in the selection window. The *
(star) switch changes the directory.
The switches which have a gray background cannot currently be
activated.
Preview window
Select the "Preview" control field.
In the preview window, the drawings of the particular file will be
displayed as soon as a file is selected in the selection window with
the left mouse button.
In this way you can check whether you have also selected the
desired drawing.
The dimensions of the part are displayed below.
If you wish to view the geometry of a file only occasionally, then
deactivate the "Preview" control field and click directly on the file
names in the selection window with the right mouse button. The
geometry is displayed in the preview window only for this particular
occasion.
File name with path specification
The name of the selected file is automatically input and displayed
below the selection window as soon as you have clicked on the file.
Using the function buttons

Ok

Cancel

3-10

DRAWING module

Confirms input.

Cancels selection procedure.

S354E31.DOC

Symbols in the selection window


In the selection window, directory names are identified with the "*"
(star) symbol and file names with the "" (dash) symbol. Example:
- 6378.GEO file name
* USER_JO2 Directory

Changing directories
In order to change to another directory in the selection window,
select the * (asterisk) symbol above the selection window scrolling
bar.

Wildcards
Wildcards serve as place holders in a file name, standing for a
certain number of characters or a string of characters.

Application:
Use wildcards to reduce the number of files in the selection box.
Proceed as follows:
Enter the file name, with wildcards, in input field "File name" in
the initial mask.
Select OK or <RETURN>. The files are offered in the file
selection mask window. The selection criterion, incl. path name,
also appears in the first line of the mask.
The following wildcards may be used:
? Question mark: Replaces any one character. Example:
*test?.geo

replaces e.g.
test1.geo
test2.geo
testa.geo

Asterisk: Replaces any string of characters. Example:


*.geo

replaces e.g.
test1.geo
test2.geo
testa.geo

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-11

Wildcards can be combined. Example


*test?.geo

replaces e.g.
1test1.geo
P1testx.geo

2.1
File

Loading a drawing as a workfile

Precondition: With FILE, STORE WORKFILE, a file with the name


workfile_300.geo must have been created.
The file is stored in the directory which is entered in the file
Tops300.ini under "ToPs-working directory (Start directory)" and
which refers to the file TOPS_PWD.
The directory \trumpf\teile\user1 is entered as standard.
Changing the name of the work file: The file name of the work file
can be changed by altering the variable ST_WORKFILE in the file
Tops300.ini without however entering the file extension.
Example: ST_WORKFILE=testworkfile. In this case, the work file is
always stored as testworkfile.geo and then loaded by you.
The work file is displayed in the file selection mask with the
extension GEO:workfile_300.geo.

Load

Select this data block. The current screen contents are erased and
the work file is displayed on the screen.
The workfile is overwritten by another workfile the next time a
storage procedure is carried out.

2.2
GEO format

Loading a file as GEO format

GEO is the file format which ToPs generates itself when you save a
drawing.
All drawings created with ToPs, or those that were stored in GEO
format must be loaded with this function.

3-12

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

2.3

Importing external formats (Option)

Other formats, such as IGES, MI, DXF and GRA are generated by
other CAD systems. The import and export functions for these
formats are an option and have to be bought as extras.
All drawings loaded or imported from external systems can
be further processed with the ToPs drawing functions.

General conditions

Drawings formatted in IGES, DXF, MI and GRA can be imported


into ToPs from CAD systems if the following basic conditions are
met:
Only 2D drawings (uniform Z coordinate) can be imported into
ToPs. 3D drawings must be projected into a two-dimensional
plane and saved as 2D drawings. Difficulties may also arise
when importing 3D drawings saved in 2D mode.
IGES: The IGES standard stipulates a fixed format of 80 characters per line. Only drawings complying with this norm can be
imported.
MI: ToPs can only import the non-compressed MI format.
There is no CAD system integrated into ToPs even if the
majority of functions are similar. For this reason, it is advisable
to make complicated drawings in a CAD system. To process the
drawing further in ToPs, it must be put into a form suitable for
production.
Drawings suitable for production have the following characteristics:
One part per drawing.
Part structures must be in exploded view.
The drawing must only contain processable contours, i.e. no
drawing borders and headers, no drawing tools; bend lines
are only interpreted by ToPS 600 and otherwise ignored.
Only geometric elements recognized by ToPs may be
transferred. This means for example, that: No Splines can be
transfered to ToPS. Consequently, avoid such geometric
elements in your drawing. Usually, for example, Splines can
be replaced very well by arcs.
Contours must be closed. ToPs checks this when saving and
generates a corresponding message.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-13

Loading a drawing with IGES format


IGES-Format

This interface which allows drawings to be imported from other


CAD systems is optional and has to be acquired in addition to the
ToPs software. For this reason the function is protected by a
password.
Various CAD systems generate the IGES format. Select this option
when you want to import drawings created on an external drawing
system.
Use the file selection masks for this.

Loading a drawing with MI format


MI-Format

Load drawing: MI
This interface which allows drawings to be imported from other
CAD systems is optional and has to be acquired in addition to the
ToPs software. For this reason the function is protected by a
password.
The MI format is generated for example by CAD system ME 10.
The drawings must be stored in MI format if you wish to load CAD
drawings from ME 10.
Make sure that the drawings which you want to import have actually
been saved in MI format. There are other possibilities with ME.
Using the file selection masks select the drawing you wish to load.
Compressed MI files can not be loaded by ToPs 300.

3-14

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Loading a drawing with DXF format


DXF-Format

This interface which allows drawings to be imported from other CAD


systems is optional and has to be acquired in addition to the ToPs
software. For this reason the function is protected by a password.
Various CAD systems generate the DXF format (e.g. AutoCAD).
Choose this option if you want to import drawings created on these
systems. Use the file selection masks for this.

Load block section

All geometry elements which were defined as a block when the


drawing was created are taken into account if the "Use BlockSection" is selected.

Loading layers

For importing DXF files it is possible to specify exact layers.


1
Example: Thanks to the layer technique, geometry can be read in
selectively from a specific layer. If e.g. the geometry to be edited is
on one layer and all other geometries are on other layers, the
geometry can be imported specifically. Re-editing (e.g. deleting
dimensions) of the imported drawing is then not required.

Procedure

"DXF Options": Specify the conditions for loading the drawing:

"Use Block-Section "? If yes, activate the control field.


All geometry elements which were defined as a block when the
drawing was created are only taken into account if the control
field is activated.

1
2

in most CAD systems part drawings can be created in layers. These are then placed on top of each other like film sheets to
give the complete part structure).
BLOCK section refers to a particular area in the DXF format.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-15

"Use Layer-Selection": Should particular layers be transferred?


If yes, which?
Select the desired layers in the selection window.

"Contour preparation" with "Tolerance": Up to what distance


should open contours be closed automatically?

"Use Text-Section": Transfer texts. Specify font.

For a detailed description see: "Automatic component for converting CAD files" in this chapter.

Loading a drawing in GRA format

GRA-Format

Drawings in GRA format are created by the TC-CAPT programming


system.
The single parts saved in TC-CAPT contain the geometry and
processing as a drawing. When the file is loaded in GRA format
1
only the information from the TOP part is transferred. Usually it is a
matter of single part geometry.

With "TOP part, level 0 is designated in the ME10 and TC-CAPT programming systems. As a rule part geometries are
assigned to this level.

3-16

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

2.4

Automatic module for converting


CAD files

A program for converting files is supplied with ToPs: VTC


CONVERT. This enables CAD files to be converted directly. CAD
drawings do not have to be loaded singly and stored in the desired
format.

Precondition: The optional IGES/DXF/MI-Interpreter is present.


Application: Automatic data conversion (e.g. overnight).
Use: Saves time, especially if several files have to be converted.
Perfect link to CAD systems.

Principle
This program enables conversion of CAD files.

GEO
IGES

GEO
tc_conv.exe

DXF:
MI

DXF:
ME10
GEO1.02

tc_conv.exe

Start the VTC CONVERT


program

The VTC CONVERT program


During installation of ToPs another TRUMPF logo (in addition to
that for ToPs) will be set up for you in the TRUMPF group with the
VTC CONVERT signature. You use this icon (by double clicking
with the left-hand mouse button) to start a program with which you
can convert the drawing files into different formats.

Starting the program


manually

S354E31.DOC

The conversion program can also be started from the operating


system. The file tc_conv.exe is available for this.

DRAWING module

3-17

Converting drawings with VTC CONVERT


Start the program VTC CONVERT by clicking on the icon "VTC
Convert" with the left mouse button.
A mask appears in which you can set the defaults for the
conversion process. The CONVERT function is used to start the
process.

Masks for WINDOWS NT and WINDOWS 95 operating systems

Fig. 19564

The following description explains the setting options in the masks.


Specify:

3-18

DRAWING module

"Input-format": which format does the file which you wish to


convert have?
"Output-format": which format should the converted file have?
"Contour preparation": should the conversion include preparation of the contour?
"Logfile Name": The logfile name is displayed.
"Display-Logfile": Display logfile itself.
"Overwrite": If the file is already present, should the file be
overwritten?

S354E31.DOC

"Contour preparation": Carry out contour preparation at the


given "tolerance"? The tolerance value indicates how far apart
the start and end points of two elements may lie for them still to
be grouped together; values in [mm] or [Inch]. This setting has
no effect if the "Contour preparation" option is deactivated.

"Progress": Optical progress display for a 0procedure

"DXF-OPTIONS": options for the conversion of DXF files.


"Use Block-Section": interpret Block-Section.
"Use Layer-Selection": Read in the layer areas selected in
the right of the selection window.
Select one or more layers or enter the description of the
layer to be transferred here.
"Use Text-Section": Interpret text-section. If this DXF option
is selected, the text font must be set in the selection field
beneath.

SELECT FILES function key: Select files which are to be


converted. Several files can be selected in the subsequent mask
using <STRG> + the left mouse button or <SHIFT> + the left
mouse button. To select all files, use the <STRG>+<A> key
combination.
CONVERT function button: Starts the conversion process.
END function button: Exits the mask and ends the program.
In WINDOWS NT and WINDOWS 95 the version can be
displayed: Click with the left-hand mouse button on the small
TRUMPF logo in the top left corner of the mask after you
have called up the program.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-19

Converting drawings with tc_conv.exe


Directory

tc_conv.exe is normally located in the ToPs directory


c:\trumpf\macros\tc_conv.exe) and must be started from there.
The converted files are stored in the same directory as the original
files.

Command format

Procedure

tc_conv <options> [file_list@response_file]

1. Change to .the operating system level. The operating system


prompt appears.
2. Create a response file. (This step is only necessary if you want
to convert several files.)
Create a file (e.g. in an editor) listing the files you wish to
convert, with their path names. Any number of files can be
given here. Save this file under your chosen name.
Example for such a Response File:

c:\trumpf\users\1.dxf
c:\trumpf\users\2.dxf
c:\trumpf\users\3.dxf
c:\trumpf\users\4.dxf
c:\trumpf\users\5.dxf

3. Change to the directory which contains the file tc_conv.exe.


4. Enter the command:
tc_conv <options> [file_list@response_file]
Example:
tc_conv

3-20

DRAWING module

-idxf -ogeo

\trumpf\users\1.dxf

(Command)

(Options)

(Files)

S354E31.DOC

Options

With which command options should the conversion be carried out?


You must specify:

Which format will be converted? Indicate the input format (max.


1 format):
for GEO
-igeo
for DXF
-idxf
for IGES
-iiges
for MI
-imi

Format to which the file will be converted. Indicate the target


format (several formats are possible):
for GEO
-ogeo
for DXF
-odxf
for ME10
-ome10
(macro language)
for GEO (V1.02) -ogeo_102

Other options for command tc_conv.exe:

Files

Report mode on:


Report mode off:
Output messages to a file:
Overwrite mode on:
No geometry preparation:
Tolerance value for contour closure:
Read in Block-Section:
Convert single layer:
Load no texts:
Specify text font:

-mon
-moff
-e(file name)
-force
-l
-t
-b
-c(Layer name)
-d
-n(Fontname)

Which files are to be converted? There are two methods of


indicating which files you want converted:
Individually: Enter the file names with paths one after the other,
separated by spaces.
Response file: Enter the symbol @ and the name of the response
file (no spaces).
5. <Return>. Conversion begins.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-21

Examples for the tc_conv.exe command

1. Example

You wish to convert files File1.dxf and File2.dxf in


directory \trumpf\users to GEO and ME10 formats.

Input format
Target format
Geometry preparation
File specification
Messages

DXF
GEO, ME10
yes
individually
yes, on the screen

Input*:
tc_conv -idxf -ogeo -ome10 -mon \trumpf\users\Datei1 \trumpf\users\Datei2
Result As a result of conversion, files
Datei1.geo
Datei2.geo
Datei1.m10
Datei2.m10
are created in the trumpf\users directory.

Example 2:

The files listed in file trumpf\users\DXF_FILE.RSP are to be


converted into GEO format.
Input format
Target format
Geometry preparation
File specification
Messages

DXF
GEO
yes
via response file (Format: *.RSP)
yes, in a file

Input*:
tc_conv -idxf -ogeo -mon -ek1.log @\trumpf\users\DXF_FILE.RSP

Result:
During conversion, the GEO files are written to the files listed in the
DXF_FILE.RSP file. The converted files are stored in the same
directory as the source files.
The file containing the messages K1.LOG is created in the
current directory.

The path needs to be specified only if the files entered are not located in the current directory.

3-22

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Background information: Optionen for


command tc_conv.exe
Formats to be converted.
Input format: -igeo,
-iges, -idxf, -imi

GEO: this is the file format generated by ToPs itself. Extension:


.geo.

MI: is created by the ME 10 CAD system.

DXF: is generated by various CAD systems (e.g. AUTOCAD). It


is possible in automatic conversion to read in single layers.

IGES: standard interface for CAD systems.


An input format must be specified. Only one input format may
be selected for each program run.

Target format: -ogeo,


-ogeo_102, -odxf,
-ome10

Formats to be converted to.


GEO is the file format which ToPs generates itself.
GEO 1.02 is an old ToPs file format for drawings of version 1.02.
DXF is generated by various CAD systems, e.g. AutoCAD.
ME10 (macro language) can be read by CAD system ME 10
(INPUT). Note the difference: Input format MI, but target format
ME10!
At least one target format must be specified. You can also
select several target formats: The input file is then converted
to each of the specified file formats.

Report mode: -mon, -moff

Report mode on (-mon) or off (-moff): Display messages about the


progress of conversion on the screen.
Error messages will only be written to a file if the files are specified
with the option -e(file name).

Output messages to a file:


-e(file name)

With the option -e the messages can be output to a file. The file
name must observe all conventions valid for the operating system.
The program is aborted if the file cannot be created. The file is
stored in the same directory as the tc_conv.exe program.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-23

Overwrite mode:
-force

Before creating the output file, the system checks whether a file of
the same name already exists. If such a file does exist, it is not
overwritten. -force deactivates this verification. Existing files of the
same name are then overwritten.

No geometry preparation: -l

When the file is saved, the geometry is automatically prepared to


avoid inaccuracies.
Option -l deactivates geometry preparation.
Recommendation: Run the geometry preparation.

Tolerance for open contour


closure: -t

Read in Block-Section : -b

With the option -t, the extent can be specified to which points of
open contours will be closed.

Only for DXF- format: Block-Section are read in.

Convert single layer:


-c(Layer name)

Only for DXF- format: To read in only specific layers, enter the layer
names in round brackets.
Example -c(BLACK RED YELLOW)

Load no texts: -d

For DXF-, IGES- and MI- formats: As standard, texts are read in.
To prevent this, the reading in of texts can be suppressed with the
option -d.

Specify text font:


-n [Fontname]

Only for DXF-, IGES- and MI- formats: When the text is read in the
textfont to be used can be specified. The textfont iso.fnt is offered
as standard.
Example -n[ISOPROP.FNT]
The following fonts are available:
ISO.FNT
ISOPROP.FNT
BOLD.FNT
or
user defined fonts created and stored in ToPs (see: the
description "User defined textfont" in this chapter).

3-24

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

3.

Storing drawings

Storing a drawing

File

Save as

Save
workfile

File name

S354E31.DOC

In the DRAWING module you can save single part drawings in


various ways:

Save

Fig. 18332

as a file without drawing data and under the available file name
in the current directory.
File name (Drawing name).GEO
as a file without drawing data under a certain file name or in a
certain directory.
File name (Drawing name).GEO
as a work file (in the directory specified by the variable
TOPS_PWD in the ToPs INI file).
File name WORKFILE_300.GEO

In the DRAWING module, files with the extension 'GEO' are


generated when single part drawings are stored. As default, a
workfile is stored under the file name 'WORKFILE_300.GEO'.
Just enter the string preceding .GEO as the file name.
Example: test1
The .GEO extension is assigned automatically.
Example: test1.GEO

DRAWING module

3-25

Geometry preparation

When the file is saved, the geometry is automatically prepared to


avoid inaccuracies. All geometric elements are analysed and - if
necessary - prepared: Inner and outer contours are determined,
doubly drawn lines removed and inaccurately drawn contour
transitions are corrected.

Construct lines

When a drawing is saved as a file with the .GEO or .DXF


extension, existing construct lines and construct circles are not
saved.
The construct geometry is saved when a drawing is stored as a
workfile.

3.1
Functions
File
Save workfile

Storing a drawing in a workfile

Procedure:
Store file as a workfile.
Application: For quickly saving your current work in the drawing.

Recommendation: Use this function frequently during the drawing


phase, especially before extensive changes and deletions.
In contrast to the normal storage procedure, no geometry
preparation takes place.
The work file is saved under the filename WORKFILE_300.GEO
in the directory given by the variable TOPS_PWD in the "ToPsworkdirectory (Start directory)" area. This variable is stored in the
Tops300.ini file.
The directory \trumpf\parts\user1 is entered as standard.
Changing the name of the work file The file name of the work file
can be changed by altering or re-entering the variable
ST_WORKFILE in the file Tops300.ini without however giving the
file extension GEO.
Example: ST_WORKFILE=testworkfile. In this case, the work file is
always stored as testworkfile.geo and then loaded under this
file name by the user.

3-26

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

3.2
Functions
File
Save

Save as

Procedure:
You can store drawings as follows:

The drawing is saved in the previously selected directory under


the current name.
The selection masks are not opened. The drawing is stored
under the file name with which you called up the drawing.
File format: (file name).GEO
Example: test12345.GEO

The file selection mask is opened. You can specify the following:
Input or select path name.
Specify file name.
Confirm input with OK.
File format: (file name).GEO
Example: test1998.GEO

S354E31.DOC

Store drawing

DRAWING module

3-27

3.3
Functions
File

Properties

Storing a drawing with drawing data

Procedure:
To store drawing data to a drawing.

Precondition: You have loaded a drawing.


The drawing data is supplementary information which is retrieved
e.g. for nesting and processing the piece. All data is gathered in an
automatically opened mask.
Enter the following data:

Drawing number and drawing name.


Who edited the drawing?
For which customer is the drawing intended?
On which machine should the part be produced?
Which laser table is to be used in processing the part?
Enter name (=number) of the process rule containing
technological instructions for machining this particular part.
Recommendation: Only enter the rules number here if this
part is to be processed using a specific rule. This assignment
option is meant for parts which exhibit special technological
machining.
Which material and sheet thickness are to be used for
producing this part?
Unit factor: Factor for scale conversion.

Using the two YES/NO switches you can input information for the
nesting of the part:

Does a mini nest exist for this drawing?


Can the part be rotated during nesting? and
Must the direction of rolling be taken into account?
Once the entries have been completed, confirm your inputs with OK.

File
Save
Save as

3-28

DRAWING module

After the drawing properties have been defined, these properties


must be saved together with the drawing.

Save the drawing in the previously selected directory under


the current name.

Enter the file name and specify the path in the file manager.

S354E31.DOC

4.
Functions
DRAWING
module

File

New

Control functions:
CREATE
CREATE 2
etc.
File
Properties
Save as

S354E31.DOC

Creating a new single part drawing

Procedure:
1. Start module DRAWING.

2. Open a new file. To do this, select the FILE, NEW functions.


The existing sceen contents (drawing) are deleted
automatically.
For purposes of orientation, the graphic screen appears with
the zero point (a red crosshair). The zero point is shown as the
intersection point of two vertical construct lines one on top of
the other (Construct line: red colored, dashed line type).
3. Using the screen menu functions, create the new drawing.

4. Store the drawing with or without drawing data.

Save file information if desired.

Input file name and specify path.

DRAWING module

3-29

5.
Functions
DRAWING
module

File

Process an existing drawing

Procedure:
1. Start module DRAWING.

2. Load a drawing created in ToPs or read in an external


drawing.
An existing drawing is automatically deleted when a new
drawing is loaded.
Note that imported drawings must be saved in ToPs even if they
are not edited further.
In the file selection window you define:

Load

Control functions:
CREATE
CREATE 2
etc.
File
Properties
Save as

3-30

DRAWING module

"Search in:" In which directory is the file located?


Select the file extension. All files which have the selected
extension appear in the selection window. Drawings you have
created in ToPs have the suffix GEO. External drawings to be
imported can have the extensions IGES, DXF, MI for example.
Select the desired file in the selection window.
confirm your choice with OK.

3. Using the screen menu functions, create the new drawing.

4. Store the drawing with or without drawing data.

Save file information if desired.

Input file name and specify path.

S354E31.DOC

6.

Drawing geometry elements

Functions

The functions for drawing geometry elements are stored in the


screen menus of the control functions CREATE and CREATE 2.

Setting the colour and line


type of geometry elements

Geometry elements are normally displayed as white lines of line


type solid on the screen. Using the functions from the control
function CHANGE 2 menu or simply by clicking in the right hand
selection window of the information and selection bar, these
standard settings can be altered.

Procedure Drawing
geometry elements

Select the functions in the menus and follow the system prompts in
the command line.

6.1

Drawing a point

CREATE function: POINT

Click on a point or enter the coordinates.

Processing point: Points to be center marked must be drawn in


cyan blue. This rule does not apply to ToPs 300.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-31

6.2
Drawing a line with 2 points

Drawing a line

CREATE function: LINE, 2 POINTS

P2

P1

Fig. 4701

Procedure:

Drawing a parallel line

Click on starting point (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Click on end point (P2) or enter the coordinates.

CREATE function: LINE, PARALLEL

P2

P1

Fig. 4702

Procedure:

Click on primary line (P1).


Click on a point (P2) to determine on which side the parallel line
will lie.
or
Enter the distance and determine on which side the parallel line
will lie by clicking on a point.
To input several distances at the same time: enter the values
one after the other. They have to be separated by a space.
Do not use commas!
Example: 10 20 30.

3-32

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Drawing horizontal lines

CREATE function: LINE, HORIZONTAL

P1

P2
Fig. 4703

Procedure:

Drawing a vertical line

Click on starting point (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Click on end point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input the length.

CREATE function: LINE, VERTICAL


P1

P2

Fig. 15165

Procedure:

Drawing a line with a


tangent to an arc element
and a point

Click on starting point (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Click on end point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input the length.

CREATE function: LINE, TAN PT

P2
P1

Fig. 4704

Procedure:

S354E31.DOC

Click on approximately the tangent point (P1) on the arc.


Click on end point (P2) or enter the coordinates.

DRAWING module

3-33

Drawing perpendicular lines

CREATE function: LINE, PERPENDICULAR

P3

P1

P2

Fig. 4705

Procedure:

Drawing a construct line


with a point, angle of
inclination and length

Click on base element (P1) (1st point).


Click on second point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
If the 2nd point is on the base element, this point will serve as
the starting point of the perpendicular line.
If the 2nd point is not on the base, the perpendicular line will be
drawn from the 2nd point.
Click on 3rd point (P3) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input the length.

CREATE function: LINE, ANGLE X

P3
P2
a
P1

Fig. 4706

Procedure:

3-34

DRAWING module

<F1>Click on starting point (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Input angle to X axis (a) or click on the point (P2) or enter the
coordinates.
Click on the point (P3) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input length of line.

S354E31.DOC

Drawing line with tangent to


2 arc elements

CREATE function: LINE, TAN 2

P2
P1

Fig. 4707

Procedure:

Drawing a polygon

Pick 1st approximate tangent point (P1).


Pick 2nd approximate tangent point (P2).

CREATE function: LINE, POLYGON


P2

P4

P3

P6
P1=P7
P5

Fig. 4708

Procedure:

Drawing a rectangle

Click on starting point (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Click on other points (P2 to P6) or enter the coordinates.
Close polygon: Click on endpoint=starting point (P7=P1) or
enter the coordinates.

CREATE function: LINE; RECTANGLE


P2

P1
Fig. 4913

Procedure:

S354E31.DOC

Pick first corner point (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Pick diagonally opposite corner point (P2) or enter the
coordinates.

DRAWING module

3-35

6.3
Drawing a circle with
three points

Drawing a circle

CREATE function: CIRCLE, 3 PTS

P1
P3

P2

Fig. 4914

Procedure:

Drawing a circle with a


center and radius

Click on first point on circle (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Click on second circle point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on third point on circle (P3) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input radius.

CREATE function: CIRCLE, CENTER RAD

P2

P1

Fig. 4709

Procedure:

3-36

DRAWING module

Mark center-point (P1) or specify coordinates.


Pick point (P2) on arc or enter the coordinates.
or
Input radius.

S354E31.DOC

Drawing a circle with


diameter

CREATE function: CIRCLE, DIAMETER

P1

P2

Fig. 4915

Procedure:

Drawing a circle with center


and diameter

Pick first point on circle (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Pick second point on circle (P2) or enter the coordinates.

CREATE function: CIRCLE, CENTER D

P2

P1

Fig. 4709

Procedure:

S354E31.DOC

Click on center-point (P1) or specify coordinates.


Pick point (P2) on arc or enter the coordinates.
or
Input diameter.

DRAWING module

3-37

Drawing a circle tangential


to 2 elements

CREATE function: CIRCLE, TAN 2

P3

P2

P1

Fig. 4711

Procedure:

Drawing a concentric circle

Click on (P1) on 1st element or enter the coordinates.


Click on point (P2) on 2nd element or enter the coordinates.
Click on point (P3) on arc or enter the coordinates
or
Input radius.

CREATE function: CIRCLE, CONCENTRIC

P2

P1

Fig. 4710

Procedure:

3-38

DRAWING module

Click on primary circle (P1).


Click on point (P2) on arc or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance: + for outside the basic circle, - for inside the
basic circle.

S354E31.DOC

6.4
Drawing an arc with 3 points

Drawing an arc

CREATE function: ARC, 3 PTS

P3
P1

P2

Fig. 4712

Procedure:

Drawing an arc with a


center, starting and end
point

Click on starting point (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Click on end point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on point (P3) on arc or enter the coordinates.

CREATE function: ARC, CENTER END

P3

P1

P2

Fig. 4713

Procedure:

S354E31.DOC

Click on center-point (P1) or enter coordinates.


Click on starting point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on end point (P3) - in counterclockwise direction - or enter
the coordinates.

DRAWING module

3-39

Drawing an arc with


diameter

CREATE function: ARC, DIAM

P2

P1

Fig. 4917

Procedure:

CREATE function: ARC, CONCENTR


...................................................................................

Drawing a concentric arc

Click on starting point (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Pick end point (P2) - in counterclockwise direction - or enter the
coordinates.

P2
P1

...................................................................................

Fig. 4714

Procedure:

3-40

DRAWING module

Pick point on arc (P1).


Pick point (P2) on new arc or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance:

S354E31.DOC

Drawing an arc with center


point, radius, starting and
end angle

CREATE function: ARC, CEN R ANG

P3

P4

P1

a b
P2

Fig. 4715

Procedure:

Drawing a contour curve

Click on center-point (P1) or enter coordinates.


Click on point (P2) on arc or enter the coordinates
or
Input radius.
Input start angle (a)
or
Click on point (P3) on arc or enter the coordinates
Input end angle (b)
or
Click on point (P4) on arc or enter the coordinates.

CREATE function: ARC, MULTICURVE CONT

P2
P1
P3

Fig. 4918

Procedure:
Contour curve = several connected arcs.
Click on the end point (P1) of an existing element (arc or line)
or enter the coordinates. This point is the arc starting point.
Pick end point (P2) of arc or enter the coordinates. This end
point is also the starting point of the next arc.
Click on next arc point (P3) etc.
The multicurve contour will not be made if there is a construct arc
under the arc.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-41

6.5

Drawing notches

Notches can be defined as corner notches or as element notches.


They can be generated on line, arc and circle elements.

Precondition: The contour on which the notch is to be defined must


be present.
Corner notches:

Fig. 19685

Element notches:

Fig. 18686

3-42

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Creating a corner notch with


differing distances

Function CREATE 2: NOTCHES, DIST DIST


2. Line

(a)

1. Line

(d)

(b)

Fig. 19687

Procedure:

Creating a corner notch with


equal distances

Select the function.


Input distance (a) to 1st line
Input distance (b) to 2nd line
Click on the 1st line or input the diameter (d). If a diameter is
defined, a partial circle is generated at the notch intersection
point.
Click on 2nd line.

Function CREATE 2: NOTCHES, CORNER POINT

Fig. 19688

Procedure:
Select the function.
Input vertex notch distance (a)
Pick the vertex (V) or input the diameter (d). If you define a
diameter before clicking on the vertex, then a partial circle is
generated at the notch intersection.
Inputting 0 generates notches without a partial circle once
again.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-43

Creating acute angular


element notches

Function CREATE 2: NOTCHES, ACUTE ANGLE

P1

(M)
( )
(h)

(d)

P1

(M)

Fig. 19689

Procedure:
Select the function.
Input the notch height (h).
Input the acute angle ().
Input the notch midpoint (M) or diameter punched (d).
Click on element (P1) at the desired position where the notch is
to be generated.
If you input a diameter before clicking the element, then a
partial circle is created for corner punching. Inputting 0
generates notches without a partial circle once again.

Creating rectangular
element notches

Function CREATE 2: NOTCHES, RECTANGLE

(w)
P1

(M)

(h)
(d)
(M)
P1

Fig. 19690

Procedure:
Select the function.
Input the notch height (h).
Input the notch width (w).
Input the notch midpoint (M) or diameter punched (d).

3-44

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Click on element (P1) at the desired position where the notch is


to be generated.
If you input a diameter before clicking the element, then a
partial circle is created for corner punching. Inputting 0 generates notches without a partial circle once again.

6.6
Drawing a bevel with
distance to the vertex

Drawing a bevel

Function CREATE 2: BEVEL, DIST DIST

a
S
P1
b

P2

Fig. 4717

Procedure:

Drawing a bevel over a


corner point

Input first distance (a) to vertex (S).


Input second distance (b) to vertex.
Click on first element (P1):
Click on second element (P2).

Function CREATE 2: BEVEL, CORNER POINT

a
P

Fig. 4923

Procedure:

S354E31.DOC

Input distance (a) to corner point (P).


Click on corner point (P) or enter the coordinates.
To recreate the corner: remove bevel using DELETE.

DRAWING module

3-45

6.7
Drawing a rounding with
radius

Drawing rounding

CREATE 2: ROUNDING, RADIUS

P1

Fig. 4716

Procedure:

3-46

DRAWING module

Input the rounding radius.


Click on corner point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
or
Click on approximate tangent point on first and second
elements.

S354E31.DOC

7.
Function scope

Modifying geometry

The functions for modifying existing geometry elements are


contained in the MODIFY and MODIFY 2 control function menu.

The MODIFY control function encompasses functions with


which you can move, rotate, reflect and stretch or duplicate.
Furthermore they can change the scale of a geometrical shape.

The MODIFY 2 control function contains menu functions with


which you can modify roundings and elements. In addition, the
colour and line type of the geometry can be altered here.

7.1

Specify modify mode

Modifying or copying original


geometry

There are two ways of modifying geometry elements:


Modifying the original elements.
Copying elements (duplication).

Precondition

Any existing parts structure must be cancelled before geometry can


be edited. Compare also "Prepare drawings".

Outline of procedure

This procedure for defining modifications is a suggestion. It can be


varied to suit your needs. Remember to follow the system prompts
in the command line.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-47

MODIFY function: MODE, ORIGINAL or COPY


Determine selection: You must define what is to be modified before
selecting the modify option.
1. Definition: do you want to modify the original or create a copy?
ORIGINAL: the original will be modified.
COPY: the original will be preserved. One or more copies
will be created. You can determine how many copies are to
be created by entering a repetition factor. Enter the
"number" of copies in the mask.
3. Definition: Select the MOVE, ROTATE, MIRROR or SCALE
modification option.
4. Definition: What shall the modification affect?
Click the elements you want to modify individually or select
several elements by putting a box around them.

4. Each modification option is terminated with END.


Please observe the requests in the command line when
carrying out the functions.

3-48

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

7.2
Moving geometry via
2 points

Moving geometry

MODIFY function: MOVE, 2 POINTS

P1

P3

P2

Fig. 4954

Procedure:

Moving geometry
horizontally

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Select modify option MOVE, 2 POINTS.
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Pick destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark complete
geometry with a box (P3).

MODIFY function: MOVE, HORIZONTAL

P1

P2

P3

Fig. 4955

Procedure:

S354E31.DOC

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Input repetition factor. Example 1.
Specify type of modification: MOVE, HORIZONTAL.
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance:
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark geometry
with a box (P3).

DRAWING module

3-49

Moving geometry vertically

MODIFY function: MOVE, VERTICAL

P1

P3

P2

Fig. 15167

Procedure:

3-50

DRAWING module

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Input repetition factor. Example 1
Specify type of modification: MOVE, VERTICAL.
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P3).

S354E31.DOC

7.3
Rotating geometry about
two points

Rotating geometry

MODIFY function: ROTATE, 2 POINTS

P1
-90
P2

P3

Fig. 4958

Rotation about two points is equivalent to rotating and moving the


element at the same time.

Procedure:

Rotating geometry about a


center point

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Select modification option: ROTATE, 2 POINTS.
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Pick destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Input angle of rotation, for example, -90.
Click on any geometry element or mark with a box (P3).

MODIFY function: ROTATE, CENTER

P2
P1

-90

Fig. 4957

Procedure:

S354E31.DOC

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Select modification option: ROTATE, CENTER.
Click on center point of rotation (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Input angle of rotation, for example -90.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P2).

DRAWING module

3-51

7.4
Changing geometry scale
using 2 points

Modifying geometry scale

MODIFY function: SCALE, 2 POINTS

P2
P1
P3

Fig. 4963

Procedure:

Changing geometry scale


about a center point

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Select modification option: SCALE, 2 POINTS.
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Input factor.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P2).

MODIFY function: SCALE, CENTER

P1
P2

Fig. 4962

Procedure:

3-52

DRAWING module

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Select modification option: SCALE, CENTER.
Click on center-point (P1) or specify coordinates.
Input factor.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P2).

S354E31.DOC

7.5
Mirroring geometry about
any axis

Mirroring geometry

MODIFY function: MIRROR, 2 POINTS

P2

P3
P1

Fig. 4960

Procedure:

Mirroring geometry about a


center point

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Select modification option: MIRROR, 2 POINTS.
Click on first point (P1) on mirror axis or enter the coordinates.
Click on second point (P2) on mirror axis or enter the
coordinates.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P3).

MODIFY function: MIRROR, CENTER

P2
P1

Fig. 4961

Procedure:

S354E31.DOC

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Select modification option: MIRROR, CENTER.
Click on center-point (P1) or enter coordinates.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P2).

DRAWING module

3-53

Mirroring geometry
horizontally

MODIFY function: MIRROR, HORIZONTAL

P2
P1

Fig. 4959

Procedure:

Mirroring geometry
vertically

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Select modification option: MIRROR, HORIZONTAL.
Click on point (P1) on mirror line or enter the coordinates.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P2).

MODIFY function: MIRROR, VERTICAL

P2
P1

Fig. 15168

Procedure:

3-54

DRAWING module

Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.


Select modification option: MIRROR, VERTICAL.
Click on point (P1) on mirror line or enter the coordinates.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P2).

S354E31.DOC

7.6
Stretching geometry using
2 points

Stretch geometry

MODIFY function: STRETCH, 2 POINTS

P1,P3

P2

Fig. 4754

Procedure:

Select function:STRETCH, 2 POINTS.


Click on reference point (P1) for stretching or enter the coordinates.
Pick destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on point (P3) where stretching is to be applied or enter the
coordinates.
To stretch several elements: mark elements with a box.
Elements intersected by the "rubber band" of the box will be
stretched. Elements lying entirely within the box marking will
be moved.

Stretching geometry
horizontally

MODIFY function: STRETCH, HORIZONTAL

P1,P3
P2

Fig. 4756

Procedure:

S354E31.DOC

Select the function. STRETCH HORIZONTAL.


Click on reference point (P1) for stretching or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance:

DRAWING module

3-55

Click on destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.


Click on point (P3) where stretching is to be applied or enter the
coordinates.
To stretch several elements: mark elements with a box.
Elements intersected by the "rubber band" of the box will be
stretched. Elements lying entirely within the box marking will
be moved.

Stretching geometry
vertically

MODIFY function: STRETCH, VERTICAL

P1,P3

P2

Fig. 4755

Procedure:

Select the function. STRETCH, VERTICAL.


Click on reference point (P1) for stretching or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance:
Pick destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on point (P3) where stretching is to be applied or enter the
coordinates.

To stretch several elements: mark elements with a box.


Elements intersected by the "rubber band" of the box will be
stretched. Elements lying entirely within the box marking will
be moved.

3-56

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

7.7
Modifying roundings

Modifying roundings

MODIFY 2: ROUNDING, MODIFY


P1

Fig. 4716

Procedure:
Input new rounding radius.
Click on rounding(s).
To recreate the corner: Input radius 0 (zero) in the command line
and pick rounding to be changed.

7.8

Splitting or connecting elements

The functions for splitting and connecting geometry elements are


combined, in a meaningful way, with the possibility of displaying
points (icon in the footer bar) so that the result can be checked.
Starting and end point are marked with red squares. If the end
points are simultaneously element connecting points, the squares
will be green.
Always select TOTAL after implementation of ELEMENTS, SPLIT,
or change the window setting so that the window can set up anew.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-57

Splitting elements at an
intersection point

MODIFY 2: ELEMENTS, SPLIT INTERS. PT

P1
P2

Fig. 4718

Procedure:

Click on first element (P1): The element appears in yellow, in


dotted line type.
Click on second element (P2). The element appears in yellow,
in dotted line type.
Determine which element to split at the intersection points:
Enter the number of the element.
or
Enter any other number to split both elements.

Application: To delete a section of an element.

Splitting elements

MODIFY 2 function: ELEMENTS, SPLIT

P1

P2

Fig. 4719

Procedure:

Click on the element (P1): The element appears in yellow, in


dotted line type.
Click on point (P2) where splitting is to be applied or enter the
coordinates.

Application: To delete a section of an element.

3-58

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Merging elements

MODIFY 2: ELEMENTS, MERGE

P2

P1

Fig. 4720

Two straight lines having the same direction or angular position can
be merged into one straight line. Requirement: The end points of
the partial lines must meet.
Straight line/arc, arc/arc or straight/straight combinations with different angular positions are not possible.

Procedure

Click on first element (P1): The element appears in yellow, in


dotted line type.
Click on second element (P2). The element appears in yellow,
in dotted line type.

7.9

Preparing a drawing

Drawings from CAD systems to be edited using ToPS must not


display inner structuring in different partial areas. ToPs offers a
function for cancelling partial structures.

Clearing partial structure of


a drawing

MODIFY 2 function: ELEMENTS, CLEAR STRUCT.


All parts of the drawing are combined to form one part. If the
drawing is in GRA, MI, IGES or DXF format, the parts structure of
the drawing will be cancelled.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-59

7.10 Modifying line attributes


Line color and type

The line attributes enable you to change the color or line type over
the whole drawing. Thus, you can e.g. convert all blue lines to red
and can change all dashed lines to dotted lines. This is particularly
useful if you have to prepare drawings from other parties in which
the line characteristics possibly have other meanings.
These functions also enable you to adapt your drawings
individually.

Modifying the line colour


Modifying line color by
selection

MODIFY 2 function: COLOR, SELECTION

Procedure:

Select the MODIFY 2 control function.


Click on menu function COLOR, SELECTION or on the
"Drawing color" selection window in the information bar with the
mouse.
A mask opens with the familiar color palette:

blue

cyan

magenta

red

black

green

yellow

white

COLOR, SELECTION menu


function

Selecting the color

3-60

DRAWING module

Fig. 19565

S354E31.DOC

Completely changing the


line color

Select the desired color in the mask.


Identify the elements in the drawing which are to appear in the
selected color. You can select all elements at once by enlarging
the box.
The color is accepted in the scrolling window and the geometry
lines are displayed in the selected color.

MODIFY 2 function: COLOR, ALL

Procedure:

Select the MODIFY 2 control function.

Select the COLOR, ALL menu function.

The following mask appears:

Changing the line color

Fig. 19566

These masks contain the color palette twice:

Selecting the original color: identify the original colours of the


lines with the upper colour buttons; i.e. specify the lines which
have this color and to which a new color is to be assigned.

Selecting the new color: select the new color for the lines with
the lower color buttons.
The selected color button remains pressed and consequently
active.

S354E31.DOC

Confirm the modifications with OK. All lines of the selected


original color are assigned with the newly defined color.

DRAWING module

3-61

You can choose only one original color and one new color.
The black colored function button in the lower color palette
cannot be selected. You cannot assign black to any
elements.

Modifying the line type


Modifying the line type by
selection

MODIFY 2 function: TYPE, SELECTION


Just as with the line color, you can also modify the line type.

Procedure:

Select the MODIFY 2 control function.


Select the TYPE, SELECTION menu function or click on the
"Line type" selection window in the information line using the
mouse.

The available line types are represented as function buttons in a


mask:
solid line
Solid
dashed

-----------dotted

..............
dashed-dotted

-.-.-.-.-.-.-

3-62

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

TYPE, SELECTION menu


function

Select the line type

Completely modifying the


line type

Fig. 19567

Select the line elements which are to be modified or mark them


with the box.
The selected line type is displayed at the top of the scrolling
window.

MODIFY 2 function: TYPE, ALL

Procedure:
Select the MODIFY 2 control function.
Select the TYPE, ALL menu function.
The following mask appears:

Modifying the line type

S354E31.DOC

Fig. 19568

DRAWING module

3-63

Select the original line type: Select the original line type in the
left of the mask, i.e. the line type to be replaced.

Select the new line type. In the right area of the window, select
the function button which represents the new line type.
The selected function buttons remain pressed and consequently active.

Confirm your choice with OK. All lines which have the selected
original line type are represented in the new line type.
You can choose only one original type and one new line type
respectively.

7.11 Deleting line attributes


You can select functions for deleting a line type or a line color in the
screen menu for the MODIFY 2 control function. The following options can be selected there:

MODIFY 2 function:
DELETE, SELECTION

Function DELETE, SELECTION.

The DELETE, SELECTION function is located in the screen menu


of the DRAWING module mask.

Deleting line type and line color

Fig. 19569

The following, in the index card system format, can be selected:

LINE COLOR: delete the line using a line color


LINETYPE: delete the line using a line type
OTHERS: you can make a SELECTION here which you wish to
delete: delete ALL or HILFSGEO.
Only the active index card is valid. Therefore you cannot
combine deletion of a specified line type and line color via
menu.

3-64

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Application:

Delete targeted construct lines or

delete targeted, particular lines in imported drawings (DXF,


IGES etc.) after reading in.

Delete line color


Delete line color

MODIFY 2 function: DELETE, SELECTION

Procedure:

Select the function.


Select the desired colors in the LINE color index card. To do
this, click in the affiliated control field. You can also select
several colors.

Deleting line colors

S354E31.DOC

Fig. 18622

All lines which have the selected line colors are deleted by
operating the DELETE function button.

DRAWING module

3-65

Deleting the line type


Deleting the line type

MODIFY 2 function: DELETE, SELECTION

Procedure:

Call up the LINE TYPE index card.


Select the desired line types. To do this, click in the affiliated
control field. You can also select several line types.

Index card: Deleting the line type

3-66

DRAWING module

Fig. 19570

All lines which have the selected line types are deleted by
operating the DELETE function button.

S354E31.DOC

8.

Drawing single hole, row of holes,


bolt circle

Macros with which you can create complex geometries easily are
stored in the MACROS screen menu. The individual functions are
combined under the MACROS heading.
Single holes, bolt circles and rows of holes are created with these
functions. Bolt circles and rows of holes consist of a basic element
which is multiplied. A basic element can comprise a circle/ellipse, a
rectangle/square, an oblong hole, a template or a tool drawing.

Outline of procedure

A fixed procedure must be followed when creating single holes, bolt


circles and rows of holes:

Determine the basic element and its parameter. Select the


function MACROS, PARAMETER from the MACROS control
function menu.

Then specify what you wish to create: SINGLE HOLE, ROW


OF HOLES or BOLT CIRCLE.

8.1

Defining basic element and parameter


for macro

The individual functions are displayed in the screen menu after you
have selected the MACRO control function.
You can define the following as basic geometry:

S354E31.DOC

Standard geometries such as circle/ellipse, rectangle or oblong


hole
"Circle/Ellipse" index card: to use a circle or an ellipse.
"Rectangle" index card: To use a rectangle or square.
"Oblong hole" index card: to use an oblong hole as a basic
element.
Select a particular geometry model.
Select "Model" index card. Select the user defined geometry
model which you created in the DRAWING module and have
saved with the extension VLG.
Using tool geometry.
"Tool" index card: select a tool geometry as a basic element.

DRAWING module

3-67

Determining parameters for


circle/ellipse

Function MACROS: MACROS, PARAMETER

Procedure:

Select the "Circle/ellipse" index card.


Decide whether you wish to define a circle or an ellipse by
selecting the corresponding radio button.

Index card for ELLIPSE with geometry data

Fig. 18626

Determine the following as geometry data for an ellipse:

determine radius 1 (a/2) and radius 2 (b/2) of the ellipse:

The axes of an ellipse:

(a)

(b)

Fig. 19721

"Angle of inclination": angle (), by which the ellipse should


be inclined. Example: 45 angle.

()

Example: Angle of inclination 45

3-68

DRAWING module

Fig. 19722

S354E31.DOC

Then click on the "Rotate geometry" control field if the


geometry is also to be rotated.

Example:
The ellipse is rotated

The ellipse is not rotated

Fig. 19723, 19724

Specifying parameters for


the rectangle

Confirm settings with OK.


Carry out macro definition as single hole, row of holes or bolt
circle.

Function MACROS: MACROS, PARAMETER

Procedure:

Select the "Rectangle" index card.

Specify the parameters:


Angle of inclination: Angle (), through which the rectangle
should be rotated. Example: 45 angle.

()

Example: Angle of inclination 45

S354E31.DOC

Fig. 19725

Then click on the "Rotate geometry" control field if the


geometry is also to be rotated.

DRAWING module

3-69

The rectangle is rotated

The rectangle is not rotated

Fig. 19726, 19727

Parameter for oblong hole

Confirm settings with OK.


Carry out macro definition as single hole, row of holes or bolt
circle.

Function MACROS: MACROS, PARAMETER

Procedure:

Select the "Oblong hole" index card.

Specify the parameters:


Angle of inclination: Angle (), through which the oblong
should be rotated. Example 45 angle.

()

Angle of inclination, example 45

3-70

DRAWING module

Fig. 19728

S354E31.DOC

Then click on the "Rotate geometry" control field if the


geometry is also to be rotated.

The oblong hole is rotated

The oblong hole is not rotated

Fig. 19729, 19730

Using a geometry model

Confirm settings with OK.


Carry out macro definition as single hole, row of holes or bolt
circle.

Function MACROS: MACROS, PARAMETER

Application: This type of geometry is particularly suited to special


geometries which you continuously use and use for various parts.
Precondition: Geometry models should be created in the
DRAWING module as a drawing and should be stored with the
extension *.VLG.
Procedure:

S354E31.DOC

Select "Model" index card.


A user defined geometry model (=drawing) for creating single
holes, rows of holes or bolt circles

DRAWING module

3-71

Using user defined geometries as models

Fig. 18627

Specifying data for model geometry:

SELECTION function button: select new model. A mask


appears in which you can select a geometry model. Only
files with the VLG ending are displayed in this mask. File
preview within the selection mask is not possible. The
geometry is displayed only in the index card in the righthand area.

"Model": The file name of the model appears in the window.

Arrow: A window opens displaying the last 5 selected


models (standard settings).

"Drawing name", "Drawing number", "Programmer", "Customer": additional information to the drawing is displayed in
this field, a requirement is that this information is defined
when the drawing is stored.

"Angle of inclination": Input the angle [degrees] through


which the geometry should be rotated (formerly: Offset
angle).

"Rotate model": Should the geometry be rotated when


creating rows of holes or bolt circles? If yes, click on the
control field.

3-72

DRAWING module

Confirm settings with OK.


Carry out macro definition as single hole, row of holes or bolt
circle.

S354E31.DOC

Using tool geometry

Function MACROS: MACROS, PARAMETER


The selected tools tool drawing is used when creating single holes,
rows of holes or bolt circles.

Precondition: the corresponding drawing must be assigned to each


tool.
Procedure:

Select TOOLS index card.

All tools managed in the data base are available in the scroll
window. The selected tools data is input at the top of the output
field.

In the lower right area of the mask you can


specify the angle of inclination.
Angle of inclination: angle (), by which the tool drawing
should be inclined.
Activate the "Rotate tool" control field.
Then click on the control field if the geometry is also to be
rotated.

Confirm settings with OK.

Carry out macro definition as single hole, row of holes or bolt


circle.
In addition, construct lines and text are transferred when
using a tool geometry drawing.

Angle of inclination:

What is the "angle of inclination" of the basic element?


The angle of inclination of the basic element gives the positioning of
the basic element in relation to the X axis. Example
1

a
X

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Basic element with angle of


inclination 0.

Basic element with angle of


inclination a=30
Fig. 4759

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-73

8.2

Drawing a single hole with a macro

Function MACROS: MACROS, SINGLE HOLE

Precondition: The basic element has been defined with MACROS


PARAMETER.

Click on any point or enter the coordinates in the command


line. The center of the basic element will be set to this point.

8.3

Drawing a bolt circle with a macro

Function MACROS: MACROS, BOLT CIRCLE


Create a number of identical holes at equal pitch along an arc.
A full circle or arc can be created.

Full circle

Fig. 4757

P2

P1
Arc

Fig. 4753

Precondition: The basic element has been defined with MACRO


PARAMETER.

3-74

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Procedure:

Decide whether to rotate the basic element.


Click on center-point (P1) or specify coordinates.
Input number of holes.
Input start angle (a) or define angle through two points.
Input end angle (b) or define angle through two points.
Input radius or define radius through one point (P1).

Defining an arc

You need to input a starting angle and end angle in order to create
an arc.

To define a full circle

The starting and end angle should be set to zero for creating a full
circle.
When the basic element is rotated, the geometry of the single
element will be matched to the circle line.
1. Example:

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Basic element, rotated.

Basic element not rotated.


Fig. 4760

2. Example:

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Basic element with angle of inclination

Basic element with angle of inclination

(90), rotated.

(30), not rotated.


Fig. 4758

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-75

8.4

Drawing a row of holes with a macro

Function MACROS: ROW OF HOLES function


Create several identical holes at equal pitch along a straight line.

Precondition: Basic element was defined with MACRO GEOMETRY.


1
a

P2
2

P1
Fig. 4752

Procedure:

Decide whether to rotate the basic element.


Input start point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Input end point (P2) or coordinates or the length (1) and
number of holes.
or
Input the number of holes and pitch between holes (2).
Input angle of inclination (a) or define it through points or enter
the coordinates.
Rotation of the basic element: The geometry of the single
element can be adapted to the contour of the straight line.

Example:

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Basic element, rotated.

Basic element not rotated.


Fig. 4767

3-76

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

9.

Inputting or modifying text in a


drawing

Insert text in various fonts and font sizes into the drawing.
Select the TEXT control function to integrate text images into the
drawing. Texts are defined in two steps.
1. Specifying information about the text presentation format. The
PARAMETER function is available for this.
2. Creating text

Specifying text parameter

Function TEXT: PARAMETER


Specify the parameters:

S354E31.DOC

Text height? (Standard value: 10 mm)


Ratio of width and height? (Standard value: 1)
Line spacing? (Standard value: 3 mm)
"Angle of inclination": (Standard value: 0)
0 corresponds to vertical characters, positive values effect an
inclination of the text to the right.
Angle of rotation?
0 corresponds to horizontal lines, positive values effect a
counterclockwise rotation of the text.
Reference point position?
This determines the cursor position at the text box.
Text direction?
Downwards: the characters are arranged downwards. Right:
the characters are arranged side by side.
Select function button FONT. select font.
Three fonts are available: BOLD.FNT, ISO.FNT and
ISOPROP.FNT
Select the appropriate font in which the text is to appear in the
drawing. Only fonts can be selected which have a font file (*.fnt)
available in the directory '/trumpf/data'.
User defined fonts can also be stored in this directory and used
at this stage. For a description (see "User defined textfont" in
this chapter).
Confirm your inputs with OK. The mask will close.

DRAWING module

3-77

Creating text

Function TEXT: CREATE

Select the TEXT CREATE function.


A mask appears in which you can input the desired text.

Example:
TEXT

If the text covers several lines, the end of each line must be marked
with \n. Example:
Line 1: TEXT \n Line 2: TEXT \n Line 3: TEXT
The input appears as follows in the input mask:
TEXT\nTEXT\nTEXT

Representation on the screen:


Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:

Modifying text

TEXT
TEXT
TEXT

Conclude text input by pressing <RETURN>.


A rectangle framing the text will appear on the screen. The
input text is invisible. Position the rectangle. The text is drawn
in the position you select by clicking.

Function TEXT: MODIFY

Precondition: The drawing contains text.


Procedure:
1. Select the TEXT, MODIFY function
2. Mark the text you wish to edit.
3. A mask containing the text parameters is opened. Modify the
text parameters and close the mask with OK.

3-78

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Creating your own font


ToPs offers the following three fonts:
BOLD.FNT
ISO.FNT
ISOPROP.FNT
Other fonts must first be created before they can be used. The
procedure is described below:

Outline of procedure

Create a font file for each font. This must have a specific format.
Create a reference file.
The reference file and alll font files must be saved in the
\trumpf\data\ directory.

Reference file
General information

The reference file contains all font files in a specific format. Here,
the appropriate numerical value is assigned to the individual fonts.
This numerical value must be integer and should be >1000.
The values 1,2 and 3 are already assiged to the standard fonts:
ISO (1), ISOPROP(2), BOLD (3).
Thes integer values cannot be altered even via the reference file!

Format

The file extension of the reference file is: *.REF


Example: The example file has the filename Font.ref and the
detailed contents appear as follows:
1001
Schrift1.FNT
1002
Schrift2.FNT
1003
Schrift.FNT

Explanation: 1001 corresponds to the integer value assigned.


Schrift1.FNT is the filename of the font.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-79

When creating or modifying the reference file, the sequence of


integer values need not be consecutive.
Important

The structure of the file must be preserved: An integer value must


always alternate with the filename in the following line.

Textfont file: Description of the file format


Construction

All the characters belonging to a font are defined in a font file.


The font file consists of three areas:
File header
Description blocks with groups
End of file

File header

The file includes a first area, the file header, containing general
information about the font. The contents and sequence of the file
header can be taken from the following example. Please note:
The sequence and the number of the data is not variable!
Information in the file header:

The file header begins with "#~HEADER".


The filename follows for the users information.
Then the characteristics of the cell are defined: Cellwidth,
Cellhight, Cap (area between the zero point of the cell and the
upper end of the character), base (output height of the
character)
see: Display of a character with group description.

The header information concludes with the number of character


description blocks and the ratio of cell width to cell height.
This block is concluded with the identification code "##~~".

Description blocks with


groups

The individual characters are defined in the individual description


blocks.
Each block is is subdivided into groups which describe parts of the
character. At least one group must be present per character.
In detail:

3-80

DRAWING module

Beginning of the block with "#~2" and


Specification of the ASCII code for the activation of the
character in ToPs.
There follow the groups, the group descriptions and
the end-of-block code with "##~~".

S354E31.DOC

Group description:

A group description defines a part of a character. For example, an


exclamation mark consists of two parts: ! a line and a point.
Characters consisting of a single polygonal contour are defined as
one part.

Group description begins with the identification code "#~2.1"


There follow instructions with the following contents:
"Mxy": "move the stylus to (x,y) without drawing"
"Mxy": "move the stylus to (x,y), drawing"
"C": "close the polygonal contour when the exit point (of the
first draw to) of the current group description is drawn to".
This instruction, C) must only stand at the end of a group
description.
A group description is ended with "|~".

The coordinates defined (x,y) are all with reference to the lower left
corner of the cell constructed. The base is the line on which
characters without descenders stand, for example, the character "A"
(the character "g" has a descender, for example!). By means of this
base line, the text is positioned in ToPs.
Represetation of the capital "A" in ISO.FNT

(16,96)

(84,96)

(8,64)

(56,64)

Base

(8,32)

Cellheight

(56,88)

Cap

(8,88)

(56,32)

(0,0)
Cellwidth

Cellwidth: Cell width

Cap:

Cellheight: Cell height

Base: Start line of the character


without descenders

(8,32): Coordinate values x,y

Cell area zero point - top of the


character

Example character "A" from font ISO.FNT

End of file:

S354E31.DOC

Fig. 20076

The end of the file is identified with the character sequence


"###~~~EOF".

DRAWING module

3-81

Example

Extract from font file ISO.FNT

File header
#~HEADER

Beginning of first block

iso.fnt

Filename

64

Cellwidth

120

Cellheight

96

Cap

32

Base

101

Number of characters following

0.533

Ratio of width to height

##~~

End of a block

...

Character description blocks


with group

...
#~2

Beginning of character description block

ASCII code (see: Representation of character "A"

Number of groups

#~2.1

Beginning of group

Number of following points

M 8 32

Move to (8,32)

D 8 88

Draw to (8,88)

D 16 96

Draw to (16/96)

D 48 96

Draw to (48/96)

D 56 88

etc.

D 56 32
M 56 64
D 8 64
|~

End of the group description

##~~

End of the character description block

#~2

Beginning of character description block for


next character

etc.

1
#~2.1
13
M 16 32
D 16 96
...
|~

End of the group description

##~~

End of the character description block

...

End of file

...
##~~
###~~~EOF

3-82

DRAWING module

End of font file

S354E31.DOC

10.
Function scope

Creating construction geometry

The functions for creating and deleting construction geometry are


stored in the screeen menu for the DRAWING TOOLS control
function.
Construction geometry refers to geometry elements which help you
construct drawings.
As construction geometries, you can create:
Construction lines and
construction circles
The following are also available:
Functions for measuring coordinates, lengths, radii and angles.

Geometry representation

Construction lines are always represented as infinite, construction


circles always as full circles.

Line type and colour

Construction geometry is displayed on the screen in red and line


type dotted.

10.1 Drawing construction lines


Function DRAWING TOOLS,
CONSTRUCTION LINE

The functions for creating costruction lines are:

S354E31.DOC

Function 2 POINTS: Drawing construction lines with 2 points


Function PARALLEL: Drawing parallel construction lines
Function HORIZONTAL and function VERTICAL: Drawing horizontal and vertical construct lines
Function TAN PT: Drawing tangents as construct lines on arc and
point
Function PERPENDICULAR: Drawing perpendicular construction
lines
Function ANGLE X: Drawing a construct line with a point and angle
of inclination
Function TAN2: Drawing tangents to 2 arc elements as construction lines.
Function ANGLE/LINE: Drawing a construct line with a point and
an angle to the base line
Function DIVISION: Dividing element using construction line

DRAWING module

3-83

Drawing construction lines


with 2 points

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, 2 POINTS


P2
P1

Fig. 4725

Procedure:

Drawing parallel
construction lines

Click on first point (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Click on second point (P2) or enter the coordinates.

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, PARALLEL


P2

P1

Fig. 4726

Procedure:
Click on base line (P1).
Click on a point (P2) to determine on which side the parallel line
will lie.
or
If a distance was not entered, it will be established when you
define the point.
To input several distances at the same time: enter the values
one after the other. The numbers must be separated by
spaces. Do not use commas!
Example: 10 20 30.

3-84

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Drawing horizontal and


vertical construct lines

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, HORIZONTAL


Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, VERTICAL

P1

P1

Fig. 4727

Procedure:
Click on the point (P1) or enter the coordinates.

Drawing tangents to an arc


element and point as a
construction line

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, TAN PT


P2

P1

Fig. 4728

Procedure:
Click on approximately the tangent point (P1) on the arc.
Pick point (P2) on tangent or enter the coordinates
or
Input angle.

Drawing perpendicular
construction lines

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE,


PERPENDICULAR

P2
P1

Fig. 4729

Procedure:
Click on base element (P1).
Click on point (P2) on element or enter the coordinates.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-85

Drawing a construct line


with a point and angle of
inclination

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, ANGLE X

P2

P1

Fig. 4730

Procedure:

Drawing a construct line as


a tangent to 2 arcs

Click on first point (P1) or enter the coordinates.


Click on second point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input angle (a) relative to X-axis.

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, TAN 2

P2
P1

Fig. 4731

Procedure:

Drawing a construct line


with a point and an angle to
the base line

Click on approximately the 1st tangent point (P1).


Click on 2nd approximate tangent point (P2).

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE,


ANGLE/ LINE

a
P1

P2

Fig. 4732

3-86

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Procedure:

Dividing element using


construction line

Input angle (a) to basic line.


Click on the point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Click on base line (P1).

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, DIVISION

P2
P1

Fig. 4733

Procedure:
Divide element between any two points (P1) and (P2) with a vertical
construction line.
Click on first point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input bisecting factor (range: 0 - 1) and click on the first point or
enter the coordinates.
Click on second point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Examples: Bisecting factor 0.5 means that the construction line will
be positioned at the center of the basic element, while a factor of
0.2 means that the line will be located at a fifth of the basic element.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-87

10.2 Drawing construction circles


Function DRAWING TOOLS,
CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE

The functions for creating costruction circles are:

Drawing a construct circle


with three points

Function 3 POINTS: Drawing a construct circle with three points


Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing a construction circle with a
center and radius
Function DIAMETER: Drawing a construction circle with diameter
Function CENTER/DIA: Drawing construction circle using center
point and diameter
Function CONCENTRIC: Drawing concentric construction circle
Function TAN2 PT: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
2 elements
Function TAN 2PTS: Drawing a construction circle tangential to an
element and two points
Function TAN 3: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
3 elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
one element and center point

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE, 3 POINTS


P1
P3

P2

Fig. 4734

Procedure:
Click on first point on circle (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Click on second circle point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on third point on circle (P3) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input radius.

3-88

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Drawing a construction
circle with a center and
radius

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE, CENTER


P2

P1

Fig. 4735

Procedure:
Click on center-point (P1) or enter coordinates.
Click on point (P2) on arc or enter the coordinates.
or
Input radius.

Drawing a construction
circle with diameter

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE,


DIAMETER

P2

P1

Fig. 4736

Procedure:
Click on first point on circle (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Click on second point on circle (P2) or enter the coordinates.

Drawing construction circle


using center point and
diameter

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE,


CENTER/DIA

P2

P1

Fig. 4709

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-89

Procedure:

Drawing concentric
construction circle

Click on center-point (P1) or specify coordinates.


Pick point on circle (P2) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input diameter.

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE,


CONCENTRIC
P2

P1

Fig. 4737

Procedure:
Click on basic circle (P1).
Pick point (P2) on arc or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance: + (plus symbol) for outside of the basic circle,
- (minus symbol) for inside of the basic circle.

Drawing a construction
circle tangential to
2 elements

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE, TAN2 PT

P3
P2

P1

Fig. 4738

Procedure:
Click on point (P1) on 1st element or enter the coordinates.
Click on point (P2) on 2nd element or enter the coordinates.
Click on point (P3) on arc or enter the coordinates
or
Input radius.

3-90

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Drawing a construction
circle tangential to an
element and two points

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE,


TAN 2PTS
P2

P3

P1

Fig. 4739

Procedure
Click on approximate tangent point (P1).
Click on point (P2) on arc or enter the coordinates.
Click on point (P3) on arc or enter the coordinates
or
Input radius.

Drawing a construction
circle tangential to
three elements

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE, TAN 3

P3

P2

P1

Fig. 4740

Procedure
Click on approximately the 1st tangent point (P1).
Click on 2nd approximate tangent point (P2).
Click on 3rd approximate tangent point (P3).

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-91

Drawing a construction
circle tangential to one
element and center point

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE,


TAN CENTER

P1

P2

Fig. 4741

Procedure:
Click on approximately the 1st tangent point (P1).
Click on center point (P2) or enter the coordinates.

10.3 Deleting construction geometry


DRAWING TOOLS: DELETE CONSTRUCTION GEO
This function can be used to delete existing construction geometry
partially or completely.

Procedure:
Delete construction geometry completely: Click on ALL.
Delete construction geometry partially: Click on the elements
individually.

Select the TOTAL function (foot bar) after executing this


function or change the window setting in order to reset the
screen.

3-92

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

11.
DRAWING TOOLS control
function

Measuring functions

The functions for measuring are stored in the menu for the
DRAWING TOOLS control function under the heading measuring.

The construction functions for measuring are:

Displaying the result

Measuring the distance


between 2 points

Measuring

Function 2 POINTS: Measuring the distance between 2 points.


Function POINT: Measuring the coordinates of a point
Function HORIZONTAL: Measuring the horizontal distance between two points.
Function VERTICAL: Measuring the vertical distance between
two points.
Function CIRCLE: Measuring the center point coordinates and
the radius of a circle.
Function ANGLE: Measure angle.

The dimensions are always displayed as a message.

Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, 2 POINTS


P1

P2

Fig. 4721

Procedure:
Click on first point (P1).
Click on second point (P2).

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-93

Measuring the coordinates


of a point

Measuring the horizontal


distance between two points

Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, POINT

Click on the point.

Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, HORIZONTAL

P1

P2

Fig. 4722

Procedure:
Click on first point (P1).
Click on second point (P2).

Measuring the vertical


distance between two points

Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, VERTICAL

P1

P2

Fig. 15166

Procedure:
Click on first point (P1).
Click on second point (P2).

3-94

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

Measuring the center point


coordinates and the radius
of a circle

Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, CIRCLE


P1

P1

Fig. 4723

Procedure:
Click on any point on circle (P1) or on the arc.

Measuring angle

Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, ANGLE


P2
P1

Fig. 4725

Procedure:
Click on first line (P1).
Click on second line (P2).
The angle (a) is measured.

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-95

12.
Function scope:

Printing drawings

The functions for printing drawings and screen shots are selected
in the FILE main menu. In the Pull-down-Men the functions
PRINT, FILE and PRINT, SCREEN are available.

Procedure:

File

Printing screen contents:

Screen

Select function FILE, PRINT, SCREEN.

Print

The windows printing mask appears. Select the corresponding


printer or plotter.
Start the print procedure using OK. The part of the drawing
visible in the graphics window will be printed.

or

Procedure:
Printing screen contents:

File
Print

File

Select function FILE, PRINT, FILE.

Select the file whose contents are to be printed in the file


selection mask (file manager).

After the selection of a file, the contents are displayed in a


window.
Start the print procedure using PRINT. The windows printing
mask appears. Select the corresponding printer or plotter.
OK: The print procedure is aborted.

Configuring the printer and


plotter

Output to a printer or plotter is controlled by the operating system.


You can configure the printer, plotter and interface in Windows
using the program "Printer". You will find this program in the
"Control Panel" program group.
Plotter: If you are using a serial plotter, you will have to make sure
that the dip switch configuration on the plotter is compatible with the
Windows configuration for the serial interface.
For further information, refer to the documentation for your
operating system.

3-96

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

13.
File

Transfer

Transfer of NC data

The TRANSFER function is contained in the main menu under


FILE.
After selecting the function, a mask for copying or moving NC data
with the extension .LST appears.
PC-TRANSFER is a TRUMPF software product which enables data
1)
transfer to the machine control system via a data line. For detailed
information, refer to the documentation for PC-TRANSFER. This
should contain a basic explanation of data transfer.

Operating mode

The NC programs created with ToPs are copied in a special format


into a directory which the PC-TRANSFER software accesses.
Example:
The following directory structure is provided as standard:
c:\trumpf\users\masch01 (all programs for a machine, for
example, for TC 200R) or
c:\trumpf\users\masch02 (all programs for a machine, for
example for TC 500R)

File format

Files are created in ToPs which have the LST format.


gearwheel.LST
4711.LST

For BOSCH-control systems:


Only such programs from the transfer directory whose names
correspond to the format can be called up by the machine.
P(4711)

The maximum possible program number is specified in your


machine file.

1)

For BOSCH TRUMAGRAPH, SIN8N and TASK500 control systems


Not required for open control systems Sinumerik SIN840 and BOSCH-control system Type 3

S354E31.DOC

DRAWING module

3-97

Copying files

The original file remains when a file is copied. A copy is created in


the target directory.

Procedure:

Moving files

Activate the COPY radio button.


The NC program file name is determined during the copy
procedure. A check is implemented to see whether the file
name is already available in the TRANSFER directory. If a file
with the same name already exists, a warning message
appears.
"Source filename": Input a file name with the ending LST or
select via file selection mask. To do this, open the selection
window via the "Arrow" symbol.
"Target directory": Select the directory into which the NC
program should be copied. \users\masch01\ is offered as
standard (i.e. the directory which has been specified for the
machine in the DATA module. For example, all files for a
machine can be copied into this directory.
Confirm your selection with OK or break off the procedure with
CANCEL.

The original file is stored in the target directory when a file is


moved. No copy is created. The file is deleted from the source
directory.

Procedure:

Activate the MOVE radio button.


The NC program file name is determined during the moving
procedure. A check is implemented to see whether the file
name is already available in the TRANSFER directory. If a file
with the same name already exists, a warning message
appears.
"Source filename": Input a file name with the ending LST or
select via file selection mask. To do this, open the selection
window via the "Arrow" symbol.
"Target directory": Select the directory into which the NC
program should be moved. \users\mach01\ is offered as
standard (i.e. the directory which has been specified for the
machine in the DATA module). For example, all files for a
machine can be moved into this directory.
Confirm your selection with OK or break off the procedure with
CANCEL.

Example:
c:\trumpf\teile\user1\gearwheel.LST
becomes
\users\mach01\P4711.LST

3-98

DRAWING module

S354E31.DOC

1.
The nesting processors

The nesting processors

Two nesting processors are integrated into ToPS, which nest the
part drawings (single part drawings or mini nests) on the sheet
according to various criteria.

The "extended rectangle" nesting processor first orientates


itself by the part boundaries as an encompassing rectangle.

The "free geometry" nesting processor observes the actual


geometry of the single or multiple part drawing.

Which parts are nested?


Defining a nesting job

The nesting job determines which parts are to be nested. During


nesting, all parts and their possible combinations are taken into
account which lie between the minimum and maximum part
numbers. This job can be configured with ToPs or read in from a
higher-level system (ASCII file).
Depending on the nesting job, one of two nesting results are
decided upon.

The same part is laid many times on the sheet

Simple multi-copy machining

S354E41.DOC

Fig. 19814

NEST module

4-3

Various parts are laid on the sheet

Nesting

Fig. 19813

The procedure is the same for both processes: The job data must
be communicated to the system, and ToPS will calculate the
optimal use of the sheet.

Defining nesting options

Various "nesting options" are available. Select the optimal strategy


according to the geometry of the various parts to be nested. The
basis for nesting is the part geometry or the horizontal and vertical
part boundaries. Decide yourself which method should be used for
nesting.

Displaying nesting result

The sheet and nesting result are displayed graphically on screen.


In the nesting result (file) itself, you can read how many parts were
nested in total, how many sheets were produced and much more.
The nesting logfile states why individual parts were not nested.

Nesting remainder sheets

If remainder sheets are left over after processing, these can also
be used in nesting.
Enter the remainder sheet size and number. The system will then
prioritize these sheets for laying out.

Manually influencing sheet


layout

The sheets produced by ToPs can be modified in any way. Delete


individual parts, add parts or change the position of individual
parts.

4-4

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

2.

Overview of main functions

The NEST module provides all the functions required to lay out a
sheet with identical or different parts.
Select the NEST module. The user interface will be displayed.

User Interface in the NEST Module

Main menu bar functions

Fig. 19812

The FILE function in the main menu bar opens a Pull-down-Menu


offering the following sub-functions:

LOAD: Load part, mini-nest or job.

SAVE: Save the file in the current directory under the current
name.

SAVE AS: Save the file in a specific directory under a specific


name.

PRINT: Print screen contents as a graphic or print the file.

TRANSFER: Copy or move the NC program to a transfer


directory.

JOB IMPORT: Import job to the ToPs data base.

S354E41.DOC

NEW: Create mini-nest, determine sheet data or define job.

JOB EXPORT: Export job from the ToPs database to a file


(format: *.DAT).

NEST module

4-5

BACK-UP COPY: Create back-up copy of a sheet or job.

RETURN: Exit the NEST module. The ToPs initial screen is


now displayed.

3.
What is a mini-nest?

Creating and modifying mini-nests

A mini-nest is implemented in ToPS as a two-part nest. A two-part


nest is a single part which is itself nested.
All single parts are suitable whose exterior geometries can be fitted
together, e.g. L-shaped geometries. Mini-nesting is not appropriate
for rectangular parts.
Example:

TRUMPF
Ditzingen
TRUMPF
Ditzingen

Mini-nest

Application

Fig. 8234

This type of nesting is used to improve the surface usage of the part.
The nesting procedure is based on the part drawing. The part
drawing can be either a single part or a two-part nest. The nesting
processor can calculate a better sheet usage with parts sensibly
combined into two-part nests.

4-6

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

3.1

Creating a mini-nest

Mini-nests are always created automatically according to the


procedure described below.

Procedure
Functions
NEST module

Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.

Precondition: The part geometry is suitable for a two-part nest.

File
New
Mini nest

2. Create a new mini-nest: Select functions FILE, NEW, MINI NEST.


3. Select a single part drawing from the file selection mask
(format: GEO) from which the mini-nest is to be created.
4. Specify the frame conditions for the mini nest.
What should the minimum distance between the exterior
contours of the single parts be?
If this distance is entered, nesting cannot be carried out at
the parting cut width for processing with common parting
cuts. Use the function MODIFY, DISTANCE from the MINI
NEST menu for this.

Function button OK

5. Confirm the data with OK.


The two-part nest of the single part is carried out and saved
automatically: (single part name).MTL
The mini nest created is displayed in the drawing window of
the mask. The mini nest consists of the original (magenta) and
a copy (white).

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-7

3.2. Modifying mini-nests


Outline of procedure
Functions
NEST
module

Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.

Precondition: A mini nest is available


A newly created mini nest can be modified or an available mini
nest loaded and modified.
For modifying a new mini nest, omit working steps 2 and 3.

File
Load
Mini nest

MINI NEST menu

Save

2. Load mini-nest to be modified: Select functions FILE, LOAD,


MINI NEST.
3. Select the mini nest drawing to be modified from the file
selection mask (format: MTL).

4. The MINI NEST menu is displayed. Modify the mini nest with
the available functions.
5. Save the drawing of the modified mini nest.

or
Save as

4-8

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

Overview of functions
The following functions are available for the modification of a
defined mini nest:

Manually modifying mini nest

Fig. 19810

MINI NEST menu

The MINI NEST menu is displayed as soon as a mini nest is


created or an available mini nest loaded.

Automatic
mini nest creation

Function AUTOMATIC, CREATE, START


This function gives the option of a completely new suggestion
generated automatically by the system. If modifications have been
made to the mini nest, these will be cancelled.

Manually modifying
mini nest

Function MANUAL, MODIFY


Mini nests can be modified like individual geometry elements. The
following options are available:
Function MOVE: Moving single parts of the mini nest.
Function ROTATE: Rotating a single part of the mini nest.
Function DISTANCE: Change distance between the two single
parts.

Drawing functions

Function MANUAL, DRAWING TOOLS


The MINI NEST menu contains additional functions for
measurement and functions for creating construction lines. These
functions should support you in defining modifications.

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-9

Move and rotate mini nest


Procedure
Precondition: Only mini nests stored as files can be modified
(format: MTL).
Modifications to mini nests are defined as follows:
Specify the type of modification: Move or Rotate.
Define the modification procedure: Enter reference point for
movement or angle for rotation.
Click on the copy (white part) or mark part with a box.
The mini nest consists of the original and a copy of the
single part. Modifications are always made to the copy. If
you click on the original part, an error message will be
displayed: "Original may not be altered.".

Moving geometry
via 2 points

MODIFY function: MOVE, 2 POINTS

P1

P3

P2

Fig. 4954

Procedure:

4-10

NEST module

Select modify option MOVE, 2 POINTS


Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Pick destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark complete
geometry with a box (P3).

S354E41.DOC

Moving geometry
horizontally

MODIFY function: MOVE, HORIZONTAL

P1

P2

P3

Fig. 4955

Procedure:

Moving geometry vertically

Specify type of modification: MOVE, HORIZONTAL.


Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance:
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark
geometry with a box (P3).

MODIFY function: MOVE, VERTICAL

P1

P3

P2

Fig. 15167

Procedure:

S354E41.DOC

Specify type of modification: MOVE, VERTICAL.


Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance:
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P3).

NEST module

4-11

Rotating geometry about


two points

MODIFY function: ROTATE, 2 POINTS

P1
-90
P2

P3

Fig. 4958

Rotation about two points is equivalent to rotating and moving the


element at the same time.

Procedure:

Rotating geometry about a


centre point

Select modification option: ROTATE, 2 POINTS


Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Pick destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Input angle of rotation, for example, -90.
Click on any geometry element or mark with a box (P3).

MODIFY function: ROTATE, CENTRE

P2
P1

-90

Fig. 4957

Procedure:

4-12

NEST module

Select modification option: ROTATE, CENTRE


Click on centre point of rotation (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Input angle of rotation, for example -90.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P2).

S354E41.DOC

Placing parts at a defined distance


These functions must be used to place parts which should
be processed with common parting cuts at a defined
distance (parting cut width).

Modifying part distance via


2 points

MODIFY function: DISTANCE, 2 POINTS

Fig. 5990

This function is employed to arrange parts at a defined distance to


each other simply.

Procedure:
Click on first point (P1).
Click on second point (P2).
Enter distance: Example 0.1500

Modifying part distance by


rotating part

MODIFY function: DISTANCE, ROTATE

Fig. 5800

This function is employed to arrange parts at a defined distance to


each other simply and rotate them at the same time.

Procedure:
Click on first geometric element (1).
Click on second geometric element (2).
Click on first point (P1).
Click on second point (P2).
Enter distance: Example 0.1500

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-13

3.3

Using construction geometry

The functions in the MINI NEST, DRAWING TOOLS menu


correspond to the functions in the DRAWING, DRAWING TOOLS.
For a detailed description see: DRAWING module: "Creating
construction geometry".
Use the construction geometries in order to define modifications
exactly.
Function scope

Construction geometries are geometry elements which help you


modify mini nests.
The measurement functions are used to check the position of the
mini nest.
The functions for deleting construction geometry are also stored in
the screen menu for the DRAWING TOOLS control function.

Geometry representation

Construction lines are always represented as infinite, construction


circles always as full circles.

Line type and colour

Construction geometry is displayed on the screen in red and line


type dotted.

4-14

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

4.
Define job

Defining and modifying nesting job

To carry out a sheet layout the system must be told which parts
and how many of them are to be nested and which conditions
should apply. A nesting job is created for this. The system then
calculates the optimal sheet layout using the nesting processors.

4.1. Defining nesting job


Outline of procedure
Functions
NEST
module

File

New
Job

Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.
Precondition: The geometry data of the single part drawings and
the min nests must be stored in the system.
2. Define nesting job.
Make the following selections: FILE, NEW, JOB. The "Job
management" mask is displayed.
3. Specify the job data in the frame of the job management.
Enter the job name.
Select a part to be nested.
1. Option: Click on the "Part name" arrow. The file
selection mask is opened.
2. Option: Select a part from a presorted parts pool:
select function button SELECT. Define search criteria.
Decide for this part whether a mini nest (if available)
should be used, whether the part can be rotated and
much more.

Function button
ENTRY

Function button
OK

S354E41.DOC

3. Add part to nesting job. The data block is selected in the lower
display window.
The nesting job now consists of one part.
Select further parts and enter them one by one in the nesting
job.
4. As soon as all parts have been added to the nesting job,
confirm the defined job with OK.

NEST module

4-15

Specifying job data


File

New

To configure a new nesting job, select the functions: FILE, NEW,


JOB.
The definition of job data is supported by the "job management"
mask.

Job

"Job management" mask

Fig. 19802E

Define the parameter for a job:

"Job": Enter job name or select an existing job via the ">"
(arrow) symbol.
The file name may have up to 35 characters. The job name
may comprise numbers, letters or a combination of both. Full
stops, spaces, blanks and special characters such as . ^. are
not permitted.

4-16

NEST module

DELETE: Delete a single job or all jobs stored in the data


base. Select the corresponding radio button in the submask.
COPY: Copies a complete job. Enter the new job name in
the sub-mask. Confirm with OK.
Application: Use existing job data to create new jobs. In the
copied job you can modify data or simply expand the job.

S354E41.DOC

"Part name" Enter the part name with extension or select the
"arrow" symbol. Select the desired file from the file selection
mask.
Parts without processing (format: GEO) but also processed
parts (format: GMT) can be loaded.
A part with processing is loaded as a circumscribed rectangle,
the outside contour processing lying in the circumscribed
rectangle. Note this when defining web widths and edges.

SELECT: Define search criteria for parts.


If the single part drawing has been saved with particular
"characteristics", then files can be searched for specifically
using these criteria.
The search criteria are:
"Job name". "machine", "drawing number", "customer
name", "material ident. number" with "material thickness",
"search path", "file selection" or details of the "part number"
(min., max).
The search process is started via SEARCH and aborted
via CANCEL.

"Part path": The file name with path details is entered in the
display window.

"numbers of parts", "min." - "max.": Enter minimum and


maximum number of parts which are to be manufactured. The
number of parts can be specified as a four-figure value.

"Customer": Enter customer name.

"Entry from Geo file": Should the information be read from the
GEO file? (see: Storing drawings with drawing data.
Active check button: the information is read.
Non-active check button: the information is ignored. The
functions "mini nest" and "rotate" are activated.
"Mini-nest": Does a mini-nest exist for this part?
Active check button: Mini-nest is taken into consideration
during nesting. If there is no mini-nest, the part is laid out
on the sheet as a single part.
Non-active check button: Mini-nest is not taken into
consideration during nesting.
The "mini nest" check button cannot be activated when
entering a GMT file.

S354E41.DOC

"Rotate": should the part be rotated?


"At will": Parts are rotated according to the angle
increments selected.
Rolling direction: Part is laid out on the sheet according to
the rolling direction selected.

NEST module

4-17

Note: If a rolling direction has been selected for a part, this


part will only be laid on a remainder sheet without rolling
direction if the standard sheet was also defined without
rolling direction.

"Suitable for CPC": Should the part be processed with common


parting cuts?
Active check button: The part is suitable for processing with
common parting cuts.
This part can now be laid out on the sheet in groups or in a
specific number in the X and Y directions.

"Group/number of parts": in X and Y direction. This


function is used to define that parts are laid out in a
versatile area during sheet layout, with specification of the
number of rows (X) and columns (Y).

Example: Sheet layout with parts groups

Fig. 15454

Example: Sheet layout without parts groups

Fig. 15455

4-18

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

Input field "only for "Free geometry nester"":


These specifications apply only for nesting with the FREE
GEOMETRY function.

"Priority": Each part can be assigned a place within a


sequence of priority. The lower the place value within the
priority sequence, the sooner the part will be selected by
the system for sheet layout.
The place value is defined via a number: the larger the
number, the lower the priority of the part.
Example: 1 = top priority, 5 = lowest priority. A part with a
priority of 3 will be placed after a part with a priority of 1 for
sheet layout, but before a priority 5 part.
If parts have the same priority they are sorted according to
their area.

"Angle" (only for FREE GEOMETRY): Enter the angle


increment through which the part may be rotated during
nesting.
The smaller the angle increment selected, the longer the
system will require for sheet layout.
For angle increments which cannot be divided by 90, the
angular positions 90, 180 and 270 are created in
addition.
Example: Sheet layout with angle increment of 30 for all
parts

Fig. 15456

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-19

Example: Sheet layout with angle increment 90 for all parts

Fig. 15457

Note:
A part will not be rotated even though you have defined an
angle increment if you have
set the "Rotate" function to NO
or
defined a rolling direction (see: Save the settings in the
"Job management" mask or the drawing with drawing data
mask: Function FILE, CHARACTERISTICS)
A sheet result will generally not be improved if a large part is
rotated with a small angle increment during sheet layout.

Active machine and active


material

In the DRAWING module, it is possible to save each drawing with


characteristics. If the drawing has been assigned to a particular
machine and a particular material, the "Machine" and "Material"
entries will be displayed here. Otherwise, the display fields remain
empty.

Selection window

In the selection window, the parts of a nesting job are displayed.


All information defined for each part is also displayed.

4-20

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

Using the preview window

As for the file selection mask, you can also view the geometry of
the part with part size here. You can thus check which parts are
defined in the nesting job.
Precondition: A nesting job has been defined or an existing nesting
job has been loaded. The filenames of single parts with details are
displayed in the selection window.

Procedure:
Move the mouse cursor to the mask scroll window.
With the right mouse button, click on a data block.
A preview window is opened: The part geometry and part size
are displayed. As soon as the mouse is moved within the
preview window, the current coordinates are displayed.

The functions in the mask footer


Function button
ENTRY

When you have defined all the data for a part, this function is used
to enter the data for the part in the job list. The data block is
transferred to the lower window.

Function button
DELETE

Deletes a data block for a part from the job list.

Function button
IMPORT

Import data block or job. The job is written to the database.

Function button
EXPORT

Export data block or job. The job is read from the database and
written to a file.

Select the data block in the selection window in the lower mask
area.

File name (jobname).dat.

File name (jobname).dat.


Function button
OK

Function button
CANCEL

S354E41.DOC

End nesting job.

Cancel procedure.

NEST module

4-21

4.2

Functions
NEST
module

Modify nesting job

Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.

Precondition: The geometry data of the single part drawings and


the mini nests must be stored in the system.

File

2. Load nest job to be modified:


Make the following selections: FILE, LOAD, JOB.

Load

3. Select the desired job in the mask.


An overview of all the laid-out sheets belonging to the job will
be displayed.

Job

JOB Menu:
Function MANAGEMENT,
MODIFY

4. Modifying nesting job data. Select the functions:


MANAGEMENT, MODIFY in the JOB menu.
The "Job management" mask is displayed. Data for the
selected nesting job are displayed in the scroll window.
Select data block for the desired part.
Modify entries and settings.
or
delete part from the job (function button DELETE).
or
Add a new part.
For a description of the "Job management" mask, see:
Specifying job data

Function button OK

4-22

NEST module

5. Confirmation of the modified job data saves the nesting job at


the same time.
Important: If the job is to be saved under a different name, the
job must be copied. Select the COPY function button in the
"Job management" mask. Enter the job name in the "New job
name" entry field. Otherwise the job will be overwritten.

S354E41.DOC

4.3

Calling up nesting job information

The INFORMATION control function is to be found in the JOB


screen menu. The single functions belonging to it enable you to
call up information on single parts and the nesting job.
INFORMATION control
function

JOB screen menu

Fig. 19805

Overview of functions:

Function SINGLE PART hide: Mask out single part.


Only active if all sheets of the job are displayed (sheet
overview).

Function DISPLAY FILENAME: Display the file name of a part


or sheet.

Function DISPLAY DRAWING. Only active with single sheet


view.

Function DISPLAY RESULT: Display nesting result. Only


active if the sheet overview is displayed.

Function DISPLAY LOGFILE: Displaying the nesting logfile

Function DISPLAY WASTE: Display waste from sheet.

S354E41.DOC

Function SINGLE PART DISPLAY: Display single part with


geometry.

Function DELETE PART: Delete part. Only active if a single


sheet is displayed (single sheet).

NEST module

4-23

Information on the single part


Display single part

INFORMATION function: SINGLE PART, DISPLAY


The functions are available with the sheet overview as well as
single sheet view.
These functions enable the display of parts.

Display single part: Click on part with the mouse cursor.


Display several parts: Surround the parts with a box with the
mouse cursor.

The display varies:

Hide single part

For sheet overview: Identified single parts represented in


various colors as encompassed rectangles are displayed with
their geometry.
For single sheet view. All parts of the identified part type are
displayed in color.

INFORMATION function: SINGLE PART, HIDE

Precondition: This function is only active in the sheet overview.


Click on single parts to be masked out. The identified parts are no
longer displayed on the sheet.
Note: The parts are not deleted from the sheet!

4-24

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

Nesting job information


Display file name

INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, FILENAME

Precondition: A sheet overview or single sheet display is present.


Display the file name of a part or sheet.
Display part name: Click on part.
Display sheet name: Click on sheet border.

Display drawing name

Function INFORMATION: DISPLAY, DRAWING


Select the name of the drawing.
This function is only active if the single sheet view is selected.

Display and print nesting


result

Function INFORMATION: DISPLAY, RESULT


The nesting result for the selected nesting job is displayed.
In the sub-mask, the nesting result can be read and printed.
see: Description of "Nesting result and Nest logfile".

Display and print nesting


log file

Function INFORMATION: DISPLAY, LOGFILE


The nesting logfile for the selected nesting job is displayed.
In the sub-mask, the nesting logfile can be read and printed.
see: Description of "Nesting result and Nest logfile".

Sheet waste display

Function INFORMATION: DISPLAY, WASTE


Display waste from sheet.
Click on the sheet border or enter the sheet name. The waste will
be displayed as a message.

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-25

5.

Creating and modifying sheet layout

The NEST module enables you to nest parts and lay them out on
one or more sheets or modify the layout of one or more sheets.
Sheet
layout options

The following options for doing this are available:


1. Option: Define a new nesting job (see: "Defining nesting job")
or load an available nesting job and create a sheet layout (see:
"Overview of procedure" on the following page).
2. Option: Load an available nesting job, modify job data (see:
"Modify nesting job") and a get the system to calculate a
completely new sheet layout.
3. Option: Load an available, laid-out sheet and manually modify
the sheet layout (see: "Manually modify sheet layout").

Nest parts: The nesting


processors

The programming system has two nesting processors.

NEST module

As standard: Control function ENLARGED RECT.RECTANGLE (in full: ENLARGED RECTANGLE)


The standard nesting processor integrated in ToPs orientates
itself according to the part borders during part nesting.

4-26

Option: Control function FREE GEOMETRY


This processor can orientate itself to any contour geometry
("Free nesting processor")

S354E41.DOC

Overview of procedure
Functions

Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.

NEST
module

Precondition: The nesting job must be defined.


2. Load a job via FILE, LOAD, JOB or accept the current job.
The current job name is displayed in the left display field of
the information and selection bar.
Incidentally: Click on the left display field with the mouse
cursor. This is another means of selecting a job.
The JOB screen menu appears.

File

Load
Job

Menu JOB:
Function ENLARGED RECT.

3. Select nesting processor according to how the parts are to be


nested.

or
Function FREE GEOMETRY

Function PARAMETER

4. Specify nesting parameters


Sheet data,
Options (e.g. fill last sheet, nest inner and outer surfaces
equally etc.),
Parameter for Common Cuts,
Parameter for Remaining sheets

Function START

5. Starting the NEST process


ToPs automatically calculates the optimal sheet layout.
The nesting result is displayed. Once the nesting result is
confirmed, an overview of the laid-out sheets is displayed.
Each part type is displayed in a particular color and the
geometry as an encompassing rectangle.
Click on a sheet. The single sheet with the exact geometries
of the single parts can be viewed.

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-27

5.1

Nesting parts as "Enlarged rectangles"

Precondition: The nesting job must be defined.


Menu JOB: ENLARGED
RECT.

Select th ENLARGED RECT. control function from the JOB menu.


Two functions are available in the variable function area:

Function PARAMETER

Function START: The nesting process is started directly with


the set parameters.
Function PARAMETER: Specify nesting parameters (sheet
data, options, parameters for Common parting Cuts or
parameters for remainder sheets).

Specify the parameters by which the system should nest the parts.
The nesting parameters are presented in four index cards:

Index card "Sheet data": Specifying sheet data.


Index card "Options": specify further options, e.g. should the
last sheet be filled or should the outer and inner areas be taken
into account during nesting etc.
Index card "CPC" (Common parting Cuts): Details for the
nesting of parts for sheet processing with Common parting Cuts.
Index card "Remainder sheets": Use remainder sheets for
nesting.
For a description of the index cards, see: "Specifying parameters".

Function START

Starting the nesting process.


The system calculates a suggested sheet layout using the specified
parameters and displays an overview of the laid-out sheet on the
screen.
All parts are represented on the sheets as circumscribed
rectangles. Pick out a sheet: The sheet is displayed with the
detailed geometries.
The system creates a nesting result including a nest log file.
The nest result contains information such as how many sheets and
how many parts were nested, how high the cuts per sheet is and a
nesting log detailing why a part was not nested (see: "Nesting
result and Nesting log").

4-28

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

5.2

Nest parts freely by contour geometry

Precondition: The nesting job must be defined.


JOB menu: FREE
GEOMETRY

Select the FREE GEOMETRY control function from the JOB menu.
Two functions are available in the variable function area:

Function PARAMETER

Function START: The nesting process is started directly with


the set parameters.
Function PARAMETER: Specify nesting parameters (sheet
data, options, parameters for Common parting Cuts or
parameters for remainder sheets).

Specify the parameters by which the system should nest the parts.
The nesting parameters are presented in four index cards:

Index card "Sheet data": specify sheet data.


Index card "Options": specify further options, e.g. should the
last sheet be filled or should the outer and inner areas be taken
into account during nesting etc.
Index card "CPC" (Common parting Cuts): Details for the nesting
of parts for sheet processing with Common parting Cuts.
Index card "Remainder sheets": Use remainder sheets for
nesting.
For a description of the index cards, see: "Specifying parameters".

Function START

Starting the nesting process.


The system calculates a suggested sheet layout using the specified
parameters and displays an overview of the laid-out sheets on the
screen.
All parts are represented on the sheets as circumscribed rectangles.
Pick out a sheet: The sheet is displayed with the detailed geometries.
The system creates a nesting result including a nest log file.
The nesting result contains information such as how many sheets
and how many parts were nested, how high the cuts per sheet is
and a nesting log detailing why a part was not nested (see:
"Nesting result and Nesting log").

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-29

5.3

Determining parameters

Determining sheet data


Index card "Sheet data"

Determining sheet data

Fig. 19804

The following definitions are required:

NEST module

"Sheet path": In which directory should the sheet be saved?


The sheet path can be entered or selected via the selection
window ("arrow" symbol).

4-30

"Sheet name": Enter the sheet name. The job name is


suggested for the sheet name as a default.
The sheet name may have up to 35 characters. The sheet
name may comprise numbers, letters or a combination of both.
Full stops, spaces, umlauts and special characters such as . ^.
not permitted.

"Material" Determining material data.


"Identification": Select the "arrow" symbol. A selection
window is displayed. Select the material desired. The data
are transferred to the display fields.
If worked parts (format: GMT) are nested, the first entered
GMT file determines the material for the nesting job.

S354E41.DOC

"Edges": Define sheet edges. If the edges selected are smaller


than the web width, the system will automatically employ the
web width.
top

left

right

bottom
Sheet edges on the example of TC 500R, working range X 2500 mm

Fig. 9450

"Spacing": Determine the spacing width in the X and Y


direction. Spacing is the distance between the part drawings in
the X and Y- directions.

Direction of rolling
Control field "Note" active: The rolling direction of the sheet
is taken into consideration during sheet layout.
Radio button "X direction" or Radio button "Y direction"
active: The sheet may have a rolling direction in the X or Y
direction. Select the corresponding switch.
Rolling direction X: Part is rotated by 180 or not at all.
Rolling direction Y: Part is rotated by 90 or 270.

Start corner: at which corner of the sheet should sheet layout


begin? Front left or back left, front right or back right. As seen
from: behind the machine.

Functions in the mask foot


Function button
OK

Function button
CANCEL

S354E41.DOC

Press OK to confirm the general conditions defined. The data are


stored. You return to the previous screen.

The procedure is aborted.

NEST module

4-31

Defining options
Index card "Options"

Defining options

Fig. 19815

As standard in ToPS, different nesting options can be chosen.


These must be defined at the start of nesting. Select the strategy
suitable for your part spectrum to be nested.
Variants:

Fill the last sheet.


Should last sheet be filled with the parts defined in the job or
not?
This situation arises only if the Min. parts quantity is smaller
than the Max. parts quantity defined. The maximum number of
parts is not exceeded.

"Internal surface": Should the area within the parts be filled


with other parts?
Radio button active: Freeing of inner area of part. The inner
area of a part is designated free to be laid-out with parts.
Select this strategy for parts with large inner areas.

1 Inner area

4-32

NEST module

Fig. 4776

S354E41.DOC

The inner areas are designated free in several planes. Example:


Laying several rings in recurrently available inner areas.

Deep nesting

Fig. 9121

"External areas": Specify:


"Do not use": No outer areas will be used.
"Use by part": The outer areas of parts are designated free
to be laid-out with parts. Select this strategy for parts with
large outer areas.

1 Outer area of a part

Fig. 4778

"Use by sheet": A remainder area beyond the part


boundaries is allocated for laying out with parts. Select this
strategy if a mixture of large parts and many small parts is
to be nested.

1 Outer sheet area

S354E41.DOC

Fig. 12297

NEST module

4-33

"Calculate start part by":


The nesting processor always begins nesting with the part
defined as the start part. You determine the criterion for the
selection of the start part:

Combinations

"Area": Part with the largest area


Extension in the X direction: part with the largest extension
in the X direction
Extension in the Y direction: part with the largest extension
in the Y direction
Part with the largest extension in the X or Y direction: part
with the largest edge lengths.

Combination of the strategies is possible.


Examples:

Nest sheetwise using inner and outer areas.


The inner areas of parts and the outer areas of the sheet are
allocated for laying out with parts during nesting.

Nest partwise using inner and outer areas.


The inner areas of parts and the outer areas of parts are
allocated for laying out with parts during nesting.

The more strategies are selected, the greater will be the


processing time.

Functions in the mask foot


Function button
OK

Function button
CANCEL

4-34

Press OK to confirm the general conditions defined. The data are


stored. You return to the previous screen.

The procedure is aborted.

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

Defining parameters for Common parting Cuts


"CPC" index card

Parameters for Common parting Cuts

Fig. 19816E

Specify:

"Activate common parting cuts": Activate check button if parts


are to be laid out on common parting cuts.

"X distance" and "Y distance": Enter the tool width here or via
SELECT choose the tool for processing two neighboring
contours simultaneously.

"Minimum edge length": what is the shortest edge length a part


must have in order that the part is subjected to common
parting cuts?

Functions in the mask foot


Function button
OK

Function button
CANCEL

S354E41.DOC

Press OK to confirm the general conditions defined. The data are


stored. You return to the previous screen.

The procedure is aborted.

NEST module

4-35

Nesting parts on remainder sheets


Index card "Remainder
sheets"

Nesting remainder sheets

Fig. 19817E

You can define the following data in this mask:

"Use remainder sheets": First define whether remainder sheets


should be used for nesting.

Then determine the other parameters.

"Material identification" and sheet dimensions: This is where


you define the length and width of the remainder sheet. Type
and thickness of material are set according to the standard
sheet.
Selecting any particular sheet geometry via the "Filename"
display window will automatically trigger determination of the
sheet length and width. The system enters the values in the
fields for X and Y.

"Random sheet geometry": If the function ELONGATEDRECTANGLE is selected, this parameter is not activated.
The Free Geometry nesting processor can nest parts with
random geometries. Random sheet geometries must be
created and saved in the DRAWING module. When drawing
sheet geometries it must be ensured that inner and outer
contours are closed.

4-36

NEST module

Non-active check button: The remainder sheet has no


random geometry. You use the specifications in the
"Material Identification" fields (sheet length, width and
thickness) to define a rectangular remainder sheet.

S354E41.DOC

Active check button: the sheet has a random geometry


(and is saved as a drawing). Select the drawing of the
sheet via the "arrow" symbol. The path and file name will
be displayed in the "file name" field. The sheet dimensions
are taken on in the "Material identification" and "X, Y, Z
dimensions" fields.
Nesting of remainder sheets with random sheet geometry
(format: GEO) is only supported with the FREE GEOMETRY
function. When nesting is with the ELONGATED
RECTANGLE function, these remainder sheets are not
nested. The nesting log shows these sheets as non-nested
sheets.
Sheets with random geometry are displayed as
circumscribing rectangles in the NEST module in the overall
view of the nested sheets and when loading in the
TECHNOLOGY module.

"File name": The sheet drawing can be loaded for remainder


sheets with random geometry. The file name is displayed with
the path details.

"Observe rolling direction": Should the rolling direction of the


sheet be taken into account during sheet nesting or not?
Once the check button has been activated, select the
direction:
"X direction" or "Y direction": The sheet may have a rolling
direction in the X or Y direction. Select the corresponding
radio button (switch with colour identification)
Rolling direction in X direction: Part is rotated by 180 or
not at all.
Rolling direction in Y direction: Part is rotated by 90 or
270.
This is only the case if rolling direction observation is
selected for the sheet and for the part. If the functions
"Rotate" and "Random" are selected together, then the
rolling direction is unimportant.
Screen display of rolling direction on the sheet:

S354E41.DOC

No rolling direction selected: (*)


Rolling direction in X direction: (-), horizontal line
Rolling direction in Y direction: (|), vertical line

NEST module

4-37

The lower area of the mask is split into two areas, each with a
scroll window:
On the left the remainder sheets are managed, and on the right the
remainder sheets are assigned to a job.
Sheets can be moved between the two windows by using the
"arrow to the right" () and "arrow to the left" () switches.

Left-hand mask area

Definition of remainder sheets.

"Location": Where are the remainder sheets stored?


"Number": How many sheets of this type are available?

Confirm the entries with the ENTER function button in the mask
footer. The data is entered in the left-hand scroll window.
Data in the scroll window:
"Location": Storage location of the sheets
"Number": Number of remainder sheets which are managed at
this storage location.
"Length": Length (X dimension) of the sheets
"Width": Width (Y dimension) of the sheets
As soon as a data block in the left display field is selected, the
other function buttons in the mask footer are activated.
INCREASE: The number of remainder sheets can be
increased.
DELETE: The data block you have selected will be deleted.

Right-hand mask area

Prepare remainder sheets for job.


"Priority": Define sequential order of remainder sheets for
sheet layout. If remainder sheets have the same priority, they
will be assigned on a random basis.
Priority is only evaluated where the free geometry nesting
processor is used. The Rectangle nesting processor lays out
remainder sheets according to the sequence in which the parts
were entered.
"Number": How many remainder sheets are to be used for this
job?
Data in the scroll window:
"Location": Storage location of the sheets
"Number": Number of remainder sheets which are managed at
this storage location.
"Priority": Sequential order of the remainder sheets
"Length": Length (X dimension) of the sheets
"Width": Width (Y dimension) of the sheets

4-38

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

The following functional buttons are available for the right-hand


mask area:
MODIFY: Save data altered in the selected data block.
INCREASE: Increase number of remainder sheets which are to
be used.
DEDUCT: Deduct entered number of remainder sheets nested
from the total number of remainder sheets.

Functions in the mask footer


Function button
OK

Function button
CANCEL

S354E41.DOC

Press OK to confirm the general conditions defined. The data are


stored. You return to the previous screen.

The procedure is aborted.

NEST module

4-39

5.4
Functions
NEST
module

Manual sheet layout

Working steps:
1. Start the NEST module.

Precondition: The parts to be nested must be available.

File

2. Load a new sheet via FILE, NEW, SHEET.

New

Note: The current screen content is deleted. The rectangle of a


new, empty sheet is displayed.

Sheet
File
Load
Load another
part.

3. Load another part.


A single part (format: GEO), a mini nest (format: MTL) or a
worked single part (format: GMT) can be loaded as a part.
Select a part from the file selection mask.
The part hangs automatically with the part zero point at the
mouse cursor.
The current screen contents, e.g. the loaded sheet, are
retained.

Place the part

4. Place the part on the sheet:


Enter target position or angle, or place with the mouse.

Menu SHEET

5. With the aid of the functions in the SHEET menu, control


function MODIFY, the part can be laid on the sheet many times.
If a sheet layout with different parts is required, working steps 3
to 5 must be repeated.

Control function MODIFY

File

6. Save laid out sheet

Save as

4-40

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

5.5

Modifying sheet layout

Overview of procedure
Functions
NEST
module

Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.

Precondition: Sheets with nested parts or mini nests have been


produced.

File
Load
Sheet

Menu SHEET:
Control function MODIFY
Control function MODIFY 2

2. Load laid out part: Select functions FILE, LOAD, SHEET.


The file selection mask (file manager) will then appear.
All files with the format TAF available in the current directory
will be displayed.
If the required sheet is in another directory, you can change
directories using the symbol *.
3. Modify sheet layout.
Several functions are available in this menu with which you
can modify e.g. the part position, number of parts or distance
between parts of available parts.
For a detailed description see: Functions: Modify sheet
layout.
If a new part is to be added, select:
Function FILE, LOAD, ADD PART to load a single part without
processing (format: GEO) or a worked single part
(format: GMT) or a mini nest (format: MTL).
Select the desired file format (radio button) from the file
selection mask. The files available in the current directory are
displayed. Select the part and confirm your selection with OK.
Place the part hanging from the mouse cursor on the sheet.

Save

4. Save the drawing of the modified sheet layout.

or
Save as

Calculating the nesting log

S354E41.DOC

5. The nesting result is automatically recalculated by the system.

NEST module

4-41

Overview of functions
Modification of sheet layouts is via functions available in the two
menus of control function MODIFY and control function MODIFY 2.
Control function MODIFY

Functions of control function MODIFY

Fig. 19818

Menu functions:

4-42

NEST module

MOVE PART: for modifying the position of the parts and


copying parts
NUMBER OF PARTS, PART DISTANCE: arrange a defined
number of parts by row and column (multi-copy processing) or
lay out parts at a defined distance or rotate through a defined
angle.
REFERENCE POINT: for changing the position marked with
the mouse within the part.
CPC DISTANCE: for placing the parts at a defined distance for
common parting cuts.
DELETE PART: Deleting parts
UNDO: Undoes the current last action.

S354E41.DOC

Control function MODIFY 2

Functions of control function MODIFY 2

Fig. 19819

Menu functions:

S354E41.DOC

CUT: Cut out a part to be moved.


PASTE: Reinsert part.

NEST module

4-43

Modifying part position, part number and


part distance
Overview of procedure:
Select the modifying option

1. Step: Select the modifying option: Do you wish to modify the


original or create a copy?

Select modification function

2. Step: Select the modification function by how the part is to be


modified: whether you want the part to be moved, placed
according to the quantity, placed in a defined area, placed at a
defined distance, or rotated through a defined angle when
placed.

Laying out the sheet

3. Step: The nested parts are placed on the sheet. Terminate


action by pressing END.
The next few pages describe these steps in detail.
The descriptions refer for simplicitys sake to "a part". You
can, of course, in practice mark more than one part for
copying, moving etc.

How are parts marked?

There are several methods of marking a part or parts:

NEST module

Double click on the left-hand mouse button: the part will be


moved directly with the mouse.

4-44

A simple click with the left-hand mouse button: the part will be
displayed in magenta.

Group several parts in a box: parts are marked simultaneously.

S354E41.DOC

Step 1: Select the modifying option.


Move original or create copy

Select from the selection window whether to modify the original


or create a copy of the part: Select the symbol "" (arrow) or
click in the display field "Copy/Original".
General rule:
Function ORIGINAL: The identified part hangs directly on
the cursor and can be moved. No copies are created.
With an original part, you can define neither an area nor a
quantity nor a part distance in X and Y directions: The
functional buttons are shown as hatched.
Function COPY: A copy of the identified part is moved
directly with the cursor or nested. You can create copies
without the original being modified. When the part has
been saved, it remains attached to the cursor.

Identify part, define angle

Follow the instructions in the command line.

or
Move part, define distance
and repeat factor

Identify a part by clicking with the mouse or via the box.


The part will be displayed in magenta. Confirm your choice
with OK. If identified via a double click on the mouse, the
part is moved immediately by the mouse.
Define angle which is to be taken into consideration for the
subsequent actions, and then
select modification function.

If you want to move a part, activate one of the MOVE PART


functions immediately after selecting ORIGINAL or COPY:
(see: Step 2: "Select modification function".
Follow the instructions in the command line.

enter distance:
The defined distance refers not to the distance between
the parts but to the distance the part is moved.
In combination with functions HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL:
Distance with a + sign means that the part is moved to the
right or upwards, whereas a - sign means that the part is
moved to the left or downwards.
A distance can always be defined with the 2 POINTS
function.
If parts are to be laid out beside one another at a particular
distance, the distance between the parts must be added to
the X or Y dimension of the part.

S354E41.DOC

Defining repetition factor.

NEST module

4-45

Step 2: select modification function.


Moving part

Select functions for MOVE PART.

2 POINTS: Moving part using 2 defined points (reference point


and reference target position). The part does not hang from the
mouse cursor.
AT WILL: part can be moved at will in X or Y direction. The part
hangs from the mouse cursor.
HORIZONTAL: Part can only be moved in X direction.
VERTICAL: part can only be moved in Y direction.

Please observe the instructions in the command line when using


these functions.

Define number of parts

Menu SHEET, MODIFY:Select the functions for NUMBER OF


PARTS: AREA or QUANTITY.

AREA function: The number of parts can be determined by


defining an area on the sheet (drawing a box).
Define the parameters in the mask:

Absolute part distance: You can define the part distance in


X and Y direction as an absolute value. Inputs are made in
[mm], without + or - sign. Absolute part distance means
that the reference point is the starting point.

Example: Part distance is 10 mm.


Absolute part distance: 15 mm. New part distance: 15 mm.

"Lay out area": Parts can be arranged in different ways in


laying out an area.
Left-hand window: Parts are arranged in a way that does
not fill the area. The part distance is maintained exactly.
This results in a variety of edge widths.
Right-hand window: the part distances are enlarged if
required so that the parts fill out the entire area regularly.
Click on one of the two representations. The one you
select will then have a blue background to indicate that it is
active.

Settings for function AREA

4-46

NEST module

Fig. 19820

S354E41.DOC

QUANTITY function: Direct setting of the number of parts.


In the auxiliary mask you define:

number of parts in X and Y direction and


the absolute part distance in X and Y direction; enter in [mm].

Settings for the QUANTITY function

Fig. 19821

Functional buttons -X, +X, -Y, +Y


You can alter the number of parts or the number of rows and
columns within the defined area by using the buttons -X, +X in
X direction and -Y, +Y in Y direction. The modifications are
carried out according to the set parameters in the masks.
The function buttons -X, +X, -Y, +Y can be selected with the
mouse or with the key combination <Ctrl>+<F1> to <F4>.
Move the mouse briefly to update the parts display.

The current modifications are shown directly at the cursor. As soon


as parts are laid out, you can reverse modifications you have just
made (UNDO functional button) or make further modifications
using the functions in the menu.

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-47

Modify part location

Precondition: There must be at least two parts hanging on the


cursor in order to change a part distance.

PART DISTANCE, PARAMETERS function: Define parameters for modifying the part distance and the part angle. The
following mask is opened:

Settings for PART DISTANCE and ROTATE

Fig. 18922

PART DISTANCE function, functional buttons -X, +X, -Y, +Y:


These functional buttons are used to modify the current
distance between the parts. The process takes into account
the part distance in the mask for PART DISTANCE,
PARAMETERS. The distance is set incrementally.

"Incremental part distance" means that the value is added


to the current distance. Values are entered in [mm].

Example: Part distance is 10 mm.


Incremental part distance: 15 mm. New part distance:
25 mm.
The function buttons -X, +X, -Y, +Y can be selected with
the mouse or with the key combination <Shift>+<F1> to
<F4>. Move the mouse briefly to update the parts display.

ROTATE+ and ROTATE- functions. For modifying part angles


and rotating parts.
The current angle of the part is modified by the angle specified
in the mask for PART DISTANCE, PARAMETERS.

"Angle incremental" means that the value is added to the


current angle.

Example: Angle is 90.


Angle incremental: 15. New part angle: 105.
The ROTATE + and ROTATE - buttons are activated either by
a mouse or a button combination between <Shift>+<> and
<Shift>+<>. Move the mouse briefly to update the parts
display.
The modifications to the part distance and the angle are
displayed directly on the screen.

4-48

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

The number of parts, part distance, angle etc. can be


modified directly only if the parts are guided directly at the
cursor. Once the parts have been placed on the sheet (click
on sheet), it is then no longer possible to modify the part
location within that part group. To do this, you will have to
start at step 1: Select COPY or ORIGINAL, identify parts on
the sheet etc.

Step 3: Finish modifications.


Once you have carried out the modifications, place the parts on the
sheet. To do this, click on a position on the sheet.
End the function by clicking on END in the fixed menu.

Change reference point of cursor


What is a reference point?

Function REFERENCE
POINT

When identifying the part with the help of the cursor you click on
the part. The part hangs on the cursor at exactly this point. This
point is called the reference point.

REFERENCE POINT: You can use the REFERENCE POINT


functions to modify the position of the cursor within the part.
This may be necessary if you wish to position the part more
accurately on the sheet with the mouse. The position of the
reference point can be changed:
AT WILL: Positional shift of the cursor in any direction.
HORIZONTAL: Horizontal shift of the cursor position.
VERTICAL: Vertical shift of the cursor position.

Precondition: Part hangs on cursor


Procedure:
Activate the desired REFERENCE POINT function.
Click on any position on the screen. The part is fixed and
highlighted in yellow. The cursor hangs on the "rubber
band".
Click on new position. The cursor is placed at the new
position. The part is then taken up again at this new
reference point.

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-49

Common parting cut: Placing parts at a


defined distance
You can use the CPC DISTANCE functions to place parts at a
precise distance (equivalent to the width of the cutting slit), so as to
allow the parts to be processed with common parting cuts.
The 2 PTS and ROTATE functions are employed to arrange parts
at a defined distance to each other. The parts can also be rotated if
so desired.

Modifying part distance


via 2 points

Menu MODIFY: Function CPC DISTANCE, 2 PTS

Fig. 5990

Procedure:

Modifying part distance


by rotation

Click on first point (P1).


Click on second point (P2).
Enter distance: Example 5

Menu MODIFY: CPC DISTANCE, ROTATE

Fig. 5800

Procedure:

4-50

NEST module

Click on first geometric element (1).


Click on second geometric element (2).
Click on first point (P1).
Click on second point (P2).
Enter distance: Example 5

S354E41.DOC

Delete part
Deleting parts

Menu MODIFY: Function PART, DELETE


Modified parts can be deleted with the function button DELETE.
Follow the instructions in the command line.

Delete single part: click on the part with the mouse or mark
with the box.

Delete several parts (part groups): group the parts in a box.

Undoing the current modifications


Undoing modifications
during definition

Menu MODIFY: Function PART, UNDO


You can undo the last modification using the UNDO function.

Cutting and pasting part


Menu MODIFY 2: BEYOND PART

Procedure:

S354E41.DOC

Select sheet to which part is to be added.

Important

Function CUT: Click on part to be moved.

Function PASTE: Reinsert part. The part hangs automatically


at the mouse cursor. Place the part at the desired position by
moving the mouse.

Save sheets to which modifications have been made.

NEST module

4-51

5.6

Displaying sheets of a job

The laid out sheets of a nesting job are shown in overview at first
after the nesting procedure.
Individual sheets can be viewed by "paging" within the sheet
sequence. The system displays functions in the main menu for this.
If the sheets are shown in overview, the function SINGLE
SHEET is offered.
As soon as a single sheet is displayed, the following functions are
shown in the main menu bar:
Function PREVIOUS SHEET
Function NEXT SHEET
Function DISPLAY ALL SHEETS

Functions in detail
Display single sheet

Function SINGLE SHEET

Precondition: All sheets of a job are displayed.


The single parts are displayed as encompassing rectangles and
each part type in a different color.
After selecting the function button SINGLE SHEET from the
main menu bar, click on one of the sheets. The sheet is displayed
with the single parts and the exact geometry. The screen menu
SHEET with control functions is also displayed.
"Paging" through the sheet
sequence

Display previous or next sheet.


To view the other sheets, simply "page" through the sheet
sequence using the function buttons in the main menu bar:

Function PREVIOUS SHEET: The previous sheet to the


current sheet is displayed.
Function NEXT SHEET: The next sheet to the current sheet
is displayed.
The screen menu SHEET with control functions is displayed with
both functions.
Display all sheets

To view all the sheets produced in a job at a glance.

4-52

NEST module

Function DISPLAY ALL SHEETS: The complete sheet


overview is shown again.
The screen menu JOB with control functions is displayed.

S354E41.DOC

5.7

Calling up sheet information

The INFORMATION control function is to be found in the SHEET


screen menu. The single functions belonging to it enable you to
call up Information on single parts and the available sheet.
Menu SHEET:
INFORMATION control
function

SHEET screen menu

Fig. 19823

Overview of functions:

Function SINGLE PART HIDE: Mask out single part.


Only active if all sheets of the job are displayed (sheet
overview).

Function DISPLAY FILENAME: Display the file name of a part


or sheet.

Function DISPLAY DRAWING: Display drawing name

Function DISPLAY RESULT: Display nesting result. Not active


with single sheet view.

Function DISPLAY LOGFILE: Displaying the nesting log. Not


active with single sheet view.

Function DISPLAY WASTE: Display waste from sheet.

S354E41.DOC

Function SINGLE PART DISPLAY: Display single part with


geometry.

Function DELETE PART: Delete part. Only active if a single


sheet is displayed (single sheet).

NEST module

4-53

Information on the single part


Display single part

INFORMATION function: SINGLE PART, DISPLAY


The functions are available with the sheet overview as well as
single sheet view.
These functions enable the display of parts.

Display single part: Click on part with the mouse cursor.


Display several parts: Surround the parts with a box with the
mouse cursor.

The display varies:

Hide single part

For sheet overview: Identified single parts represented in


various colors as encompassed rectangles are displayed with
their geometry.
For single sheet view: All parts of the identified part type are
displayed.

INFORMATION function: SINGLE PART, HIDE

Precondition: This function is only active in the sheet overview.


Click on single parts to be masked out. The identified parts are no
longer displayed on the sheet.
Note: The parts are not deleted from the sheet!

4-54

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

Nesting job information


Display file name

INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, FILENAME

Precondition: A sheet overview or single sheet display is present.


Display the file name of a part or sheet.
Display part name: Click on part.
Display sheet name: Click on sheet border.

Display drawing name

INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, DRAWING


Select the name of the drawing.
The single part name will be displayed as a message. Precondition: The single part was saved with characteristics (see:
DRAWING module).

Display and print


nesting result

INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, RESULT


This function is not active in the single sheet display.
The nesting result including the nest log for the selected nesting
job is displayed.
In the sub-mask, the nesting result can be read and printed.
see: Description of "Nesting result and Nest logfile".

Display and print


nesting log

INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, LOGFILE


This function is not active in the single sheet display.
Only the nesting logfile for the selected nesting job is displayed.
In the sub-mask, the nesting logfile can be read and printed.
see: Description of "Nesting result and Nest logfile".

Sheet waste display

INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, WASTE


Display waste from sheet.
Click on the sheet border or enter the sheet name. The waste will
be displayed as a message.

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-55

Description of "Nesting result and Nest logfile"


The nest result is displayed after the sheet layout has been produced.
Nesting result

The nesting result comprises


General information: such as job name, sheet identifications,
sheet path, material, sheet thickness, production date, sheet
dimensions.
Information on single parts: Number. File name, customer job,
rotation, area.
Information on sheets: Sheet size, number of sheets with
identical part layout, sheet waste. All waste areas are
contained in the sheet waste: not merely the waste grid but
also all waste parts separated.

Overall result

The overall result comprises:


Details of the total sheet number produced overall,
Details of the actual part number (actual value) and minimum
and maximum part numbers,
Details of part names,
Details of sheet dimensions and number.

Nest log

The nest log contains information on parts which were not nested:
Name of nesting job
Parts which were not nested because, e.g. a part or mini nest
was not found.
Example: "6378.mtl: Mini nest not found in current directory".
Example of a file:

************************************************************************
*
N e s t - R e s u l t
*
************************************************************************
Job name
Sheet identification
Sheet path
Material
Sheet thickness
Date
Sheet dimensions [mm]

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

test1
test1
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2
St37-20
2.000000
25.04.1997 09:46:51
2000.00 x 1000.00 x 2.00000 *

************************************************************************
*
P A R T - I N F O
*
************************************************************************
No.
File name
Customer job
Rotation
Area

1
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\6378.GEO
test
rotate part at will
77743.359375

No.
File name
Customer job
Rotation
Area
No.
Filename
Drawing name
Customer job
Rotation
Area

4-56

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

3
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\L-FORM2T.GEO
test
do not rotate part
9680.419922
2
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\SZ52.GEO
C-Axes-part
test
rotate part at will
48070.433594

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

Sheet number: 1 2000 x 1000 2 Sheet(s)


Waste 23.25%
=========================================================================
No. | File name
|Actual| Draw. name
----|-----------------------------------------|------|-----------1
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\6378.GEO
| 18 |
3
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USE...L-FORM2T.GEO | 14 |
Sheet number: 3 2000 x 1000 Sheet(s)
Waste 29.66%
=========================================================================
No. | File name
|Actual| Draw. name
----|------------------------------------------------|------|-----------1
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\6378.GEO
| 14 |
3
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USE...L-FORM2T.GEO | 18 |
2
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\SZ52.GEO
| 3
| C-Axes-part
Sheet number: 4 2000 x 1000 Sheet(s)
Waste 45.17%
=========================================================================
No. | File name
|Actual| Draw. name
----|------------------------------------------------|------|-----------3
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USE...L-FORM2T.GEO | 9
|
2
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\SZ52.GEO
| 21 | C-Axes-part
Sheet number: 5 2000 x 1000 1 Sheet(s)
Waste 49.53%
=========================================================================
No. | File name
|Actual| Draw. name
----|------------------------------------------------|------|-----------2
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\SZ52.GEO
| 21 | C-Axes-part
Sheet number: 6 2000 x 1000 1 Sheet(s)
Waste 49.53%
=========================================================================
No. | File name
|Actual| Draw. name
----|------------------------------------------------|------|-----------2
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\SZ52.GEO
| 21 | C-Axes-part
************************************************************************
Overall result
************************************************************************
Overall result: 6 Sheets(s) Waste 39.43 %
========================================================================
NO. | File name
|Actual| Min | Max | Drawing name
----|--------------------------------|------|-----|-----|---------------1
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS_JO2\6378.GEO
| 50
| 20 | 50 |
3
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS...L-FORM2T.GEO | 55
| 40 | 55 |
2
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS...JO2\SZ52.GEO | 66
| 50 | 80 | C-Axes-part
************************************************************************
Sheet(s)
| No. | Actual| Max | Rolling direction |
---------------------|-----|-------|-----|--------------------|* 2000.00 x 1000.00 | 1
| 6
| -1 | *
|
************************************************************************
*
N e s t - L o g
*
************************************************************************
Job name
: test1
The following parts were not nested:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------- No entries ---

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-57

5.8

Display sheet view with machine


environment

The control function DISPLAY in the screen menu SHEET enables


the accurate positioning of a sheet on the machine.
Menu SHEET: Control
function DISPLAY

Functions for display of sheet with machine environment

Fig. 19824

Precondition: A sheet is loaded.


Procedure:

Select the DISPLAY control function. The menu functions are


displayed.

Menu function SELECT: Select machine drawing. All available


machine drawings are displayed in the file selection mask
(format: MCH).

After confirmation of the machine choice with OK, the machine


environment is only displayed once one of the check buttons is
activated.
"Machine": Only machine drawings with sheets are
displayed.
"Spacing": Only spacings on the machine are displayed.
If both check buttons are selected, the sheet is displayed with
the entire machine environment.

4-58

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

5.9
Menu SHEET DRAWING:
TOOLS control function

Using construction geometry

The functions in the SHEET, DRAWING TOOLS control function


menu correspond to the functions in the DRAWING, DRAWING
TOOLS.
For a detailed description see: DRAWING module: "Creating
construction geometry".
Use construction geometries to carry out modifications e.g. to part
positions or to position parts exactly.

Function scope

Construction geometries are geometry elements which make


programming easier.
The measurement functions are used to check the position of a
part or the distances between two parts.
The functions for deleting construction geometry are also stored in
the screen menu for the DRAWING TOOLS control function.

Geometry representation

Construction lines are always represented as infinite, construction


circles always as full circles.

Line type and colour

Construction geometry is displayed on the screen in red and line


type dotted.

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-59

6.
Function scope

Printing a file

The functions for printing drawings and screen shots are selected
in the FILE main menu. In the pull-down menu the functions
PRINT, FILE and PRINT, SCREEN are available.

Procedure:

File

Printing screen contents:


Print

Select function FILE, PRINT, SCREEN.

Screen

The windows printing mask appears. Select the corresponding


printer or plotter.
Start the print procedure using OK. The part of the drawing
visible in the graphics window will be printed.

or

Procedure:
Print screen contents.

Select function FILE, PRINT, FILE.

Print

Select the file whose contents are to be printed in the file


selection mask (file manager).

File

After the selection of a file, the contents are displayed in a


window.
Start the print procedure using PRINT. The Windows printing
mask appears. Select the corresponding printer or plotter.
OK: The print procedure is aborted.

File

Configuring the printer and


plotter

Output to a printer or plotter is controlled by the operating system.


You can configure the printer, plotter and interface in Windows
using the program "Printer. You will find this program in the
"Control Panel" program group.
Plotter: If you are using a serial plotter, you will have to make sure
that the dip switch configuration on the plotter is compatible with
the Windows configuration for the serial interface.
For further information, refer to the documentation for your
operating system.

4-60

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

7.
File

Transfer

Transfer of NC data

The TRANSFER function is contained in the main menu under FILE.


After selecting the function, a mask for copying or moving NC data
with the extension .LST appears.
PC-TRANSFER is a TRUMPF software product which enables
1)
data transfer to the machine control system via a data line. For
detailed information, refer to the documentation for PCTRANSFER. This should contain a basic explanation of data
transfer.

Operating mode

The NC programs created with ToPs are copied in a special format


into a directory which the PC-TRANSFER software accesses.
Example
The following directory structure is provided as standard:
c:\trumpf\users\masch01 (all programs for a machine, for
example, for TC 200R) or
c:\trumpf\users\mach02 (all programs for a machine, for
example for TC 500R)

File format

Files are created in ToPs which have the LST format.


gearwheel.LST
4711.LST

For BOSCH-control systems:


Only such programs from the transfer directory whose names
correspond to the
P(4711)

The maximum possible program number is specified in your


machine file.

1)

For BOSCH TRUMAGRAPH, SIN8N and TASK500 control systems


Not required for open control systems Sinumerik SIN840 and BOSCH-control system Type 3

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-61

Copying files

The original file remains when a file is copied. A copy is created in


the target directory.

Procedure:

Moving files

Activate the COPY radio button.


The NC program file name is determined during the copy
procedure. A check is implemented to see whether the file
name is already available in the TRANSFER directory. If a file
with the same name already exists, a warning message
appears.
"Source file name": Input a file name with the ending LST or
select via file selection mask. To do this, open the selection
window via the "Arrow" symbol.
"Target directory": Select the directory into which the NC
program should be copied. \users\mach01\ is offered as
standard (i.e. the directory which has been specified for the
machine in the DATA module). For example, all files for a
machine can be copied into this directory.
Confirm your selection with OK or break off the procedure with
CANCEL.

The original file is stored in the target directory when a file is


moved. No copy is created. The file is deleted from the source
directory.

Procedure:

Activate the MOVE radio button.


The NC program file name is determined during the moving
procedure. A check is implemented to see whether the file
name is already available in the TRANSFER directory. If a file
with the same name already exists, a warning message
appears.
"Source file name": Input a file name with the ending LST or
select via file selection mask. To do this, open the selection
window via the "Arrow" symbol.
"Target directory": Select the directory into which the NC
program should be moved. \users\mach01\ is offered as
standard (i.e. the directory which has been specified for the
machine in the DATA module). For example, all files for a
machine can be moved into this directory.
Confirm your selection with OK or break off the procedure with
CANCEL.

Example:
c:\trumpf\parts\user1\gearwheel.LST
becomes
\users\mach01\P4711.LST

4-62

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

8.

Job export and import

Each nesting job created in the NEST module is written to the data
base. This cannot be controlled from the Windows file manager.
From the NEST module, jobs stored in the database can only be
deleted in the frame of the job management with the function
button DELETE.
Function FILE,
JOB EXPORT

To store job data which is not required daily, for example, in


another directory or even to save them in another storage medium,
the job must be written to a file. This is done by means of the
function JOB EXPORT. A file is produced with the format DAT.

Function FILE,
JOB IMPORT

If job data is required again, the files can simply be imported


(format: DAT) back into the NEST module. The data are written to
the database and are thus available for further programming.

Exporting a job
The defined nesting job can be saved in a file. The file will receive
the extension .DAT. This file can then be managed from the
Windows file manager like any other file.
Procedure
Functions
NEST
module

File
Job Export

Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.

2. Exporting a job. Select function FILE, JOB EXPORT.


The "Job selection" mask is displayed. All jobs present in the
database are displayed.
3. Select the job desired.
Specify the directory to which the job should be exported in
the file selection mask. Specify a file name for the nesting job
under "Filename" or accept the suggestion.
4. Confirm the specification with OK. The job is exported to the
specified directory. (jobname).dat.

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-63

Importing a job
Each exported job i.e. those with the extension DAT can be read
into ToPS again. The function FILE, JOB IMPORT is provided for
this.
Procedure
Functions
Module
NEST

File
Job Import

Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.

2. Importing a job. Select function FILE, JOB IMPORT.


The file manager of ToPs is displayed. Change to the
directory in which you manage exported jobs (format: DAT).
3. Select the job desired.
Confirm your selection with OK. The "Load job in database"
mask is displayed.
If a job with the same job name already exists in the
database, you must decide:
select the radio button "Overwrite" if the existing job is to
be overwritten
or
select the radio button "complete" if the existing job is to
be completed. The number of parts is added on to the
number of parts already stored in the database.
4. Confirm your choice with OK. The data are written to the
database.

4-64

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

Format description of a DAT file


File format

Files to be read in must be constructed according to a specific


format:*)
Higher-level format conventions remain effective:

The following apply:


The file is divided into blocks.
The following blocks are allocated:
Block

Designation

Explanation

Block 1

#~11

General information

Block 2

#~25

Job data

Block 3

#~40

Sheet data and remainder


sheet data

Block 4

#~35

Part identification

*)

Start of block: #~n (n = Block designation)


End of block: #~END
End of file: #~EOF
The file must always begin with #~11 (Block 1).
The contents of block 1 are not evaluated.
No empty lines are permitted within individual blocks.

Files created with previous versions can still be read in.

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-65

Detail of file structure: Example with explanations


Example

#~11
PCNN
C:\TRUMPF
#~END
#~25
Part1
Part1
St37-20
2000.000000
1000.000000
10.000000
10.000000
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
1
1
1
5.000000
5.000000
1
1
1
0
2
1
1
1
2.000000

3
1
1
0
1
2
52
65.000000
5.000000
70.000000
0.000000
0.000000
PCNN
#~END
#~40
St37-20
2
500
500
taf1.geo
C:\TRUMPF...USER_JO2
2
2
3
1
5
rest1
1
1

4-66

NEST module

Start of block 1
Computer name
Root directory
End of block 1
Start of block 2
Job name
Sheet name
Material ID no.
Sheet length
Sheet width
Web in X
Web in Y
Top edge
Bottom edge
Left edge
Right edge
Inner area (1/0=Y/N)
Outer surfaces (0=no, 1=part, 2=sheet)
Start corner (1=LB, 2=LT, 3=RB, 4=RT)
CPC distance X
CPC distance Y
CPC number of parts in block in X
CPC number of parts in block in Y
Lay out remainder sheets (1/0=Y/N)
CPC layout (1/0=Y/N)
Resolution (1=small, 2=medium, 3=large)
Sort criterion (1=area, 2=perimeter)
Fill last sheet (1/0=Y/N)
Start part (1=area, 2=X, 3=Y, 4=X/Y)
Sheet thickness
Sheet geometry name
Sheet path name
Rolling direction (1=X, 2=Y, 3=unknown)
Positioning direction (1=X, 2=Y)
MasterPlate (1/0=Y/N)
Exact distance (1/0=Y/N)
Sheet is not rectangular (1/0=Y/N)
Number of MasterPlate (1=one, 2=several)
Clean last sheet (52/2=Y/N)
Min. % nesting MasterPlate
Min. % improvement mini-nests
Max. % limit recalculation last sheet
Min. element length for common parting cuts
Min. distances for securing corners with CPC
Computer name for sheets
End of block 2
Start of block 3
Material of the remainder sheets
Sheet thickness (Z)
Sheet length (X)
Sheet width (Y)
Sheet name
Sheet path
Number of remainder sheets
Remaining number of remainder sheets
Rolling direction (1=X, 2=Y, 3=unknown)
Positioning direction (1=X, 2=Y)
Priority of sheet
Name of remainder sheet
Sheet is not rectangular (1/0=Y/N)
Start corner (1=LB, 2=LT, 3=RB, 4=RT)

S354E41.DOC

Part 1
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
PCNN
|~
:
:
|~
#~END
#~35
C:\TRUMP...USER_JO2\GEO_
MTL\SZ600PLA.GEO
30
100
1
4
0
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USER_JO2\
GEO_MTL\SZ600PLA.GEO
5
90.000000
3
2
0
MiniNest
0
1
1
PCNN
none
|~
#~END
#~EOF

S354E41.DOC

Job name of remainder sheet


Top edge
Bottom edge
Left edge
Right edge
Computer name for sheets

End of block 3
Start of block 4
Part name with path details
Minimum quantity
Maximum quantity
Rotate(1/0=Y/N)
Mini nest (0=No, 1= Horizontal, 2=Vertical,
3=Auto, 4=MTL)
GTS-compatible (1/0=Y/N)
Part path name
Priority
Rotation angle increment
Rolling direction (1=X, 2=Y, 3=unknown)
Positioning method (1=FirstFit, 2=centre of
gravity)
Part in mini nest (1/0=Y/N)
Name of MiniNest
Place part in coil
Number of rows in coil
Number of columns in coil
Computer name for parts
Customer of the part
End of block 4
End of file

NEST module

4-67

9.

Creating back-up copies

The main function FILE, BACK-UP COPY enables the copying of


the entire file to a sheet or to a job in any directory or to a preset
drive, e.g. to diskette.

Application: A back-up copy can thus be made of a nested sheet


or of a job.
This allows sheet data or job data which is stored in different
directories to be stored safely in one directory on one computer or,
for example, on an external storage medium.

Creating copies of sheet data


Procedure
Functions
Module
NEST

File
Back-up copy
Sheet

Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.

2. Select the main function FILE, BACK-UP COPY from the


NEST module.
Select the SHEET function in the pull-down menu.
3. In the auxiliary mask "Saving sheet data including
GEO-/MTL", specify:
"Sheet file": Enter sheet name or select via the "arrow"
symbol.
You are presented with the file selection mask.
Select here the desired sheet which you intend to copy.
The file name will be displayed with the complete path.
"Target directory": In the lower mask area you define the
directory where the data is to be copied to.
4. Confirm the details with OK.
All data which belong to the selected sheet is copied to the
back-up copy: Sheet file, all single part drawings (format:
GEO), mini nests (format: MTL) and worked single parts
(format: GMT). Recommendation: Check if you have
several copies of certain data. Superfluous data can be
deleted.

4-68

NEST module

S354E41.DOC

Creating back-up copies of job data


Procedure
Functions
Module
NEST

File
Back-up copy
Job

Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.

2. Select the main function FILE, BACK-UP COPY from the


NEST module.
3. Select the JOB function in the pull-down menu.
In the following mask, "Save complete job", specify:
"Job": Enter job name or select via the "arrow" symbol.
You are presented with the file selection mask.
Select here the desired job which you intend to copy.
The file name will be displayed with the complete path.
"Target directory": In the lower mask area you define the
directory where the data is to be copied to.
4. Confirm the details with OK.
All data which belong to the selected job is copied to the
back-up copy: Job file (format: DAT), all single part
drawings (format: GEO), mini nests (format: MTL), Sheet
file (format: TAF) and worked single parts (format: GMT).
Recommendation: Check if you have several copies of
certain data. Superfluous data can be deleted.

S354E41.DOC

NEST module

4-69

1.

Flexible processing definition and


NC program generation

The processing operation is defined and the NC program is


generated in the TECHNOLOGY module. ToPs automatically
generates the NC program. To do this, it refers to NC components
stored in the data base. The processing of the sheets or of a single
part can be simulated on the screen.
ToPs also creates a processing plan containing all information
relevant to processing. The NC program, the setting plan and the
screen display can be printed out at any time.

Flexible programming
sequence

The programming sequence is variable. Decide yourself how you


would like to proceed.
It is always possible to switch between single part processing and
sheet processing. The same functions are available for defining the
processing operation, regardless of whether you define the
processing operation for single part or sheet. This distinguishes
ToPs 300 from other systems. In other systems, the procedure is
usually determined by the programming sequence: i.e. single part
programming or sheet layout. In ToPs 300, it is always possible to
switch between single part programming and sheet programming.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-7

Processing strategies
A sheet processing method is referred to as a processing strategy.
The possibilities are:
Multi-copy processing: simple or sectional multi-copy processing
processing of nested sheets which were created in the NEST
module
Initial blank processing: single part size corresponds to sheet
size
Overview of processing strategies:

Processing of
nested

Multi-copy
processing

Initial blanc
processing

Simple
multi-copy processing

Sectional
multi-copy processing

Common
parting cut

Fabrication
from grid

Processing strategies

5-8

TECHNOLOGY module

Fig. 19903

S354E51.DOC

Sheet processing as
multi-copy processing

Multi-copy processing means that one single piece in an area is


placed on the sheet multiple times. A distinction must be made between simple and sectional multi-copy processing.
There are two different parting methods in multi-copy processing:
Fabrication from grid and common parting cut. Nested sheets are
usually processed using fabrication from grid.

Fabrication from grid

Fabrication from grid: The parts are separated from the sheet. A
scrap skeleton (waste grid) arises.

Sectional multi-copy processing: Fabrication from grid

Common parting cut

Fig. 5884

The sheet is laid out as with fabrication from grid. In contrast to


fabrication from grid however, no scrap skeleton is created.
Parts which are positioned next to each other in such a way that
the parting cut width corresponds to the tool width can be separated with common parting cuts.
Result: The contours of different parts are cut simultaneously.

Sheet with common parting cuts

S354E51.DOC

Fig. 5751

TECHNOLOGY module

5-9

Sheet processing as
cut-to-size processing

Cut-to-size processing is usually defined as follows:

Cut-to-size processing: sheet with one single part

Fig. 4773

It is always cut-to-size production if one single piece is made from


a sheet. The sheet dimension correspond to the dimension of the
corresponding rectangle (single part dimensions = dimensions of
the raw sheet). The outer contour of the single part is not processed continuously. The contour of the sheet corresponds in
sections to the outer contour to be produced.

5-10

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Overview of work sequences


Flexible programming
sequence

One of the essential features of ToPs 300 is the flexibility in


programming sequence. Two possibilities are mentioned now as
examples.

Two possibilities:

1st possibility

Drawing of 1st single part

2nd possibility

Drawing of 2nd single part

1st single part (processed) Drawing of 2nd single part

Definition of single part


processing

Definition of sheet layout

Definition of sheet layout

Definition of single part


processing

Flexible programming sequence

S354E51.DOC

Fig. 7297E

TECHNOLOGY module

5-11

1st possibility
The programming sequence described in the following is an
example. There are many different ways to proceed.
DRAWING
module

TECHNOLOGY
module

Loading and processing first


single part

Create drawings of the first and second single piece after each
other and store them.

Define processing and sheet layout.


1. Select machine.

2. Load first single part


Select the function FILE, LOAD in the main menu. Enter
the file name or select from the selection window.
The radio button for the GEO format must be activated.
Specify sheet data.
The single part is hanging on the handle. Position the part
outside the displayed sheet.
3. Process a single part.
Select the SINGLE PART function in the main menu.
The PUNCH PROCESSING menu appears.
Define the processing operation with punching tools
and/or with laser automatically or manually using the
functions in the menus.
Do not forget to specify the disposal method for the part.
4. Transfer single part processing to the sheet.
Select the TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET function
button. A mask will appear automatically, allowing you to
define the general conditions for the transmission to the sheet.
Accept the standard settings and do not make any changes.
5. Store a single part with processing.
Select FILE, SAVE SELECTION in the main menu.
Specify the file name (format: GMT).
Identify the part to be stored.

Load the second single part


and process

6. Load the second single part and position the part outside of
the displayed sheet.
7. Repeat steps 3-5.

5-12

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Lay out the sheet

8. Lay out the sheet.


Select the function LAYOUT in the main menu.
Select the function CREATE, AREA BASED in the
SHEET LAYOUT menu.
Specify the "Multi-copy processing parameters" in the
following mask.
Place the first part onto the sheet: Click on the part and
confirm your selection with OK. Define an area on the
sheet with a box. Remember to observe the system
messages in the command line.
Then place the second part onto the sheet: Click on the
part and define a sheet area.
Result: Both single parts are now in separately defined sheet
areas with the specified processing operation and disposal
method (sectional multi-copy processing).

Optimize the sheet

Generate NC program

Data transfer

S354E51.DOC

9. Sheet optimization means: sorting the processing sequence so


as to optimize processing (tool and time-optimized).
Select the function OPTIMIZE in the main menu.
The SHEET OPTIMIZATION menu opens. Click on the
function AUTOMATIC, START. The sheet optimization is
carried out automatically by the system.
You can also interactively define a sheet optimization at any
time: function MANUAL, INTERACTIVE.

10. Select the NC PROGRAM function in the main menu. The NC


PROGRAM menu appears.
To generate the NC program, activate the functions
GENERATE, START. Specify the parameters in the index
cards.

11. Copy and move file in transfer directory.


Select the function FILE, TRANSFER in the main menu and
enter a source file name and a target directory.
Also decide whether you wish to copy or move the
NC program.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-13

2nd possibility
The programming sequence described in the following is an
example. There are many different ways to proceed.

Requirements

The first single part with processing must be stored (format: GMT).
The second single part must be available as a drawing without
processing (format: GEO).

TECHNOLOGY
module

Lay out sheet with single parts and process second single part:
1. Specify sheet data. Main menu FILE, NEW. Specify sheet
data.

Load first part

Load second part

3. Load second single part.


Select the function FILE, LOAD in the main menu.
Activate the GEO radio button. Enter or select file name.
The single part is hanging on the handle. Position the part
outside the displayed sheet.

Lay out the sheet

5-14

2. Then load the first single part with processing:


Select FILE, LOAD in the main menu.
Activate the GMT radio button. Enter or select file name.
The single part is hanging on the handle. Position the part
outside the displayed sheet. Tip: if the part is not visible,
select the TOTAL function so that the screen is built up
again!

4. Lay out the sheet.


Select the function CREATE, SECTIONAL in the SHEET
LAYOUT menu.
Specify the "Multi-copy processing parameters" in the
following mask.
Place the first part (with processing) on the sheet: Click on
the part and confirm your selection with OK. Define an
area on the sheet with a box. Remember to observe the
system messages in the command line.
Then place the second part (without processing) onto the
sheet: Click on the part and define a sheet area.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Result

Defining the processing for


the second single part

The first single part (with processing) and the second part (without
processing) are now in separately defined sheet areas with the
specified processing operation and disposal method (sectional
multi-copy processing).
5. Process a single part.
Select the SINGLE PART function in the main menu.
The PUNCH PROCESSING menu appears.
Define the processing operation with punching tools
and/or with laser automatically or manually using the
functions in the menus.
Do not forget to specify the disposal method for the part.
6. Transfer single part processing to the sheet.
Select the TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET
function button. A mask will appear automatically, allowing
you to define the general conditions for the transmission
to the sheet. Accept the standard settings and do not
make any changes.
7. Store a single part with processing.
Select the function FILE STORE SELECTION in the main
menu.
Identify the part to be stored.

Optimize the sheet

Generate NC program

Data transfer

S354E51.DOC

8. Sheet optimization means: sorting the processing sequence


so as to optimize processing (tool and time optimized).
Select the function OPTIMIZE in the main menu. The
SHEET OPTIMIZATION menu opens. Click on the
function AUTOMATIC, START. The sheet optimization is
carried out automatically by the system.
You can also interactively define a sheet optimization at
any time: function MANUAL, INTERACTIVE.
9. Select the NC PROGRAM function in the main menu. The NC
PROGRAM menu appears.
To generate the NC program, activate the functions
GENERATE, START. Specify the parameters in the index
cards.
10. Copy and move files in the transfer directory.
Select the function FILE, TRANSFER in the main menu
and enter a source file name and a target directory.
Also decide whether you wish to copy or move the
NC program.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-15

2.

Overview of functions

The TECHNOLOGY module provides all the functions required to


define processing and generate an NC program.
Select the TECHNOLOGY module. The user interface is displayed
after you have selected your machine.
TECHNOLOGY
module

User interface in the TECHNOLOGY module

5-16

TECHNOLOGY module

Fig. 19829E

S354E51.DOC

Main menu bar functions


The main functions are presented next to each other at the top of
the screen. The corresponding subfunctions become visible and
can be activated after the main function has been selected.
Function scope:
File

New

Load

The main function FILE contains the subfunctions:


Load new sheet (sheet data).
Load files.

Save all

LOAD single part drawing: GEO format.


Load mini-nest drawing: MTL format. A mini-nest is generated
in the nest module.
Load sheet drawing: TAF format. The sheet drawing is
generated during nesting in the NEST module.
Load selected screen contents, e.g. single part with
processing: GMT format.
Load selected screen contents, e.g. single part with
processing: TMT format.

Store the entire screen contents.


Format: TMT

Store selection

Storing contents of a selected screen.


Format: GMT

Print...

Transfer...

Setup sheet

Table
comparison
Back

S354E51.DOC

Print screen contents.


Transfer of NC data: Move or copy NC data from source directory
to target directory.
The functions:

Translate clamps.
Change loading position.
Modify sheet dimensions.

Write tool and laser technology tables in files in order to carry out
a comparison of the data with the data of the machine.
Quit the TECHNOLOGY module. The initial screen of ToPs is
displayed.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-17

Layout

Single part

Define sheet layout.

Generate single part processing.


The following functions are offered in the main menu bar:

Processing

Optimize

NC program

Tool

TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET: Transfer processing


operations which were defined in the single part to the parts of
the sheet.
CONTOUR: Single part processing observing contour.

Generate sheet processing.

Optimize processing.

Generate the NC program.

Select tools for punch processing and combined processing.


Select laser technology tables and rules.
Tool management.

5-18

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

3.

On-screen display: Meaning of the


colors and symbols

The following list gives an overview of the default settings for the
display in the TECHNOLOGY module.
Color

Symbol
Line type

Meaning

Yellow

Coordinate cross
with X and Y axes

Zero point of the machine

Red

Circle

Index pin

Red

Asterisk

Punching head position during loading

Magenta

Line type: dotted

Working area of the machine

Red

Line type: dotted

Travel area of the machine

Yellow

Rectangle

Clamp dead range for standard clamps:


Small rectangle for standard tools, large rectangle for Multitool tools

Yellow

Cross

Positions on the traverse rail for tools and clamps

Yellow

Trapeze

Clamping surface for pull-back or swing-back clamps

White

Line type: solid

Sheet, geometry and surrounding rectangle with symbolic part representation

Magenta

Line type: solid

Selected objects

Cyan

Line type: solid

Punch processing

Green

Line type: solid

Laser processing

Cyan

Cross

Start and end point for punch processing

Yellow

Line type: solid

Unprocessed geometries, contours

Blue

Line type: solid

Positioning distance between neighboring parts

Magenta

Triangle (arrow)

in association with positioning motions: Direction of the positioning motion,


start point of the next processing

Green:

Line type: dotted

Approach flag for laser processing

Yellow

Cross

Start point of processing with presser foot (M27)

Green

Cross

Start point of a processing with delayed single stroke (M26)

Yellow

Circle

Collision point with processing definition

Red

Square

Disposal with ejection subprogram

Green

Square

Disposal with flap with punch processing

Red

Triangle

Disposal with machine stop, manual removal with punch processing

Red

Square

Disposal with chute with punch processing

Yellow

Cross

Disposal with flap with laser processing

Yellow

Cross

Disposal with machine stop, manual removal with laser processing

Green

Line type: dotted

First part of a processing sequence (compulsory sequence)

Green

Line type: solid

All other parts of a processing sequence, positioning distance between the


parts of a processing sequence

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-19

4.

Selecting machine

When ToPs 300 is installed, all data on the machine types which
ToPs supports is stored in the included database.

Basic machines

A basic machine is the basis for different machine types which


differ in their equipment.
If the machine is equipped with a different control system, a basic
machine is defined for each control system.
Example: Basic machine TC 235 with Bosch CC 200 control system
and basic machine TC 235 with Sinumerik 3N control system.

Machine types

Machine types are variants of the basic machine. The basic


machine is divided into machine types when ToPs is installed.
After installation, you therefore have the following available, for
example:
2 machine types for the TC 600L,
3 machine types for the TC 260L,
2 machine types for the TC 235 with Bosch CC 200 control
system
and
2 machine types for the TC 235 with Sinumerik 3N control
system.

Machine types are selected in ToPs 300. A machine type usually


corresponds to its machine configuration. You can however define
your own machine type after you have installed ToPs for a basic
machine.
The machine types differ in the size of the working memory and the
design of the clamps.

5-20

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Machines and components supported


Machines (basic machines) which are supported in ToPs 300 are
listed in the following. You can also find information on the
machine control system and the automation components which are
possible for the machine.
Machine
(basic
machine)

Control system
(Machine software)

Automated

Explanations

TC 120R

Bosch CC 220

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1000 all automation components

TC 160R

Bosch CC 220

TC 190R

Bosch CC 220

TC 200R

Bosch CC 220

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 200

all automation components

TC 180 K/W

Bosch M5TC

only Bosch M5TC, without: laser, tapping,


Multitool, swift

TC 180.2 K/W

Bosch M5TC

only Bosch M5TC, without: laser, taping,


Multitool, swift

TC180 K/W

Fanuc 6MB

only rotation, without: laser, thread,


Multitool

TC180 K/W

Sinumerik 8N

only non-rotation, working

TC 235

Bosch CC 200

TC 235

Sinumerik 3 N

TC 240

Bosch CC 200 (T19)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TC 240

Bosch CC 200 (>= T21)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TC 240L

Bosch CC 200 (< T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TC 240L

Bosch CC 200 (> T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TC 240R

Bosch CC 300

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TC 260

Bosch CC 300 (< T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C


+ TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB

TC 260

Bosch CC 300 (> T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C


+ TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB

TC 260L

Bosch CC 300 (< T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C


+ TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB

TC 260L

Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C


+ TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB

TC 500R

Bosch CC 220

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
1000, 1250, 1300, 1600

all automation components

TC 600L

Sinumerik 840 D

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
1306, 1606

all automation components

TC 2000 R

Bosch type 3

Machines with plasma devices are not supported by ToPs 300.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-21

Automation Components

All data for the automation components is included with the


database of ToPs 300. By default, the machine types in ToPs 300
are configured without these components. See: the chapter
"Automation components, defining machine configuration".
A database which contains data on the machine types listed above
and the automation components TRUMALIFT SheetMaster,
TRUMASORT, TRUMAGRIP and TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB is
included with ToPs 300.
If your machine is equipped with automation components or has
been configured ex works for a subsequent attachment of
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster, then you must define your machine
configuration in the DATA module after ToPs is installed. See:
the chapter "Automation components, defining machine configuration - Which data must be activated where?"

Procedure
Beginning in the
TECHNOLOGY module

The machine must be selected the first time you select the
TECHNOLOGY module. The machine selection remains
unchanged.

Selecting machine

Fig. 19830

The machine name and the control system name are displayed in
the machine selection mask.
The mask also contains the following information:
"Name", "Type" and "Control system" of the machine
Type of machine: The machine type specifies whether the
machine is a standard type or a variant.
"X format" and "Y format": The amount of working memory is
displayed here.
"Note": The note is for further description of the machine; e.g.
specifications on the working area and the design of the
clamps.

5-22

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Selecting other machines


Information and selection
bar in the mask header

In the TECHNOLOGY module, you can select another machine at


any time.

Click on the left selection window in the mask header where


you see the active machine displayed.
or
click on the "" (arrow) icon.
When changing machines with a sheet loaded, e.g. in the
TECHNOLOGY module, a message with a warning is given
because processing or removal must be transferred to the new
machine.

The "Machine selection" mask is displayed. Select the desired


machine. The existing machine environment is deleted and the
environment of the new machine is displayed. Existing parts or
sheets are kept.

5.
File

New

Select the function FILE, NEW whenever you wish to start a new
sheet.
Define data for the new sheet in the following mask "Specify sheet
data".

S354E51.DOC

Specifying new sheet data

"Material ID": Enter or select the ID number of the material.


Example: St37-20 means structural steel with a material
thickness of 2 mm.
"Dimensions": Enter or select sheet dimensions. The sheet
dimensions are automatically displayed when the material
identity number is selected.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-23

PARAMETER
function button

In the mask of the PARAMETER function button, specify:

Click on indicator window


for material ID

Function button
OK

Whether you want a non-scratch processing operation or not.


Non-scratch processing means: The stripper is positioned
approx. 1 mm higher during processing.
What sheet type does the sheet you are creating have:
"Normal sheet"
"Formed sheet"
"Uneven sheet"
Depending on the sheet type, the punching head moves to
different punching head positions (see: description in the
programming manual for your Maschine).
For the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster: Change parameters.
Do you wish to use the sheet detector?
Should the sheet be stripped?
Output type: direct or time-optimized?
Change speed.
Change acceleration.

Select the material from the indicator window with the symbol ""
(arrow) or just click in the indicator window. This will save you
having to type everything in. The dimensions from the database are
entered in all other entry fields.

Confirm the indications with OK.


Existing screen displays are deleted and the new sheet is displayed
in the specified size. The punching head position is shown as a red
star (symbol) inside the sheet.
(For machines with automation components, the red star means the
loading position at pin no. 0; a red cross is shown at pin no. 1).
This symbol is important for defining the processing operation when
dealing with resetting motions (see: Activating repositioning area.
The sheet is loaded centered by default. The loading position and
the sheet size can be changed later (see: the function FILE,
SETUP SHEET... ).

5-24

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

6.

Loading and storing a file

All loading and storing procedures are done using the data
manager in ToPs (also called file selection mask).

Data manager: Loading and storing files

Fig. 19344

You can load and store the following formats as files:


File format

Function

Meaning

GEO

FILE, LOAD

Load Geometry, i.e. load single part drawing without processing.

MTL

FILE, LOAD

Load drawing of the mini-nest, i.e. load two single part drawings
nested in each other without processing.

TAF

FILE, LOAD

Load drawing of the sheet with nested parts.

GMT

FILE, LOAD

Geometry with technology; i.e. load selected screen contents


(e.g. one or more processed single parts).

FILE, SAVE
SELECTION

Store selected screen contents (e.g. one or more processed


single parts).

FILE, LOAD

Load complete screen contents (sheet with technology; i.e. with


processing).

FILE, SAVE ALL

Store complete screen contents (sheet with processing)

TMT

To be able to select the files with the desired extension, first


activate the appropriate radio button (switch with colour identification). Switch to the directory in which the files were stored.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-25

6.1

Loading files

Files of single parts, mini-nests or nested sheets with and without


processing are displayed with geometry during loading. The cursor
is located at the zero point of the geometry which is loaded.
You can rotate a part by any angle before you place it.

Loading and placing parts

Sheet size,
material

5-26

Fig. 19895E

A mask for entering the sheet size and material opens automatically before files are loaded if you have not already entered this
data. Procedure: see: "Specifying new sheet data", function
FILE, NEW.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Loading single part without processing


File

Single parts without processing are single part drawings which


you have created and stored in the DRAWING module.
The data manager is displayed.

Load

"GEO" radio button

All files with the extension GEO available in the current directory
will be displayed.
You can change the directory by clicking on the * function button
(star symbol) located above the window scroll.

Procedure:

Enter or click on the desired file name.


The file name will be entered into the "File name" indicator
window.
Confirm your choice with OK.
The drawing which was stored under this file name is carried
on the mouse pointer at the zero point of the drawing.
Place the drawing on the screen.

Loading mini-nest without processing


File

Load

"MTL" radio button

A mini nest is a single part nested with itself. A mini nest drawing
is created and stored in the NESTING module.
The data manager is displayed.
All files with the MTL extension available in the current directory
will be displayed.
You can change the directory by clicking on the * function button
(star symbol) located above the window scroll.

Procedure:

S354E51.DOC

Enter or click on the desired file name.


The file name will be entered into the "File name" indicator
window.
Confirm your choice with OK.
The drawing which was stored under this file name is carried
on the mouse pointer at the zero point of the drawing.
Place the drawing on the screen.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-27

Loading sheets with nested parts


File

Load a sheet with nested parts which you created and stored in
the NESTING module.
The data manager is displayed.

Load

"TAF" radio button

All files with the extension TAF available in the current directory will
be displayed.
You can change the directory by clicking on the * function button
(star symbol) located above the window scroll.

Procedure:

Enter or click on the desired file name.


The file name will be entered into the "File name" indicator
window.
Confirm your choice with OK.
A new sheet with the dimensions of the sheet drawing is
created and the nested parts are displayed.

Loading part with processing


File

Load

"GMT" radio button

You can load selected contents of a screen (a single part or


several single parts or mini-nest with processing) if it was stored in
the TECHNOLOGY module and is available in the GMT format.
The data manager is displayed.
All files with the extension GMT available in the current directory will
be displayed.
You can change the directory by clicking on the * function button
(star symbol) located above the window scroll.

Procedure:

Enter or click on the desired file name.


The file name will be entered into the "File name" indicator
window.
Confirm your choice with OK.
The drawing which was stored under this file name is carried on
the mouse pointer at the zero point of the drawing.
Place the drawing on the screen.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

5-28

Loading entire sheets with processing


File

Load

"TMT" radio button

You can load the complete contents of a screen (sheet with


processing) if it was stored in the TECHNOLOGY module and is
available in the GMT format.
The data manager is displayed.
All files with the extension TMT available in the current directory will
be displayed.
You can change the directory by clicking on the * function button
(star symbol) located above the window scroll.

Procedure:

Enter or click on the desired file name.


The file name will be entered into the "File name" indicator
window.
Confirm your choice with OK.
A new sheet with the dimensions of the sheet drawing (with
processing) is created and the sheet layout with processing is
displayed.

6.2

Store file

You have two options in the TECHNOLOGY module:

The function FILE, SAVE SELECTION: to save selected


screen contents
or
The function FILE, SAVE ALL: to save entire screen.

Precondition: The functions FILE, SAVE SELECTION and FILE,


SAVE ALL can only be selected if you have a sheet processing
type active. It is not possible to save a single part in single part
mode.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-29

Save entire screen


Procedure:
File
Save all

Select the function FILE, SAVE ALL.

The data manager of ToPs is displayed.


Accept the default file name or enter a file name. The system
automatically assigns an extension: The "TMT" radio button is
active.
Confirm the selection with OK in the "Data manager" mask.

The contents of the entire screen are stored in a file in TMT


format.
Note: Even parts located outside of the sheet are saved.
You must first delete parts which you do not wish to save.

Storing selected screen contents


Procedure:
File
Store selection

Select the function FILE, SAVE SELECTION.

The data manager of ToPs is displayed.


Accept the default file name or enter a file name. The system
automatically assigns an extension: The "GMT" radio button is
active.
Confirm the entry with OK in the "Data manager" mask.
Identify part or surround several parts in a box.
Confirm your choice with OK in the screen menu.

The marked parts are stored in a file in GMT format.


A group of several single parts can consist of processed
and unprocessed single parts.

5-30

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

7.

Tools

A great number of tools are already integrated in ToPs 300.


The following table show which tools can be used for which
processing type.
Tool

Functions
Automatic Manual punch processing with geometry model:
punch
Individual functions
processing
Create
Start

Single
hole

Next to
On ele- Next to
element/ ment/ on element
next to
contour part.
cont.

Punching

Lin-Lin

Round

Square

Square with
corner radius

Rectangle

Rectangle with
corner radius

Oblong hole

Screw thread
Forming1)

Notching

X
X

X2)

Embossingtool1)

X2)

Bend

Triangle

Slotting

Micro-joint*)
Multicut
Special1)

X
X

X2)

Radius

Marking

Quick forming

X
X

tool

1) Forming, embossing and special tools must consist of a closed contour as a drawing (*.wzg). This drawing is then compared
with the geometry in the single part during processing.
2) These tools are supported by the function NEXT TO ELEMENT/NEXT TO CONTOUR overlaps perfectly at 180.
*) This tool must be treated as a special tool.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-31

Tool

Functions
Manual punch processing without geometry model:
Individual functions
Single
hole

PunPunNibbling
ching up ching up row of
circle
rectanholes
gle

Nibbling
circle of
holes

Round

Square

Square with
corner radius

Rectangle

Rectangle with
corner radius

Oblong hole

Screw thread
Forming1

Embossingtool1)

Bend

Triangle

Slotting

Micro-joint*)
Multicut
Special1)

Radius

Marking

X
X

X
X

1) Forming, embossing and special tools must consist of a closed contour as a drawing (*.wzg). This drawing is then compared
with the geometry in the single part during processing.
*) This tool must be treated as a special tool.

5-32

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

The laser is used as a tool in ToPs 300 and is offered n the form of
laser tables including rules for automatic or manual laser processing.
The following functions are supported with the laser:
Tool

Functions
Automatic Manual laser processing with and without geometry model:
laser
Individual functions
processing
Generate,
Start

Laser

S354E51.DOC

Element Contour

Beyond
element

Cut

TECHNOLOGY module

5-33

7.1

Activating tools

You must first activate or identify a tool when dealing with the
many functions which are used for processing geometries and
contours. This is the case in the single part mode, in contour mode
and in sheet mode.
The following options are available to you:

Activate tool: Main function, symbol and selection menu

Fig. 20089E

Function TOOL in the main menu bar.


A mask with four active index cards is displayed:
"Punching" index card: Depending on the selected tool
type (go to SELECTION in the selection window), all tools
which are available to you in the database will be
displayed.
Via SELECTION, you can determine a tool type and, in
doing so, reduce the number of tools as needed. All tools
for this tool type will then be shown in the indicator window.
To see a display of all the tools, select "All tools" with the
SELECTION function button.

"List" index card: The last tool list selected is offered by


default. In the selection window, you can select the individual tools from the tool list. In the "Tool list" field, you can
select your own tool list at any time.

Index card "Tools already used": Only tools which have


already been used are listed in the indicator window.

"Laser table" index card: In this mask, ToPs offers you the
laser tables which are permitted for the selected material.
Specify the rules after selecting the laser table.

5-34

Symbol (click button) "punch" at the right in the information


and selection bar. Click on the symbol. Identify the tool by
clicking on punch or laser processing or by entering the ID no.
of the tool. Follow the instructions in the command line.
The active tool is indicated at the top of the right selection
window "Active tool".

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Selection window "Active tools" in the information and


selection bar. Click directly in the window or select the arrow.
All used tools will be listed here in an index card. Select the
tool desired.

If you click on a tool data block using the right mouse button,
then the appropriate tool illustration will be blended in for you
in a preview window.

7.2
Machine-independent
tool offering

Punching tools from master data

All the tools in the database are available. However only those
tools which you can actually use with the current machine are
displayed to you. Tapping, slotting, engraving and long tools, for
example, are only displayed if the active machine supports them.
The tools available for the current machine for punching, nibbling
and forming are displayed to you in the "Punching" index card.

"Punching" index card

Punching tools from master data

S354E51.DOC

Fig. 18337

TECHNOLOGY module

5-35

Indicator window for "Selection": It is possible to presort or


reduce the number of tools using the function button with the
"Arrow" symbol or by clicking in the selection window.

Selecting the tool type

Fig. 18628

Select a particular tool type. Only tools of the particular type


sorted according to size are then displayed.
Example: Select the tool type "Oblong hole". Only all oblong
tools now appear in the selection window, with the oblong tool
with the greatest Dim 1 shown first.

Criteria for searching for tools or for reducing the number are
listed at the lower left:

"ID no." and "Comments": The system searches for the


tool according to ID no. or comments text. The percent sign
"%" acts as a placeholder (wildcard).

"Dim 1" and "Dim 2": Enter a number. Only tools whose
dimensions are not greater than the values entered are
found.

Click the desired check button it will be activated. Enter the


data. You start the search according to the defined search
criteria using FIND...

DELETE: The selected data block is deleted from the database


and all tool lists. You must confirm this action.

Quit the mask with QUIT.

5-36

Functions for managing the tools can be selected in the lower


right area. See: Explanation: "Managing tools".

OK confirms the selection and closes the mask.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

7.3

Tools used

Precondition: The index card which specifies the tools already


used can only be selected if you have already defined a processing
operation.
Select the "Tools already used" index card in the mask for the main
function TOOL.
Index card
"Tools already used"

Activating an already used tool

Fig. 18804

In the mask, specify:

S354E51.DOC

"Number of tools used": The number of tools used in the


current processing operation is displayed for your information.
All of the tools used are listed in the scroll window. When a tool
is selected, the data in the indicator field is displayed above the
scroll window.
"ID no.": ID no. of the tool
"MT": Is this tool a Multitool tool? Yes=1, No=0
"Stroke": Number of strokes;
The tools which are marked with * (asterisk) correspond
exactly in dimensions to the geometry to be processed
during automatic punch processing (single hole or punch
up).
"Punching head position": Active punching head position
for the tool.
"Softp": Is Softpunch activated or not? If yes, which level?
"Angle": Angle at which the tool is used.
"Note": Text with additional information on tool.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-37

"Display Multitool" check button: If Multitool tools are used


during processing, by default only those punches which are
actually used are listed. If you wish to display all of the tool
punches from a Multitool, activate this check box.
This makes it possible to also activate a Multitool which has
not yet been used.
The system recognizes whether a tool from a Multitool has
been used. If this is the case, all tools from the Multitool are
displayed in the list. Example: Only one tool which appears in
the list has so far been used from a quadruple Multitool. With
this function, all tools from the Multitool are displayed
temporarily in the list.
Application: Selecting tools from an already used Multitool to
reduce tool changing.
Note: Multicut tools are managed as Multitool tools.

REDUCE function button: Reducing the number of tools used.


In the two-section follow-up mask, click on the tool you wish to
remove in the upper scroll window. This tool is deleted in the
upper scroll window and automatically entered in the lower
scroll window. The number of tools used is thereby reduced to
one.

Reducing the number of tools used

Fig. 18806

5-38

PRINT function button: The list of tools is printed.


PARAMETER function button: The parameters for the selected
tool is displayed.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Display tool parameters

Fig. 18805

The selected tool and the parameters defined for it are displayed:
Softpunch: On or off?
Step 1 is quiet; step 4 is loud.

Tool change type (sheet type): Normal sheet, uneven sheet,


formed sheet?

Punching head position: Normal working position, forming


position, fast forming position, variable forming position?
Holding down force

Select the appropriate button to change other parameter settings.


You must confirm the modifications with OK.
The changed parameters do not become active until the first time
the tool is inserted.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-39

7.4

Tool lists

There are two types of tool lists in ToPs.

Superior tool list

Individual tool lists

This ist forms the basis (master


data).

These list contain some of the


tools of the superior tool lists.

The tool management system


always accesses this list.

These lists can for example be


addressed by selecting
automatic processing.

Application examples: You program with a different range of


tools for different machines.
Create an individual tool list for
each machine.

An individual tool list with the name "TRUMPF" is included


when ToPs 300 is delivered. The system uses this individual
list when processing is defined automatically (function
PUNCH
PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC,
GENERATE,
START).

The tool list "TRUMPF" contains the following tools:


ID no.

Comment

Dim. 1

Dim. 2

WT

LW

MT

min.

max.

03100000

Square 10

10.0

0.0

0.5

8.0

04762050

Rectangle 76.2x5

76.2

5.0

0.5

5.0

04370050

Rectangle 37x5

37.0

5.0

0.5

5.0

04150030

Rectangle 15x3

15.0

3.0

0.5

4.0

You can expand the TRUMPF tool list as desired or add new
individual tool lists (see: "Managing tool lists").

5-40

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Calling up tool list


You can select tools from the TRUMPF list and from other selfdefined tool lists using the LIST index card.
The index card has the following structure:
"List" index card

Activating tool using LIST index card

Fig. 18629

"Selection": Presort and/or reduce the number of tools in the


selected list by selecting a certain tool type.

The four search criteria are also available here:


"ID no.", "Comments", "Dim 1", "Dim 2".
Start the search with SEARCH...

S354E51.DOC

"Tool list": Select individual tool list: Select the function button
with the arrow symbol and click in the indicator window. A
mask opens which contains the names of all individual tool
lists. Select the desired list.

MANAGE LISTS function button: You can create, change and


delete in the two-section mask (see: "Managing tool lists").

TECHNOLOGY module

5-41

Managing tool lists


Managing tool lists means creating, changing and deleting lists.
You will be supported by masks when modifying tool lists. They are
shown if you select the functions TOOL, index card "List" and the
MANAGE LISTS function button.

MANAGE LISTS
function button

Defining tool list

Fig. 19904

The tool display is divided. All available tools are shown in the
upper half (master data), and the tools for the individual tool list are
entered in the lower half.

5-42

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Create new tool list


Precondition: You can only add tools to the individual tool list which
are contained in the superior tool list (master data).

NEW function button: Create new individual tool list. Enter the
new name of the tool list in the mask and confirm the indication
with OK.

NEW function button

"Tool list" display field: Select individual tool list.


Select the function button with the "" (arrow) symbol or click
directly on the display field. A mask opens which contains the
names of all individual tool lists. Select the desired list. The
name of the list is entered in the display field.

Add tool to the individual tool list:


Select the tool in the upper list. The tool is transferred automatically to the lower list. Select a tool again until you have
added all the desired tools to the new tool list.
Make sure that you add all punches of a Multitool when you
add Multitool tools to an individual list.

Adding to existing tool lists


You can add new tools to an existing tool list at any time.

Procedure:
Call up the desired tool list in the mask for MANAGE LIST in
the lower section of the mask.
All tools from the superior tool list are offered in the upper
section of the mask.
Click in the upper section of the mask on the tool you wish to
add to the individual tool list.
The selected tool is entered in the lower window.
BACK confirms the changes and returns you to the previous
mask.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-43

Delete tool from tool list


Function button
REMOVE

Delete tool from the individual tool list:


Select the REMOVE function button in the lower section of the
mask after you have identified the tool in the tool list.

Delete entire tool list


Function button
DELETE

Delete entire individual tool list:

Precondition: The name of the tool list is entered in the entry field.
Click on the DELETE function button. The tool list is deleted with
all tools.

5-44

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

7.5

Manage tools

Managing a tools means entering (creating), changing and deleting


tool data. It also includes simply viewing tool information.
We recommend comparing the included tool data with the
data of your existing tools before generating an NC program
on the machine. Are all tools which are available to you at
the machine also in the ToPs 300 database? This is the
case, for example, if you have special tools or special
forming tools, or if you use tools with special dimensions for
processing. Check the data blocks. If deviations are present,
enter the new data expand the database with your special
tooling information. Only in this way can ToPs provide you
with an exact NC program which you can then process
trouble-free on the machine.

Index card "Punching"

In the "Punching" index cards, function buttons are available to you


which support tool management.

CREATE: Enter data for a new tool. You can create as a new
tool: standard tool, Multitool, tapping tool.

PRINT: print data block for selected tool.

MODIFY: Modify existing data for selected tool.

S354E51.DOC

FULL INFORM.: View data block for selected tool. Data cannot
be modified in this mask.

DELETE: delete the selected data block and in doing so, the
tool from the database.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-45

Overview: Which dimensions must be


entered for which tool?

Tool type

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

Round

Diameter

Rectangle with
corner radius

Length

Corner width

Square

Length

Rectangle

Length

Width

Diameter

Core hole
diameter

5
Tapping
> see Creating tapping
tool

Radius

Square with corner Length


radius

Radius

Oblong hole

Length

Width

Special
2)
tool

Length

Width

10

Center punch

Diameter

11

Laser (ToPs 250)

13

Forming
2)
tool

Length

Width
(standard)

Penetration
5)
depth

=0 normalforming
+53)
height
>0 variable
6)
forming height

14

Embossing
2)
tool

Length

Width
(standard)

Penetration
5)
depth

15

Arc

Radius

Length

Web width

Center point

16

Radius

Radius

Web width

4)

2) The dimensions of the tool are determined by the drawing of the tool in ToPs. You do not have to enter tool dimensions.
An exact drawing of the tool geometry must be present.
3) A forming height is not permissible for Multitool tools (message).
4) For the arc tool, a differentiation is made between arc tool type 1 and type 2 depending on dimension A2, see: Technical
information on the arc tool.
5) Only for machines with BOSCH CC300 and CC220 control systems. For machines with SINUMERIK 840D or BOSCH
type 3 control, the setting must be entered directly on the control system.
6) The value must be between the minimum and maximum values which are stored in DATA module in the for MACHINES,
DATA, BASIC MACHINE, DATA 3.

5-46

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Tool type

A1

A2

A3

17

Triangle

Angle

Length x

Length y

18

Slotting
tool

Length

Width

20

Marking
tool

Diameter

21

Multicut
tool

Radius R1-R4

Tool reference
offset

19

Quick forming

Length

Width

A4

Penetration depth

A5

Forming
5)
position

For tool administration, please observe the details (length,


width, radius, twisting angle) in the informational booklet
which is included in the tool delivery.

5) Only for machines with BOSCH CC300 and CC220 control systems. For machines with SINUMERIK 840D or BOSCH
type 3 control, the setting must be entered directly on the control system.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-47

Creating standard tool


Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

"Punching" index card:


CREATE function

Steps:
Precondition: The TECHNOLOGY module must be selected.

Select the function TOOL in the main menu.

Select CREATE function button in the "Punching" index card.


Click on "Standard" tool type.
Select the CONTINUE function button at the bottom of the
mask. The following can be selected: Standard tools such as
round, rectangle, oblong hole, center punch, slotting,
engraving, forming tools.
Select the tool desired.

The next mask "Create standard tool" will be displayed.


Specify in the left part of the mask:

"Type": The previously selected tool type is displayed in this


display field.

Entry fields for tool dimensions are located underneath:


"Dimensions" using function button "...".
The system suggests a tool drawing. You can modify this
proposal at any time. Select the switch with the "arrow" symbol
and click on the desired illustration in the selection mask (files
with WZG format).
A1 to A5: You can enter the dimension data or call it up with
the "..." function button. You will find the tool parameter defined
exactly here.
Double clicking opens the calculator so you can make
calculations yourself.

"auto. proposal": Specify the ID number and comment text


automatically.
ID number structure
Every tool is entered into the database with a unique identity
number. The ID number is structured in accordance with the
following principle:

5-48

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Format of the ID number for standard tools:


12345678
12

Tool type (with preceding zeros)

345

Dimension A1 (in 1/10 mm)

678

Dimension A2 (in 1/10 mm)

Example: ID number of the rectangular tool 76.2x5 reads


0476050.
Format of the ID number for Multitool tools:
01999xyz
01999

ID for Multitool

ID for the kind of Multitool (2, 3, 4 or 6-tuple)*)

yz

Consecutive punch number of the Multitool

Example: the identity number for the first punch of a 4-station


Multitool reads 01999401.
An identity number defined in this way can be applied as a
useful search criteria for tool selection. Example: Show all
rectangular tools with a 20 mm edge length. Entry: 04200%.

"Whispertool": Does the tool have a slanted cutting edge or


not?

*)

CALCULATE: The system suggests an ID no. depending on


the tool type and the first two dimensions. You can modify the
proposal for the remark text at any time. The ID number has a
certain coded content and is created in dependence of the
present identity numbers in the database. You should accept
the suggestion for this reason.
Deactivate the check button if an automatic proposal is not
desired. The function button is disabled at the same time. This
block then applies to every mask in the tool management
system. Manual modification of the proposals is possible at any
time.

"Material thickness": Enter minimum and maximum sheet


thickness [in mm].

12-station Multitool tool (embossing punch) has the identity number 14999000 in ToPs. Specify an identity number which
can be used in your administration for other 12-station Multitool tools.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-49

At the right side of the mask you determine:

"Magazine station": Which magazine station is occupied by the


tool? This information is not evaluated by the system.

"Long tool" (e.g. for the TC 2000R): Does the tool have a long
punch?

"Block": Should this punching tool be disabled for processing


definition?

NEXT: Do you want to enter data for another standard tool?


Select this function button at the bottom of the mask: The
specified data for the defined tool is written into the database,
the mask stays open, however, for one more tool. The process
restarts with the selection of the tool type. The data for material
thickness remain the same, so that you can successively enter
more tools for the same sheet thickness.

5-50

"Installation position": In which installation position is the tool


used, specified in degrees.

CLOSE: Has you finished your tool definition?


By pressing CLOSE, the data is transferred to the database.
Click function button with the left mouse button: You have
to confirm the data transfer once again.
Click function button with the right mouse button: The data
is written into the database immediately without further
confirmation.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Create Multitool tool


Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

"Punching" index card:


CREATE function

Steps:
Precondition: The TECHNOLOGY module must be selected.

Select the function TOOL in the main menu.

Select CREATE function button in the "Punching" index card.


Click on "Multitool" tool type.
Select CONTINUE at mask bottom. Click on the Multitool type
and identify the tool type for the first tool punch. Confirm your
selection with OK.
Click on the tool type.

The next mask "Create Multitool" will be displayed.


Specify the data needed for the first punch.

"Type": In this pull-down menu, the selected tool type is specified firstly, and secondly you can modify the tool type via the
"arrow" button. The selection mask will be displayed with tool
types.

Below are the entry fields with the tool dimensions:


"Dimensions" using function button "...".
The system suggests a tool drawing. You can modify this
proposal at any time. Select the switch with the "arrow" symbol
and click on the desired illustration in the selection mask (files
with WZG format).
A1 to A5: You can enter the dimension data or call it up with
the "..." function button. You will find the tool parameters
described exactly here.
Double clicking opens the calculator so you can make
calculations yourself.

"auto. proposal": Specify the ID number and comment text


automatically. ID no. composition see: "Creating standard
tool".

CALCULATE: The system generates a proposal for the identity


number and remark text depending on the defined Multitool
type, the punch number, the tool type and the first two
dimensions.
The proposal for the remark text is generated anew with every
punch, the ID number, however, is only created once during
the first punch. It then remains unchanged, so that all other
punches of the Multitool tool have the same ID no.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-51

Deactivate the check button if an automatic proposal is not


desired. The function button is disabled at the same time. This
block then applies to every mask in the tool management
system.

"Whispertool": Does the tool have a slanted cutting edge or


not?

"Material thickness": Enter the minimum and maximum sheet


thickness [in mm].

At the right side of the mask, specify:

"Magazine station": Which magazine station is occupied by the


tool? This information is not evaluated by the system.

"Multitool type": You can find the selected Multitool type


displayed here.

"Punch number": The number of the punch which you are


currently defining will be displayed.

"Long tool": is not active.

"Block": Should this punching tool be disabled for processing


definitions?

The punches which have already been defined are shown in


the window situated underneath: Punch number, remark text,
dim. 1 and dim. 2. A punch can be clicked on from this list and,
in doing so, processing operations can be defined.

CONTINUE: Determine data for the following Multitool


punches.
Determine firstly the tool type for the next punch again, the
material thickness will be accepted.
As soon as you have defined the last punch this function
button will be deactivated.

5-52

"Installation position": In which installation position is the tool


used, specified in degrees.

NEXT: This function button is only active when you have


created the entire Multitool tool set.
Do you want to enter data for another Multitool tool?
Select this function button at the bottom of the mask: The
specified data for the defined tool is written into the database,
the mask stays open, however, for one more Multitool tool. The
process restarts with the selection of the Multitool type and the
tool type. The data for material thickness remain the same, so
that you can successively enter more tools for the same sheet
thickness.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

CLOSE: Has you finished your tool definition?


By pressing CLOSE, the data is transferred to the database.
Click function button with the left mouse button: You have
to confirm the data transfer once again.
Click function button with the right mouse button: The data
is written into the database immediately without further
confirmation.
A Multitool tool must always be defined completely. If
punches are missing when the CLOSE function button is
selected, the Multitool is deleted. A message appears which
enables you to cancel this procedure. You can then continue
the tool definitions properly.

Create tapping tool


Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

"Punching" index card:


CREATE function

Steps:
Precondition: The TECHNOLOGY module must be selected.

Select the function TOOL in the main menu.

Select CREATE function button in the "Punching" index card.


Click on "Tapping tool" tool type.

The next mask "Create thread forming tool" will be displayed:


At the left side of the mask you determine:

S354E51.DOC

"Type": The selected tool type is displayed in this display field.


Below are the entry fields with the tool dimensions: "Dimensions" using function button "...".
The system suggests a tool drawing.
A1 to A5: You can enter the dimension data or call it up with
the "..." function button. You will find the tool parameter defined
exactly here.
Double clicking opens the calculator so you can make calculations yourself.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-53

"auto. proposal": Determine the ID number and comment text


automatically or enter it. ID no. composition see: "Creating
standard tool".

CALCULATE: the system generates a proposal for the identity


number and remark text depending on the first two dimensions.
You can modify the proposal for the remark text at any time.
The ID number has a certain coded content and is created in
dependence of the present identity numbers in the database.
You should accept the suggestion for this reason.
Deactivate the check button if an automatic proposal is not
desired. The function button is disabled at the same time. This
block then applies to every mask in the tool management
system.

"Material thickness": Enter minimum and maximum sheet


thickness [in mm].

Specify in the right side of the mask:

"Thread type": Rotation direction of thread. Does this thread


forming tool create a right-handed or a left-handed thread?

"Magazine station": Which magazine station is occupied by the


tool? This information is not evaluated by the system.

"Ratio": What ratio does the tapping tool have?

"Pitch": What pitch does the thread forming tool have?

"Block": Should this punching tool be disabled for processing


definition?

NEXT: Do you want to enter data for another tapping tool?


Select this function button at the mask bottom: The specified
data for the defined tool is written into the database, the mask
stays open, however, for one more tool. The data for material
thickness remains the same, so that you can successively
enter several tapping tools for the same sheet thickness.

5-54

"Thread type": Design of thread; fine-pitch, standard or


special?

CLOSE: Has you finished your tool definition?


By pressing CLOSE, the data is transferred to the database.
Click function button with the left mouse button: You have
to confirm the data transfer once again.
Click function button with the right mouse button: The data
is written into the database immediately without further
confirmation.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Create Multicut tool


Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

"Punching" index card:


CREATE function

Steps:
Precondition: The TECHNOLOGY module must be selected.

Select the function TOOL in the main menu.

Select CREATE function button in the "Punching" index card.


Click on "Multicut" tool type.
Select the CONTINUE function button at the bottom of the
mask.

The next mask "Create Multicut" will be displayed.


Specify:

"auto. proposal": Specify the ID number and comment text


automatically. ID no. composition see: "Creating standard
tool".

CALCULATE: The system suggests an ID no. and remark text


depending on the defined tool type and the entries. You can
modify the proposal for the remark text at any time. The ID
number has a certain coded content and is created in
dependence of the present identity numbers in the database.
You should accept the suggestion for this reason.
Deactivate the check button if an automatic proposal is not
desired. The function button is disabled at the same time. This
block then applies to every mask in the tool management
system. Manual modification of the proposals is possible at any
time.

Below are entry fields for radius and offset entries and an entry
fir an informational text as a remark text. Double clicking in a
display field for numerical values displays the calculator.

"Material thickness": Enter the minimum and maximum sheet


thickness [in mm].

"Installation position": In which installation position is the tool


used, specified in degrees.

S354E51.DOC

"Type": The tool type you selected is displayed in this display


field.

"Magazine station": Which magazine station is occupied by the


tool? This information is not evaluated by the system.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-55

"Block": Should this punching tool be disabled for processing


definition?

NEXT: Do you want to enter data for another Multicut tool?


Select this function button at the bottom of the mask: The
specified data for the defined tool is written into the database,
the mask stays open, however, for one more tool. The process
restarts with the selection of the tool type. The data for material
thickness remain the same, so that you can successively enter
more tools for the same sheet thickness.

5-56

"Long tool": Does the tool have a long punch?

CLOSE: Has you finished your tool definition?


By pressing CLOSE, the data is transferred to the database.
Click function button with the left mouse button: You have
to confirm the data transfer once again.
Click function button with the right mouse button: The data
is written into the database immediately without further
confirmation.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Deleting the data block for a tool


Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

"Punching" index card:


DELETE function

Steps:
Precondition: The TECHNOLOGY module must be selected.

Select the function TOOL in the main menu.

Select the tool (data block) which you wish to delete from the
master data (= superior tool list) and the list (individual tool
list) in the "Punching" index card.
Click the DELETE function button.
Confirm the response from the system:
YES: The tool is deleted from the master record and the
(individual) lists.
NO: The procedure is aborted. You return to the "Punching"
index card.

Changing the data for a tool


Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

"Punching" index card:


MODIFY function

Steps:
Precondition: The TECHNOLOGY module must be selected.

Select the function TOOL in the main menu.

S354E51.DOC

Select the tool (data block) whose data you wish to change in
the "Punching" index card.
Click the MODIFY function button.
The mask with the entire data block for the selected tool is
displayed.
Carry out the desired changes.
Confirm your selection by pressing the CLOSE function
button. At the same time, you leave the mask and return to
the "Punching" index card.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-57

8.
Module
DATA

The laser tables in ToPs contain the application parameters (data)


which optimize laser processing. The database contains the
application parameters for processing:

Laser

Laser tables

mild steel (St37)


special steel (1.4301) and
aluminium alloys (ALMg3, AlMgSi1)

The application parameters have been determined and released


for the corresponding machines by our process development
department.

You will also find these application parameters in the Data


collection for your machine.

5-58

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

8.1

Structure of laser tables

A laser table in ToPs contains all technology data for the


processing of a material type and sheet thickness.
It corresponds to a data block in the database and is composed as
follows:

The data for the processing operation is determined depending on


the

machine
table no.
laser power
gas pressure
lens focal length
material
material thickness

One or more sets of rules are also assigned.

DATA module: Function LASER, PIERCING


DATA module: Function LASER, GENERAL CUTTING
DATA module: Function LASER, CONTOUR CUTTING
DATA module: Function LASER, VAPORIZE
DATA module: Funktion LASER, MARKING
DATA module: Function LASER, POINT MARKING
DATA module: Function LASER, MICROWELD
DATA module: Function LASER, COMMENTARY

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-59

8.2

Laser table numbers

The numbers in the laser tables are consecutive, 4-digit numbers.


Number range of TRUMPF

The number range from 1000 - 4999 is reserved for the laser tables
created by TRUMPF.

Your number range

The number range from 5000 - 9999 is reserved for the laser tables
you create.

Important: The numbers of the laser tables created by TRUMPF


are rewritten each time the software is updated. For this reason,
you should not change the tables. If you wish to change a table,
assign a new table number from the number range available to
you (5000 - 9999). This is the only way to ensure that your table is
not overwritten when the software is updated. Recommended
procedure: Copy an existing laser table. Change the number and
the values which must be changed (managing laser tables see:
DATA module).

Data collection

In the data collection you received with your machine, the laser
tables are stored under the same number as in the database.

Updating the data collection

The data collections are updated by TRUMPF at regular intervals.


The data collection contains a summary of the table numbers in
which data has been changed and information on the improvements expected from the change. You have the option of deciding
whether to accept our recommendations and change and expand
your present database.

5-60

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

8.3
Programming

Laser table: Programming and NC text

A laser table (and one of the assigned rules) is selected in ToPs for
defining the processing with the laser.
The parameters for the particular processing operation are read in
from these laser tables on the BOSCH or SINUMERIK control
systems of the machines.
Precondition: The laser tables mustbe available to the control
systems.

SINUMERIK control system


Laser table and NC text

The technology table is called up as a cycle parameter in the laser


cycle TC_LASER_ON.
So the question is: How is the data from the laser tables
transferred to the SINUMERIK control systems?
The TC_LASER_ON cycle contains the following cycle parameter:

processing method,
"Table",
piercing type,
cutting type.

TC_LASER_ON (processing method, "Table", piecing type, cutting type)


Example: TC_LASER_ON (5,"2000",0,100)

For a description of the individual parameters, please refer


to the programming instructions for your machine.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-61

Cycle parameter processing


methods

Particular functions are assigned to defined processing methods:


processing
methods

Function

Piercing and cutting with distance control


system

Piercing and cutting without distance control


system

Piercing without distance control system,


cutting with distance control system

Piercing with distance control system, cutting


without distance control system

Cutting with distance control system

Cutting without distance control system

Cutting with distance control system, beam


OFF

Cutting without distance control system, beam


OFF

241

Cutting with "On-the-fly data exchange";


distance control ON

242

Cutting with "On-the-fly data exchange";


distance control OFF

Cycle parameter:
Table

The appropriate laser-technology table is selected by entering the


4-digit table number.

Cycle parameter:
Piercing type

Data is selected from the active laser technology table via the
piercing type.
Several piercing types are stored in the table:
Number
10

Normal piercing

11

Gentle piercing

20

Cycle parameter:
Cutting type

Function

Point marking (spot shaped)

Data is selected from the active laser technology table via the
cutting type. Cutting data (e.g. laser power, cutting and approach
parameters) is stored in the laser table.
A distinction is made between:
small, medium and large contours
normal and reduced cutting speeds
normal and reduced acceleration values

5-62

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

The cutting type is selected with a 3-digit number:


3

1 Large contour

0 normal

0 normal

2 Medium contour

1 reduced

1 reduced

3 Small contour

The following cutting types are available:


Number
100

Cutting large contours with normal acceleration

101

Cutting large contours with reduced acceleration

110

Cutting of large contour with reduced approach


and normal acceleration

111

Cutting of large contour with reduced approach


and reduced acceleration

200

Cutting medium contours with normal acceleration

201

Cutting medium contours with reduced


acceleration

210

Cutting of medium contour with reduced approach


and normal acceleration

211

Cutting of medium contour with reduced approach


and reduced acceleration

300

Cutting small contours with normal acceleration

301

Cutting small contours with reduced acceleration

310

Cutting of small contour with reduced approach


and normal acceleration

311

Cutting small contours with reduced approach

400

Vaporization special processing

500

Marking special processing

600

S354E51.DOC

Function

Special processing for centre marking geometry

TECHNOLOGY module

5-63

BOSCH control system


Initial position

In ToPs, the parameters for laser processing are taken from the
laser tables. In BOSCH control systems, the parameters for laser
processing are read in from the technology tables.
So the question is: How is the data from the laser tables transferred to the technology tables?

Scope of information
in the tables

A laser table contains substantially more information than a


technology table. The result of this large information capacity: A
laser table contains several technology tables (control). Example:
Laser table
Key parameters: Table no., machine, laser power (watt),
gas pressure, lens focal length, material, material thickness
Piercing type

Cutting type

Contour size

normal

normal

large

soft

reduced

small

Piercing: normal, cutting type: normal,


Contour size: small
Table no., machine, laser power (watt),
title, lens focal length, material, material thickness
Technology table

Basic rule

General rule: The data which is actually required is selected by


specifying the cutting type, piercing type and contour size.

Number of the
technology table

The number of the technology table is composed according to the


following scheme:
Number of the laser table + code number
4711xyz

5-64

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Structure of the code number


x:

Piercing type

0 = normal
1 = soft

y:

Cutting type

0 = normal
1 = reduced

z:

Contour size

0 = large
1 = small

Example:
Number of the laser table: 4711
Piercing type

Cutting type

Contour size

normal

soft

normal

reduced

large

small

Number of the technology table: 4711001


The code number 001 therefore means: normal piercing, normal
cutting, small contour.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-65

Technology table for the processing types:


Center marking, marking and vaporization
Center marking

Technology tables which contain data for centre marking are


formed according to a fixed scheme. These technology tables
always have the code number 440 regardless of the selected
piercing type, cutting type and contour size.
Schematic overview:
Number of the laser table + 440
4711440

Marking

Technology tables which contain data for marking are formed


according to a fixed scheme. These technology tables always have
the code number 030 regardless of the selected piercing type,
cutting type and contour size. Schematic overview:
Number of the laser table + 030
4711030

Vaporization

Technology tables which contain data for vaporization are formed


according to a fixed scheme. These technology tables always have
the code number 020 regardless of the selected piercing type,
cutting type and contour size. Schematic overview:
Number of the laser table + 020
4711020

5-66

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

9.

Rule group

A rule group is a collection of rules according to which decision


processes are to be carried out. A rule group is also integrated in
ToPs which contains all the information for determining the laser
processing operation. The information of this rule group is stored in
the database. Interpretation is done with the specified rules of the
part geometry and the processing operation is assigned in the
TECHNOLOGY module.
By means of the rules specified in the rule group, ToPs recognises
which type of contour is being used, the corner to start at, where to
create a looping and much more.

Stored Information
DATA
module

Rule group

S354E51.DOC

Rule groups from TRUMPF are already stored in the database.


They are valid for the processing of

mild steel (St37),


special steel (1.4301) and
aluminum alloys (AlMg3, AlMgSi1).

TECHNOLOGY module

5-67

9.1

Structure of rule group data

The data block of a rule group is determined according to the


following scheme:

Processing strategies are specified depending on the

rule group name (number)


material
material thickness
machine
gas pressure.

General conditions: General specifications


Small/medium/large contour
Vaporization
Piercing
Cutting
Rounding
Looping
Positioning
Approaching

5-68

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

9.2

Rule group name

The name of the rule group can consist of various characters:


letters, numerals or a combination of both. Maximum length of the
name: 12 characters.
Your rule groups

The first character of you rule group name must be a "K".


Examples:

Rule groups from TRUMPF

The rule groups which we have already stored in the database are
characterized by the fact that their first character is not a "K".
Examples:

K4711
KPR1
K0001

60371
60372
60373
...
60704

Important: The rule groups created by TRUMPF are rewritten


each time the software is updated. For this reason, you should not
change these rule groups. If you wish to change a rule group,
assign a name which starts with "K". This is the only way to
ensure that your rule group is not overwritten when the software is
updated. Recommended procedure: Copy an existing rule group.
Change the number and the values which must be changed.
The names of our rule groups, which are already contained in the
database, are formed according to the following scheme:
Four characters + code number
5001x
The code number indicates which general conditions apply to this
rule group.
The general conditions are summarized in a mask (see: DATA
module: Determining rule group data, Masks) with commentary
under a key word.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-69

Code numbers and


key words

The code number facilitates selection of a rule group. The code


number has the following meanings:
Code
number

Meaning

Round (corners are rounded)

Looping (corners become sharp)

No round/no looping (corners are ground down)

Film/round (sheet is covered with film, corners are


rounded)

Example: The rule group with the name 60373 creates neither
loops nor roundings.

5-70

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

10.

Generate processing operation

In ToPs we speak generally of processing operations, when we


mean either punch or laser processing.
When defining processing operations using the functions of the onscreen menu, one must distinguish between:

The functions PUNCH PROCESSING, MANUAL:


Manual punch processing with tools (punch, nibble and forming
tools).

The functions LASER PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC:


Automatic laser processing with the laser as a tool.

Sheet processing or
Single part processing

The functions PUNCH PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC:


Automatic punch processing with tools (punch, nibble and
forming tools).

The functions LASER PROCESSING, MANUAL:


Manual laser processing with the laser as a tool.

Punch and laser processing can be defined both in the single part
(single part mode) and on the sheet (sheet mode).
You select the processing mode by selecting the function in the
main menu bar, regardless of whether you define the processing
operation for single part or sheet.
Function SINGLE PART

Function TRANSFER
SINGLE PART TO SHEET

Change to single part


processing

Change to sheet processing


(sheet mode)

(Single part mode)

It is always possible to switch between single part and sheet


modes. Processing operations which were defined in the single
part must be transferred to the sheet.
The on-screen menus for processing on the sheet and in the single
part are for the most part the same. The processing functions for
punch an on-screen processing are started in the on-screen menu.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-71

Overview of procedure
Requirements:
The requirements for defining or changing a processing operation
are:
Geometry as a reference quantity, such as
single part drawing
drawing of a mininest
drawing of a sheet with nested parts
single part or mini-nest with processing
sheet with processing
Geometries without reference sizes: processing operations are
placed freely on the part or the sheet. No geometry is available
as a reference quantity for processing definition.
The procedure for defining processing with removal is always
basically the same regardless of whether you are defining the
operations in the single part or on the sheet.
TECHNOLOGY
module

File
Load

Start the TECHNOLOGY module. Confirm machine or select a


new machine.
Using the function FILE, LOAD:

Select processing mode


Single part

Load parts without processing (format: GEO), or mini nests


(format: MTL) and specify sheet data.
or
Load sheet without processing (format: TAF).
or
Load parts with processing (format: GMT).
or
Load sheet with processing (format: TMT).

Decide whether to carry out processing in single part or sheet


mode:

Single part processing (mode): Select the function SINGLE


PART in the main menu.
After you have loaded several single parts or a sheet, click on
the single part drawing whose processing you would like to
define. This step does not apply if only one single part
drawing is loaded.
In single part mode, you have the option of seeing a contour
view: Function CONTOUR (see: Single part processing with
contour view).
processing operations which were defined in the single part
must be transferred to the sheet: Select the function
TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET.

5-72

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Processing

Defining the
processing operation

Sheet processing (mode): Select the function Processing in


the main menu. The functions for sheet processing (menu)
are displayed.

First specify the processing technology (punch or laser


processing) and the processing type (automatic or manual).
Select the appropriate control function to define the processing
operation.

Punch processing

The processing options:

PUNCH PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC, control functions

Fig. 20090

PUNCH PROCESSING, MANUAL, control functions

Fig. 20091

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-73

Laser processing

LASER PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC, control functions

Fig. 20092

LASER PROCESSING, MANUAL, control functions

Fig. 20093

The individual menu functions will appear depending on the control


functions.

5-74

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Defining single part processing


Single part

Single part processing can only be carried out in single part mode:
Select the SINGLE PART function.

Precondition: Single part or sheet is loaded.


After you have loaded several single parts or a sheet, click on the
single part drawing whose processing you would like to define.
This step does not apply if only one single part drawing is loaded.
The mask appears as follows:

Single part processing in single part mode

Define processing in
single part mode.

Fig. 19896

The single part is shown filling the entire screen.


The following functions are offered in the main menu bar.
The screen menu for single part processing will be displayed. For
a description of the functions in the menu, see: "Automatically
generating punch processing".

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-75

Transferring single part processing to the


sheet

Function
TRANSFER
SINGLE PART
TO SHEET

You can transfer the processing operation of the single part to the
sheet.
When you have finished single part processing, select the function
TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET.

Transferring single part processing to the sheet

"General" index card

Choose from the general options in the next mask:

5-76

Fig. 20094

TECHNOLOGY module

Which parts should the processing definition be transferred to?


To all parts of the sheet or
the parts which you select interactively.
Should the angular position of the parts on the sheet be taken
into account?
Active check button: changes are only made to parts with the
same angular position.
Check button not activated: Angular position of the parts is not
taken into account.

S354E51.DOC

"MFN" index card

The "MFN" (multi-copy processing) index card is only active if a


sheet with several multi-copy processing areas is available.
Specify which parts are to be updated in "Update multi-copy processing":

all parts in the multi-copy


parts in the uneven rows
parts in the even rows.

The update applies to the multi-copy processing from which you


have identified the single part.

OK function:

S354E51.DOC

Confirm the specification with OK.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-77

Processing with contour view


You can carry out processing of individual contours in single part
mode.
At the same time you can decide if you wish to transfer the
specified contour processing to other similar geometries (copies) in
the individual part. Contours, texts and points are seen as
geometries.

Application: You can test the processing on the geometry as a


sample and transfer it to other similar geometries.
Procedure:
Functions
Single part

Steps:

Change to single part mode.

Single part mode

Contour

5-78

TECHNOLOGY module

Fig. 18824

Select the CONTOUR function. You see a mask with check


boxes in which you can make certain settings.
"Angular position": Should the angular position be taken
into account for geometries with the same form (and the
same size)? If yes, check the box. Oblong holes with the
same angular position belong to a pattern group. If there
are other oblong hole contours at another angle, they are
treated as a separate pattern group.
If not, all oblong holes are grouped in one pattern group,
regardless of their angular position. Each pattern group
represents one pattern.

S354E51.DOC

OK function

"Fill screen": Should the pattern be displayed filling the


entire screen?
"Consider individual holes": Should processed individual
holes be taken into account or not? In the mask above, that
would be the large square at an angle of 45.
"Autocut suggestion": A processing suggestion for each
pattern is made via the definition of the automatic
processing operation during viewing. The parameters and
the tool settings which are defined in the automatic
processing are used.

Confirm the mask with OK. The viewing of the geometry begins
with a geometry within the single part.
The individual geometries are referred to as a pattern and are
numbered. Also follow the instructions in the message line.
Example: Single part in shown masks
You see the following indications in the message line:
"Pattern no. 3/12": Contour pattern 3 of a total of 12 contour
patterns.
"Copies: 4": There are 4 more contours of this type in the
single part, i.e. oblong holes with the same angular position
(because "Consider angular position" is activated)
"Oblong hole: l=10.00, b=5.00, r=2.50": The contour is an
oblong hole with these specifications for length l, width b
and radius r in [mm].

A random representative from a contour group is selected as


"pattern" and marked with the color magenta. Example: There are
4 oblong holes with the same angular position in the single part.
One oblong hole is displayed in magenta and counts as the pattern.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-79

Full-screen contour mode

Next contour

Select next contour: Click the NEXT CONTOUR function.


If there are several copies of the depicted contour a mask now
appears in which you must confirm whether the processing of
the pattern contour is to be transferred to the remaining
"copies" in the single part.

Transfer the processing of the pattern contour to the copies or not?

5-80

TECHNOLOGY module

Fig. 18826

Fig. 18827

S354E51.DOC

Confirm mask

Confirm the mask with YES or NO.

YES: The geometry processing is transferred to the existing


copies.
NO: The geometry processing is not transferred

The system jumps to the next geometry pattern and displays it.
In this way, you can view the geometries within a single part on
after the other. The function buttons are located in the main menu
bar:
Previous
contour
Next contour

PREVIOUS CONTOUR: The system jumps back to the


previous contour.

NEXT CONTOUR: The system jumps to the pattern within


single part.

View previous or next contour

Fig. 18829E

The system informs you as soon as you reach the first or last
pattern.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-81

Defining sheet processing


Activate sheet mode

You are in sheet mode if you

have loaded a sheet


have switched from single part mode to sheet mode.

The display on-screen contains the depiction of the sheet with parts
as well as, for example, the working area, the overshoot area and
the clamp dead ranges.

Processing

Sheet processing can only be carried out in sheet mode:


Select the Processing function. The menu for processing definition is displayed.

Collision test for punch and laser


processing
Punch processing with
collision test

A collision test of punching tool and contour is always carried out


during processing definition.
Collision test means: the system checks automatically whether a
contour violation by the punching tool will occur during processing
of the contour. Not only the neighboring elements, but all elements
are checked.
Collisions are depicted on screen with yellow circles. This allows
you to recognize and correct possible contour violations.

Laser processing with


collision test

5-82

ToPs 300 automatically performs a collision test when carrying out


laser operations (self collision test). Adjacent contours are not
subjected to a collision test.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Collision test means: During definition of a laser processing


operation, ToPs checks whether its own contour is violated by a
pre-punch hole approach and move-away flags or loops. The
system enforces a safety distance of 1.0 mm.
If a contour violation is recognized, the system tries to avoid the
collision: Approach and departure flags are shortened, and loops
are reduced. These processing changes are, however, carried out
within the framework of the rules.
Collision tests are also performed for contours which are only
partly processed.
All settings which apply to the collision test are defined in the
system rule group.

Display

Collisions are marked with yellow circles in the TECHNOLOGY


module. Enlarge the desired section of the screen so that you can
see the collision markings more clearly.

Collisions in ToPs: Enlarged display

S354E51.DOC

Fig. 19914

TECHNOLOGY module

5-83

10.1 Generating punch processing


automatically
Functions
PUNCH PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC, GENERATE,
START

Start automatic processing with punching tools.


Defining automatic processing with punching tools with ToPs 300
means:

Fully automatic processing of the geometry, without manual


tool selection or use of technological know-how.

Individual holes, simple and complicated inner and outer


contours, as well as the punching of breaches of different
geometries are now processed more quickly and easily; e.g.
punching of breaches:
Oblong holes are processed with round or oblong tools.
Rectangles with corner radius are punched automatically
with a square or rectangular tool with corner radius.
Round breaches are punched with round or Multicut tools.
Processing sequence:
Single hole
Punching up
Contours.

User-friendly options for individual adaptation of automatic


punch processing.
Optimal support of all tool types; see: Overview: Which tool
for which processing?"

Precondition:

5-84

Single part or sheet must be loaded.


The setting "Standard selection" must be selected for the tools
(first display field) in the menu PUNCH PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC.
A tool list with the name "TRUMPF" must be available because
the system accesses this individual list with standard setting
during automatic processing. A tool list with the name
"TRUMPF" is included with the software. See: Standard
settings for automatic processing.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Procedure:
Functions
File

Load
Single part
processing

Function
PUNCH PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC,
GENERATE, START

Steps:
Automatic processing at the push of a button.

Load single part or nested sheet.

Switch to single part mode to define the processing.

or

Define the processing of the entire sheet in sheet mode.

Right click on the START menu function in the PUNCH


PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC, GENERATE menu.
Automatic processing of the part or sheet is started
immediately.

or

S354E51.DOC

Mark the part or sheet to be processed.


Start the processing for the marked part or sheet with OK
(fixed function in menu).
Automatic processing starts immediately if OK is selected
directly with no part marked.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-85

Standard settings for automatic punch


processing
Standard settings are the default settings, i.e. the setting which are
there when ToPs is started.
You find the following settings in the selection window of the menu
by default:

Standard settings for automatic punch processing

Tool selection

Fig. 19896

Tool selection for single hole, punch-up, contours:


Which tools can be selected?
You have the following options for tool selection with all three automatisms:
Standard (all tools from master data),
"TRUMPF" list,
any individual tool list,
active tool,
already used tools.
The following tool selection is defined in the display windows by
default:

"Standard": Tools from master data are used for processing


definition.
"TRUMPF": The TRUMPF list is activated as tool list.
"All contours": For the processing definition, all contours (inner
and outer contours) are to be processed.

You can change these settings: Click in the particular window or


select the "arrow" symbol. The selection options are offered to you
as pull-down windows or a mask.

5-86

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

By default, ToPs accesses tools during processing which are


related with certain automatisms:

"Single hole": Should single holes be processed automatically?


If yes: Activate check box.
For individual holes: use all tools ("Standard").

"Punching": Should standard geometries be punched automatically? If yes: Activate check box.
Standard geometries are: round hole, oblong hole, rectangle
and square.
For punching: use all tools (master data).

"Contour": Should contours automatically be processed with


punching tools? If yes: Activate check box.
For contours: Use the "TRUMPF" tool list, an already existing
individual list, which is automatically delivered with ToPs.
Specify which contours are to be processed automatically with
punching tools
all contours
only inner contours
only outer contours.
Check the appropriate box if individual holes, geometries or
contours are to be reset for laser processing. These elements are then not processed and are marked in yellow on
the screen.

Remove small parts

S354E51.DOC

"Removal": First you can check the box for removal. Effect:
ToPs automatically creates a removal procedure for large
breaches in the single part and the single part itself.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-87

"TRUMPF" tool list


Background information on
the "TRUMPF" tool list

The "TRUMPF" tool list is an individual list which was put together
by TRUMPF.
The "TRUMPF" tool list contains the following tools:

Tools in the TRUMPF


tool list

Square 10 mm, ID no. 03100000


Rectangle 15x3 mm, ID no. 04150030
Rectangle 37x5 mm, ID no. 04370050
Rectangle 76.2x5 mm, ID no. 04762050.

You can of course adapt this list to your processing possibilities:


Adding and deleting tools (see: Recommended tools).
It is important, however, that this list contains tools which are
available to you and which allow optimum processing of inner and
outer contours.
Recommended tools

We recommend adding the following tools to the "TRUMPF" tool


list:
Contour

Tool

Long, straight
elements

Large rectangular tool1)

Short, straight
elements

Medium and small


rectangular tool

External arc

Small square tool,


multiple radius tool,
arc tool

Internal arc2)

Multicut too,
arc tool
round tool

Adding a triangular tool to the "TRUMPF" list is also recommended, e.g. for acute angle notches.
Already used tools are also used for contour processing in
addition to the tools from the "TRUMPF" list.

1) Slitting tools are managed as rectangular tools with radius.


2) An arc is processed as a single hole in automatic punch processing if the radius of the arc and the radius of the round tool
are identical.

5-88

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Specifying parameters for automatic punch


processing
Function GENERATE,
PARAMETERS

Further conditions for automatic punch processing are found in the


mask for the PARAMETER function.
In the mask, specify:

"Tools"
Which tools should be used with the highest priority?
Multitool tools? Standard setting NO.
Whispertool tools? Standard setting YES.
Special tools? Standard setting NO.
Tolerance?
With what tolerance should the tool be searched for? A
tolerance 0.01 mm is set by default.
Example: A round tool with a diameter of 10 mm is
present. The drawing shows round holes with a diameter of
10.002 mm. The tool will not be used at a tolerance value
of 0.0001 mm.

"Conditions"
"Smooth edges": Are smooth edges desired when processing the contours: yes or no?
Check box activated: Smooth edges means that no postprocessing is intended for the contour. The system checks,
e.g. when processing arcs, whether using round tools can
be avoided. If other tools are available (e.g. Multicut tool),
no round tools are used.
Check button not activated: The edges do not have to be
smooth when processing arcs and circles (default setting).
"Observe installation angle".
If a tool with a certain angle is installed in the tool adapter
and the installation position is to be considered during
processing definition, this check box must be activated.
This check box can only be activated if it is a machine
without a C-axis (example: TC 240).

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-89

"Tests"
"Collision prevention": Should the collisions be depicted on
screen during automatic processing or not?

Active check button: Automatic processing is carried out


with collision test. Processing operations with collisions are
not displayed.
Processing operations which cause a collision are deleted
immediately during automatic punch processing. The
unprocessed contour remains (default setting).
The collision test is always active with the ON CONTOUR
function!

Check button not activated: Automatic processing with


collision is carried out but the processing with collision is
not deleted from the screen. All collisions are depicted on
screen with yellow circles. This allows you to check the
processing operations with collisions.

Background information:
Collision test also means that in corners with acute or obtuse
angles and at tangential transitions the positions are calculated
exactly tool-specifically.

Tool-specific exact collision tests

5-90

TECHNOLOGY module

Fig. 12298

S354E51.DOC

Using individual functions for automatic


punch processing
Function
PUNCH PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC, INDIVFUNC:

Specify which tools should be used for processing for the


automatisms as part of the individual functions:
The following individual functions are available:
"Single hole" or
"Punching" or
"Contour"
Or specify:

"Part removal": whether part removal should be automatic or


not.

You can only select one individual function each time.


Then start automatic punch processing using the START function.

Calling up information on punch processing


INFORMATION function

View detailed information on a particular processing operation.

Procedure:

Select the INFO function.


Click the desired processing operation.

The information on the operation and technology will be presented


in the form of a report list.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-91

Example: Displaying information on an operation with removal


###################### 1st processing ###########################
Correspondence
: Element
In a compulsory sequence
: No
Starting point
: 138.824 1084.316
End point
: 226.624 994.316
Type of operation
: Part removal
Number of technologies
:3
Tool: Rectangle 76.2x5
ID no. 04762050
====================== 1st TECHNOLOGY =========================
Straight nibbling
No. of single strokes
:3
Starting point
: 138.824 1084.316
End point
: 152.424 1084.316
Starting angle
: 0.000
Offset angle
: 0.000
Feed rate per stroke
: 74.200
Roughness
: 0.150
Punching mode
: normal
Single stroke display
: No:
Tool orientation activated
: No
===================== 2nd TECHNOLOGY =========================
Single stroke
Position
: 226.624 1084.316
Angle
: 0.000
Punching mode
: Normal
Output in the NC
: Yes
===================== 3rd TECHNOLOGY =========================
Part removal
Flap: 500.00 500.00 position: in front of the punching head
Position
: 226.624 994.316
Use ejection program
: No
Ejection distance
: 0.000 90.000
Ejection speed [m/min]
: 15.000
TRUMASORT container no.
:0
Removal with open flap
: No
First eject, then open flap
Use ejection cylinder
: No
Acknowledgement of light barrier
: Yes
Anti-scratch removal
: No

Background information:

5-92

TECHNOLOGY module

A processing operation can consist of more than one technology (see: example).
You can also group a number of processing operations
together in a box: All operations are then displayed according
to the processing sequence.
With laser processing, all operations are displayed in a
compulsory sequence.

S354E51.DOC

Setting defaults
Default settings include:

"Punching mode": How is the punching operation going to be


carried out:

"Normal": Single strokes or nibbling operations will be


executed without presser foot and without delay function.

"Delayed": The programmed single stroke or the programmed nibbling path is only executed after a certain period of
time (delayed) after having reached the position.
Application: for processing operations well away from the
center of gravity or if the sheet has to be settled before the
next processing operation.

"Presser foot": The sheet will be tightened hydraulically with


the presser foot against the die for nibbling or punching.
Application: This punching mode is a good idea if distortion
of the sheet can occur (e.g. with a high processing ratio), if
punchings are very close to each other or if thin sheets are
being processed.

Effect: All processing operations defined later will be punched in


the active punching mode.

Set the value for "Overlap": The overlap values which apply for
the processing operations which have not yet been defined are
set with this function.
Set overlap values with:
corners
punching (overlap between the individual nibbling paths)
feed (overlap with nibbling lines)
notches
roughness

Select display of a processing operation as single strokes.


With this mask, you can also determine how the processing
operation is to be displayed on the screen: Depiction as single
strokes or as line.

Displaying the processing operation in single strokes is


very computation-intensive. This is why screen set-up is
somewhat slower.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-93

Using aids
Function scope

The functions for creating and deleting construction geometry are


stored in the screen menu for the ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT
control function.
Construction geometry refers to geometry elements which help you
construct drawings.

Geometry representation

Construction lines are always represented as infinite, construction


circles always as full circles.

Line type and colour

Construction geometry is displayed on the screen in red and line


type dotted.

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


CONSTRUCTION LINE

The functions for creating construction lines are:

Function 2 POINTS: Drawing construction lines with 2 points.


Function PARALLEL: Drawing parallel construction lines.
Function HORIZONTAL and function VERTICAL: Drawing horizontal and vertical construct lines.
Function TAN PT: Drawing tangents as construct lines on arc
and point.
Function PERPENDICULAR: Drawing perpendicular construction lines.
Function ANGLE X: Drawing a construct line with a point and
angle of inclination.
Function TAN2: Drawing tangents to 2 arc elements as construction lines.
Function ANGLE/LINE: Drawing a construct line with a point
and an angle to the base line.
Function DIVISION: Dividing element using construction line.

The description of the individual functions can be found in


the module DRAWING see: "Generating construction geometry".

5-94

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE

The functions for creating construction circles are:

Function 3 POINTS: Drawing a construct circle with three


points.
Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing a construction circle with
a center and radius.
Function DIAMETER: Draw construction circle by entering two
points on the circle.
Function CENTER: Drawing construction circle using center
point and diameter
Function CONCENTRIC: Drawing concentric construction
circle.
Function TAN2 PT: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
2 elements.
Function TAN 2PTS: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
an element and two points.
Function TAN 3: Drawing a construction circle tangential to 3
elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle tangential to one element and center point.
The description of the individual functions can be found in
the module DRAWING see: "Generating construction geometry".

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


DELETE CONSTRUCTION
GEO

This function can be used to delete existing construction geometry


partially or completely.

Procedure:
Delete construction geometry completely: click on ALL.
Delete construction geometry partially: Click on the elements
individually.
Select the TOTAL function (foot bar) after executing this
function or change the window setting in order to reset the
screen.

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


MEASURE

The construction functions for measuring are:

Function 2 POINTS: Measuring the distance between 2 points.


Function POINT: Measuring the coordinates of a point.
Function HORIZONTAL: Measuring the horizontal distance
between two points.
Function VERTICAL: Measuring the vertical distance between
two points.
Function CIRCLE: Measure center points and radius as well as
center points of a circle.
Function ANGLE: Measure angle.
The description of the individual functions can be found in
the module DRAWING see: "Measurement".

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-95

10.2 Generating punch processing manually


Functions
PUNCH PROCESSING,
MANUAL

You can also define processing operations using individual functions and "by hand". Specify which function is to be processed with
which tool, where removal takes place, etc.

Procedure:
Functions
File

Load
Single part
processing

Select the functions for


PUNCH PROCESSING,
MANUAL

GENERATE control function

5-96

Steps:
Define processing using individual functions.

Load single part or nested sheet.

Switch to single part mode to define the processing.

or

Define the processing of the entire sheet in sheet mode.

The functions of the menu PUNCH PROCESSING,


AUTOMATIC are displayed.
Switch to manual processing by selecting the second window
MANUAL.
The menu functions for the control function GENERATE are
displayed.
These and the functions for the other control functions are
available for manual processing definition.

Define processing using individual functions. You select the


individual functions via the control function GENERATE:
GEOMETRY: Create processing using an existing geometry.
WITHOUT GEOMETRY: Create processing operations without
having a defined geometry available as a model.
ROWS OF HOLES: Convert single holes in rows of holes and
then process these as rows of holes.
COMPULSORY SEQ: Set processing operations in compulsory
sequences, break up present compulsory sequences, split or
invert.
INFO: View information on a processing operation. To do so,
you must identify the particular processing operation in the part.
DELETE: To delete a certain processing operation or processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a positioning path or to delete all processing operations.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Other control functions

Other functions are available for manual processing definition. They


can be started using control functions. In particular:

Control function EXTRAS: Add NC functions, define positioning


paths, display unprocessed geometries, set compulsory
sequences.

Control function SMALL PARTS: Specify removal system for


small parts.

Control function LIFT: Unload parts using TRUMALIFT


SheetMaster or TRUMALIFT SB/SC/SE. Can only be selected if
a lift is in the configuration of the current machine.

SHEET control function: Specify resetting procedure and


clamping operation. Only active in sheet mode.

Control function MODIFY: Modifying processing operations.

DEFAULT control function: Set punching mode and overlap


values as well as display for the processing.

DRAWING TOOLS control function: Create construction


geometries and select measurement functions.

Generate processing with geometry model


Processing single hole

Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, SINGLE HOLE


Define single punching with a tool.
Activate tool.
Click on the geometry or
define the processing without geometry. Processing can be
positioned as required.
For this purpose, execute the instructions in the command line:
1. Enter angle, i.e. define position of tool to the X-axis.
2. Click on centre point of tool or enter the coordinates.
1

a
X

Picture 1: angle 0
Picture 2: angle 30
Fig. 4759

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-97

Processing single element


along the contour

Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, AT ELEMENT


Process single element of a contour. The tool center runs alongside the contour.

Precondition: Geometry as basis.


Procedure: Click on geometry element of contour.
Effect: the system automatically recognises on which side the
Processing must be positioned. The processing direction is
determined by clicking: The starting point of the nibbling path is
placed where the distance to the next corner point is the shortest.
The overlapping, roughness and punching mode is set in the
menu for the SETTINGS control function and taken into consideration with this function.
Special case: If an element is smaller than the tool used, the set
overlap will be ignored. If the tool for the element is too large, the
operation will not be executed. In this case, select the AT EL.PART
function to execute the operation.

Processing complete
contour

Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY AT CONTOUR


Processing a complete contour which consists of several processing elements. The tool center is adjacent to the contour.

Precondition: Geometry must be present.


Procedure:
1. Select tool. Along with the standard tools (e.g. round, square
and rectangular tools) this function now also supports special
tools which have congruent processing with 180 rotation.
2. Click on first element (start element) of the contour.
3. Click on last element (end element) of the contour.
To process the contour completely: Click first element twice.
Effect: The system automatically recognises on which side the processing must be positioned. The processing direction is determined by clicking: The starting point of the nibbling path is placed
where the distance to the next corner point is the shortest.

Punching up contour

Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, PUNCH UP


Punching up a contour.
Click on contour to be punched up. The contour will be punched up
with the active tool.
Advantage the contour is completely punched up without having to
eject scrap.

5-98

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Partial processing of
contour element

Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, AT EL.PART


Process a contour element not completely, but rather partially (tool
center adjacent to geometry). See AT ELEMENT function.
This function can only be executed at line elements. Only this
function enables already processed elements to continue to be
processed (example: adding triangular processing to a corner).

Procedure:
1. Click on element.
2. Click on starting point.
3. Click on end point.
Create single stroke: A single stroke is carried out when the distance between the start and end points is less than the tool length.
The position of the single stroke depends where you define the
starting point and end point on the line element.
Example 1: set single stroke symmetrical to element

Identify element (1.),


define starting point (2.) and end point (3.).
The single stroke will be set symmetrical to element if all three points are at the
same position.
Fig. 12857

Example 2: set single stroke to element corner

Identify element (1.),


define starting point (2.) and end point (3.).
The single stroke is set to the element corner if (1.) is defined differently from (2.)
and (3.).
Fig. 12857

Processing with triangular tool and defining AT EL.PART


function: If the function AT ELEM.PART is carried out with a
triangular tool, only single strokes are generated.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-99

Procedure:
1. Click on element.
2. Define starting point; the position of the top of the triangular
tool will now be determined.
3. Determine end point; the position of the back of the triangular
tool will now be determined.

Creating processing directly


on element

Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, ON ELEMENT


Define processing directly on the geometry element. This is different to the AT ELEMENT function, because the tool center is
positioned on the geometry.
See AT ELEMENT function.

Creating processing directly


on contour

Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, ON ELEMENT


Define processing directly on a part of the processing element.
This is different to the AT CONTOUR function, because the tool
center is positioned on the geometry.
See AT CONTOUR function.

TRIM

Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, LIN-LIN


Function for defining cuts over parts limits. Example: processing
with common cuts.

Precondition: The linear elements along which the cut should run
must be aligned.
Procedure: Click on starting point and end point of a cut. Example:

1
2
3

Trimming path
Vertical parting cut
Horizontal parting cut

Trimming, common cuts

5-100

TECHNOLOGY module

Fig. 4410

S354E51.DOC

On the contrary to grid processing, no remnant arises when


processing with common cuts. The tool width corresponds to the
parting cut width. The definition of common parting cuts must be
observed at every programming step. Already during sheet layout,
the part spacing must be adapted to the parting cut.
This parting strategy is usually selected along with sheet trimming.

Punching notches

Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, NOTCH


Punching up notches.

Procedure:
1. Click on straight line element.
2. Click on straight line element.
You can process several notches successively.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-101

Create processing without geometry model


Creating single hole

Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, SINGLE HOLE


Define single punching with a tool.

Procedure:

Activate tool:
Define the processing without geometry model. Processing can
be positioned as required.
Follow the instructions in the command line:
1. Enter angle, i.e. define position of tool to the X-axis.
2. Click on centre point of tool or enter the coordinates.

a
X

Picture 1: angle 0
Picture 2: angle 30
4759

Punching up circle

Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, PUNCH UP


CIRCLE
Punching up circle
Precondition: No geometry as basis. Processing can be positioned
as required.

Procedure:
1. Click on center point (alternative: enter coordinates).
2. Enter radius.
Effect: The inner cutout is completely punched up. Advantage no
waste must be disposed of.

5-102

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Punching up rectangle

Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, PUNCH UP RECT


Punching up rectangle.
Precondition: No geometry as basis. Processing can be positioned
as required.

Procedure:
There are two different ways of proceeding.
Variant 1
1. Click on starting point (alternative: enter coordinates).
2. Click on the second point, which is diagonally across from the
starting point.
Variant 2:
1. Click on starting point (alternative: enter coordinates).
2. Enter length of rectangle or click on the point.
3. Enter width of rectangle or click on the point.
4. Enter the angle for the X-axis under which the rectangle should
be placed. Alternative: Define the angler by entering a third
corner point of the rectangle.

Effect: The rectangle will be punched up, no waste must be


disposed of.

Creating row of holes

Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, ROW OF HOLES


Precondition: No geometry as basis. Can be positioned at will.

Procedure:

Enter frame data in mask.


You can control through the number of strokes whether a nibbling path or a row of holes should be created. Number of
strokes 0 = nibbling.
Enter starting point (alternative: enter coordinates).
End point (alternative: enter coordinates).

Row of holes with offset angle

Offset angle (45)

Row of holes with offset angle

S354E51.DOC

Fig. 7272

TECHNOLOGY module

5-103

Creating circle of holes

Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, CIRCLE OF


HOLES
Punch or nibble circle of holes or circle element (arc).

Precondition: No geometry as basis. Can be positioned at will.


Procedure:
1. Enter frame data in mask.
You can control through the number of strokes whether a
nibbling path or a row of holes should be created.
Number of strokes 0 = nibbling.
2. Click on center point (alternative: enter coordinates).
3. Enter radius.

Nibble circle element or whole circle.

CCLW

counterclockwise (CLW = clockwise)

Example: Nibbling arc

5-104

TECHNOLOGY module

Fig. 6599

S354E51.DOC

Converting hole pattern in rows of holes


Function GENERATE: Converting hole pattern in rows of holes
Precondition: only axially parallel hole patterns can be converted
into rows of holes.
Converting present hole patterns to rows of holes.
Example: A hole grid is drawn from single holes. Single strokes
were defined here for operation.

Procedure:
Select the function ROWS OF HOLES, CONVERT.
In the sub-mask you select the direction in which the single
holes are to be converted into rows.
"Search direction X" or "Y": Press a switch.
The reference to the geometry is lost in the conversion of the
single holes into rows of holes.

Advantage:
Quicker processing: distance and time-optimized sheet processing.
If the hole grid is very large, the NC texts generated will be a
lot smaller.
Faster optimization calculation during optimization process.

Creating compulsory sequences


Compulsory sequences are a set sequence of processing operations which are executed one after the other. These processing
sequences with fixed definitions always remain unchanged. Even
optimization processes don not make changes. Compulsory
sequences form a possible basis for subroutines.
Compulsory sequences are not bound to the part. You can form
compulsory sequences which transcend the individual part. Create
compulsory sequences, however, so that they are parts-related. In
doing this, you will support the optimization process for sheet
processing.
You can break up, split (divide up) and invert defined compulsory
sequences.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-105

Setting compulsory
sequence

Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, SET


Set processing operations in a compulsory sequence.

Procedure:
Click consecutively on the processing operations which you would
like to place in a compulsory sequence.
Effect: The processing operations included in a compulsory
sequence are displayed in a particular colour. Default setting: first
operation: dotted green line, all other operations: solid green line.
Examples: Single part

Compulsory sequence in the single part

Fig. 7343

This example shows that the parting of the inner cutout should be
the end of processing with the square tool. To ensure that the
system calculates a sensible processing sequence, the operations
are put into a compulsory sequence using the square tool.

Break up compulsory
sequence

Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, BREAK UP


Break up an available compulsory sequence of operations again.

Procedure:
Click on the operation within a compulsory sequence from which
on the compulsory sequence is to be broken up. Select the menu
field ALL to break up the entire compulsory sequence.

Reverse compulsory
sequence

Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, INVERT


Invert sequence of operations which are in a compulsory sequence.

Procedure:
Click on a processing from a compulsory sequence.
Effect: The sequence of processing operations within a compulsory
sequence will be inverted.
Compulsory sequences which contain a disposal may not be
inverted.

5-106

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Splitting compulsory
sequence

Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE: SPLIT


Splitting compulsory sequence.

Procedure:
Click on the processing operation where the compulsory sequence
has to be split.
Effect: The compulsory sequence is split into two compulsory
sequences. The processing operations no longer included in a
compulsory sequence are displayed cyan.

Defining NC code and positioning path


EXTRAS control function

The following menu functions are activated using the EXTRAS


control function:

NC FUNCTIONS: You can supplement an NC function into the


sequence of present processing operations.
You can call up the following NC functions: any text, or any
cycle, lubrication, sheet thickness, suction unit, tool change
position or flap.
Precondition: you have stored these NC functions as
customized cycles in the DATA module.

POSITIONING PATH: Define a positioning path. Determine


speed and acceleration parameters and maximum punching
head height and determine the starting position of the
positioning path via Start.

COMPULSORY SEQ: Set processing operations in a compulsory sequence.


You can break up, split (divide up) and invert defined
compulsory sequences.

INFO: View information on a processing operation. To do so,


you must identify the particular processing operation in the
part.

DELETE: Delete a certain processing operation or determine


what should be deleted via SELECTION. To delete a processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a positioning
path or to delete all processing operations.
Using the index card "Layout" you can delete a part from multicopy processing, sheet area, or external area or delete all.
Please observe the requests and instructions in the
command line when implementing the functions.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-107

Defining NC functions

NC functions are machine functions which you can select directly


via the EXTRAS menu for control functions.
NC functions must always be linked to a processing operation.

Entering NC code directly

Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, FREE TEXT


This function allows you to write NC functions or messages directly
into the NC code. Entries are made in a mask.

Procedure:
Enter NC text. The characters and ~ are not allowed!
The following rule applies:
"M27"
If the text is accompanied with single inverted commas,
ToPs executes a syntax and function check. The execution
of this function depends on the result of this check.
Example: If M27 is active in a preceding function, the text
will not be transferred into the NC program.
" M27 " or "M27"
This format tells the system that this function must
definitely be transferred to the NC program.

Before or after which processing operation should the NC text


be inserted? Select the desired radio button: "before" or "after".
Which processing should the text apply to? Click on a
processing operation.
Where should the text be positioned? Click on target position
for text display.

Free texts can only be positioned at the first and last


processing operation of a compulsory sequence. Otherwise:
Break up the existing compulsory sequence and then
position your text at the desired processing operation.

5-108

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Defining free NC cycle

Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, FREE CYCLE


You can define the NC cycle by yourself in the DATA module, NC
OUTPUT function, CUSTOMER CYCLES. You can start these
cycles here and integrated them in the processing operation.

Procedure:
A mask is opened:
Select the cycle in the "cycle name" selection window (Scroll
window up). The NC text will be displayed in the scroll window
underneath. Editing of the NC text is not possible in this mask.
Choose the position for target operation by selecting the
corresponding switch.
BEFORE or AFTER? Should the cycle be inserted after or
before the selected processing operation?
Confirm your choice with OK.
Click firstly onto reference processing with the mouse, then on
the target position for display of the NC cycles.
The cycle name is placed as text at the target position in the
part.
For checking the positioned NC cycle (text), it is recommendable to enlarge the screen area by clicking it with the
right mouse key.
For a description and the general conditions for the corresponding M and G functions, please refer to the programming
instructions for your machine.

Defining sheet thickness as


NC code

Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, SHEET THICKNESS


You define the sheet thickness preselection for minimum-scratch
processing.
This function is only active for machines which have the
option "Non-scratch processing".

Procedure:
Enter the sheet thickness.
Choose the position for target operation by selecting the
corresponding switch.
BEFORE or AFTER? Should the sheet thickness preselection
be inserted after or before the selected processing operation?
Confirm your choice with OK.
Click firstly onto reference processing with the mouse, then on
the target position for display of the NC function.
The NC function is inserted as a text
HEIGHT_minimum-scratch" at the target position.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

"WORKING

5-109

Defining chip
vacuum system

Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, EXHAUST SYS


Switch chip vacuum system on or off.

Procedure:
A mask is opened.
Should chip vacuum system be switched on or off? Select the
desired setting.
Before or after which processing operation should the ascertained setting be effective?
Click on a processing operation after the mask has been
closed.
Effect: The function is self maintaining.
The chip vacuum system will automatically be switched off
when processing with forming tools. It could be a good idea
for small, not so heavy parts to switch off the vacuum
system before the last stroke, because the parts are
otherwise slightly drawn towards the die.

Defining tool
change position

Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, TOOL CHANGE POS


Programming tool change positions.

Precondition:
Single part processing and sheet layout are defined.
You are in the sheet mode. The function WZG.W.POS. (Tool
change position) can only be selected in the sheet mode.
Procedure:
Choose the switching function TOOL CHANGE POSITION. A
mask is opened.
Determine when the position for the tool change should be
approached: before the target operation or after the target
operation.
Define reference processing. Click on a processing operation.
Click on position for the tool change. The defined position is
represented by a character string: TOOL_CHANGE_POS
(yellow color). The positioning paths are displayed.
The programmed tool change position is self-maintaining. All other
tool changes are carried out in this position.
If repositioning takes place during a sheet processing operation,
then the tool change position must be adjusted accordingly.

5-110

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

In ToPs 300, the differing type of approach of tool change


positions is not displayed on the screen. There will always
only be one direct approach path displayed. This is of
particular importance if you have to take formed sections, for
example, into consideration.

Defining NC code for


open flap

Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, FLAP


Use this function to determine whether a flap should be open
continuously or not.

Procedure:
A mask is opened for this purpose:
What should the flap status be: closed or open?
BEFORE or AFTER? Before which or after which processing
operation should the flap be opened or closed?
Click on a processing operation after the mask has been
closed. In addition, you can place the [FLAP] text on any free
position.
Effect: The function is self maintaining. This means: If you have set
the flap to "permanently open", then you must ensure that the flap
is closed again.
Application examples: Disposal with the flap opened continuously
is a procedure to save time. This method of removal is mostly
implemented for processing in rows.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-111

Defining travel path


Specify the parameters for
positioning path definition

Function EXTRAS: POSITIONING PATH, PARAMETERS


Specify the parameters for positioning path definition.

Procedure:
In the mask, specify:
"speed" and "acceleration": At what speed and acceleration
should the travel path be traversed?
"max. punching head height": Should the punching head move
into the highest working position in doing so?

Defining positioning path

Function EXTRAS: POSITIONING PATH, START


Define travel motion with the specified parameters.

Procedure: Click on the points of support of the travel path.


Effect: The travel path is displayed. This travel motion is interpreted by the system as if it was a processing operation. This
means: it has not yet been specified to which processing operation
this travel motion has actually been executed in accordance with.
The sorting (determination of the sequence) and optimization of the
processing operations are defined at a later point in time.
If the starting point of a positioning path is attached to a present
processing operation, then the end point of the processing operation is the starting point of the positioning path. This is the reason
why the sequence of processing operations is fixed.

Application example: By-passing of formed sections

Removal of small parts


Control function
SMALL PARTS

Activate functions with which you can determine the removal of


small parts:

5-112

MANUAL REMOVAL: The part is removed by hand.


SMALL PARTS: The part is removed via flap or chute.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

MICROJOINT: The part stays temporarily connected to the


sheet remainder via small webs (microjoint). The part must be
broken off by hand after the withdrawal of the complete sheet.
As a rule, microjoint tools (e.g. dovetail tools, trapezoid tools)
are used to produce microjoints.

INFO: View information on a processing operation. To do so,


you must identify the particular processing operation in the
part.

DELETE: Delete a certain processing operation or determine


what should be deleted via SELECTION. To delete a processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a positioning path or to delete all processing operations.
Using the index card "Layout" you can delete a part from multicopy processing, sheet area, or external area or delete all.
Please observe the requests and instructions in the
command line when implementing the functions.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-113

Removing part manually


Specifying parameters for
manual removal

SMALL PARTS function: MANUAL REMOVAL, PARAMETERS


Parameters Specify manual removal of small parts.

Procedure:
Select the desired settings in the mask.
Remove small parts in punching mode. Specify the procedure
during part removal.
The parameters to be selected depend on the machine
selected. With machines with table format such as SINUMERIK 840D, you see a mask with the contents laid out very
differently than with BOSCH or Fanuk control systems.

You can determine other basic conditions by pressing the


PARAMETERS function button.
Will the parts be removed from a grid?
Should the punching head move to the highest position
during removal?
Should the knock-out cylinders be applied (be activated)
during removal?
Should removal via the chute be supported by compressed
air?
Should the removal with flap be acknowledged by the light
barrier or not?
At what speed should the part be pushed out?
Push-out motion Y: by how many millimeters should the
part be pushed in the Y direction?
For TC 600L and TC 2000R: Try to define the same Y pushout motions for the same type of part. A separate table
PART_UNLOAD is created respectively for parts with
differing Y push-out motions. This has the effect that a
longer NC text is generated.

Defining manual removal for


part

SMALL PARTS function: MANUAL REMOVAL, SET


Specify the removal position taking the defined parameters into
consideration.

Procedure:
Select the function.
Click on the processing operation. The last stroke is set and
the symbol for manual removal (red triangle) is placed.

5-114

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Removing small parts using flap or chute


Specifying parameters for
the removal of small parts

SMALL PARTS function: SMALL PARTS, PARAMETER


Removing small parts using flap or chute.

Tip: Check which removal parameters are set at the beginning of


the removal definition.
Specify your removal parameters. You can then click on the
processing operation for the last separating stroke for other
parts without having to call up the PARAMETERS menu.

The parameters to be selected depend on the machine selected.


With machines with table format such as SINUMERIK 840D, you
see a mask with the contents laid out very differently than with
BOSCH or Fanuk control systems.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-115

TC600L:
Defining parameters

For this, select the PARAMETERS function. Select the desired


settings in the mask. The masks appear as follows:

Removing small parts using flap or chute

Remove small parts in punching mode.


How is the sequence of single steps for removal per flap going
to run?
Select the sequence of steps
"separate--> swing-down": separate part, then lower flap
and remove part after that
"swing-down--> separate--> push out": separate part, then
lower flap and push out part after that
"swing-down--> separate--> push out": separate part, push
part onto flap and then lower flap
"separate--> swing-down": first lower flap, then separate
part (make final stroke)
"swing-down--> separate--> push out": lower flap firstly,
then separate part (set last stroke), and then push out part

Ejection of parts in laser mode

5-116

TECHNOLOGY module

Fig. 19906

Fig. 19907

S354E51.DOC

Remove small parts in punching mode.


How is the sequence of single steps for removal per flap going
to run?
Select the sequence of steps

"swing-down": swing down flap, remove part via flap


"swing-down--> push out": separate part, then lower flap
and push out part after that
"push out--> swing down": separate part, push out part
then lower flap after that
"push out --> swing down": eject part with push out
cylinder, lower flap and remove part
"push out --> eject --> swing-down": push out part, eject
part with push out cylinder, then lower flap

You can determine other basic conditions by pressing the


PARAMETERS function button. The following mask appears:

Specify other parameters for part removal

S354E51.DOC

Fig. 19908

Will the parts be removed from a grid?


Should the punching head move to the highest position
during removal?
Should the chip flap be closed during part removal?
Should removal via the chute be supported by compressed
air?
Should the removal with flap be acknowledged by the light
barrier or not?
Should the machine move back to the initial position after
the push out procedure?
Should the parts be removed with the flap open?

TECHNOLOGY module

5-117

Should the flap be lowered first (and only swung down


afterwards)?
At what speed should the part be pushed out?
Push-out motion Y: By how many millimeters should the
part be pushed in the Y direction?
For TC 600L and TC 2000R: Try to define the same Y pushout motions for the same type of part. A separate table
PART_UNLOAD is created respectively for parts with
differing Y push-out motions. This has the effect that a
longer NC text is generated.

SET DEFAULTS
function button

This function button sets the settings back to the default setting.
The default settings are reactivated.

Other machines:
Defining parameters

For all other machines which do not have SINUMERIK control


system 840D, you see the following mask to specify parameters.
All options are active when they are active in the DATA module.

Specifying parameters

Fig. 19905

Should part removal be done using automatic push-out


program?
Should removal via the chute be supported by compressed
air?
Should the removal with flap be acknowledged by the light
barrier or not?
Should removal be anti-scratch?
Should the parts be removed with the flap open?

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

5-118

Defining removal of
small parts

Should the ejector cylinders be applied (be activated) during


removal?
At what speed should the part be pushed out?
With which sequence should the part be pushed out?
"push --> open": First push part, then open flap/chute.
"open --> push": First open flap/chute, then push part.

SMALL PARTS function: SMALL PARTS, SET


Define removal of small parts via flap or chute.

Procedure:
Select the SET function. A mask is opened. With the aid of the
mask, define the following:
For TRUMASORT: Into which container should the part be
moved into? Enter the container number.
Click on the processing operation: Click onto the processing
operation where the last separating stroke will be executed.
Decide how removal will take place: flap or chute? Click on one
of the two removal options (flap/chute operations or character
string). It is usually the flap or the chute.
Position the flap or the chute over the part. A vertical guide line
is drawn at the position of the last stroke to help you with this.
If you are happy with the selected position, click on the OK
function.
or
Place one of the removal units in position again.
The position will be identified by a symbol:
Flap: Green square.
Chute: Red square.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-119

Processing part with microjoint


MicroJoint technology

MicroJoint technology means: The part is not completely separated, it remains connected to the sheet via small webs. A microjoint tool is usually implemented for this processing operation. The
parts are broken out after the end of sheet processing.

Advantage: there are no operation delays caused by removal time


for a sheet layout with many small parts.
Precondition: Contour has been processed, e.g. with a special
microjoint tool.
Procedure:
Select MICROJOINT, SET function.
Enter the width for Microjoint.
Click on the processing operation at that point where the web
is to be inserted.
Effect: Processing is split at a defined point and a web is inserted.

Web width

MicroJoint production

Fig. 3619

Removal is always at the end of a processing sequence


after an automatic sheet optimization.

Removing part with lift


Control function LIFT

5-120

Part removal using TRUMALIFT SheetMaster or TRUMALIFT


SC/SB/SE is described in a separate chapter.
This chapter also contains the description of the automation
components TRUMAGRIP and TRUMASORT.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Repositioning
SHEET control function

In the menu for the control function SHEET you find stored functions to define a repositioning process and a clamping operation.
You can only reposition in the sheet mode. The sheet is subdivided
into repositioning areas for this action. The processing operations
executed before and after the repositioning move are assigned to
several repositioning areas.

Application: Repositioning is required when a sheet is too long or,


as another example, when processing operations are in the
clamping dead range and cannot be executed on the basis of
normal processing sequences.

REPOSITION: Start and delete a repositioning procedure.

CLAMPING OPERATION: Rearrange processing operations


(which processing operation should be processed after
repositioning? etc) or activate a defined repositioning process.

INFO: View information on a processing operation. To do so,


you must identify the particular processing operation in the
part.

DELETE: Delete a certain processing operation or determine


what should be deleted via SELECTION. To delete a processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a positioning
path or to delete all processing operations.
Using the index card "Layout" (in sheet mode) you can delete a
part from multi-copy processing, sheet area, or external area or
delete all.
Please observe the requests and instructions in the command line when implementing the functions.

Functions for repositioning and clamping are only offered in the


sheet mode.

Defining repositioning:
Options

There are two ways to reposition in ToPs.


Variant 1: the processing operation is defined on the whole sheet
regardless whether repositioning must take place or not. After that,
one determines how often repositioning should take place and
which processing operation should be allocated to which
repositioning area.
Variant 2: the repositioning movements are defined during the
processing operation definition. Processing operation is defined
per repositioning area.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-121

Variant 1

Procedure:
1. Completely define the operating process which is going to be
executed on the sheet.
2. Select the function REPOSITIONING, START. Follow the instructions in the command line:

Specify clamping position.


Repositioning devices (normally: punching head and
repositioning cylinders) are displayed and can be moved
within the cross over area and the sheet with the aid of the
mouse.
Select repositioning devices: Select one of the devices for
repositioning. For this purpose, click on either the punching
head or a repositioning cylinder. If no repositioning devices
are available you can define the repositioning motion
directly.
Define working area according to repositioning: The working range and clamps "stick" on the cursor and can be
positioned at random in the X direction. Confirm the
working range location by pressing OK.

The repositioning path and repositioning direction is represented by a red arrow on the screen.
3. Determine which processing operation is to be processed after
repositioning.
Significance of the colors: The complete, previously defined
operating process after the repositioning process is shown in
blue. Blue: No processing operation is active in the repositioning area. Cyan Active processing operation.

Select the function CLAMPING OPERATION, PROCESSING.REARR. A mask opens in which you decide
whether you want to reorder a processing operation or a
complete part.
Select processing operation: Open box or click on
processing operations individually. The selected processing operation is shown in magenta. Processing operations
which are shown in magenta are taken out of the selection
when click on is repeated.
Confirm your choice with OK. Effect: The processing
operation from the active repositioning area is shown in
cyan.

Variant 2

Procedure:
1. Designate an area of the sheet and define processing operation.
2. Select REPOSITIONING, START function to define repositioning movement.
3. Designate an area of the sheet and define processing
operation.
You can repeat this sequence as often as you wish.

5-122

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Repositioning areas

Repositioning areas are made by repositioning movements. The


processing operations executed before and after the repositioning
move are assigned to several repositioning areas.
1st repositioning area

_
_
_
_
_
_

2nd repositioning area

Excessive length sheet with two repositioning areas

Significance of the colors:


Blue: PProcessing operation which is not in the repositioning
area.
Cyan: Processing operation which is active.

Defining repositioning
procedure

Function SHEET: REPOSITIONING, START


Defining repositioning procedure.

Procedure:
1. Select the function REPOSITIONING, START. Follow the instructions in the command line:
Specify clamping position.
Repositioning devices (normally: punching head and repositioning cylinders) are displayed and can be moved within
the cross over area and the sheet with the aid of the
mouse.
Select repositioning devices: select one of the devices for
repositioning. For this purpose, click on either the punching
head or a repositioning cylinder.
Define working area according to repositioning: The working range and clamps "stick" on the cursor and can be
positioned at random in the X direction. Confirm the working range location by pressing OK.
The repositioning path and repositioning direction is represented by a red arrow on the screen.
2. Determine which processing operation is to be processed after
repositioning.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-123

Deleting repositioning area

Function SHEET: REPOSITIONING, DELETE


Delete repositioning area.

Precondition: Repositioning areas are available due to one or more


repositioning movements.
Procedure: Click on processing operation (color: blue) in the
desired processing operation area.
Effect: All operations from the repositioning area and the following
repositioning areas are assigned to the preceding repositioning
area. Checking possibility: Color changes to cyan, repositioning
arrow is deleted.
Example: From a total of 5 repositioning areas, repositioning area
3 is deleted. Repositioning area 3, 4 and 5 are assigned to
repositioning area 2.

Activating
repositioning area

Function SHEET: CLAMPING OPERATION, ACTIVATE


Clamping operation = activate repositioning areas.
Clamping operations must be activated to change or supplement a
processing operation.

Precondition: Repositioning areas are available due to one or more


repositioning movements.
Procedure:
Click on processing operation (color: blue)
or
Click on the symbol in the desired repositioning area.
Symbol: The first repositioning area is activated by clicking on
the red star (= punching head position) in the lower corner of
the working range, working area. The other repositioning areas
can be activated by clicking on the particular red arrow.

Rearranging
processing operation

Function SHEET: CLAMPING OPERATION, PROCESS.REARR


Rearrange processing operations or parts in the active repositioning area (clamp).

Procedure:
Select the function.
What do you want to rearrange: single processing operations
or complete part?
Select processing operation or part: Open box or click on
processing operation/part individually.
The selected processing operation is shown in magenta.
Processing operations which are shown in magenta are taken
out of the selection when click on is repeated.
Confirm your choice with OK. Effect: The processing operation
from the active repositioning area is shown in cyan.

5-124

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Modifying processing operations


MODIFY control function

Functions are available to you in this menu with which you can
modify an operation or reverse (invert) a sequence of operations.
Breakdown of separate functions:

OVERLAPPING: Lengthen or shorten nibbling paths.

PUNCHING MODE: How should the single stroke or nibbling


path be punched: regularly, with presser foot or with delay?

PROCESSING: Determine whether a copy of the processing


operation should be moved or rotated. Then click on one of the
options
MOVE: Should the object be moved about two points,
horizontally, vertically or should a multi-copy (grid) be
created?
ROTATE: How should the object be rotated: around two
points or at center point?

INFO: View information on a processing operation. To do so,


you must identify the particular processing operation in the
part.

DELETE: Delete a certain processing operation or determine


what should be deleted via SELECTION. To delete a processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a positioning
path or to delete all processing operations.
Using the index card "Layout" (in sheet mode) you can delete a
part from multi-copy processing, sheet area, or external area or
delete all.
Please observe the requests and instructions in the
command line when implementing the functions.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-125

Changing
overlapping values

MODIFY function: OVERLAPPING, MODIFY


Modify overlapping value of a defined operation.
The set overlapping values are defined under the control function
DEFAULT.

Procedure:
Select the function OVERLAPPING, MODIFY.

Define modification:

1. Option
Click on starting or end point of nibbling path near to the
tool center point.
Define the new start or end point by clicking on the nibbling
path.
Click directly on tool center for single strokes.
2. Option
Enter overlapping value.
Click on starting or end point of nibbling path to be
changed.
The overlapping value is self-maintaining. The processing
operation can be selected as often as needed.

Modifying punching mode

MODIFY function: PUNCHING MODE, MODIFY


Change punching mode.
The defined punching mode is set via the DEFAULT control
function.
How is the punching operation going to be carried out:
Normally?
Single strokes or nibbling operations will be executed without
presser foot and without delay function.
With presser foot?
The sheet will be tightened hydraulically with the presser foot
against the die for nibbling or punching.
Application: This punching mode makes sense if:
the sheet metal could become distorted (e.g. with high
processing ratio, hole grid),
the punchings are in very close proximity
processing thin sheets.
Delayed?
The programmed single stroke or the programmed nibbling
path is only executed after a certain period of time (delayed)
after having reached the position.
Application: for processing operations well away from the
center of gravity or if the sheet has to be settled before the
next processing operation.

Effect: All marked operations will now be punched with the active
punching mode.

5-126

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Moving or rotating the


processing operation

MODIFY function: PROCESSING, MOVE and ROTATE


With these functions, the original for the present processing operation is changed or a copy is created (duplication).

Precondition: Defined processing operation must be present.


Overview of procedure
This procedure for defining modifications is a suggestion. It can be
varied to suit your needs. Remember to follow the system prompts
in the command line.

Decision: Do you want to modify the original or copy an existing


operation? Select ORIGINAL or COPY.

Selection: Which elements should be modified? Click the


processing operation individually or put a box around several
processing operations.
Enter repetition factor.
Select type of modification: MOVE or ROTATE.

Each change must be terminated with END.

Specify selection: Modify original drawing or create a copy

Procedure:
Specify selection: You must define what is to be modified before
the modification operation.

1st specification: Do you want to modify the original or create a


copy?
ORIGINAL: The original will be modified.
COPY: The original will be preserved. One or more copies will
be created. You can determine how many copies are to be
created by entering a repetition factor.

S354E51.DOC

2nd specification: What shall the modification affect?


Click the elements you want to modify individually or select
several elements by putting a box around them.
3rd specification: Select modify option

TECHNOLOGY module

5-127

Moving processing
operation via 2 points

MODIFY function: MOVE, 2 POINTS

P1

P3

P2

Fig. 4954

Procedure:
Specify selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.
Select modify option: MOVE, 2 POINTS.
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Click on destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on any processing operation in the original or mark
complete processing operation with a box (P3).

Moving processing
operation horizontally

MODIFY function: MOVE, HORIZONTAL.

P1

P2

P3

Fig. 4955

Procedure:
Specify selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.
Enter the repetition factor, for example: 1.
Specify type of modification: MOVE, HORIZONTAL.
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates,
or
enter distance.
Click on any processing operation in the original or mark
processing operation with a box (P3).

5-128

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Moving processing
operation vertically

MODIFY function: MOVE, VERTICAL

P1

P3

P2

Fig. 15167

Procedure:
Specify selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.
Enter repetition factor. Example: 1
Specify type of modification: MOVE, VERTICAL.
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates
or
enter distance.
Click on any processing operation in the original or mark with a
box (P3).

Rotating processing
about two points

MODIFY function: ROTATE, 2 POINTS

P1
-90
P2

P3

Fig. 4958

Procedure:
Rotation around two points is equivalent to rotating and moving
the element at the same time.
Specify selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.
Select modification option: ROTATE, 2 POINTS
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Click on destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Enter angle of rotation, for example -90.
Click on any processing operation or mark with a box (P3).

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-129

Rotating geometry
about a centre point

MODIFY function: ROTATE, CENTRE

P2
P1

-90

Fig. 4957

Procedure:
Specify selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.
Select modification option: ROTATE, CENTRE
Click on centre point of rotation (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Enter angle of rotation, for example -90.
Click on any processing operation in the original or mark with a
box (P2).

Creating hole grid

MODIFY function: MOVE, GRID

Precondition: defined processing operation must be present.


Procedure:
1. Specification: Do you want to modify the original or create a
copy? Select ORIGINAL or COPY in the selection window.
2. Select processing operation.
3. Select the GRID function. A mask will be opened so that the
dimensions of the hole grid can be determined:
quantity of processing operations in X and Y direction
distance in X and Y direction
angular position

5-130

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Setting defaults
DEFAULT control function

The DEFAULT control function includes the following menu


functions:

Set punching mode

PUNCHING MODE: Set punching mode.


OVERLAPPING: Setting overlapping values.
Check button "Display as single strokes": To select or deselect
display of the single parts.

Control function DEFAULT: PUNCHING MODE


Specify how punching is to be carried out in the selection window:

Normally?
Single strokes or nibbling operations will be executed without
presser foot and without delay function.

With presser foot?


The sheet will be tightened hydraulically with the presser foot
against the die for nibbling or punching.
Application: this punching mode makes sense if:
The sheet metal could become distorted (e.g. with a high
processing ratio).
The punchings are in very close proximity.
You are processing thin sheets.

Delayed?
The programmed single stroke or the programmed nibbling
path is only executed after a certain period of time (delayed)
after having reached the position.
Application: for processing operations well away from the
center of gravity or if the sheet has to be settled before the
next processing operation.

Effect: All processing operations defined later will be punched in


the active punching mode.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-131

Setting overlapping values

Control function DEFAULT: OVERLAPPING


The overlapping values are set in these enter fields and apply for
the processing operations that follow.

Procedure:
Enter the overlapping values. Click on the appropriate entry field
using the mouse:
Overlapping at corners
Overlapping when punching up between single nibbling lines
Feed (overlap with nibbling lines)
Roughness, when nibbling with round tools

Displaying processing
operation as single strokes

Function DEFAULT: Check button "Display as single strokes"


With this check button, you can determine how the processing
operation is to be displayed on the screen: as single strokes or as
a line.
Displaying the processing operation in single strokes is very
computation-intensive. This is why screen set-up is somewhat slower.

5-132

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Using aids
DRAWING TOOLS
control function

Functions for creating and deleting construction geometry are


stored in DRAWING TOOLS.
Construction geometry refers to geometry elements which help you
draft drawings.

Geometry representation

Construction lines are always represented as infinite, construction


circles always as full circles.

Line type and colour

Construction geometry is displayed on the screen in red and line


type dotted.

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


CONSTRUCTION LINE

The functions for creating construction lines are:

Function 2 POINTS: Drawing construction lines with 2 points.


Function PARALLEL: Drawing parallel construction lines.
Function HORIZONTAL and function VERTICAL: Drawing horizontal and vertical construct lines.
Function TAN PT: Drawing tangents as construct lines on arc
and point.
Function PERPENDICULAR: Drawing perpendicular construction lines.
Function ANGLE X: Drawing a construct line with a point and
angle of inclination.
Function TAN2: Drawing tangents to 2 arc elements as construction lines.
Function ANGLE/LINE: Drawing a construct line with a point
and an angle to the base line.
Function DIVISION: Dividing element using construction line.

The description of the individual functions can be found in


the module DRAWING see: "Generating construction geometry".

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-133

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE

The functions for creating construction circles are:

Function 3 POINTS: Drawing a construction circle with three


points.
Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing a construction circle with
a center and radius.
Function DIAMETER: Draw construction circle by entering two
points on the circle.
Function CENTER D: Drawing construction circle using center
point and diameter.
Function CONCENTRIC: Drawing concentric construction
circles.
Function TAN2 PT: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
2 elements.
Function TAN 2PTS: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
an element and two points.
Function TAN 3: Drawing a construction circle tangential to 3
elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle
tangential to one element and center point.
The description of the individual functions can be found in
the module DRAWING see: "Generating construction geometry".

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


DELETE CONSTRUCTION
GEO

This function can be used to delete existing construction geometry


partially or completely.

Procedure:
Delete construction geometry completely: click on ALL.
Delete construction geometry partially: Click on the elements
individually.
Select the TOTAL function (foot bar) after executing this
function or change the window setting in order to reset the
screen.

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


MEASURE

The construction functions for measuring are:

Function 2 POINTS: Measuring the distance between 2 points.


Function POINT: Measuring the coordinates of a point.
Function HORIZONTAL: Measuring the horizontal distance
between two points.
Function VERTICAL: Measuring the vertical distance between
two points.
Function CIRCLE: Measure center points and radius as well as
center points of a circle.
Function ANGLE: Measure angle.
The description of the individual functions can be found in
the module DRAWING see: "Measurement".

5-134

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

Calling up information
INFORMATION function

Calling up and viewing information on an operation. The INFO


function is offered if any of the following is selected:
GENERATE control function
EXTRAS control function,
SMALL PARTS control function,
SHEET and control function
MODIFY control function:

Procedure:
Click on INFORMATION function.
Click on the relevant operation with the mouse. A message list
where you can receive detailed information on "Processing"
and "Technology" will be displayed.

Deleting processing operations and parts


You will find the functions with which processing operations can be
deleted in the menu for
GENERATE control function
EXTRAS control function,
SMALL PARTS control function,
SHEET control function,
MODIFY control function,
DEFAULT control function

Deleting processing
operation directly

Function DELETE, PROCESSING

Procedure: Select the processing operation to be deleted. Click on


an individual processing operation. Or: Open a box. Or: Select the
menu field ALL to delete the screen contents completely.
Effect: The selected operations are shown in magenta. Confirm the
deletion by pressing OK.
If processing operations are deleted individually, then the
traverse paths between the neighboring operations will be
updated automatically. If processing operations are caught
in a box when deleting, then the traverse paths will not be
automatically updated.
Operations in compulsory sequences cannot be deleted.
First break up the compulsory sequence, then delete the
processing operation.

S354E51.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-135

Deleting selected
processing operation

Function DELETE, SELECTION, index card "Processing"


This function allows you to make a targeted selection of objects to
be deleted. A mask is opened for this purpose:

"Positioning path": Delete positioning path without


processing operation allocated.
Click on the positioning path after closing the mask.

"Tool": Delete entire processing operation of the active tool.


Precondition: Tool has been activated.

Deleting parts of the layout

"Disposal": Delete disposal of a part.

"All processing operations for part": Delete entire processing


operation of a single part.
Identify the single part after closing the mask.

the

Function DELETE, SELECTION, index card "Layout"


This index card is only offered in sheet mode.
It contains the option to delete parts from the present layout.
"Multi-copy processing": Delete parts of a multi-copy processing
operation. If several multi-copy processing operations are
present on the sheet, identify the multi-copy processing
operation you wish to delete. To do so, click on a part in the
multi-copy processing operation.
"Sheet area": Delete parts on the entire sheet.
"External area": Delete part which are located outside of the
sheet.
"All": Delete all parts on the screen.
Select the desired radio button. The corresponding parts are
deleted.

5-136

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E51.DOC

10.3 Generating laser processing


automatically
Prerequisite: No contours which are to be processed with the laser
may be processed with punching tools.
Procedure:
Functions
1st step:

Steps:
During punch processing, specify the contours which are to be
processed with the laser.
1st possibility
Reset contours when defining punch processing.
Deselect the contour type which should not be processed with
punching tools in the mask for automatic punch processing:
Deactivate the desired check button.
The deselected contour type is not processed during definition of
punch processing. The number of unprocessed elements or
geometries is shown in a message list. The geometries or
elements themselves are shown in yellow on the screen.

or
2nd possibility
Define automatic processing with punching tools using PUNCH
PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC and then delete the desired processing operation and define the laser processing.

or
3rd possibility
Do not define punch processing. Process a single part completely
with the laser.
If there are certain general conditions or if the geometry of the
single part is unsuitable for punch processing, you can also
process a single part completely with the laser.
In this case, you may not define any punch processing operations.
Switch directly to laser processing: Click on the display field in the
menu.

File

S354E52.DOC

You must load the part or sheet first if you wish to process a part
or a sheet with the laser only.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-137

Load

Single part
Processing

2nd step:

Load single part or nested sheet.

Switch to single part mode for processing definition.

or

Define the processing of the entire sheet in sheet mode.

Specify general conditions for laser processing.


You already select a laser table switching from punch processing
to laser processing.
An additional mask is automatically displayed after the laser table
is selected. This mask offers all the rule groups which belong to
the selected laser table.
Decide:

Which laser table do you wish to work with? By selecting the


laser table, you determine the general conditions for
production of the part.
Which rule group should be the basis for processing?
You can only select one of the rule groups which are assigned
in the laser table.

Selecting laser table and rule group see: "Default settings for
automatic laser processing".

3rd step:
Function
LASER PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC, START

Automatically define laser processing.

Right click on the START menu function in the menu LASER


PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC, GENERATE.
Automatic processing of the part or sheet is started
immediately.

or

5-138

TECHNOLOGY module

Mark the part or sheet to be processed.


Start the processing for the marked part or sheet with OK
(fixed function in menu).
Automatic processing starts immediately if OK is selected
directly with no part marked.

S354E52.DOC

Select laser table


By selecting the laser table, you determine the general conditions
for processing of the part.
The following mask appears:

Select laser table

Fig. 19909

Table no. of the selected laser table

Name and information text of the selected rule group

Selection window with scroll: All laser tables which are available for the active material and machine group are offered in
the selection window.

S354E52.DOC

Machine display

Search criteria: You can reduce and control the selection of


laser tables using the search criteria.
"Table no.": Enter the number of the table or use a
placeholder.
"Group": Enter or select machine group. Some machines
are placed together in groups.
Example: Group 4 presently contains the TC 600L.
A mask is displayed to support you in selecting a machine
group. Here you can see which machines belong to a
group.
"Max. power": Maximum laser power
"Material ID": The ID no. of the material indicates in code
the material type thickness.
"Material thickness": material thickness in [mm]

TECHNOLOGY module

5-139

For machines with BOSCH control systems, this mask also


contains the search criteria "Gas pressure".

SEARCH function button: You start the search with this


program button.

In the "Display contents" area, you find two function buttons:

5-140

Function button "Lasertech": The contents of the selected laser


technology table are displayed.
This function button is not active for machines with the
Sinumerik control system SINUMERIK 840D.
Function button "Rules": The contents of the selected rule
group will appear.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Selecting rule group


You will be prompted to select a rule group immediately after
selecting the laser table.
The following mask only offers rule groups which are assigned to
the selected laser table. The assignment of a rule group to a laser
table is done during creation of the laser table in the DATA module.
The following mask appears:

Select rule group

S354E52.DOC

Fig. 19910

Table No. of the laser table and information text on the laser
table
List of rule groups: rule group number and information text for
the rule group
Select a rule group by clicking a radio button.
Meaning of the rule group number see: "Rule group" description in this chapter.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-141

Default settings for automatic laser


processing
Default settings are defined for laser processing as well.
The mask appears as follows:

Automatic laser processing

Function
LASER PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC, GENERATE,
START

Fig. 19912

Start automatic processing with the laser.

Procedure:

Right click on the START function.


Laser processing starts and runs automatically. The default
settings apply as parameters. Single parts are processed in
single part mode and entire sheets in sheet mode.

or
Select the START function with the left mouse button.
Identify the part to be processed.
Start automatic processing with OK.

In combined processing, only those contours for which no punch


processing has been defined are processed.

Function PARAMETER

5-142

Setting parameters see: "Specifying parameters for automatic


laser processing".

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Defining contours for


processing

Defining part removal


automatically

Specify which contours are to be processed with the laser.

To do so, click in the display window or select the arrow


symbol.
Select the contour:
"All contours"
"Inner contours"
"Outer contours"

"Part removal" check box: The system automatically


generates a part removal suggestion if this box is checked.

Calling up information on laser processing


INFORMATION function

View detailed information on a particular processing operation.

Procedure:

Select the INFO function.


Click the desired processing operation.

The information on the operation and technology will be presented


in the form of a report list.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-143

Example: Excerpt from a report list


###################### 1. PROCESSING ######################
Correspondence
: Contour
In a compulsory sequence
: Yes
Starting point
: 149.147 1265.163
End point
: 149.147 1066.013
Processing type
: Laser cutting
Number of technologies
:1
Tool: Laser Id. no. 99999999
==================== 1. T E C H N O L O G Y ======================
CUT
:
==================
:
Contour size
: Large contour:
Height regulation
: Active
Kerf
: 0.075
Laser technology table
: 4073
Rule group
: 61181
==================
:
Starting point
: 149.147 1265.163
End point
: 149.147 1066.013
###################### 2. PROCESSING ######################
Correspondence
: Contour
In a compulsory sequence
: Yes
Starting point
: 149.147 1066.013
End point
: 148.647 1065.513
Processing type
: Laser rounding
Number of technologies
:1
Tool: Laser Id. no. 99999999
==================== 1. T E C H N O L O G Y ======================
ROUNDING
:
==================
:
Contour size
: Large contour:
Height regulation
: As defined in rule group
Kerf
: 0.075
Laser technology table
: 4073
Rule group
: 61181
==================
:
Starting point
: 149.147 1066.013
End point
: 148.647 1065.513
Center point
: 148.647 1066.013
Radius
: 0.500
Direction
: Arc direction clockwise
Corner point
: 149.147 1065.513
###################### 3. PROCESSING ######################
Correspondence
: Contour
In a compulsory sequence
: Yes
Starting point
: 148.647 1065.513
End point
: -251.003 1065.513
Processing type
: Laser cutting
Number of technologies
:1
Tool: Laser ID no. 99999999
==================== 1. T E C H N O L O G Y ======================
CUT
:
==================
:
Contour size
: Large contour:
Height regulation
: Active
Kerf
: 0.075
Laser technology table
: 4073
Rule group
: 61181
==================
:
Starting point
: 148.647 1065.513
End point
: -251.003 1065.513

...

5-144

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Background information:
A processing operation can consist of more than one
technology.
You can also group a number of processing operations
together in a box: All operations are then displayed according
to the processing sequence.
With laser processing, all operations are displayed in a
compulsory sequence.

Using drawing tools


Function scope

The functions for creating and deleting construction geometry are


stored in the screen menu for the DRAWING TOOLS control
function.
Construction geometry refers to geometry elements which help you
draft drawings.

Geometry representation

Construction lines are always represented as infinite, construction


circles always as full circles.

Line type and color

Construction geometry is displayed on the screen in red and line


type dotted.

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


CONSTRUCTION LINE

The functions for creating construction lines are:

Function 2 POINTS: Drawing construction lines with 2 points.


Function PARALLEL: Drawing parallel construction lines.
Function HORIZONTAL and function VERTICAL: Drawing horizontal and vertical construct lines.
Function TAN PT: Drawing tangents as construct lines on arc
and point.
Function PERPENDICULAR: Drawing perpendicular construction lines.
Function ANGLE X: Drawing a construction line with a point
and angle of inclination.
Function TAN2: Drawing tangents to 2 arc elements as constructionion lines.
Function ANGLE/LINE: Drawing a construction line with a point
and an angle to the base line.
Function DIVISION: Divide element using construction line.

The description of the individual functions can be found in


the module DRAWING see: "Generating construction geometry".

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-145

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE

The functions for creating construction circles are:

Function 3 POINTS: Drawing a construction circle with three


points.
Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing a construction circle with
a center and radius.
Function DIAMETER: Drawing a construction circle with
diameter.
Function CENTER: Drawing construction circle using center
point and diameter.
Function CONCENTRIC: Drawing concentric construction
circles.
Function TAN2 PT: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
2 elements.
Function TAN 2PTS: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
an element and two points.
Function TAN 3: Drawing a construction circle tangential to 3
elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle tangential to one element and center point.
The description of the individual functions can be found in
the module DRAWINGsee: "Generating construction geometry".

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


DELETE CONSTRUCTION
GEO

This function can be used to delete existing construction geometry


part by part or completely.

Procedure:
Delete construction geometry completely: Pick ALL.
Delete construction geometry part by part: Pick the elements
individually.
Select the TOTAL function (foot bar) after executing this
function or change the window setting in order to reset the
screen.

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


MEASURE

The construction functions for measuring are:

Function 2 POINTS: Measuring the distance between 2 points.


Function POINT: Measuring the coordinates of a point.
Function HORIZONTAL: Measuring the horizontal distance
between two points.
Function VERTICAL: Measuring the vertical distance between
two points.
Function CIRCLE: Measuring the center point coordinates and
the radius of a circle.
Function ANGLE: Measuring angle.
The description of the individual functions can be found in
the module DRAWING see: "Measurement".

5-146

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

10.4 Generating laser processing manually


Functions
LASER PROCESSING,
MANUAL

Generating laser processing manually means to define the


processing of individual contours with the laser. A series of functions are at your disposal here which are called up individually
using the control functions.
The following mask is available to you:

Mask with menu for manual laser processing

Fig. 19913

Procedure:
Functions
File

Load
Single part
Processing

S354E52.DOC

Steps:
Define processing using individual functions.

Load single part or nested sheet.

Switch to single part mode for processing definition.

or

Define the processing of the entire sheet in sheet mode.


The functions of the menu PUNCH PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC are displayed.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-147

Combined processing

Select the functions for


LASER PROCESSING,
MANUAL

GENERATE control function

If you wish to define combined processing of the part or sheet,


you can switch to laser processing directly from punch processing.
The part to be processed is then already loaded.

Switch to manual laser processing by switching to LASER


PROCESSING in the first display window and MANUAL in the
second display window.
The menu functions for the control function GENERATE are
displayed.
These and the functions for the other control functions are
available for manual processing definition.

Define processing using individual functions. You select the


individual functions via the control function GENERATE:
The following setting options are available to you:

LASER MODE: Specify the type of laser processing.

BEGINNING OF CUT: Where should the beginning of the cut


be?

PARAMETER: Activate cutter path compensation as a laser


parameter.

To generate processing, select:

GEOMETRY: Create processing operations using an existing


geometry.

WITHOUT GEOMETRY: Create processing operations without having a defined geometry available as a model.

COMPULSORY SEQ: Set processing operations in compulsory sequences, break up present compulsory sequences,
split or invert.

Other functions are:


INFO: View information on a processing operation. To do so,
you must identify the particular processing operation in the
part.

5-148

TECHNOLOGY module

DELETE: To delete a certain processing operation or a


processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a
positioning path or to delete all processing operations.

S354E52.DOC

Other control functions

Other functions are available for manual laser processing


definition. They can be started using control functions. In
particular:

Control function EXTRAS: Add NC functions, define


positioning paths, detect unprocessed geometries, set
compulsory sequences or measurement point.

Control function SMALL PARTS: Specify removal of small


parts, set Micro-Joint.

Control function LIFT: Unload parts using TRUMALIFT


SheetMaster or TRUMALIFT SB/SC/SE. Can only be selected
if a lift is in the configuration of the current machine.

Control function SHEET: Specify resetting procedure and


clamping operation. Only active in sheet mode.

Control function MODIFY: Define processing operations such


as approach and depart, contour start, processing direction,
etc.

Control function DRAWING TOOLS: Create construction


geometries and select measurement functions.

Specifying parameters for manual laser


processing
Function GENERATE,
PARAMETERS

You can activate cutter path compensation as a parameter during


manual laser processing.
Cutting with cutter path compensation means that the processing is
generated directly on the geometry of the contour. The kerf width is
only taken into account by the control system for processing on the
machine.
Prerequisite: When cutting with cutter path compensation, the
approach path must be defined (in the rule group) so as to allow
the cutter path compensation to be built up.
Cutting with path correction: The contour is cut without cutter path
compensation. ToPs automatically calculates the precise course of
the contour on the basis of the actual kerf width. The laser cut
takes place directly on the defined contour.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-149

Specifying laser mode and cut start


Function LASER MODE

Specify which type of laser processing is to be active.

Procedure:

Function CUT START

Select the function button with the " t" (arrow) symbol or click
directly on the display field. You can select from the following
laser modes:
"Cutting": cut contours with the laser.
"Marking": mark with the laser.
"Center marking": center mark with the laser.

How should the cut start take place?


You have the following options for cutting contours:

"Beam on": The laser beam is ignited in a breach or outside of


the sheet.
In addition to defining the laser processing, it is a good idea to
place a measurement point near the edge. This is done before
the actual laser processing. The current upper edge of the
sheet near the edge of the sheet is determined using the
measurement point. You define the processing path which is
traversed without height regulation using the function MODIFY,
PROCESSING, CHANGE OVER, with the radio button "Height
regulation" active (in the processing type LASER
PROCESSING, MANUAL).
Example 1: The laser cut starts in a previously produced
breach. Prepunching is not necessary.
or
Example 2: Common slitting cuts: The outer contours start or
end outside the sheet area; due to previous trimming, the
outside contour to be processing is at the sheet edge.

5-150

"Piercing": Pierce the material directly with the laser and then
begin contour processing.
Example 1: Processing very small contours. Definition of a prepunching hole would violate the contour. The contour violation
also cannot be corrected by changing the approach flag.
Example 2: Slotting with the laser.
"Pre-punching": Pre-punch a single stroke with the selected
punching tool, and the laser is ignited in this breach (default
setting). Select the tool with which the pre-punching hole is to
be made in the next display window.
Example: Processing of small, medium-sized and large
contours.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Creating laser processing with geometry


model
Processing element

Function GENERATE GEOMETRY, ELEMENT


Process element with the laser.

Pick the start point for element processing.

The cutting start and element are shown in the color cyan.

Process contour

Function GENERATE GEOMETRY, ELEMENT


Process individual contours with the laser.

Procedure:
Pick the contour. Contours to be processed must be identified
by you.
The way of identifying specifies the contour elements to be
processed as well as the beginning and the end of the
operation and thus the direction of processing.
As soon as you pick the start point for processing a contour,
the removal flap for laser cutting,
the laser and
the laser ejection cylinder are displayed on the screen.

Pick the element up to which the contour is to be processed.

The cutting start and contour are shown in the color green.
A contour consisting of several elements is to be processed
completely: Specify the start and end point of the operation by
double-clicking at the same position.
Identify particular elements of a contour specifically. Pick the first
and last element of a sequence of contour elements. The contour
is processed completely from the first to the last element picked,
including the contour elements in between.
The direction of processing results from the selection of the first
point picked. The beginning of the processing operation is
generated from the end point closest to the point picked.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-151

Process elements outside


the part

Function GENERATE GEOMETRY, BEYOND ELEMENT


Process elements (external contours) over several parts.

Use: Interactive trimming with the laser.

Pick the elements to be processed beyond the part.


Confirm element selection with OK.
Pick the start point for element processing.

The cutting start and processing are shown in the color green.
Please note: Processing can also be created for several parts at a
time, the path between the elements of the individual parts being
automatically closed by means of a linear connecting cut.
Processing defined with this function is part of total sheet
processing. If you displace parts or multiple-copy areas,
outside contour processing will not be transferred. In single
part mode, processing is assigned to the corresponding
single part.

5-152

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Creating laser processing without geometry


model
Generate linear laser cut

Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, CUT


Generate linear cut on the sheet or within a single part.

Use: Cut off remnant strips or slot contours in the finished part.
Please note when slotting: "Piercing" or "Beam on" must be specified as cutting start.
Procedure:
Pick starting point.
Pick end point.
Terminate cut definition with END.
The cut is shown as a green line between the start and end points.
You can also define verticals, horizontals and lines in any angular
position by clicking on a start and end point.
For sheet cuts which go over the sheet limit:
Automatic approaching of the sheet edge without height
regulation. Subsequent switching to cutting with height regulation is done automatically.
Automatic withdrawal from the sheet edge without height
regulation takes place automatically if the selected rule group
contains a withdrawal path.
Recommendation: For laser cutting without height regulation,
i. e. approaching a sheet edge, it is advisable to define a measuring point. See: the function EXTRAS, NC FUNCTIONS,
MEASURING POINT.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-153

Creating compulsory sequences


Set compulsory sequence

Function GENERATE COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, SET


Set processing operations in a compulsory sequence.

Procedure:
Click consecutively on the processing operations which you would
like to place in a compulsory sequence.
Compulsory sequences can be defined at will:

Only laser processing is put in a compulsory sequence.


Only punching is put in a compulsory sequence.
Punch and laser processing are put in a compulsory sequence.

Effect: The processing operations included in a compulsory


sequence are displayed in a particular colour. Default setting: first
operation: dotted green line, all other operations: solid green line.

Break up compulsory
sequence

Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, BREAK UP


Break up an available compulsory sequence of operations again.

Procedure:
Pick a processing from a compulsory sequence. The compulsory
sequence is broken up.

Reverse compulsory
sequence

5-154

Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, INVERT


Invert sequence of operations which are in a compulsory
sequence.
Important: A laser processing operation in a compulsory
sequence cannot be inverted. This procedure is not permitted. A
warning is displayed as a message box.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Split compulsory sequence

Function GENERATE COMPULSORY SEQUENCE: SPLIT


Split compulsory sequence.

Procedure:
Pick the processing operation where the compulsory sequence has
to be split.
Effect: The compulsory sequence is split into two compulsory
sequences. The processing operations no longer included in a
compulsory sequence are displayed in cyan. The selected
processing operation is removed from the compulsory sequence.

Defining NC function and positioning path


EXTRAS control function

The following menu functions are activated using the EXTRAS


control function:

POSITIONING PATH: Define a positioning path. Determine


speed and acceleration parameters and determine the starting
position of the positioning path via Start.

UNPROCESSED GEO: Identify properties which have no


processing. These geometries are shown in the color yellow.
This function provides information to check the processing
operations.

S354E52.DOC

NC FUNCTIONS: You can insert an NC function into the


sequence of present processing operations.
You can call up the following NC functions: define any text and
any cycle and measurement point.
Prerequisite: You have stored these NC functions as customer
cycles in the DATA module.

COMPULSORY SEQ: Set processing operations in a compulsory sequence.


You can break up, split (divide up) and invert defined compulsory sequences.
Compulsory sequences are set sequences of processing
operations which are executed one after the other. These
processing sequences with fixed definitions always remain
unchanged. Even optimization processes do not make
changes. Compulsory sequences form a possible basis for
subroutines.
Compulsory sequences are not bound to the part. You can
form compulsory sequences which transcend the individual
part. Create compulsory sequences, however, so that they are
parts-related. In doing this, you will support the optimization
process for sheet processing.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-155

INFO: View information on a processing operation. To do so,


you must identify the particular processing operation in the
part.

DELETE: Delete a certain processing operation or part or


determine what should be deleted via SELECTION. Delete a
processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a
positioning path or to delete all processing operations. In the
"Layout" area, you can select whether multi-copy processing,
sheet area, or external area is deleted or delete all.
Please observe the prompts and instructions in the
command line when using the functions.

Defining NC functions

NC functions are machine functions which you can select directly


via the menu for the EXTRAS control function.
NC functions must always be linked to a processing operation.
Switching functions are separated and deleted from the
assigned processing operation by sheet optimization, as
long as the switching functions are not in a compulsory
sequence.
NC functions must therefore always be set after sheet
optimization
or
be set in a compulsory sequence with the corresponding
processing operation.
NC functions can only be set at the beginning or at the end
of a compulsory sequence (error message!). If NC functions
are set to another position, the existing compulsory
sequence must be split at this position.

5-156

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Enter NC code directly

Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, FREE TEXT


This function allows you to write NC functions or messages directly
into the NC code.
Text is entered in a mask.

Procedure:
Enter NC text. The characters and ~ may not be used.
The following rule applies:
"M27"
If the text is accompanied with single inverted commas,
ToPs executes a syntax and function check. The execution
of this function depends on the result of this check.
Example: If M27 is active in a preceding function, the text
will not be transferred into the NC program.
" M27 " or "M27"
This format tells the system that this function must
definitely be transferred to the NC program.

Before and after which processing operation should the NC


text be added? 0=before it, 1=after it.
Which processing operation should the text apply to? Pick a
processing operation.
Where should the text be positioned? Pick target position for
text display.

Free texts can only be positioned at the first and last


processing operation of a compulsory sequence. Otherwise:
Break up the existing compulsory sequence and then
position your text at the desired processing operation.
The NC function ANY TEXT must be linked to a processing
operation with a compulsory sequence, otherwise the text is
lost or deleted during sorting.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-157

Defining any NC cycle

Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, FREE CYCLE


You can define the NC cycle by yourself in the DATA module, NC
OUTPUT function, CUSTOMER CYCLES. You can start these
cycles here and integrated them in the processing operation.

Procedure:
A mask is opened:
Select the cycle in the "cycle name" selection window (Scroll
window up). The NC text will be displayed in the scroll window
underneath. Editing of the NC text is not possible in this mask.
Choose the position for target operation by selecting the
corresponding switch.
BEFORE or AFTER? Should the cycle be inserted after or
before the selected processing operation?
Confirm your choice with OK.
Click firstly onto reference processing operation with the
mouse, then on the target position for display of the NC cycles.
The cycle name is placed as text at the target position in the
part.
For checking the positioned NC cycle (text), it is advisable to
enlarge the screen area by clicking it with the right mouse
key.
For a description and the general conditions (e.g. function
call-ups) for the corresponding M and G functions, please
refer to the programming instructions for your machine.

5-158

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Define measuring point

Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, MEASURING POINT


Define the measuring point before or after a processing operation.

Procedure:
Follow the instructions in the command line:
Before = enter 0 or
After = enter 1.
Pick the reference operation.
Pick the target position.
The measuring point is displayed on the screen in the form of a red
cross.

Application:
Setting the measuring point for instance before laser cutting
without height regulation.
Important! Measure the sheet thickness near the sheet edge
prior to starting laser cutting outside the sheet.

Defining travel path


Specify the parameters for
positioning path

Function EXTRAS: POSITIONING PATH, PARAMETERS


Specify the parameters for positioning path definition.

Procedure:
In the mask, specify:
"speed" and "acceleration": At what speed and acceleration
should the travel path be traversed?
"Max. punching head height": Should the punching head move
into the highest working position in doing so?

Define positioning path

Function EXTRAS: POSITIONING PATH, START


Define travel motion with the specified parameters.

Procedure: Pick the points of support of the travel path.


Effect: The travel path is displayed. This travel motion is interpreted by the system as if it was a processing operation. This
means: At first, it has not yet been specified after which processing
operation this travel motion has actually been executed. The
sorting (determination of the sequence) and optimization of the
processing operations are defined at a later point in time.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-159

If the starting point of a positioning path is attached to a present


processing operation, then the end point of the processing operation is the starting point of the positioning path. This sets the
sequence of processing operations.
Positioning paths must be assigned to a processing operation! Positioning paths which are not coupled to a processing
operation will be deleted during the optimization process.

Application example: by-passing of formed sections

Identifying unprocessed geometry


Function EXTRAS: UNPROCESSED GEO, IDENTIFY
With this function, you can display all geometry which still has no
laser processing.

Procedure:
Select the function.
All geometries are shown in the color yellow. You also receive
a message indicating the number of elements which have not
been processed.
Use: checking function for complete processing e.g. for a sheet
with many filigree parts.

5-160

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Removal of small parts


Control function SMALL
PARTS

Activate functions with which you can determine the removal of


small parts:

MANUAL REMOVAL: The part is removed by hand.

SMALL PARTS: The part is removed via flap or chute.

MICROJOINT: The part stays temporarily connected to the


sheet remainder via small webs (microjoint). The part must be
broken off by hand after the withdrawal of the complete sheet.
Microjoint tools (e.g. dovetail tools, trapezoid tools) are usually
used to produce microjoints.

INFO: View information on a processing operation. To do so,


you must identify the particular processing operation in the
part.

DELETE: Delete a certain processing operation or determine


what should be deleted via SELECTION. To delete a
processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a
positioning path or to delete all processing operations.
The index card "Layout" is only offered in sheet mode and
allows you to delete a part from a multi-copy processing
section, sheet area, or external area or to delete all.
Please observe the requests and instructions in the
command line when implementing the functions.

The individual functions are described in detail in the context of


punch processing See: "Generating punch processing manually".

Removing part with lift


Control function LIFT:

S354E52.DOC

Part removal using TRUMALIFT SheetMaster or TRUMALIFT


SC/SB/SE is described in a separate chapter.
This chapter also contains the description of the automation
components TRUMAGRIP and TRUMASORT.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-161

Repositioning
SHEET control function:

In the menu for the control function SHEET you find stored
functions to define a repositioning process.
You can only reposition in the sheet mode. The sheet is subdivided
into repositioning areas for this action. The processing operations
executed before and after the repositioning motion are assigned to
several repositioning areas.

Application:Repositioning is required when a sheet is too long or,


as another example, when processing operations are in the
clamping dead range and cannot be executed on the basis of
normal processing sequences.

REPOSITION: Start and delete a repositioning procedure.

CLAMPING OPERATION: Rearrange processing operations


(which processing operation should be processed after repositioning? etc.) or activate a defined repositioning process.

INFO: View information on a processing operation. To do so,


you must identify the particular processing operation in the part.

DELETE: Delete a certain processing operation or part or


determine what should be deleted via SELECTION. To delete
a processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a
positioning path or to delete all processing operations. As part
of sheet layout you can delete parts from multi-copy
processing, sheet area, or external area or delete all.
Please observe the requests and instructions in the
command line when implementing the functions.

Functions for repositioning and clamping are only offered in the


sheet mode.
For a description see: "Generating punch processing manually".

5-162

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Modifying the approach and withdrawal


paths
Function MODIFY,
APPROACH/WITHDRAWAL,
MODIFY

Modify approach flag and withdrawal flag with pre-punching hole.


Approach flags are a user-oriented extension of the parts geometry. They consist of a piercing point or pre-punching hole and an
approach path. The approach path can be a straight line or a
combination of straight line and arc.

Procedure:
Example of approach flags:

a
c
d

Pre-punching hole with tool center


Straight part of the approach path
Arc of the approach path
Contour

1
2
3

Start point of the approach flag


Transition from straight line to arc
Transition from approach flag to
contour (end point approach flag)

Approach flags

Fig. 12786

Please note: Collisions with previously defined processing


may arise if the approach flag is subsequently modified.
Laser processing operations are not checked automatically
for collisions with neighboring processing operations (See:
Collision test).

Recommendation: Make use of the option of enlarging a section of


the screen for changing approach flags (with the right mouse
button).
Procedure:

1st pick point: Pick approach flag.


2nd pick point: Pick new position.
Pre-punching hole and approach path are set to the new
position.
The prepunching hole is only moved along with if the tool
center point is identical with the start point of the approach flag.

The change to the approach flag depends on the position of the


first and second pick points:

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-163

1nd variant:
Shorten straight section of the approach path. Arc and transition
from arc to contour (contour entry) are retained.
Place first pick point near the start point of the approach flag.
Place second pick point on the approach flag in the direction of
the end point.
2nd variant:
Delete the approach path completely. Piercing or punching hole is
placed on the contour.
Place first pick point near the start point of the approach path.
Place second pick point on the end point of the approach path.
3rd variant:
Change arc radius. Start point and tangential transition are
retained.
Place first pick point near the transition from straight line to arc.
Place second pick point near the approach path in the direction
of the start point of the approach flag. The second pick point
describes a position on a nonexistent arc which is used for
calculating the new approach arc.

M Calculated center point of the circle


1.x = 1st pick point; 2.x = 2nd pick point (example)
Changing the radius of the arc of the approach flag

Fig. 12785

4th variant:
Approach arc is deleted; i.e. change in the approach path contour
from straight line with arc to straight line.
Place first pick point near the transition from straight line to arc.
Place second pick point on the end point of the approach path
(transition from arc to contour).

5-164

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

5th variant:
Create approach arc with straight approach path; i.e. change of the
contour of the approach path from straight line to straight line with
arc.
Place first pick point on the end point of a straight approach
path.
Place second pick point near the approach path. The second
pick point describes a position on a nonexistent arc which is
used for calculating the approach arc.

M Calculated center point of the circle


1.x = 1st pick point; 2.x = 2nd pick point (example)
Change the approach path

S354E52.DOC

12863

TECHNOLOGY module

5-165

Offsetting contour start


Function MODIFY,
CONTOUR START, OFFSET

As part of laser processing you can shift defined approach flags


with prepunching hole or piercing position .

Prerequisite: Approach flag is defined on a closed laser operation.


If a microjoint is defined at the end of the contour processing (only
one approach flag present), the microweb is also shifted and is
retained.
If there are a number of microjoint processes, the microjoint cannot
be shifted, as there is in this case no closed laser processing
element present.
Procedure:

1. pick: Select the desired position for the approach flag.


Preliminary punch hole and approach path are set in current
form to the new position.
2. Set pick outside the part: the approach path is generated at
the position desired according to the rules which are defined in
the selected rules data.
3. Set pick outside the part: The approach flag is set back to
the original position.
No processing may be selected with picks 2 and 3.

The following rules apply:

5-166

TECHNOLOGY module

You can also select rounded corners or corners with loops as


the start point. Looping or rounding are deleted.
Microjoints are shifted with an approach flag, for example.
Corners which become free are rounded or a loop is added,
depending on the rule group setting.
Disposals are deleted.
The collision test is activated by default during execution of this
function.

S354E52.DOC

Reversing processing direction


Function MODIFY,
PROCESSING DIRECTION,
INVERT

Inverting the direction of processing for open or closed contours to


be processed with the laser

Procedure:

1
2

Identify the processing operation

Contour element
Laser path

Approach flag with pre-punching


hole

Processing defined prior to inverting

Fig. 13573

The direction of processing is inverted. The suggestion for


inversion is displayed.
Picking the contour again activates display of all possible
suggestions one after the other. The last suggestion is identical
with the initial situation.

The programming system generates the following suggestions:


Inverting the operation with the form of the approach and
withdrawal elements being retained. The direction is changed.

1
2

Contour element
Laser path

Approach flag with pre-punching


hole

Suggestion for inversion: Direction is changed

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

Fig. 13574

5-167

2. Invert the processing operation while generating a completely


new approach and withdrawal flag under consideration of the
specifications of the rule group. In this suggestion, the form
and direction of the approach and withdrawal flag are changed.

1
2

Contour element
Laser path

Approach flag with pre-punching


hole

Suggestion for inversion: Direction and form are changed

Fig. 13575

3. The initial situation is offered again.

1
2

Contour element
Laser path

Approach flag with pre-punching


hole

Suggestion for inversion: Initial situation is displayed

Fig. 13573

If you mark the contour to be inverted by a box, the system


st
will offer you only one suggestion for inversion (1 inversion
suggestion).

Remarks:

Measuring points coupled to laser operations are not changed,


but retain their position in the processing sequence. They are
not changed.

5-168

Changeover points set on the contour will be modified


accordingly.

Any programmed removal other than manual removal will be


deleted.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Changing over processing operation


Function MODIFY,
PROCESSING,
CHANGEOVER
Switch height regulation on
and off.

Define laser processing operations with or without height regulation


and change contour size.

Procedure

Pick the start point on contour.


Identify the position for changeover point on the contour. The
sequence of changeover points must correspond to the
direction of processing.

In the following mask, specify:


"Initial situation": The current contour size (in the rule
group) is displayed.
"Height regulation": The current settings of the height
regulation system are displayed.
Settings in the "New value" area are made automatically.
Confirm your selection with OK.

Identify the end point of changeover.

The changeover points are displayed. Their positions are marked


by the symbol for the changeover function.

Representation on the
screen
Height regulation:

Changeover on the contour of the height regulation is displayed by


a particular symbol: line type solid, colour green.

1
2

Contour element
Processing without height
regulation

3
4

Processing with height regulation


Processing direction

Symbol for height regulation changeover

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

Fig. 13586

5-169

Remarks:

Change contour size

This function can also be used for approach and withdrawal


flags. The selected function is then effective for the complete
flag. Changeover within the flag is not possible.
Changeover from cutting with height regulation to cutting without height regulation and vice versa within one contour
element is possible.

The system determines whether the contour is large or small


during processing definition. The data is taken from the rule group
for processing definition accordingly, and the contour is processed
with the parameters from the laser table.
This function allows you to change contour size interactively and
thereby call up other cutting data.
Example: A contour is composed of long and short complex
elements. It is advisable to work with different cutting parameters
when processing a contour with different contour elements.

Procedure:
Select function and observe instructions in the command line:
Pick the start point on contour.
The current contour size is displayed in the following mask. The
contour size being changed over to is displayed in the "New
value" display area.
Pick end point.
The change in contour size is marked by a vertical line on the
screen. The contour size is indicated by the arrow size:
Large arrow: large contour
Small arrow small contour

5-170

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Stretching laser processing


Function MODIFY,
PROCESSING, STRETCH

Extending or shortening laser cutting operations


This function allows linear or circular laser cutting operations to be
extended or shortened at any element point. Approach or withdrawal elements and changeover points are modified correspondingly.

Procedure:

Select the function.


Follow the instructions given in the command line.

Enter numerical value (stretching increment):


A positive numerical value means stretching (extending) the
processing
With a negative value, processing is shortened.

Pick the start and end points of the processing operation.

Applications:
Partial processing of a contour, e. g. with manual definition of common slitting cuts or if a contour does not have to be processed
completely.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-171

Using drawing tools


DRAWING TOOLS control
function:

Functions for creating and deleting construction geometry are


stored in DRAWING TOOLS.
Construction geometry refers to geometry elements which help you
draft drawings.

Geometry representation

Construction lines are always represented as infinite, construction


circles always as full circles.

Line type and colour

Construction geometry is displayed on the screen in red and line


type dotted.

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


CONSTRUCTION LINE

The functions for creating construction lines are:

Function 2 POINTS: Drawing construction lines with 2 points


Function PARALLEL: Drawing parallel construction lines
Function HORIZONTAL and function VERTICAL: Drawing horizontal and vertical construction lines
Function TAN PT: Drawing tangents as construction lines on
arc and point
Function PERPENDICULAR: Drawing perpendicular construction lines
Function ANGLE X: Drawing a construction line with a point
and angle of inclination
Function TAN2: Drawing tangents to 2 arc elements as construction lines.
Function ANGLE/LINE: Drawing a construction line with a point
and an angle to the base line
Function DIVISION: Dividing element using construction line

The description of the individual functions can be found in


the module DRAWINGsee: "Generating construction geometry".

5-172

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE

The functions for creating construction circles are:

Function 3 POINTS: Drawing a construction circle with


three points
Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing a construction circle with
a center and radius
Function DIAMETER: Drawing a construction circle with
diameter
Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing construction circle using
center point and diameter
Function CONCENTRIC: Drawing concentric construction
circles
Function TAN2 PT: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
2 elements
Function TAN 2PTS: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
an element and two points
Function TAN 3: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
3 elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle tangential to one element and center point
The description of the individual functions can be found in
the module DRAWINGsee: "Generating construction geometry".

Function DRAWING TOOLS:


DELETE CONSTRUCTION
GEO

This function can be used to delete existing construction geometry


part by part or completely.

Procedure:
Delete construction geometry completely: Pick ALL.
Delete construction geometry part by part: Pick the elements
individually.
Select the TOTAL function (foot bar) after executing this
function or change the window setting in order to reset the
screen.

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


MEASURE

The construction functions for measuring are:

Function 2 POINTS: Measuring the distance between 2 points


Function POINT: Measuring the coordinates of a point
Function HORIZONTAL: Measuring the horizontal distance
between two points
Function VERTICAL: Measuring the vertical distance between
two points
Function CIRCLE: Measuring the center point coordinates and
the radius of a circle
Function ANGLE: Measuring angle
The description of the individual functions can be found in
the module DRAWINGsee: "Measurement".

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-173

Calling up information
Function GENERATE, INFO

Call up and view information on an operation. The INFO function is


offered if any of the following is selected:
Control function GENERATE
Control function EXTRAS:
Control function SMALL PARTS:
Control function SHEET:
Control function MODIFY:

Procedure:
Click on INFORMATION function.
Pick the relevant operation with the mouse. A message list
where you can receive detailed information on "Processing"
and "Technology" will be displayed.

Deleting processing operations and parts


You will find the functions with which processing operations can be
deleted in the menu for the
GENERATE control function.
Control function EXTRAS:
Control function SMALL PARTS:
Control function SHEET:
Control function MODIFY:

Delete processing operation


directly

Function DELETE, PROCESSING

Procedure: Select the processing operation to be deleted. Pick an


individual processing operation. Or: Open a box. Or: Select the
menu field ALL to delete the screen contents completely.
Effect: The selected processing operations are shown in magenta.
Confirm the deletion by pressing OK.
If processing operations are deleted individually, then the
traverse paths between the neighboring operations will be
updated automatically. If processing operations are grouped
in a box when deleting, then the traverse paths will not be
automatically updated.
Operations in compulsory sequences cannot be deleted.
First break up the compulsory sequence, then delete the
processing operation.

5-174

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Delete selected processing


operation

Function DELETE, SELECTION, index card "Processing"


This function allows you to make a targeted selection of objects to
be deleted. A mask is opened for this purpose:

"Positioning path": Delete positioning path without the


processing operation allocated.
Pick the positioning path or mark it with a box after closing the
mask.

"Tool": Delete entire processing operation of the active tool.


Prerequisite: Tool has been activated.

Delete parts of the layout

"Disposal": Delete disposal of a part. Close the mask and pick


the processing operation on which the symbol for disposal is
defined.

"All processing operations for part": Delete entire processing of


a single part.
Identify the single part or mark it with a box after closing the
mask.

Function DELETE, SELECTION, index card "Layout"


This index card is only offered in sheet mode.
It contains the option to delete parts from the present layout.

"Multi-copy processing": Delete entire multi-copy processing. If


several multi-copy processing sections are present on the
sheet, identify the multi-copy processing section you wish to
delete. To do so, click on a part in the multi-copy processing
section.
"Sheet area": Delete parts on the entire sheet.
"External area": Delete part which are located outside of the
sheet.
"All": Delete all parts on the screen.

Select the desired radio button. The corresponding parts are


deleted.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-175

11.

Multifunction processing operation


with the laser

Multifunction processing in laser mode refers to processing


definitions that can be programmed by combining certain functions.
Two frequently defined processing operations are described here
as examples:

Trimming with the laser


Manual definition of common parting cuts

Trimming with the laser


Requirements:

Your sheet layout requires trimming of the parts, as is the case


with common parting cuts.

Elements that have to be trimmed may not be processed in


single part mode.

Trimming can be defined in sheet mode only.

Default settings for laser cutting:

5-176

TECHNOLOGY module

Select menu LASER PROCESSING, MANUAL with "Cutting


start" BEAM ON.
Any table suitable for the type and thickness of the material to
be processed may be selected as laser technology table.
Rule group: "At will": It is, however, advisable to select a rule
containing withdrawal.

S354E52.DOC

Procedure
Example:

1
3

Sheet
Trimming cut on sheet

Single part

Trimming when using common slitting cuts

Fig. 14144

1. Define sheet layout.


Important: Only elements that are visible can be selected for
trimming. Activate the SYMBOL function button at the bottom
of the mask.
2. Select the function GENERATE, GEOMETRY, MULTIELEMENT (menu for LASER PROCESSING, MANUAL).
Now identify all elements to be included in laser cutting for
trimming either individually or by placing them in a box. The
identifying sequence is not relevant.
The selected elements will be displayed in magenta colour.
A marked element can be deselected by clicking on it again.
3. Pick the start point for element processing.
The laser cut for trimming the composed contour is made
automatically.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-177

4. Extend the processing operations at their beginning and end


using the function MODIFY, PROCESSING; STRETCH.
Extend the laser cut after the approach path and before the
withdrawal path, e. g. by approx. 3 mm. Switching of the height
regulation can then be defined on this path.
5. Modify the approach and withdrawal flags:Select the function
MODIFY, APPROACH/WITHDRAWAL, MODIFY.
Change the direction of processing of the approach and withdrawal paths, so that they are positioned toward the sheet
edge.
An optimum course of the cut can be generated by adding an
arc to a linear approach and withdrawal element.
Note: It is advantageous to select a rule with the following
features:
Approach: at corner with line/arc
at element with line/arc
Withdrawal: at corner with line/arc
at element with line/arc
6. Extend approach and withdrawal flag: Function MODIFY,
PROCESSING, STRETCH
If the approach element begins or the withdrawal element ends
inside the sheet area, you must extend it beyond the sheet
edge.
Note: It is advantageous to select a rule with the following
features:
Approaching and withdrawal: select a relatively great maximum
length; take into account the margin specified for sheet layout.

1
3

Sheet
Cut on sheet

Stretching the approach path

5-178

TECHNOLOGY module

2
4

Single part
Extended approach path on sheet
Fig. 14145

S354E52.DOC

1
3

Sheet
Cut on sheet

2
4

Single part
Extended withdrawal path on
sheet

Stretching the withdrawal path

Fig. 14146

7. Activate or deactivate the height regulation: Select the function


MODIFY, PROCESSING, CHANGEOVER.
The beginning and the end of the trimming cut are outside the
sheet area. As the height regulation is normally activated for
cutting, it must be deactivated in time at the beginning and end
of the cut.
The height regulation is activated or deactivated at the
extended part of the contour. The approach and withdrawal
elements are always processed completely without height
regulation.

Deactivating the height regulation


at the beginning of the cut
Fig. 14148

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-179

Deactivating the height regulation


at the end of the cut

Deactivating the height regulation

Fig. 14149

8. Determine the sheet thickness: The function EXTRAS, NC


FUNCTIONS, MEASURING POINT.
A measuring point must be defined in the area of the sheet
where the cut starts, as the beginning of the cut is outside the
sheet and the first part of the cut is executed without height
regulation. The measuring point is inserted before the laser
processing begins.

Activating the height regulation at


the beginning of the cut

Define measuring point for sheet


thickness determination
Fig. 14147

5-180

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

9. .Specify removal: Select the MANUAL REMOVAL, SMALL


PARTS function.
A manual removal is defined at the end of the trimming cut. A
manual stop is programmed for this.

Deactivating the height regulation


at the end of the cut

Define manual stop for removal

Fig. 14150

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-181

Manual definition of common slitting cuts


with the laser
Prerequisite:
Sheet layout has been done. Web widths in X and Y direction were
chosen according to the kerf width of the laser (= beam diameter).
The kerf width of the laser cut is stored in the laser technology
table in the DATA module.

Presettings for laser cutting:

Select BEAM ON in the menu LASER PROCESSING,


MANUAL with "Cutting start" .
Any laser technology table compatible with the material and
material thickness can be selected. Make sure it contains the
required kerf width.
Rule group: It is advantageous to select a rule group in which a
withdrawal is already defined and which generates no loops or
rounded corners.

Procedure:
1. In single part mode: Define single part processing
The processing operation for all single contours is defined in
single part mode. Outside contours are processed only
partially.
Process outer contour elements of a part which have common
parting cut edges with adjacent parts with the laser.
The outer contour of parts which are located for example in the
outer area of a multi-copy processing operation are processed
in sheet mode with trimming.
You then transfer the parts processed in different ways in
single part mode interactively onto the sheet layout (Function
TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET).

Note: Trimming is usually done before the actual separation of


the parts. This means that the edge of the material moves
directly up to the part to be separated. You must take this into
consideration during processing definition in single part mode.

5-182

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

1
3

Sheet edge
Edge of single part

2
4

Single part
Common parting cut

Trim parts

Fig. 14151

2. Specify separation of the parts: Select the function GENERATE, GEOMETRY, CONTOUR or ELEMENT.
Identify elements for separation. Selecting the first element
also specifies the processing direction.
Note: The laser cut begins at the edge of the sheet if trimming
has been done.
3. Modify the approach and withdrawal flags: Select the function
MODIFY, APPROACH/WITHDRAWAL, MODIFY.
If the approach and withdrawal flag has not already been
placed in the desired direction, this can be changed. You can
also add an arc at this point so that an ideal approach and
withdrawal is generated.
4. Program height regulation: Select the function MODIFY,
PROCESSING, CHANGEOVER.
The cutting start and end are no longer located on the sheet.
Because cutting is usually done with height regulation, the
height regulation must be deactivated promptly at the
beginning and end of cutting.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-183

1
3

Single part
Switch on height regulation.

Common parting cut

Switching on height regulation

Fig. 14152

5. Specify measuring point: Select the function EXTRAS, NC


FUNCTIONS, MEASURING POINT.
Because the laser cut begins outside of the sheet, the current
sheet thickness should be measured before cutting. Define a
measuring point near the edge of the sheet before the laser
cut.

Single part
Switch on height regulation.

Place measuring point

2
4

Common parting cut


Define measuring point:
Fig. 14153

6. Define removal of the part: Select the SMALL PARTS function.


Define the desired removal for the part at the end of the laser
cut.

5-184

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

7. Define
compulsory sequences
if
necessary.Function
GENERATE, COMPULSORY SEQ, SET
If the outer contour is specified by sections in several laser
cuts, it is advisable to specify the desired sequence of laser
cuts using a compulsory sequence. Use: Separation of parts is
more user-friendly.
Important: Note the subsequent sorting strategy when
defining laser processing.

Further procedure
After defining the processing in single part mode, the transfer of
the processing to the sheet takes place selectively; i.e. the
processing is only transferred to suitable parts of the sheet.
In this procedure, only parts which require a different processing
definition are now processed.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-185

12.

Laying out sheet

In ToPS, you can do sheet layout in both the NEST and TECHNOLOGY modules.
Lay out sheet in NEST
module

Lay out sheet in


TECHNOLOGY module

Single part drawings (with or without processing) or drawings of


mini-nests are the basis for nesting. Sheet layout is dine either
manually or using nesting processors. Specify the sheet size and
how many of which parts is to be placed on the sheet.
A drawing of the nested sheet is generated. You can load this
sheet as a drawing in the TECHNOLOGY module and define the
processing.

Sheet layout is done in a different way in the technology module.


You have several options in selecting the layout strategy:

Simple multi-copy
processing

Simple multi-copy processing


Sectional multi-copy processing:

The same part is on the sheet multiple times.

Simple multi-copy processing

Sectional multi-copy
processing

5-186

Fig. 5883

Specify sections of the sheet in which a part is placed on the sheet


several times. This layout method also allows you to carry out all
layout strategies on the sheet. Example: One section is defined
with multi-copy processing and another with nested parts.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Sectional multi-copy processing

Initial blank

Fig. 5884

A single part is placed on the sheet.

Initial blank

Layout

Control functions

Fig. 4773

Sheet layout is primarily defined using the control functions for the
main function LAYOUT. The following control functions are
available:

CREATE: Lay out the sheet with parts in simple or sectional


multi-copy processing.
MODIFY: Modify section properties, move section, compare
geometry.
MODIFY SHEET: modify sheet dimensions.
LOAD: Specify loading position.
MODIFY PART: change number of parts, move or rotate parts.
CLAMP: Change clamp positions.
DRAWING TOOLS: Create construction geometries and select
measurement functions.

Display on the screen:


By default, only the first 2 or 4 parts of a multi-copy processing
section are displayed with geometry and processing. All other parts
are represented as symbols (=surrounding rectangle). You can
change this display at any time using the SYMBOL function button
at the bottom of the mask.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-187

Specifying sheet data


Sheet data is queried
automatically.

The sheet data (dimensions of the sheet, material) is requested


automatically as soon as a sheet is loaded.
You only need to select the function FILE, NEW in the main
window bar if you wish to define a new sheet with a new layout and
processing.
Enter new sheet data
Select the function FILE, NEW to define a new sheet. A mask is
opened for this purpose:

Procedure:
You must make the following entries:
Sheet size
Material thickness
Material designation The material designation must correspond
with the entries in the database (DATA module).
PARAMETER: You specify here
whether you want non-scratch processing operation or not.
Non-scratch processing means: The stripper is positioned
approx. 1 mm higher during processing.
Specify the sheet type: normal sheet, uneven sheet or formed sheet?
For the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster: MODIFY "Lift parameter".
Do you wish to use the sheet detector?
Should the sheet be stripped?
Output type: direct or preparatory?
Change speed.
Change acceleration.
To keep from having to type everything in: select the material by
clicking in the display field or selecting the "Arrow" symbol.. Effect:
The dimensions from the database are entered in all other entry
fields.
Define sheet processing

5-188

Effect: Existing screen displays are deleted and the new sheet is
displayed in the specified size. An insertion symbol (red star) is
drawn inside the sheet. This symbol is important for defining the
processing operation when dealing with resetting motions See:
"Repositioning".
The sheet is loaded centered by default. The loading position and
the sheet size can be changed later (see: the function FILE,
SETUP SHEET or the menu SHEET LAYOUT, function LOAD or
the function MODIFY SHEET.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Creating sheet layout


A multi-copy processing section can be formed in two ways.
Variant 1: All part on the sheet are aligned in the same way.
Variant 2: The parts within the multi-copy processing section are
placed so that optimum utilization of the area is achieved. The
parts are rotated for this if necessary.
Multi-copy processing:
simple

Definition: The entire sheet is used as the basis for sheet layout.
The sheet is not divided into different sections. Instead: Sheet size
= section size of the multi-copy processing section.

Simple multi-copy processing (variant 1)

Function CREATE, SIMPLE

Fig. 7270

Prerequisite You must have already loaded one or more parts to


define a multi-copy processing section.

Procedure
1. Select the function. A mask for entering margins and webs
opens automatically.
2. Enter dimensions for outer margins and webs. Close the mask
with OK.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-189

1
2
3
4

Left margin
Upper margin
Right margin
Lower margin

5
6

Web width in Y direction = part spacing


Web width in X direction = part spacing

Margins and webs

Fig. 4412

3. Define unit to be the basis fir multi-copy processing. E.g. pick


part, or pick several parts one after the other, or group several
parts in a box.
4. Complete part selection with OK.

Effect: Sheet is laid out. The parts located inside the sheet are
taken into account in the generation of the NC program. You can
delete these parts before NC generation using the functions
DELETE, PART or SELECTION, index card "LAYOUT" ("Outer
area" radio button).

Multi-copy processing:
sectional

Definition: Define different rectangular sections to be filled with


parts.

Sectional multi-copy processing

Function CREATE,
SECTIONAL

5-190

Fig. 5884

Prerequisite You must have already loaded several parts to place


parts in the sections.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Procedure:
1. Select the function. A mask for entering margins and webs
opens automatically.
2. Enter dimensions for outer margins and webs. The dimensions
refer to the multi-copy processing sections (in comparison: In
definition of a simple multi-copy processing section, these
specifications refer to the sheet, see: Simple multi-copy processing). Close the mask with OK.
3. Define unit (e.g. part or pick several parts one after the other or
group parts in a box) which should be the basis for the multicopy processing.
4. Complete part selection with OK.
5. Define section orenter the number of parts in the X direction
and Y direction. The multi-copy processing sections are usually
defined inside the sheet. But: Any placement on the screen
can be used to achieve ideal layout.

Effect: The section is displayed on-screen with layout.


Applications: This function is usually used to place several parts in
several multi-copy processing sections on the sheet. Other possibilities are shown in the following example:

Sectional multi-copy processing

Fig. 7269

Explanation of sheet: The upper left corner is occupied by a nested


sheet (500x500). Multi-copy processing sections are also defined.
The parts of the nested sheet are treated as single parts. The
section where these pats are located is not a multi-copy processing
section.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-191

Modifying sheet layout


Change web widths

MODIFY function: SECTION PROPERTIES, WEB WIDTH


Change web widths within a multi-copy processing section.

Procedure:
Enter the web width in the X and Y direction.
Select multi-copy processing: Pick part within the multi-copy
processing section.

Breaking up multiple-copy
section

MODIFY function: SECTION PROPERTIES, BREAK UP


Break up group of several parts in a multi-copy processing section.

Procedure: Select multi-copy processing: Pick a part within the


multi-copy processing section to do so.
Application You have to use this function if you wish to move parts
which belong to a multi-copy processing section. It is possible to
copy parts without breaking up the multi-copy processing section.

Modify rows and columns

MODIFY function: SECTION PROPERTIES, ROWS


MODIFY function: SECTION PROPERTIES, COLUMNS
Rotate position of parts within a multi-copy processing section by
180 according to rows or columns.

Procedure:
A mask opens.
Select the row or column whose parts you wish to rotate: Odd
or even numbered? Confirm with OK.
Select multi-copy processing: Pick a part within the multi-copy
processing section.
Application This function is good to use for generating technologyoriented positioning. Example: Place parts with notches next to
each other in such a way that the notches can be processed
simultaneously.

5-192

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Move section

MODIFY function: MOVE SECTION, 2 POINTS or HORIZONTAL


or VERTICAL
An entire multi-copy processing section can be changed in position
with this function.
These function correspond for the most part with the functions for
modifying geometry elements. The procedure is described in the
chapter on the DRAWING module (see: "Modifying geometry").

Compare geometry

MODIFY function: GEO COMPARER


The functions in the GEO COMPARER menu allow you to do the
following:

Function COMPARE PART: Compare geometries of two parts


(source part, target part) and transfer the processing operation
of one part to the other.

and

Function REPLACE PART: Replace a part in a sheet layout.

Mask with sheet layout and menu:

Mask with example

S354E52.DOC

Fig. 18830

TECHNOLOGY module

5-193

Example:
The sheet layout in the mask depicted above is intended as an
example. The section markings are for orientation and are not
visible to you on-screen in ToPs 300.
Four multi-copy processing sections (1-4) are defined on the sheet:
The parts in multi-copy processing sections 1 and 2 are almost
identical. They differ only in one geometry: The parts in section 1
have an arc and the parts in section 2 have a square at the same
position. The parts in multi-copy processing sections 3 and 4 are
identical.

Application: to modify existing geometries with processing


operations in the single parts on an existing sheet quickly and
easily, or even to replace parts of a complete multi-copy processing section with a different part quickly and conveniently.

Comparing geometry
All closed contours, texts and points are compared with their
processing operations. Processing operation in the target part are
deleted because processing operations of the original part (source
part) act as a model. They are transferred to the target part.
If geometries exist in the source part but not in the target part, or
vice-versa, no comparison can be made of the geometries. These
geometries are not modified. They are retained unchanged in the
target part.
Open contours are not taken into account in the comparison.

Procedure:

Select the LAYOUT function. Activate the MODIFY control


function button in the menu. The menu functions for MODIFY
are displayed.

5-194

Select the TECHNOLOGY module. Load single parts or nested


sheet.

Select the COMPARE PART function. The following mask


opens:

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Specifying parameters for geometry comparison

Fig. 19026

Specify by clicking the check boxes:

"Observe position": The form, position, angle position and


geometry are considered in the comparison. The function
also checks whether the geometry has the same reference
point.

"Retain compulsory sequence": Should processing


sequences which exist as compulsory sequences be
retained as such or should they be broken up?
Confirm your choice with OK. The geometry comparison is
started.

Identify the source and target parts by clicking with the mouse:
Follow the instructions in the command line:
Source part: is the part whose processing is to be adopted.
Target part: is the part which should receive the processing.
The selected parts will be displayed in magenta colour.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-195

Replacing geometries and


parts

Procedure:

Select the TECHNOLOGY module. Load single parts or nested


sheet.

Select the LAYOUT function. Activate the MODIFY control


function button in the menu. The menu functions for MODIFY
are displayed.

Replacing parts

Fig. 19027

In this example, a single part with processing was loaded. This part
is intended to replace the parts in multi-copy processing section 1.

Select the REPLACE PART function.


Follow the instructions in the command line:
First identify the new part ("source part"), then the part to be
replaced ("target part").
Should the angular position of the part to be replaced be
taken into account? Enter 1 for YES and 0 for NO. Confirm
with RETURN
Do you want to replace anther part? If yes, identify the part;
if no, end the action with OK.
The identified parts will be displayed in magenta colour. The
parts on the sheet are replaced when the action is ended.

5-196

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Parts in multi-copy processing section 1 are replaced

Fig. 19028

Always observe: When you replace part, you must ensure


that the outer dimensions of the parts correspond. If the
outer dimensions differ, it can cause geometry violations or
the sheet area will not be utilized optimally. The webs
between the parts can become wider than is necessary,
because the webs are not adapted to the new external
dimensions of the parts.
You can change the selection of identified parts interactively.

Procedure:

specify whether the angular position is to be taken into


account. The parts of the multi-copy processing section are
now displayed in magenta.

Now click on the parts which are not to be replaced or to be


replaced separately. The color display changes again: These
parts are marked in white again.

S354E52.DOC

Identify the part to be replaced and

Complete the action with OK. Now only those parts which you
have not interactively excluded are replaced.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-197

Modifying sheet dimensions


Function MODIFY SHEET: DIMENSIONS
Modify the dimensions of the sheet.

Procedure The sheet data is entered in a mask. The default dimensions from the database (material data) are preset. You must
overwrite this data if do not wish to work with the standard data.
Effect: The sheet is drawn enlarged or reduced. An already
existing sheet layout is not changed.

Changing the loading position


Function LOAD: LOADING POS.
Change the loading position of the sheet. The sheet is loaded
centered by default. You can change the loading position.

Procedure

Select the function. A mask is opened.

Select how the loading position is to be changed in the mask:

Index pin no.: Enter the number of the index pin.


Number 1 = without lift
Number 2 = with lift
The pin number must always be changed when you switch
between loading with the lift and manual loading (or viceversa).

Should the sheet be loaded from the center?

TECHNOLOGY module

Loading side (point of view: in front of the machine) left or


right? Effect: The sheet is loaded as far to the left or right
as possible.

5-198

Type of loading: manually or using lift? (only if lift is


available)

Should the processing be anti-scratch?

S354E52.DOC

Changing number of parts and part position


Control function MODIFY
PART

The control function MODIFY PART contains menu functions with


which you
can move or rotate the original,
or
make copies of the original and be able to simultaneously
move or rotate them.

Procedure:

Decide whether you wish to modify the original or make a


copy.Click the display field or the "Arrow" symbol.
If you select "Copy",specify the number of copies.

Select the modification function (menu function).Follow the


instructions in the command line.

Breakdown of separate modification functions:


Move part

Rotate parts

Function MOVE, 2 POINTS: Move part (original or copy) by


two parts.
Function MOVE, HORIZONTAL: Move part horizontally.
Function MOVE, VERTICAL: Move part vertically.
Function ROTATE, 2 POINTS: Rotate geometry around two
points.
Function ROTATE, CENTER: Rotate geometry around a
center point.

The individual menu functions correspond for the most part with
the functions which are described in the DRAWING module see:
"Moving geometry" and "Rotating geometry".

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-199

Changing clamps
Function SHEET LAYOUT, MANUAL, control function CLAMP:
In the menu for manual sheet layout, you can change the clamp
positions and the dead strip display.

Change clamp position

Function CLAMP: MOVE:


Set clamp to another position.
The clamp itself is not displayed on screen, but rather the clamp
dead range.

Procedure

Display/hide dead strips

Pick clamp.
Pick the position to which the clamp is to be moved (target
position).

Function CLAMP: DEAD STRIPS


Hide or display clamp dead strips on the screen.
The term "dead strip" refers to the entire collision area between the
clamps and the inserted tool. No processing can take place in the
dead strip.
The dead strip is marked by a yellow line on the screen.

Procedure

5-200

TECHNOLOGY module

Pick function: Dead strip is displayed.


Pick the function again: Dead strip is hidden.

S354E52.DOC

Using drawing tools


DRAWING TOOLS control
function:

Functions for creating and deleting construction geometry are


located in the DRAWING TOOLS menu.
Construction geometry refers to geometry elements which help you
draft drawings.

Geometry representation

Construction lines are always represented as infinite, construction


circles always as full circles.

Line type and colour

Construction geometry is displayed on the screen in red and line


type dotted.

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


CONSTRUCTION LINE

The functions for creating construction lines are:

Function 2 POINTS: Drawing construction lines with 2 points


Function PARALLEL: Drawing parallel construction lines
Function HORIZONTAL and function VERTICAL: Drawing
horizontal and vertical construction lines
Function TAN PT: Drawing tangents as construction lines on
arc and point
Function PERPENDICULAR: Drawing perpendicular construction lines
Function ANGLE X: Drawing a construction line with a point
and angle of inclination
Function TAN2: Drawing tangents to 2 arc elements as construction lines
Function ANGLE/LINE: Drawing a construction line with a point
and an angle to the base line
Function DIVISION: Dividing element using construction line

The description of the individual functions can be found in


the module DRAWINGsee: "Measurement". Creating
construction geometry.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-201

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE

The functions for creating construction circles are:

Function 3 POINTS: Drawing a construction circle with three


points
Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing a construction circle with
a center and radius
Function DIAMETER: Drawing a construction circle with
diameter
Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing construction circle using
center point and diameter
Function CONCENTRIC: Drawing concentric construction
circles
Function TAN2 PT: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
2 elements
Function TAN 2PTS: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
an element and two points
Function TAN 3: Drawing a construction circle tangential to 3
elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle
tangential to one element and center point
The description of the individual functions can be found in
the module DRAWINGsee: "Measurement". "Creating
construction geometry".

Function DRAWING TOOLS:


DELETE CONSTRUCTION
GEO

This function can be used to delete existing construction geometry


part by part or completely.

Procedure:
Delete construction geometry completely: Pick ALL.
Delete construction geometry part by part: Pick the elements
individually.
Select the TOTAL function (foot bar) after executing this
function or change the window setting in order to reset the
screen.

Function DRAWING TOOLS,


MEASURE

The construction functions for measuring are:

Function 2 POINTS: Measuring the distance between 2 points


Function POINT: Measuring the coordinates of a point
Function HORIZONTAL: Measuring the horizontal distance
between two points
Function VERTICAL: Measuring the vertical distance between
two points
Function CIRCLE: Measuring the center point coordinates and
the radius of a circle
Function ANGLE: Measuring angle
The description of the individual functions can be found in
the module DRAWINGsee: "Measurement". Measuring

5-202

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Sheet layout: Delete functions


Delete part.

Function PART, DELETE


Prerequisite: The part to be deleted my not be in a multi-copy
processing section. To delete parts from a multi-copy processing
section you must first break up the multi-copy processing section.

Procedure Pick part.


Effect: Part is deleted together with processing.

Delete layout

Function DELETE, SELECTION.


Delete particular parts. A mask is opened for this purpose: Select:

"Multi-copy processing": Delete parts of a multi-copy processing section. If several multi-copy processing sections are
present on the sheet, identify the multi-copy processing section
you wish to delete. To do so, click on a part in the multi-copy
processing section.
"Sheet section": Delete parts on the entire sheet.
"External area": Delete part which are located outside of the
sheet.
"All": Delete all parts.

Select the desired radio button. The corresponding parts are


deleted.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-203

13.

Optimizing sheet processing

The processing of the complete sheet is optimized. The optimizing


concept is based on the following goals: as few tool changes as
possible, exact parts, controlled NC programs and to create short
NC programs.
Please observe the
following points

The selected cutting order of single parts can only be taken


into account if a removal operation was defined for all parts,
e.g. removal via flap/chute, removal via TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster or manual removal.

When operations are sorted, reference is always made to the


part or the contour. If operations are now copied, this
processing reference will be lost, as copying involves only
processing operations. It is therefore generally wise not to copy
processing operations!
Compulsory sequences have lost significance in the optimum
processing sequence. Operations generally no longer have to
be defined in compulsory sequences. Example: Contours which
contain a removal component are now automatically sorted etc.
Compulsory sequences which you define in the PUNCH
PROCESSING, GENERATE or LASER PROCESSING,
GENERATE menu are retained during automatic sheet
optimization. You should therefore use them specifically in
conjunction with the sheet optimization, as they compromise
the options available with the optimization processor.

5-204

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Procedure:
Optimization

Prerequisite:
A sheet processing operation is defined.

Function OPTIMIZE SHEET,


AUTOMATIC, CALCULATE,
START

Function OPTIMIZE SHEET,


MANUAL, START

Optimize sheet automatically.


The options are offered as index cards. You can choose between:
Index card "Grid" Sheet processing with grid processing
Index card "Row by row": Row by row processing of parts on
the sheet within a multiple-copy function
"Flexible" index card Arranging sheet processing flexibly

Optimize sheet manually. The following control functions for doing


this are available:

S354E52.DOC

REARRANGE: Rearrange processing operations on the basis


of the corresponding tools.
INTERACTIVE: Define sheet optimization manually using
individual functions.
SIMULATION: Simulate sheet processing on the screen.
DRAWING TOOLS: Create help geometries and use
measurement functions.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-205

Setting the general conditions


Whenever an index card is selected, a mask will appear allowing
you to define the general conditions for the processing sequence.
Each index card has the same structure. Three areas allow you to
define the following:

Separation sequence of parts on the sheet: serpentine form,


row by row, column by column etc.
The part cutting sequences are displayed in graphic form, and
can be selected by clicking with the mouse.

Serpentine: The separation sequence of the parts reverses


at the end of every row.

Fig. 4424

Row by row: Process all parts in a row.

Fig. 4425

Column by column: Process all parts in a column.

Fig. 4417

5-206

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Function buttons in the


mask for the index cards

Cutting strategies for parts (only for index cards ROW BY


ROW and FLEXIBLE): Separating parts part by part or row by
row, process complete rows or optimized to tool change.
Parameters for NC program: Create short or a fast NC
program.

Function buttonCANCEL
The process is terminated.
Function button CONTINUE
A sub-mask is displayed in which you can accept the suggested
tool sequence as a system proposal or edit them.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-207

Optimizing sheet processing as grid


processing
Index card "Grid"

For grid production, you can set:

"Direction": Select cutting sequence of parts on the sheet


(as seen from: behind the machine.
Serpentine form front left to back right (default setting)
Serpentine form from back right to front left
The serpentine processing direction can be altered via the
MODIFY button.

Standard procedure dictates separation part by part. Select the


"Process parts completely" strategy if every part is to be processed completely and removed.

These settings effect all tools which are presently used.


"Parameter":
"Short program": The optimizer searches for repeating
processing patterns within a part and generates a proposal
for possible subroutines based on them. The starting
corner is positioned within a part. Result generation of a
short NC program.
"Fast NC program": The sequence of sheet operations is
sorted according to time over the entire sheet. The starting
corner is positioned within the sheet. Result generation of
a fast NC program which is generally not "short".

If a multiple tool-change is present after a tool-optimized


sorting of the operations, then the actual sequence of tools
will be issued as a report list.

5-208

Function button CONTINUE The tool sequence for operation is


listed. You can now sort or rearrange the tools.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Optimizing row by row sheet processing


Index card "Row by row":

You can set the following for row by row processing of a multi-copy
processing section on the sheet:

"Direction": Select cutting sequence for parts on the sheet (as


seen from behind the machine).
Serpentine form from front left to back right (standard
setting) and serpentine form front right to back left.
Row by row: each row from left to right or vice-versa and
from top to bottom
Column by column: each column from top to bottom and
from left to right
The separation sequence can be changed with the
MODIFY function button.

"Strategy": Define cutting strategy.


How are the parts to be separated from the sheet?
"Separating part by part": The part is completely cut out
and then removed.
"Separating row by row": Processing of outside contour,
which contains removal, is carried out in rows. The other
outside contour elements are processed within a row
according to optimum time plan.
If the parts are to be cut out in multiple copies with an open
flap, this cutting strategy must be selected for single parts.
How should the sheet be processed?
Optimized tool-change: The tools are employed in a
sequence which ensures that (where possible) only 1 toolchange takes place per tool.
If a multiple tool-change is present after a tool-optimized
sorting of the operations, then the actual sequence of tools
will be issued as a report list.

S354E52.DOC

Complete rows: Each row is processed to completion with


all tools.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-209

Combination of the processing strategies is possible.


Example: "Cut row by row" and "Opt. tool change"
1. Processing of the parts is such that (where possible) only 1
tool-change takes place per tool. The parts are, however,
cut out and removed in rows.
2. "Separating part by part", "Rows completely".
In this example, rows are processed completely with all
tools; only the separation of parts takes place within these
rows. This requires multiple change of tools.

"Parameter": What sort of NC program is to be generated?


"Short program": The optimizer searches for repeating processing patterns within a part and generates a proposal for
possible subroutines from them. The starting corner is
positioned within a part. Result generation of a short NC
program.
"Fast NC program": The sequence of sheet operations is
sorted according to time over the entire sheet. The starting
corner is positioned within the sheet. Result generation of
a fast NC program which is generally not "short".
These settings effect all tools which are used.

Function button CONTINUE The tool sequence for operation is


listed. You can now sort or rearrange the tools.

5-210

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Arranging flexible sheet processing


"Flexible" index card

This optimization option can be used for sheets with and without
multiple-copy areas. It is also independent of whether a nested
sheet was created using the RECTANGULAR nesting processor or
the free geometry processor.

This "flexible optimization option" also allows


interactive correction of the parts sequence and
interactive specification of parts groups.
(What are part groups? See: description in the following
pages "Defining part groups")

Specify:

"Strategy": Specify cutting strategy.


"Separating part by part": The part is completely separated
and then removed.
"Separating row by row": Processing of outside contour,
which contains removal, is carried out in rows. The other
outside contour elements are processed within a row
according to optimum time plan.
"Slitting tool part by part": yes or no?
Should processing of the inner contours with the slitting
tool be done immediately before separation of the part with
the slitting tool?
This function can only be selected in combination with "Cut
part by part".

S354E52.DOC

"Direction": Select cutting sequence of parts on the sheet (as


seen from behind the machine).
Serpentine from front left to back right (default setting)
Serpentine from back right to front left
The separation sequence can be changed with the MODIFY
function button.

"Parameter": What sort of NC program is to be generated?


"Short program": The optimizer searches for repeating
processing patterns within a part and generates a proposal
for possible subroutines from them. The starting corner is
positioned within a part. Result: generation of a short NC
program.
"Fast NC program": The sequence of sheet operations is
sorted according to time over the entire sheet. The starting
corner is positioned within the sheet. Result: generation of
a fast NC program which is generally not "short".

TECHNOLOGY module

5-211

Function CONTINUE

Press CONTINUE to confirm your settings.


The "Tool sequence" sub-mask is divided into two areas:
The upper mask area lists the tool sequence which is
applied to the entire sheet.
The lower area lists the tools which are optimized only
within the existing part group.

OK function:

Confirm your settings with OK. Follow the instructions in the


command line:
A suggestion appears for the processing sequence:
Red part geometry: single part within a part group.
Yellow part geometry: last part within a part group.
Yellow arrow: processing direction.
Correct part sequence or confirm with OK.
Part groups can now be defined based on the parts sequence.
Confirm the process with OK.

If an optimization process is repeated, the sheet display


described above will only appear if you answer NO to the
"Retain parts sequence?" prompt. If you answer YES, the
process is carried out immediately and the parts sequence is
not altered.

5-212

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Defining part groups


Definition:

A part group is a group of parts on a sheet. You can define one or


several part groups on one sheet.
A part group is defined by using the mouse to identify the last part
of the group. The first part to the second-to-the-last part of a part
group is displayed in red. The last part is marked yellow (=end of
the part group).
If there is only one part group on a sheet, the last part does not
have to be marked.

Application:

As with the "Row by row" optimization option, where complete rows


can be processed, parts can be grouped together with this
function. The first stage of sorting operations involves the processing of all parts in one group, before the next group is begun.
This processing sequence requires additional tool changes.
Process-secure processing and precisely cut parts are the results
of part groups.
Example:

1
2

Single part: red marking, start of


the part group and all other parts
Processing direction: yellow arrow

Single part: yellow marking, end of


the part group

Part group with serpentine processing

S354E52.DOC

Fig. 15451

TECHNOLOGY module

5-213

Defining a sample part


A sample part was until now identified and defined by clicking on
the corresponding single part.

"Flexible" index card

With this version and higher, you can only define a sample part
after selecting the FLEXIBLE optimization option.

Procedure:
Answer NO to the "Retain parts sequence?" prompt.
Define a part as part group: Pick the first part on the sheet. The
part is shown in yellow. You have now defined a part group
comprising one single part (=sample part). The next (i.e. the
second) part group now contains the remaining parts.

5-214

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

13.1 Automatic sheet optimization


In the menu for sheet optimization, the following functions for
automatic sheet optimization are available to you:

SIMULATION: Simulate processing sequence of complete


sheet processing.

Automatic calculation of
sheet optimization.

CALCULATE: Automatic calculation of sheet optimization.

DRAWING TOOLS: Individual functions with which you can


generate or measure construction lines, construction circles.

Procedure:

Control function CALCULATE is selected.


Select the START function.
The options are offered as index cards. You can choose between:
Index card "Grid" Sheet processing with grid processing.
Index card "Row by row": Row by row processing of parts
on the sheet within a multiple-copy function.
"Flexible" index card: Arranging sheet processing flexibly.
After selecting the CONTINUE function button the tool
sequence will be displayed.
The function buttons in the mask for "Tool sequence" are:

Function SORT: Sort tool sequence.

Function REARRANGE, BEFORE A tool is placed in front of


another.
1. Step: Press function button.
2. Step: Select tool which is to be rearranged.
3. Step: Identify tool which the selected tool is to be placed in
front of.

S354E52.DOC

OK function: You accept the suggested tool sequence.


Optimization process will be started.

Function REARRANGE, AFTER A tool is placed behind


another.
1. Step: Press function button:
2. Step: Select tool which is to be rearranged.
3. Step: Identify tool which the selected tool is to be placed
behind.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-215

TECH PARAMETERS function: (TECHNOLOGY PARAMETERS function): Defining technical parameters for the selected
tool.
"Softpunch": Activate or deactivate? If yes, which level?
"Tool change type": Which type of sheet is being processed: Normal sheet, uneven sheet or formed sheet?
"Punching head position": Which working position should
the punching head go to for this tool: normal working
position, forming position, fast forming position, variable
forming position?

CANCEL function: The procedure is aborted.

Function OPTIMIZATION PARAMETERS


In the following screen, you can specify optimization parameters
especially for the selected tool:
"Tool": The selected tool is displayed.
"Small NC program": Operations with the selected tool are
only time-optimized within the part limits. All identical parts
are processed in the same way. Subroutines are then
created when generating the NC program.
"Fast NC program": Processing with this tool is optimized
so that processing is time-optimized. Part limits are
ignored.

"Consider part sequence:": Should the suggested part


sequence be retained for this tool or not?
"Start corner": If the optimization process for this tool begin
at a certain corner, then select starting corner
or
If the starting corner, with the tool change position taken
into account, be automatically defined by the system, then
select "Optimum tool change".
Example: With tools which are introduced from a tool change
wheel or if Multitool tools are employed, it may be wise not to
define a fixed setting for the starting corner for a tool. In this
case, the system can define the starting corner itself, and thus
minimize the approach distances of the tool change positions
to the next operation.
Selecting a start corner excludes the "Optimized tool change"
option.

5-216

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

13.2 Manual sheet optimization


In the menu for sheet optimization, the following functions for
manual sheet optimization are available to you:

INTERACTIVE: Change sheet optimization manually.

SIMULATION: Simulate processing sequence of complete


sheet processing.

Rearrange tool sequence

REARRANGE: Place a processing operation at the beginning


or end, or before or after a particular operation.

DRAWING TOOLS: Single functions with which you can


generate or measure construction lines, construction circles.

Function REARRANGE, BEGINNING


Set processing operation at the beginning of sheet processing.
Function REARRANGE, END
Set operation to the end of sheet processing.
Function REARRANGE, BEFORE
Set processing operation in front of another.
1. Step: Select processing operation which is to be rearranged.
2. Step: Select processing operation which will have the selected
operation placed in front of it.
Function REARRANGE, AFTER
Set processing operation after another.
1. Step: Select processing operation which is to be rearranged.
2. Step: Select processing operation which will have the selected
operation placed behind it.

Interactive sheet
optimization

Function INTERACTIVE, START


The operation is sorted interactively for all tools.
All used tools will be listed here in an index card. You can confirm
the tool sequence or modify it if necessary.
Then the processing operation will be shown with the first tool
(yellow operation).
The function buttons in the mask for "Tool sequence" are:

S354E52.DOC

OK function: You accept the suggested tool sequence. Optimization process will be started.
Function SORT: Sort tool sequence.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-217

Function REARRANGE, AFTER A tool is placed behind


another.
1. Step: Press function button:
2. Step: Select tool which is to be rearranged.
3. Step: Identify tool which the selected tool is to be placed
behind.

TECH
PARAMETERS
function:
(TECHNOLOGY
PARAMETERS function): Define technical parameters for the
selected tool.
"Softpunch": Activate or deactivate? If yes, which level?
"Tool change type": Which type of sheet is being
processed: Normal sheet, uneven sheet or formed sheet?
"Punching head position": Which working position should
the punching head go to for this tool: normal working
position, forming position, fast forming position, variable
forming position?

Options for interactive


sorting of tools

Function REARRANGE, BEFORE: A tool is placed in front of


another.
1. Step: Press function button.
2. Step: Select tool which is to be rearranged.
3. Step: Identify tool which the selected tool is to be placed in
front of.

CANCEL function: The procedure is aborted.

Function INTERACTIVE, OPTIONS


Because a specific tooling must be selected, sorting is carried out
selectively.
You can choose between:
all tools
active tool
SELECTION: Tools used
Tool for the operation picked.
First of all, the processing operation of your choice will be shown
on the sheet (yellow operation).
Please note: The tool which you have allocated the removal
to must always be at the end. Processing operations which
you have set in compulsory sequences are retained.

5-218

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Other functions for


INTERACTIVE

The following functions are available for interactive modification of


the processing sequence:

Function INTERACTIVE, DISTANCE OPT.: Processing with


the selected tools should be carried out distance-optimized.

function INTERACTIVE, NEXT TOOL: With this function, the


next tool and the operation sequence connected to it will be
displayed.

Function INTERACTIVE, INVERT: The processing direction of


individual, linear nibbling paths are inverted for interactive
sorting.

Processing: display on the screen


Color/symbol

Display

Operation

Red processing Starting point of the first


processing operation carried out
by the particular tool.

Pick with mouse pointer:


identification as erroneous
operation.

Yellow
processing

Processing operation which have Pick with mouse pointer:


already been sorted.
identification as erroneous
operation.

Blue
processing

Processing operation which must Pick with mouse pointer:


yet be sorted.
Definite a new sequence.

White cursor
pointer

End point of the processing


operation; mouse pointer is
caught on rubber band.

If an erroneous operation is
identified, then the cursor
pointer will jump to the
identified position.

Procedure:
Functions
1st step:

Steps:
Start interactive sheet optimization:

Select function INTERACTIVE, START


or
function INTERACTIVE, OPTIONS.

After confirming the tool sequence by pressing OK, the processing


operations with the first tool or selected tool will be shown on the
sheet.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-219

2nd step:

Interactive sorting of the processing operations based on the


functions

Sort tools interactively

DISTANCE OPT: distance-optimized


NEXT TOOL: next tool
INVERT: invert

Select function NEXT TOOL: operation with the next tool will be
shown.
If the current processing operation sequence is correct, then the
next processing operation sequence can be shown. Pick the operation (marked in red or yellow) from where the sequence should
be modified. The mouse pointer jumps to the selected operation.
The operation sequence situated in front of that is retained and
will continue to shown in yellow. The operations whose sequence
is to be modified are marked in blue.
You can sort these operations (blue color) as follows:

Pick the operations one by one.


With the DISTANCE OPT function, sort all remaining
operations.
Place those operations to be sorted in a box. All operations
marked in this way are shown in magenta. Select the
DISTANCE OPT function: Only the available operations in the
box will be sorted.
Important: The first point of the box also serves as the starting
point for the path optimization procedure.
If separation processing operations are sorted using the
function INTERACTIVE, DISTANCE OPT,the cutting out
operations is sorted based on the processing direction
which was active during the automatic run-through.

If the present operation is correct, then a change can be made


to the next tool. Select the NEXT TOOL function.

This procedure can be repeated for the next processing


sequence.

Function INVERT

5-220

You must select this function if you want to selectively invert the
processing direction of individual, linear nibbling paths.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

14.

Simulating sheet processing

Sheet processing can be executed with varying speed when


supported with processing simulation and, in this way, check tested
exactly.

Procedure:
Activate SIMULATION control function.
To set the "Speed": click on the beam in the slide bar and push
it in the required direction. Push to the right: simulation speed
will be reduced. Push to the left: speed will be increased.
START: Start simulation. The screen contents will be deleted
and the simulation begins from the very start at the speed you
have set. You can vary the speed during the simulation.
STOP: Stop simulation.
CONTINUE: Continue execution of simulation.
Step: Let simulation run step by step.
Examples of useful combinations:
STEP BY STEP, CONTINUE functions: The processing operations, positioning movements etc. are displayed step by step.
In doing so, you have to click on the function button STEP BY
STEP for each step. Stop the simulation at the desired position
and then continue the process automatically.

or

START, STEP BY STEP, CONTINUE functions: Execute the


simulation automatically until the desired processing operation
is reached, then change to the incremental mode. Continue the
execution of the automatic processing operation after the
appropriate position has been reached.

CANCEL function: The simulation process is canceled using


this function.

Displaying tool change

Menu function TOOL CHANGE, DISPLAY


The number of tool changes per tool is shown in the form of
message list in the simulation.

DRAWING TOOLS control


function

The menu functions for the control function DRAWING TOOLS are
described in the module DRAWING see: "Generate construction
geometry".

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-221

15.

Generating NC program

The NC program can be generated on completion of sheet optimization.


NC program

The menu for NC PROGRAM contains the following control


functions:
GENERATE: Generate the NC program.
PALLETIZING: When unloading with automation components,
specify placement of the parts on pallets. See: description
in separate chapter.
SIMULATION: Simulate NC program (execution).
DRAWING TOOLS: Create help geometries and use
measurement functions.

Generating NC program automatically


Function GENERATE,
START

After modifying sheet processing or sheet layout you must first


carry out sheet optimization once more and then generate a new
NC program.
After selecting the START function you will be offered index cards
in which you will be able to select required settings before going on
to create the NC program.

5-222

TECHNOLOGY module

"Settings" index card: general settings for defining NC program


issue; e.g. name of NC program and program number.
"Parameters" index card: general parameters like clamp
monitoring, defining NC program with block numbering etc.
"Subroutine technique" index card: defining settings for the
issue of an NC program with subroutines.
"Setup plan" index card: Which details should the setup plan
include: production instructions, single part information, etc.?

S354E52.DOC

General settings for the NC


program

"Settings" index card


General settings which affect the generating of an NC program can
be defined in this index card:

"Name of NC program": Enter a file name. The system automatically attaches the extension LST. The whole path is shown
in the input line.
The sheet name is suggested as a program name by the
system, this name can be changed.
File name: (program name).LST
Example: sheet name 4711 becomes 4711.LST.

"Program number": Enter the number of the desired program.


This detail will be written in the NC program as "Main program
number". The system automatically prefixes a P. Example:
1098 becomes P1098.
"Subroutine numbers": Specify number for subroutine.
"Processed by": Who created this program?
"Company": For which company was this program created for?
"NC title": A title is always issued at the beginning of the NC
program. Define the title content here.
"Remark and setup plan": You can input additional information
as a remark in text form which is then issued in the setup plan.

Define parameters

S354E52.DOC

"Parameters" index card


You can define the following as parameters:
Enter number of program runs.
Should clamp positions and space between clamps be monitored?
Should the loading procedure be carried out before the end of
the program? (e.g. TC 240R, TC 260)
Should the first tool be reloaded at the end of the program?
(Only if sheets are loaded using TRUMALIFT SheetMaster).
This function enables you to end program execution in such a
way that the first tool will be reloaded. This makes sense, for
example, if the last tool used was a forming tool.
Should the NC blocks be issued with block numbering during
NC output?
Should sheet layout be prepared on the machine? (Only for
machines with BOSCH CC200/CC300 control system).
See the following chapter: "Flexible sheet layout directly on
the machine".
Should the technology data also be transferred using this NC
program?
Should the push-out subroutine also be transferred using this
NC program?
Should the subprogram for sheet layout also be transferred?

TECHNOLOGY module

5-223

Define details for


application of the
subroutine technique

"Subroutine technique" index card


Subroutine technique means: Certain execution sequences which
repeat themselves within sheet processing are written into a
separate program (=subroutine). The subroutine can be started
multiple times within the main program.
Define the following basic conditions here:
Which strategy should be used for NC generation?
"Part-oriented": The NC program will be generated partoriented. This means that the system searches for the
equivalent processing sequences in a multi-copy processing
section. These same processing sequences are then set
into subroutines according to the defined rules.
"Compulsory sequence": Processing operations in
compulsory sequences are generated in subroutines.
These specifications are evaluated if the subroutine "Part-oriented"
is generated.

Vaporize with the laser

Setup plan

5-224

Minimum number of processing operations for a subroutine?


Define minimum number of processing operations for a subroutine.
What is the minimum number of subroutine call-ups in a main
program? Input the minimum number of call-ups for one
subroutine.

"Laser table" index card


You specify how vaporization is to be done using this index card:
"No": This option is deselected.
"Sheet by sheet": Carry out vaporization sheet by sheet.
"Part by part". Vaporize the film part by part.

"Setup plan" index card


The setup plan is stored by the system as a file. The file name
corresponds to the sheet name which you have entered in the
mask for generating the NC program:
File name: (Sheet name).EIN
Example: 4711 becomes 4711.LST.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Mark the information which should be included in the setup plan


with a cross:
"General data": includes, amongst other things, machine,
control system, program numbers, sheet name with path
details, size of sheet or initial blank with weight, processing
time and memory space requirement.
"Production instructions": clamp positions, stop pin, starting
point.
"Tool data": tool list with used tools.
"Single part information": parts number, drawing number and
name, amount of parts, weight, file name with path details.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-225

Flexible sheet layout directly on the machine


In practice, it is very common that individual parts must be laid out
on a sheet directly on the machine.
In ToPs the fabrication of individual parts is realized by preparing
for sheet layout on the machine.
Why lay out sheets on the
machine?

Sheet layout directly on the machine can be necessary for different


reasons:

Prototype or individual
part?

Fabricating an individual part directly on the control system


without having to call up the program for optimized sheet
processing (with prototype).
Flexible fabrication of consistently recurring parts.
Maximizing use of the sheet: Use the areas of incompletely
covered sheets
or
assign residual sheets on the machine.

ToPs 300 offers the possibility to fabricate a prototype or an individual part for sheet layout directly on the machine.

Prerequisite:
Machines with a Bosch CC200, CC220, CC300 control system
(See overview: "Preparing sheet layout on the machine" in this
chapter).
The individual part for the sheet layout does not replace the
prototype.
When programming in ToPs, you can choose a prototype from
inside the laid out sheet as well as prepare an individual part for
sheet layout. A separate NC program will be given for the chosen
individual part.
The difference is in the production sequence:
In ToPs, the prototypes on a nested or laid out sheet are produced
first. The remaining sheet is optimally processed.
With an individual part for sheet layout, the programming system
generates a separate NC program for each individual part.
These NC programs will be attached to the main program
(complete sheet processing). The NC text for the individual part
can be called up on the control system independent of the
complete optimized sheet processing.

5-226

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

With the help of a CPL dialogue program, the control system gives
the operator the required parameters for the desired sheet layout.
A graphic display is available for control.
When using individual part fabrication, the sheet layout can be
completely executed without attention to additional tool changes for
the processing of a prototype. The pieces can simply be laid out on
a sheet and produced. The necessary CPL program is included
with the ToPs 300 package.

Background:
Programs created with ToPs 300 are sheet-oriented. Tooling work
is summarized for the entire table and optimized for time. This form
of optimization occurs for all pieces on the sheet. The result is that
the processing of an individual piece is no longer recognized in the
generated NC program for a complete sheet.
On the control system, it is not possible within the NC text to
discard the processing of an individual part from the entire NC
program.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-227

Programming in ToPs
An individual part must be completely fabricated in individual
part mode (geometry and removal). With the preparation of
individual parts for sheet layout, the control system will not
consider processing that is completed in sheet mode.

Procedure
DATA module

Step 1: Define machine configuration (allow or forbid individual


part fabrication for the NC version).
Choose in the following order:
DATA module
MACHINES, DATA,
BASIC MACHINE, DATA3
"Prepare sheet layout on the machine", function button:
YES/NO.
Save changes with the MODIFY function button.

Example - TC 500R: Preparing sheet layout on the machine

Fig. 20474

The entries and switch settings in the mask are the standard
settings.
Make modifications only when your configuration differs from the
standard settings.

5-228

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Overview: "Preparing sheet layout on the machine"; individual part


fabrication
Machine

Control system

DATA module, MACHINE


PARAMETERS, BASIC MACHINE,
DATA3

(Machine software)

Comment

"Prepare sheet layout on the


machine", function button
TC 120R

Bosch CC 220

YES

TC 160R

Bosch CC 220

YES

TC 190R

Bosch CC 220

YES

TC 200R

Bosch CC 220

YES

TC 180 K/W

Bosch M5TC

NO

TC 180.2 K/W

Bosch M5TC

NO

TC180 K/W

Fanuc 6MB

NO

TC180 K/W

Sinumerik 8N

NO

TC 235

Bosch CC 200

NO

TC 235

Sinumerik 3 N

NO

TC 240

Bosch CC 200 (T19)

(YES)

Multitool not supported

TC 240

Bosch CC 200 (>= T21)

(YES)

Multitool not supported

TC 240L

Bosch CC 200 (< T23)

(YES)

Multitool not supported

TC 240L

Bosch CC 200 (>= T23)

(YES)

Multitool not supported

TC 240R

Bosch CC 300

(YES)

Multitool not supported

TC 260

Bosch CC 300 (< T23)

(YES)

Multitool not supported

TC 260

Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)

(YES)

Multitool not supported

TC 260L

Bosch CC 300 (< T23)

(YES)

Multitool not supported

TC 260L

Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)

(YES)

Multitool not supported

TC 500R

Bosch CC 220

YES

TC 600L

Sinumerik 840 D

NO:

TC 2000 R

Bosch type 3

NO:

S354E52.DOC

(YES) = Limited functionality with these control system versions.


It is not possible to request information about the working
range and the clamp dead range on the machine.
Multitools are not supported from version T23.418 control
systems.

TECHNOLOGY module

5-229

TECHNOLOGY module

Step 2: Prepare individual parts for sheet layout on the machine.


Generate a separate NC text for an individual part in the
TECHNOLOGY module. This occurs in the realm of NC creation
for the complete sheet.

Preparing sheet layout on the machine

Fig. 20475

Choose in the following order:


TECHNOLOGY MODULE
NC PROGRAM
GENERATE
START
PARAMETER
Click on "Prepare sheet layout on the machine"
Note:
The setting is not stored and must therefore be reset each
time NC is activated.
Click on "Transfer sheet layout subroutine"
With this selection, the CPL dialogue program "P9994" is
attached to the NC program for sheet layout. When
transferring the processing program, this CPL dialogue
program will also be transferred.
(This CPL dialogue program must be transferred only for
the first NC program. It can be stored and overwriteprotected in the control system).

5-230

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

S354E52.DOC

OK
Comment in the command lines: "Mark individual part for sheet
layout or OK".
Mark one or more individual parts on the sheet layout. The
selected individual parts will be displayed in magenta. Remarking a part reverses the selection.
OK
NC text is created

TECHNOLOGY module

5-231

NC program
The NC text for the individual parts is attached to the optimized
program for the sheet layout. All processing of individual parts will
be delivered in the same sequence as occurs in the optimized
sheet layout. As a standard, the individual part will be laid out onto
the smallest possible sheet. To this extent, the edges and webs of
the multi-copy processing area will be used. If the individual part is
not located in the multi-copy processing area, standard values will
be given. The loading position will always be set to 0. Clamp
positions will be given as with the optimized sheet program.

Building an NC text
The generated NC text is presented as follows:
0. Subroutines for the optimized sheet (if applicable).
1. Main program for processing the optimized sheet.
2. CPL program for 1st individual part,
CPL program for 2nd individual part,
etc.
3. CPL dialogue program P9994 for sheet layout with subroutine
numbers starting with 99 on the machine. This CPL dialogue
program must be transferred only for the first NC program.
The CPL programs for the individual parts (2) are independent programs. They are numbered like the subroutines (0) of
the optimized sheet program. In this way the CPL programs,
like the subroutines, can be deleted together with the main
program.

5-232

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Example of an NC program
A clarification of the NC text is found in the left column.
...
NC Main program:
beginning

Processing of parts,
optimized for time over the
entire sheet
Calling up the "individual
part" subroutine at the end
of the main program (used
to delete the subroutine
together with the main
program)
NC Main program: end
Beginning of program for
processing 1st individual
part

First block: Values for


sheet layout

Second block: Values for


the CPL dialogue program

Calling up the dialogue


program as a subroutine

S354E52.DOC

%
(DFS,P1998,TOPS300)
10#MACHTYP$="500/91T"
N10(*MSG,MAIN PROGRAMME NUMBER,P1998)
...
N310X779.28Y814.64C45M25
N320X1209.95Y736.57C-45
...
N330G24L998.1
N340Q990001998
N350Q980001998
N998.1(*MSG,JUMP FLAG)
....
N410G07
N420M02
(DFS,P990001998,SAMPLE TOPS300)
10#MACHTYP$="500/91T"
N10(*MSG,MAIN PROGRAMME NUMBER,P990001998)
N20(V:3.00#B:171.0#D:19981217#P:TOPS300_EXE)
N30(V:3.7#B:51#D:981221104305#P:TOPS300_ACCESS20)
N40(*MSG,SINGLE PART FOR SHEET LAYOUT: 000
C:\TRUMPF\TEILE\LOCH2.GEO)
1 .START1
N90(PARAMETERS FOR SHEET LAYOUT)
1 #A54LPX=0
1 #A54EZX=20.00
1 #A54EZY=117.00
1 #A54PSX=525.00
1 #A54PSY=425.00
...
N100(---------------)
1 #A54SSX=540.00
1 #A54SSY=537.00
1 #A54PDX=500.00
1 #A54PDY=400.00
...
1 .START2
N110M09
N120Q9994

TECHNOLOGY module

5-233

Normal start of individual


part machining

Flexible loading position

Tool change

...
1 .START3
N130G92
N140F108.17
N150G01M20
...
N200G56X[#A54LPX+(680)]Y140.01
N210(*MSG,ZERO POINT 0 0)
N220(*MSG,LOAD SHEET )
N230M61

N270(*MSG,TOOL ID NO:4500050)
N280(*MSG,WZG RECTANGLE,X=50.00,Y=5.00)
N290T1[4,50.00,5.00]
N300M6[0,1]
...

Grinding for sheet layout


process according to
chosen parameters

1 FOR I%=#A54SNY% TO #A54NPY%


1 IF I%>#A54SNY% THEN K%=1
ELSE K%=#A54SNX%
ENDIF
1 IF I%<#A54NPY% THEN L%=#A54NPX% ELSE
L%=#A54ENX% ENDIF
1 FOR J%=K% TO L%

Zero point correction on a


specific part of the layout

N320G92
N330G92X[(CPOS(1)-(#A54LPX+#A54EZX+#A54PSX*(J%-1)))]
N340G92Y[(CPOS(2)-(#A54EZY-#A54PSY*(I%-1)))]

Processing the individual


part
(Coordinating relative to
the part zero point)

N350X262.48Y238.9C45M25
...

Deactivating all processes

End of grinding

Possibility of finishing
several sheets with this
individual part.

5-234

N360M20
N370C0
...
1 NEXT: NEXT
N380G92
...

1 DLG
1 T%=0
1 SFK(T%,"END", ,"NEW&LAYOUT","CHANGE&LAYOUT",
"SAME&LAYOUT")
...

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Program end

Beginning of program for


processing 2nd individual
part

CPL dialogue program


P9994

End of file *.LST

1 .ENDE
N440C0
N450G56X[#A54LPX+(680)]Y140.01
N460M51
N470M0
N480G07
N490M02
(DFS,P980001998,SAMPLE TOPS300)
10#MACHTYP$="500/91T"
N10(*MSG,MAIN PROGRAMME NUMBER,P980001998)
N20(V:3.00#B:171.0#D:19981217#P:TOPS300_EXE)
N30(V:3.7#B:51#D:981221104305#P:TOPS300_ACCESS20)
N40(*MSG,SINGLE PART FOR SHEET LAYOUT: 090
C:\TRUMPF\TEILE\LOCH2.GEO)
...
(Continuation based on 1st individual part)
(DFS,P9994,DIALOG)
N10(SUBROUTINE NUMBER,P9994)
N20(*MSG,PARAMETERS FOR SHEET LAYOUT,P9994)
...
M02

The subroutine numbers assigned to the individual parts begin with


the maximum allowable number (P99...) and are counted
backwards (P98..., P97..., P96... etc.).
Example:
Maximum subroutine number: "P990001998" = 1st individual part
subroutine.
Further subroutine numbers: "P980001998" = 2nd individual part
subroutine, "P970001998 = 3rd individual part subroutine.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-235

Setup plan
In the setup schedule you can check to see whether the individual
parts for sheet layout have been defined on the machine or not.

a, b

5-236

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

You can gather the following information:


a: Machining time: This detail contains only the processing time for
the optimized sheet.
b: Required memory: Full size of *.LST file; in this detail are included the main program and subroutines for optimized sheet
layout, programs for individual parts and the dialogue program
(as long as its included in the LST file).
c: Individual part for sheet layout: Here you will find details about
the angular position of the individual part on the sheet and the
program number of the subroutine for individual part machining.
Example: Individual part for sheet layout:
000 990001998
000 = angular position 0, 990001998 = subroutine number for
the processing of the 1st individual part under the angular
position of 0.
090 980001998
090 = angular position 90, 98000198 = subroutine number for
the processing of the 2nd individual part under the angular
position of 90.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-237

Operating the machine


With ToPs 300 it is possible on the machine to simply and quickly
create a sheet layout with prepared individual parts.
Operation of the control system is driven by menus and supported
by graphics.

Prerequisites

Your machine must have a BOSCH control system (CC200,


CC220, CC300) with CPL program extension.
In case your machine has no linear magazine, it is recommended to undertake a simple test program with one individual part. That way it is possible to determine whether your
machine can reset the corresponding CPL program.

5-238

An NC program must be accessible that includes the individual


part program for the sheet layout. It is possible to create such
programs with ToPs 300.
For the machine operator, this is clearly identified in the NC
program "(DFS, P.....,Muster...)" and in the settings plan (last
line: 000 99...).
The CPL dialogue program "P9994" must be accessible by the
control system. With the first NC program transfer from
ToPs 300 to the machine, this CPL program must also be
transferred.
(Recommendation: Set the CPL program in the control system
to "READ ONLY").

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Procedure
Step 1:

Call up the individual part program (e.g. 990001998 Sample


ToPs 300).
To lay out a sheet with an individual part directly on the machine,
call up the NC program for the individual part. Inside this program,
the CPL dialogue program will be called up as a subroutine:
The sheet layout (a single part on the smallest sheet necessary) is
displayed graphically on the screen. The clamps are shown at the
bottom of the display (as in ToPs, upon closer examination they
are situated behind the machine). Additionally, a menu bar with
function keys (softkeys) is available.

Step 2

Modify sheet layout values.


Details for the sheet layout can be modified.
The following functions are available in the menu bar:
Lay out sheet
Change loading position
Special functions
After each function, the graphic will be updated. Before you select
this function, double-check the graphic display on the screen!

Step 3

Start sheet processing.


From the menu bar, select the function button
Start program.

Function button
"Program start"

The dialogue program ends and the process proceeds according to


the currently set values.

If there are no modifications to make (only a prototype), you


can immediately start individual part machining. With this
procedure, Step 2 is skipped.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-239

Machine functions
Functions on the control panel:

+/-

*
_

ENTER

Control panel: Select function

Function button
Lay out sheet

EINLEGEPOS SONDER
PROGRAMM
AENDERN
FUNKTIONEN START

TAFEL
BELEGEN

_
_

Fig. 11770

With this function, you can:


Enter dimensions of the sheet to be used,
Modify edges and webs.
The maximum possible sheet layout is then calculated and
displayed on the screen.
When inquiring about the desired number of parts in the X and Y
directions, the current and maximum number is displayed. You can
confirm these values with the <ENTER> button or overwrite with
new values. Modifications will be immediately reflected by the
graphic on the screen.

Function button
Change loading position

5-240

First, directly enter the approximate loading position as a value in


millimeters. The loading position may be modified in increments of
+/- 10 or +/- 100 mm until the sheet has been properly situated into
the clamps. Each correction is immediately displayed on the
screen.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Function button
Special functions

Intentionally leave out individual parts.


In case an individual part program should be implemented
repeatedly on the same sheet, it can make sense in further
processing to leave out the already finished first individual part. It
can be determined which row (of the supposed layout) and which
number with which to begin in this row.
If an exact number of parts is to be made, it is also possible to
leave parts out of the last row.

Notes on clamps

Clamp positions are not adjustable here because they must


already have been adjusted when starting the individual part
program (in the linear magazine under "Release clamps" for
machines with clamps).

These values are necessary here only for the graphic, to


facilitate your determination of the best loading position.

Available individual part and dialogue programs are coordinated especially for the type of clamp on the machine.

Clamps in the linear magazine:


The control systems on these machines allow an instant query of
clamp positions. To this extent, the clamps are always shown in
the positions where they are currently located.
Translation clamps:
Here the clamps are shown in the position where the optimizing
sheet program suggests they should be. Clamps are not checked
here. Work between the clamps is not possible!
Retractable clamps:
Clamps are shown in fixed positions and play no roll in processing.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-241

Explanation of parameters in the individual part


program
The values listed here are only used for example.
First block: Parameters for
sheet layout

Parameter

Explanation
Loading position

1 #A54EZX=20.00

X-position of the original part:


lower left corner of the outlined rectangle around
the rough geometry

1 #A54EZY=117.00

Y-position of the original part:


lower left corner of the outlined rectangle around
the rough geometry

1 #A54PSX=225-00

X-distance between the parts:


#A54PDX + desired web width in X

1 #A54PSY=75.00

Y-distance between the parts:


#A54PDY + desired web width in Y

1 #A54NPX%=1

Number of parts in X

1 #A54NPY%=1

Number of parts in Y

1 #A54SNX%=1

Start part number in the starting row

1 #A54SNY%=1

Start row number

1 #A54ENX%=#A54NPX%

Number of the last part in the last row

1 #A54CPMAX%=2

Number of clamps

1 #A54CP1=350

Only with translation clamps: position in mm

1 #A54CP2=825

Only with translation clamps: position in mm

1 #A54CP3=1628

Only with translation clamps: position in mm

1 #A54CP4=2100

5-242

1 #A54LPX=0

Only with translation clamps: position in mm

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Second block:
Parameters for the
CPL dialogue program

Parameter

Explanation
Sheet dimension in X

1 #A54SSY=187.00

Sheet dimension in Y

1 #A54PDX=200.00

Part width in X: length of the rectangle outlined


around the rough geometry

1 #A54PDY=50.00

Part width in Y: width of the rectangle outlined


around the rough geometry

1 #A54DX=25.00

Distance from part in X: between geometries

1 #A54DY=25.00

Distance from part in Y: between geometries

1 #A54LM=20.00

Left margin

1 #A54RM=20.00

Right margin

1 #A54TM=20.00

Upper margin

1 #A54BM=20.00

S354E52.DOC

1 #A54SSX=240.00

Lower margin; above the clamp dead range

TECHNOLOGY module

5-243

What you still need to know...


This method of sheet layout directly on the machine is a simple
and quick way to arrange parts on a sheet.
Please note the following:

5-244

TECHNOLOGY module

Sheet loading can only be done manually and from the left.
Inserting from the right or loading with TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster is not supported.
Extra long sheets may not be loaded because repositioning is
not possible.
Sheet processing is essentially an exercise in minimizing the
scrap skeleton.
An individual part is always laid out on the sheet as an outlined
rectangle (around the individual part geometry). The selected
edges and webs always correspond to the outlined rectangle of
the individual part.
For each program process, a part can either be laid out on the
sheet individually or as multiple copies. Nesting an individual
part or several different individual parts is not possible.
Row-by-row execution and removal is not possible.
A tool change optimization occurs during sheet layout. The
rows are executed from top to bottom and left to right (as seen
from behind the machine).
Machines with a linear magazine: It is not possible to position
clamps with the dialogue program because the clamps are
already fully checked at the beginning. Should the clamps be in
other positions, this must first be set on the machine in an
individual part program.
Machines with transitional clamps: No clamp positions or
clearances are checked. Placing parts between clamps is not
possible.
After canceling, it is only possible to reenter the program
before a tool change.
The layout can be checked with the graphic display. Especially
in the last row, push-out movements should be controlled. The
program does not monitor the dead range. With releasable and
retractable clamps, it must be checked to see whether a
clamping edge is stuck.

S354E52.DOC

Displaying or printing NC program


Function NC PROGRAM,
DISPLAY or PRINT

The NC program executed at the machine can be displayed or


printed using these functions. The file selection mask is opened.
Choose the NC program that you want to print. The file name of
the current NC program is preset.
File name
The NC program is stored in the system as a file. The file name
corresponds to the sheet name. Example: Sheet name 4711
becomes 4711.LST.

(Sheet name).LST
The file name is always issued in the upper case in the NC
program - regardless of the type of writing in the programming system.
The structure and functions which are issued in the NC text are
described in the programming instructions for your machine.

Displaying or printing setup plan


Function SETUP PLAN,
DISPLAY or PRINT

The setup plan is displayed or printed with this function.

File name
The setup plan is stored in the system as a file. The file name
corresponds to the sheet name you defined.
(Sheet name).EIN

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-245

Checking NC program
Menu NC PROGRAM,
function SIMULATION

Sheet processing can be executed with varying speed when


supported with processing simulation and, in this way, the
processing sequence can be check tested exactly.
For a description see: "Simulating processing sequence"

Drawing tools: Generating construction


geometry
Menu NC PROGRAM,
function DRAWING TOOLS

5-246

The menu functions for the control function DRAWING TOOLS are
described in the module DRAWING see: "Generate construction
geometry".

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

16.
Function scope:

Printing screen contents

The functions for printing drawings and screen shots are selected
in the FILE main menu. In the pull-down menu the functions
PRINT, FILE and PRINT, SCREEN are available.

Procedure

File

Printing screen contents:


Print

Select function FILE, PRINT, SCREEN.

Screen

The Windows printing mask appears. Select the


corresponding printer or plotter.
Start the print procedure using OK. The part of the drawing
visible in the graphics window will be printed.

or

Procedure:
Print screen contents.

Select function FILE, PRINT, SCREEN.

Print

Select the file whose contents are to be printed in the file


selection mask (file manager).

File

After the selection of a file, the contents are displayed in a


window.
Start the print procedure using PRINT. The Windows printing
mask appears. Select the corresponding printer or plotter.
OK: The print procedure is aborted.

File

Configuring the printer and


plotter

Output to a printer or plotter is controlled by the operating system.


You can configure the printer, plotter and interface in Windows
using the program "Printer. You will find this program in the
"Control Panel" program group.
Plotter: If you are using a serial plotter, you will have to make sure
that the dip switch configuration on the plotter is compatible with
the Windows configuration for the serial interface.
For further information, refer to the documentation for your
operating system.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-247

17.
File

Transfer

Transfer of NC data

The TRANSFER function is contained in the main menu under


FILE.
After selecting the function, a mask for copying or moving NC data
with the extension .LST appears.
PC TRANSFER is a TRUMPF software product which enables
1)
data transfer to the machine control system via a data line. For
detailed information, refer to the documentation for PC-TRANSFER. This should contain a basic explanation of data transfer.

Operating mode

The NC programs created with ToPs are copied in a special format


into a directory which the PC-TRANSFER software accesses.
Example:
The following directory structure is provided as standard:
c:\trumpf\users\masch01 (all programs for a machine, for
example, for TC 200R) or
c:\trumpf\users\mach02 (all programs for a machine, for
example for TC 500R)

File format

Files are created in ToPs which have the LST format.


gearwheel.LST
4711.LST

For BOSCH control systems:


The machine can only call up programs from the transfer directory
whose names correspond to the following format:
P(4711)

The maximum possible program number is specified in your


machine file.

1)

For BOSCH TRUMAGRAPH, SIN8N and TASK500 control systems


Not required for open control systems Sinumerik SIN840 and BOSCH Type 3.

5-248

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

Copying files

The original file remains when a file is copied. A copy is created in


the target directory.

Procedure:

Moving files

Activate the COPY radio button.


The NC program file name is determined during the copy
procedure. A check is implemented to see whether the file
name is already available in the TRANSFER directory. If a file
with the same name already exists, a warning message
appears.
"Source file name": Enter a file name with the extension LST or
select via file selection mask. To do this, open the selection
window via the "Arrow" symbol.
"Target directory": Select the directory into which the NC
program should be copied. \users\mach01\ is offered as
standard (i.e. the directory which has been specified for the
machine in the DATA module). For example, all files for a
machine can be copied into this directory.
Confirm your selection with OK or break off the procedure with
CANCEL.

The original file is stored in the target directory when a file is


moved. No copy is created. The file is deleted from the source
directory.

Procedure:

Activate the MOVE radio button.


The NC program file name is determined during the moving
procedure. A check is implemented to see whether the file
name is already available in the TRANSFER directory. If a file
with the same name already exists, a warning message
appears.
"Source file name": Input a file name with the extension LST or
select via file selection mask. To do this, open the selection
window via the "Arrow" symbol.
"Target directory": Select the directory into which the NC
program should be moved. \users\mach01\ is offered as
standard (i.e. the directory which has been specified for the
machine in the DATA module). For example, all files for a
machine can be moved into this directory.
Confirm your selection with OK, or break off the procedure with
CANCEL.

Example:
c:\trumpf\parts\user1\gearwheel.LST
becomes
\users\mach01\P4711.LST.

S354E52.DOC

TECHNOLOGY module

5-249

18.
File

Setup sheet

Translate clamps.

Setting up sheet

This function allows you to make changes to the sheet data during
programming.
These functions are only offered in sheet mode.

Translate clamps.
Change loading position
Modify sheet dimensions.

Function SETUP SHEET, TRANSLATE CLAMPS

Procedure:

Change loading position

Select the function SETUP SHEET, TRANSLATE CLAMPS.


Follow the instructions given in the command line.
Pick the clamp you wish to offset.
Pick the slot or enter the slot number (position on the
transverse rail).

Function SETUP SHEET, LOADING POSITION

Procedure:

Modify sheet dimensions.

Select the function SETUP SHEET, LOADING POSITION. The


"Change sheet loading" mask appears.
Specify "Loading type" and "Loading side".
Specify parameters for the loading position.
Confirm the specifications with OK.

Function SETUP SHEET, SHEET DIMENSIONS

Procedure:

5-250

Select the function SETUP SHEET, SHEET DIMENSIONS.


Reenter the dimensions of the sheet in the X and Y direction
as well as the sheet thickness (Z dimension). You cannot
change the material ID numbers.
Confirm the changes with OK.

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

19.

Table comparison

Option of transferring the tool master data and laser technology


tables managed in the database of ToPs to the machine control
system without generating an NC program.

Background: This compact data transfer ensures that the same


tool and laser technology data is available to the user on the
machine as is available to you when programming with ToPs.
Procedure:
File

Requirements:
The TABLE COMPARISON function can only be selected if:

Table
comparison

In the TECHNOLOGY module, select:

S354E52.DOC

The current machine (control system) supports the table


format (e.g. SINUMERIK 840D and BOSCH Type 3 control
systems).
No sheet is loaded.

the FILE function in the main menu,


and immediately after it the function TABLE COMPARISON in
the pull-down menu.
Specify in the following mask which data should be used as
files for the table comparison:
Output of tool data:
Select: all tools or tool type?
File name: "wzg.tab" is offered as file name. You can also
enter a different name. The system automatically attaches
the extension.
Output of the laser technology tables (LTT):
Which LTT group does your machine belong to?
File name: "ltt.tab" is offered as file name. You can also
enter a different name. The system automatically attaches
the extension.
"Target directory": The target directory is displayed in this line.
You can transfer the generated files with the file name "*.tab"
to the machine control system and read them in there (as with
"*.lst" files).

TECHNOLOGY module

5-251

The tool master data and the laser technology tables are not
overwritten on the control system. Example: A table "4711"
already exists on the control system. If a laser technology
table "4711" is also transferred with the file "*.tab", the
transferred table "4711" is ignored during the comparison
and the one on the control system is retained.

5-252

TECHNOLOGY module

S354E52.DOC

1.

Database management

In the various phases of the program creation, ToPs 300 accesses


data and NC cycles stored in the integrated data base.
Stored Information

When you receive the system, the data base already contains the
essential information you need for machining mild steel (St37),
special steel (1,4301) and aluminium alloys (AlMg3) on your
TRUMPF machine. Included are:

Module
DATA

6-4

Module DATA

machine data
material data
laser tables
process rules data
NC output (NC modules)
user settings.

In the DATA module, you can supplement, modify or delete the


stored data to meet your requirements.

S354E61.DOC

Overview of functions
Function scope

Machines
Configuration
Daten

Material

Laser

Process rules
Data
System

The main functions for the DATA module are presented next
to each other at the top of the screen. The corresponding
subfunctions become visible and can be activated after a main
function has been selected.

Record machine data.


Configuration define machine configuration.
Daten define machine data.

Record material data.

Record laser tables.

Record process rules data.


Data: Record process rules data for laser machining.
System: System process rules - password protected support function.

Punching

Punching rules data for punching technique - function which is


protected by a password.

Machine

Machine: rules data for machine - function which is protected by a


password.

NC output
Times
Customer cycles

Functions for NC output.


Times:modify processing time.
Customer cycles store self-defined NC cycles.

Cycles
Header data

S354E61.DOC

Cycles: Functions for support. Function which is protected by


password.
Header data table information which is issued in the NC program.
Function which is protected by password.

Module DATA

6-5

User

Editor
Paths

6-6

Module DATA

Define user settings.


Editor: Working with user settings.
Paths: Management and definition of computer names and paths.

S354E61.DOC

2.

Standard masks in the DATA module

Data blocks differ in size. It is not always the case that the contents
of a data block can be displayed in a mask. Two types of masks are
differentiated for large data blocks in order to record a complete
data block:
Initial masks (with the supplementary masks)
Sub-masks
The primary data of a data block are recorded with the initial masks
and the sub-masks combined with them. The entries for other data
fields are recorded in the sub-masks.
A data block is recorded in various masks:

A sub-mask is opened when


MODIFY, CREATE, COPY
and DELETE are pressed.

Supplementary mask

Initial mask

The sub-masks are called


up by activating CONTINUE.

continue

Sub-masks (overview)

return

1st sub-mask

return

2nd sub-mask

return

3rd sub-mask

return
Fig. 4867

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-7

2.1

Initial masks

In the initial mask, the selection of a data block can be made where
you can initiate modifications should you desire.

Main menu bar


Mask header
Output and sort
functions for
the display

Selection window
with data blocks

Mask footer
Fig. 19560

Mask header

Sort functions

Click on a data block in the selection window. The data are


displayed in the display fields.
By using the sort functions, the data blocks in the selection window
can be reduced as exactly as required (see Basic information on
standard functions, Masks: basic functions).

Selection window

All data blocks are displayed in the selection window. Using the
search symbols (Scroll) at the right edge of the window, you can
display all data blocks (see Basic information on standard
functions, Masks: basic functions).

Mask footer

6-8

The mask header contains a title. Modifications cannot be made


directly.

The functional buttons accomodated in the mask footer are


activated by clicking them with the mouse.

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Function buttons of the initial mask


Function button MODIFY

Modifying data: data from the mask header can be modified.


Usually this is by means of sub-masks.
The number of data blocks in the database and in the selection
window remains the same.

Function button
CREATE

Creating data block: a completely new data block is created. As a


rule, the entries in the mask header are made with the aid of a
supplementary mask. All the other data fields remain temporarily
empty until they are also filled with the aid of sub-masks.
A new data block is added to the existing data blocks in the
database and selection window.

Function button
COPY

Copying data block: a data block already existing is copied (1:1) in


order to create a new data block with similar data.
A new data block is added to the existing data blocks in the
database and selection window.

Function button
DELETE

Deleting data block: An existing data block is completely deleted.


One data block less will be included in the selection window and in
the database.

Function button
CONTINUE

Function button
OUTPUT

Output of data block: output of laser technology tables and rules.

Function button
READ IN

S354E61.DOC

Continue: calling up sub-masks

Reading in data block: read in laser technology tables from the


control system.

Module DATA

6-9

2.2

Supplementary masks

Data from the mask header is modified with the aid of the submask. The input possibilities in this mask correspond to the inputs
in the mask header of the initial mask and sub-masks.

Function buttons in sub-masks


Function button RETURN

Function button READ

Back: return to the initial mask.

Read: reading in data. The input fields are filled with settings.

Precondition: These functions can only be activated if an


unambiguous search criterion has been entered. The unambiguous
search criterion is specified in the description of individual data
storage areas.

Function buttons
MODIFY,
COPY,
DELETE,
CREATE

6-10

Module DATA

These function buttons appear regardless of which function button


you have activated in the initial mask. Select the displayed function
button and initiate the required action with it.

S354E61.DOC

Selection functions in the sub-masks


You can use the sub-mask for selecting the data blocks which are
to be copied, modified and deleted. These selection functions are
integrated in the system so that the desired operation is executed
with several data blocks consecutively. You can save yourself the
trouble of jumping back into the initial mask after every entry.

Procedure:
Functions

Steps:
1. Fill the data input windows which have a unambiguous search
criterion.

Function button
READ

Function buttons
MODIFY,
COPY,
DELETE,

Function button RETURN


Function button
CONTINUE

S354E61.DOC

2. Read in assigned data.

3. Select the function.

4. Jump back into the initial mask


5. Call up sub-masks to make more data block modifications.

Module DATA

6-11

2.3

Sub-masks

Sub-masks are called up in the initial mask by using the


CONTINUE button.
Special function buttons for calling up various sub-masks are listed
under the mask header. This kind of function button is also labelled
with a color identification in the top right corner.
Significance of the colors: red or white
Red indicates that the mask is active.
White indicates that the mask is inactive.

Function buttons in sub-masks


Function button
MODIFY

Function button
RETURN

6-12

The modifications are accepted in the data block.

Jump back into the initial mask.

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

3.
Machines

Recording of machine data

The machine data are the basis for the creation of the NC program.
ToPs can be configured for various machines with NC interfaces.
The technical data for machine and control system are stored in the
data base. The data for programming TRUMPF machines is
entered in the database before the system is delevered to the
customer.
In the documentation for your machine (operators manual,
programming manual) you can find the data which has to be
entered. Check the stored values. When generating the NC
program, ToPs accesses this data. The NC program will not
run properly if the wrong values were entered.

Zero point of the


coordinates input

The zero point for the input of all X and Y coordinates is the center
point of the punching head, the so-called loading position.

Selecting machine
Select machine
Machines
Configuration

Machines
Data

What do you have to do?


You must select the machine before you configure the machine data.
After you have activated the MACHINES, CONFIGURATION
function, a mask is opened where all machines are displayed in a
selection window
or
Select the function combination MACHINES, DATA.
The selection window for the machines appears initially in this case
as well.
The following data are displayed in the selection mask for the
machine:

Function button
CONTINUE

S354E61.DOC

Description of the machine.


Type of machine: the machine type specifies whether the
machine is a standard type or another type. No. 1 is normally
entered.
Description of the control system.
Working range format.
Remark on the machine.
Select the desired machine. Confirm your selection by pressing
the CONTINUE function button.

Module DATA

6-13

Modifying, copying, deleting, creating


machines
Modifying, copying,
deleting, creating machine

Machines

The data for a machine can be modified, copied, deleted or a new


machine can be created as soon as the corresponding function
buttons are available in the footer of a mask. Proceed in one of the
following two ways:

Select the following in succession: MACHINES CONFIGURATION


CONTINUE switch button with color identification then the
function buttons MODIFY, COPY, DELETE and CREATE in the footer

Configuration

or
Machines

Select the following in succession: MACHINES CONFIGURATION


CONTINUE switch button with color identification then the
function buttons MODIFY, COPY, DELETE and CREATE in the footer

Data

Select the desired function button and then a machine in the


scrollbar.Execute the desired action:

Function button
MODIFY

Function button
CREATE

Create new machine.


Enter the new machine data in the input fields of the display mask.
Confirm your alterations: Select the CREATE function button.

Function button
READ or
COPY

Copy machine.

Function button
DELETE

6-14

Modify the present machine.


Enter the modified data in the input fields of the display mask.
Confirm your alterations: Select function button MODIFY.

Delete machine.
Select the DELETE function button. The displayed machine will be
deleted.

Module DATA

Execute the following steps with the aid of the display mask:
1. Read in the data block of the selected machine: select function
button READ.
2. In the input fields, enter the name, type, and the control system
for the machine to which you wish to allocate the read-in data
block.
3. Copy the data block to the selected machine: select function
button COPY.

S354E61.DOC

3.1
Machines
Configuration

Function button
DATA 1

In the submenu CONFIGURATION you can modify the configuration of your machine.
Select one of the two function buttons: DATA 1 or DATA 2.

Make the following definitions:


Which processing types can be executed by using your
machine?
PUNCHING
LASER
PUNCHING +LASER
In which way is the material to be fixed down during
repositioning?
with CYLINDER
with PRESSER FOOT
with CYL.+PRESSER.: Cylinder and presser foot
How is the material to be positioned when loading ("Stop")*)?
without stop: NONE
with PIN
Type of support*)?
TABLE
What devices does your machine have at its disposal for
automatic tool changing*)?
NONE
MAGAZINE: tool magazine
Which other kinds of processing types has your machine been
set up for?
NONE
THREAD: tapping
Can the level of lubrication be programmed?
Yes: SELECTABLE
No: NONE
Which scrap deflector is available*)?
NONE
What type of scrap box does your machine have at its
disposal*)?
NONE

*)

Modifying machine configuration

Which sorting unit is available?


NONE
TRUMASORT L/DOUBLE CART
TRUMASORT R4/S / DEFLECTOR,
TRUMASORT L + R4/S,
DEFLECTOR

These details are not evaluated by ToPs.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-15

Function button
DATA 2

Make the following definitions:

6-16

Module DATA

Which measuring system does your machine have?


NONE
Is your machine equipped with a flap/chute?
YES
NO
How are the clamps mounted?
NONE there are no clamps
MOVABLE: movable standard clamps
FIXED: fixed standard clamps
RETRACTABLE: swing-back/retractable clamps.
Which devices are available for skeleton removal?
NONE (sheet skeleton removed manually)
GRIP SELECTION: Select TRUMAGRIP.
Which automation components are available for loading?
manual (=none)
Lift selection: select Lift for loading if your machine is
equipped with a TRUMALIFT SheetMaster or TRUMALIFT
SB/SE/SC.
How are sheets rotated on the machine?
MANUAL
Which automation components are available for unloading?
MANUAL (=none)
LIFT SELECTION: select Lift for part removal if your
machine is equipped with a TRUMALIFT SheetMaster or
TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC.

S354E61.DOC

3.2
Machines
Data

Modifying machine data

In the submenu DATA you can modify the following data of your
machine:

BASIC MACHINE
STOP PIN DATA
SMALL PART REMOVAL
REPOSITIONING DATA
PUSH-OUT DATA
CLAMP DATA
FORMULAE
TOOLING SYSTEM DATA
LUBRICATING SYSTEM DATA
GRIP
UNLOADING AREA
SUCTION CUP DATA
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER
LIFTGROUP 2 SB/SE/SC

Select a function button (switch with color identification).


The mask appears as follows:

Function MACHINES, DATA: Calling up sub-masks

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

Fig. 19916

6-17

Modifying data for basic machine


BASIC MACHINE switch,
DATA 1

Switch, DATA 1
Modifying data for basic machine.
Make the following definitions:

*)

Which limit values apply for the working range of your machine?
Which limit values apply for the overshoot range of your machine?
What is the maximum sheet size that may not be exceeded?
At what acceleration can your machine work? Enter the
maximum and minimum values. ToPs calculates the optimal
acceleration depending on the sheet weight.
How high is the minimum and maximum positioning speed with
which your machine can travel?
min. positioning speeds*) in X, Y and Z direction.
max. positioning speed in X, Y and Z direction.

These details are not evaluated by ToPs.

6-18

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 2

Switch, DATA 2
Modifying data for basic machine
Make the following definitions:

*)

What is the maximum sheet thickness that may not be


exceeded for punching?*)
What is the maximum punching capacity of your machine?
What is the maximum weight of the material allowed to be? *)
How great is the conversion factor for the sheet weight?*)
At which roughness depth does nibbling normally take place?
Load material:*)
minimum loading position in the X direction?
minimum loading position in the Y direction?
Where is the loading position for tool change next to the sheet
("Lateral t. change pos.")?*)
X coordinate
Y coordinate
Maximum diameter of the tools?
Maximum length of edge of the square tools?
Default values for the definition of roughness depth: *)
feedrate factor when nibbling with round tools?
feedrate factor when nibbling with rectangular tools?
How great is the conversion factor for punching capacity?*)
Minimum overlapping values when nibbling:
overlapping at corners?
during shape cutting?
at what feedrate?
Should the last stroke be executed automatically by the
machine for manual unloading?
YES: the last stroke will be set by the machine.
NO: last stroke will be generated by the programming
system.
Is the tool change position fixed or variable?
FIXED:
VARIABLE
Tool change before sheet panel: what is the smallest distance
the tool change position may be from the sheet edge in the Y
direction ("Y increment tool change at sheet")?
Tool change before working range: what is the smallest
distance the tool change position may be from the working
range in the Y direction ("Y increment tool change at working
range")?
Parts-related unloading table: YES/NO?

These details are not evaluated by ToPs.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-19

BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 3

Switch, DATA 3
Modifying data for basic machine.
Make the following definitions:

*)

"punching head" how is the ram on your machine moved?*)


MECHANICALLY
HYDRAULICALLY
Does your machine feature antiscratch machining?
Should sheet layout be prepared with single parts at the
machine?
YES: a separate NC text is created for the selected single
part for NC generation in the TECHNOLOGY module. This
NC text can then be called up at the machine (regardless of
the NC program for the complete sheet processing).
Can processing operation include Softpunch?
Is the power for presser foot programmable?
Which forming heights can be approached?
variable forming height: minimum and maximum heights:
fast forming height: maximum height
"Y reduction limit": in which area in the Y direction should
traveling take place with reduced speed?
"X reduction strip": in which strip in the X direction should
traveling take place with reduced acceleration?
"Max. reduced speed": what is the slowest speed the machine
is allowed to travel at?
"Acceleration reduced by": by what percentage should acceleration be reduced?
Is tool rotation possible?
Which processing types are supported by the control system?
tapping
slotting
marking
Can long tools be implemented on the machine?
Is rapid forming possible?

These details are not evaluated by ToPs.

6-20

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 4

Switch, DATA 4
Modifying machine data for processing with Multitool tools.*).
Make the following definitions:

BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 5

Can your machine work with Multitool tools?


YES
NO
Select Multitool type: if your machine can work with Multitool
tools, then the following definitions must be made for every
Multitool type:
how large is the diameter of the outer circle of the tool
("Diameter of hole circle")?
how large is the angle between the fitting position and the
first punch ("Start angle")?
what is the maximum material thickness that can be
processed?
for punching
for nibbling
for embossing

Switch, DATA 5
Modifying data for laser processing table format, punching
head/laser offset and ejection cylinder.
Make the following definitions:

*)

Is laser table output possible?


Which laser table format should be output at the end of the NC
text?
Type 1: variables are output in lines.
Type 2: every variable is output separately in a line.
Type 3: general table format in accordance with
DIN V 4001. Type 3 must be set for the TC 600L.
X and Y offset from punching head to laser station?
At which magazine station is the dummy tool? A dummy tool is
inserted into the punching head during laser processing to
protect the tool adapter from spattering.
At which minimum Y position should the dummy tool be
exchanged?
X- and Y- offset for ejector cylinder?
Minimum and maximum acceleration in the X and Y direction?
Is the microweld process possible?
Microweld process: Separated parts are rejoined to the sheet
skeleton with small welding points.

These details are not evaluated by ToPs.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-21

BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 6

Switch, DATA 6
Modifying machine data for laser machining.
Make the following definitions:

BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 7

Can process ensue with contour control mode (rounding)?


Can process ensue with path slope?
Can process ensue with distance control?
Can process ensue with high pressure?
Can process ensue with Feed Forward?
Can process ensue with laser power control (here LLS)?
Which measuring cycle for ascertaining material thickness
should be used for piercing?

Switch, DATA 7
Modifying machine data for processing with subroutine technique.
Make the following specifications for subroutine program definition
and type of subroutine output type:

Should subroutine output take place?


Should subroutines be output together with main programs?
Should main programs and subroutines be linked for NC
output?
If yes:
Maximally how many subroutines may be linked?
Maximally how many digits can the main program number
have?
How should subroutines be output?
PART-ORIENTATED: If the NC program is to be output
part-oriented, then an automatic search is made for
identical processing sequences within multi-copy
processing. Subroutines are then generated for each of
these identical processing sequences according to the
defined rules.
COMPULSORY SEQ: present compulsory sequences are
generated as subroutines.

For part-oriented subroutine technique:


minimum number of machining operations for a subroutine?
What is the minimum number of subroutine call-ups in a main
program?

6-22

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 8

Switch, DATA 8
Modifying the data for machine control.
Define maximum values for NC output:

What is the highest main program number which can be given?


What is the highest subroutine number which can be given?
Which maximum limit values apply for the X, Y, I and J values?
What is the highest block number which can be given?
What is the maximum value for feedrate per stroke?
Maximally how large can the distance beween single strokes be
("subdivision of path/distance")?
Note: Information text may be added as comments to these
entries.

Define parameters for NC output:

S354E61.DOC

Are the blocks in the NC program numbered?


What is the step size for block numbering ("Block increment")?
Should the push-out subroutine be transferred to machine
control on NC output?
What is the maximum permissible number of NC characters in
an NC program?
In which directory are the NC programs normally located for
your machine ("Name of transfer path")?

Module DATA

6-23

Modifying stop pin data


STOP PIN DATA
switch, DATA 1

Switch, DATA 1
Modifying stop pin data.
Make the following definitions:

What is the maximum amount of stop pins at your disposal?


What is the number of the default stop pin? (If no other entries
are made, then ToPs will assume the use of the default stop pin
during program creation).
How wide are the stop pins in the X direction ("Dimension of
pin")?
width of the first stop pin?
width of the second stop pin?

Input the following data for every pin:

At which position are the stop pins mounted?


X coordinate
Y coordinate
How is the sheet loaded?
with Lift?
manually
From which side is the sheet loaded?
from the right
from the left
Which Y loading positions apply when loading the sheet:
with Lift?
manually?
If your machine is equipped with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
or has been modified ex works for a subsequent attachment
of TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300 or 1600, then stop pin 2
must be activated.

6-24

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Modifying removal of small parts


REMOVAL SMALL PARTS
switch, DATA 1

Switch, DATA 1
Modifying data for the removal of small parts.
Select a data block in the lower selection window.
Then make the following definitions:
Dimensions of the flaps/chutes?
Minimum and maximum values in X direction and Y direction
(zero point is the center point of the punching head, the socalled loading position)
Does the flap/chute have a sensor at its disposal?
What should the minimum length of the push out path in Y
direction be?
Is the last stroke activated by the push-out cycle?
YES. The last stroke is suppressed by ToPs.
NO. The last stroke is generated by ToPs.
Should the flap or chute be active prior to the last stroke?
select YES if the machine is equipped with TRUMASORT.
Effect: a check is made as to whether TRUMASORT is
ready for removal of part.
Can the part to be expelled lie in the sheet skeleton?
YES
NO
Example of TC 200R: parts which are removed from the pushout cycle via the large flap must be released.
NC cycles: select NC cycles in the scroll window. The data is
displayed on the left in the input fields. This will save you
having to type everything in.

REMOVAL SMALL PARTS


switch, DATA 2

Switch, DATA 2
Modify data for removal of small parts.
The definitions are dependent on the way your machine has been
equipped:

S354E61.DOC

should removal via the chute be supported by compressed air?


Does the punching head of your machine have blow-out
nozzles?
Example: the C-axis is rotated by 180 for the TC 260 so that
the air nozzles can blow in the push-out direction.

Module DATA

6-25

Is the chute monitored by a light barrier?


Is antiscratch removal possible?
Which tool is connected to activating the flap: LASER,
PUNCHING or LASER/PUNCHING?
Is a removal possible with an open flap?
Which drawing should be displayed? Enter the name of the
drawing for the flap/chute.
The NC cycle name and the minimum and maximum X and Y
dimension of the respective flap or chute is displayed in the
scroll window.
Select a data block. This will save you having to type everything
in.

Modifying repositioning data


REPOSITIONING DATA
switch, DATA 1

Switch, DATA 1
Modifying data for repositioning.
Make the following definitions:

*)

At what speed does repositioning take place?


How far is the sheet moved in the Y direction during
repositioning ("1. Y lift dimension")?
In which area is the repositioning position?
minimum position in Y direction for standard clamps
minimum position in the Y direction for retractable clamps
Maximum position in the Y direction*) for retractable clamps
Minimum position in Y direction for laser
What is the minimum position for the presser foot?
in Y direction ("Min. Y pos. presser foot")
in X direction ("Min. X position")
At which positions are the punching head and repositioning
cylinders located?
in -X direction
in +X direction
in -Y direction
in +Y direction
How large is the diameter of the cylinder?
How large is the diameter of the punching head
("Diameter of presser foot")?
Note: The punching head is used as the presser foot.

These details are not evaluated by ToPs.

6-26

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Modifying push-out data


PUSH-OUT DATA
switch, DATA 1

Switch, DATA 1
Modifying push-out data.

Select a data block in the selection window.


Make the following definitions:

Thickness of material to be pushed out


Minimum sheet thickness
Maximum sheet thickness
How long is the minimum and maximum push-out path in the X
and Y direction?
How high is the minimum and maximum push-out speed in the
X and Y direction?

Modifying clamp data


CLAMP DATA
switch, DATA 1

Switch, DATA 1
Modifying data for clamps.
Make the following definitions:

Which identity number does the clamp have?


What are the dimensions of the clamp contour?
PUNCHING: the contour of the clamp dead area is
displayed for standard clamps.
RETR.CL.ACTIVE: the contour of the clamping area of the
clamp is displayed for retractable clamps.
RETR.CL.INACTIVE: if the retractable clamps are not
active, then a clamp dead strip will be displayed.
LASER WITHOUT DUMMY laser without dummy (only for
combined machines like, for example, the TC 600L)
LASER WITH DUMMY laser with dummy (only for
combined machines like, for example, the TC 600L)

Another sub-mask is opened on selection of a function button.


Enter the coordinates of the contour positions for the clamp dead
range or the clamp clamping area. The X coordinates of the contour
positions are in the left column, the Y coordinates in the right
column.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-27

Representation of clamp types in ToPs


Standard clamps

The contour of the dead range of a standard clamp is displayed as


a yellow rectangle. The yellow cross marks the postion on the
transverse rail. Standard clamps can be movable or fixed depending on the machine design.
For your information:

1-4
5-9
a
b
A
S
P

Contour position of the clamp dead range for multitool tools


Contour position of the clamp dead range for standard tools
Clamp dead range for multitool tools
Clamp dead range for standard tools
Working range
Clamp axis of symmetry
Clamp (not shown on screen)

Contour positions of the clamp dead range

Retractable
clamps

Fig. 12125

the contour of the clamping area of the clamp is displayed as a


yellow trapezoid. The position of the clamp is specified. Retractable
clamps cannot be offset.
For your information:

1-4 Contour positions of the clamping area for the retractable clamp
A

Working range

Clamp axis of symmetry

Clamping area of clamp

Example: Contour positions of clamp clamping area


for retractable clamps

6-28

Module DATA

Fig. 9623

S354E61.DOC

CLAMP DATA
switch, DATA 2

Maximum number of clamps which can be installed on your


machine?*)
How many slots are available for the fitting of clamps?
How many clamps are actually used?
Can the clamps be opened individually?
Application of retractable clamps:
Minimum range of dead range strips in the Y direction?
How large is the distance from the clamp center to the
sensor?*)
Minimum safety dimension for retractable clamps in Y direction
("Min. Y dimension")?
Positions of the clamps on the transverse rail:
How large is the distance between the machine zero point
and the first clamp ("1st X dimension")?
How large is the distance between the clamps ("dx from
one clamp to the next")?
Identification in the NC program:
Is the clamp located in the magazine?*)
1 = Yes
0 = No
This information is accessed by ToPs when creating the
NC program as long as no other entries are made.
with which number is the clamp identified in the NC
program ("Cons. number")?

Switch, DATA 2
Modifying data for clamps.

Make the following definitions:

*)
*)

Clamps in the linear magazine: what are the numbers of the


magazine positions where the clamps are normally located?
ToPs uses the entered values for the graphical representation
(see: TECHNOLOGY module
What are the numbers of the sensor clamps?
How large may the traversing path be in the positive Y direction
for closing the workpiece clamp?

These details are not evaluated by ToPs.


These details are not evaluated by ToPs.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-29

CLAMP DATA
switch, DATA 3

Switch, DATA 3
Modifying data for clamps.
Make the following definitions for standard clamps:

CLAMP DATA
switch, DATA 8

In which range can the clamps at the individual X positions be


moved?
from ("minimum")
to ("maximum")
How large is the minimum distance between the clamps?
What should the NC clamp monitoring check:
the clamp positions?
clamp distances?
Which dimension (-X and +X coordinates) should apply for
clamp monitoring? The dimensions refer to the clamp center.
Where are the standard fixed positions for the clamps? ToPs
uses the entered values for the graphical representation
( see: TECHNOLOGY module).

Switch, DATA 8
Modifying data for clamps.
The following data for "sheet loading position" can be defined:

Sheet dimension in X direction?


Loading position in X direction? ("Zero traverse rail-sheet
edge")
Loading type: manually or via TRUMALIFT?
From which side does loading take place? (You stand in front of
the machine)
Is the retractable screen active?

The data block is displayed in the selection window.


Modifications to this mask should only be made after
consultation with TRUMPF Customer Support.

6-30

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Modifying formulas
FORMULAS
switch, DATA 1

Switch, DATA 1
Modifying formulas.
Select one formula in the selection window.
Make the following definitions:

Which number does the formula have?


"Active": should the formulas be selected or not?
"Note": what is calculated with the formula?
Polynomial degree?
Minimum value of the result accepted.
Maximum value of the result accepted.
Which values apply to the coefficients A(0) to A(n)?
Modifications to this mask should only be made after
consultation with TRUMPF Customer Support.

Modifying tooling system data


TOOLING SYSTEM DATA
switch, DATA 1

Switch, DATA 1
Modifying tooling system data.
Make the following definitions:

S354E61.DOC

How many tool magazines can your machine access?*)


(A TRUMATOOL also counts as a magazine.)
How many magazine positions in total are available on your
machine?
Should your machine have a magazine wheel at its disposal:
how many tools can the magazine wheel accept?*)
Should your machine have a linear magazine at its disposal:
how many tools can the linear magazine accept?*)

Module DATA

6-31

TOOLING SYSTEM DATA


switch, DATA 2

Switch, DATA 2
Modifying tooling system data.
Make the following definitions via the NC output formats for tool
change and for optimization of tool set-up:

Through which address does the tool change ensue? Activate


the type of tool change that your machine understands.
The mask contains the following information concerning the tool
change types possible:
format (coding in the NC text): T address, K address or
CCTOOLNO.
"type": description of the corresponding address.
"preparatory": Yes or No: Only applies to the 8-digit
K address.
"activated": Activate corresponding format.
Should all tool angles be rotated through 180 during NC output?
This tool optimization setting makes good sense if you have
machines where the tools have to be set up with a varying
fitting position.
Example: TC 240R or TC 260 and TC 200R or TC 500R

The address your machine understands depends on the machine


type and on the software series version for your machine:
13-digit T addresses

13-digit T address: punching machines with BOSCH control


system to software series version T23-4xx.
ToPs offers two alternatives for this address:

The position x4x5 in the T address is output as consecutive


two-digit number for tools treated as special tools;
or
The last two digits of the identification number (ID number in
ToPs management) are taken for the position x4x5.

Please note:
The consecutive two-digit number is always unambiguous, but it is
effective for the created program only.
For identifying a tool by the last two digits of the ID number from
ToPs, you have to make sure that these two digits have been
specified unambiguously in tool management. If necessary change
these ID numbers.
Example: ID No. 09560050 and ID No. 09762050; the last two
digits are identical!

Example: 13-digit T address, for example, for TC 260 or TC 240R


General: Tx1-x13
x1x2

6-32

x3

Module DATA

Consecutive tool number in the NC text


Tool shape in coded form
(1 for round tool, 4 for rectangular tool etc.; 9S354E61.DOC
for special
tool with X4,X5 = number of the special tool)

x4-x8

Dimension 1
(diameter, edge length in X or length of tool in general)

x9-x13 Dimension 2
(edge length in Y or width of tool in general)
Code in the NC text:
e.g.: rectangular tool 20 x 10mm: T0440200000100

18-digit T address

18-digit T address: from software series version T23-4xx.

Note:TRUMALTOOL 40 must be programmed by the 18-digit


T address with identification number.
Example: 18-digit T address for TC 500R
General: Tx1x2[x3-x18]
x1x2
x3x4
x5-x8
x9-x12
x13-x14

x15-x16
x17-x18

Consecutive tool number in the NC text


Tool shape in coded form
(01 for round tool, 04 for rectangular tool etc.)
Dimension 1
(diameter, edge length in X or length of tool in general)
Dimension 2
(edge length in Y or width of tool in general)
Multitool type
(4 for 4-station Multitool, 6 for 6-station Multitool, 12 for
12-station Multitool)
Punch within the multitool
Consecutive number of a Multitool type for differentiating
various Multitools of the same type.

Code in the NC text:


e.g.: rectangular tool 20 x 10mm: T04[4,20,10]
e.g.: rectangular tool 10 x 5mm, as second punch in a 4-station
Multitool; third 4-station Multitool: T08[4,10,5,4,2,3].

For tool management in ToPs, a maximum of nine digits may


be used for the identification number. The first two digits are
normally reserved for the tool type. Please take these
conditions into account when creating new tool data. The
identity number given there must be selected in such a way
that machine control understands the details in the tool
change call-up.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-33

K address

K address is, for example, for the TC 260 with cell control and for
machines from software series version T23-4xx.

CCTOOLNO

Valid for TC 600L.


Tool selection for the tool which should be installed next in the tool
adapter with the command TC_TOOL_CHANGE.
Example: TC_TOOL_NO (Ident-Number)

For a description on programming and the meaning of the


various tool changes (addresses), please refer to the
respective programming manual for your machine.

6-34

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Modifying lubricating system data


LUBRICATING SYSTEM
DATA switch, DATA 1

Switch, DATA 1
Modifying data for tool lubrication. *)
Make the following definitions:

How many lubrication containers does your machine have at its


disposal?
Which container is allocated for tool lubrication? Default selection: 1
How should the lubrication intensity be set: example for TC 600L.
WEAK after every 60 strokes, a set amount of oil is released
MEDIUM after every 30 strokes, a set amount of oil is released
STRONG after every 5 strokes, a set amount of oil is released
EXTRA STRONG: Tool lubrication at every punching stroke,
however max. 200 Impulses per minute.
Precise details of the lubrication intensities are to be found in
the operators manual for your machine.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-35

Automation components
The automation components are completely supported by ToPs.
Programming in the TECHNOLOGY module and the configuration or settings in the DATA module are fully described in
Chapter 8.

GRIP switch

Switch
UNLOADING AREA

SUCTION CUP
DATA switch

TRUMAGRIP is supported in ToPs 300

Palleting supported in ToPs 300

In ToPs 300 this function is supported.

Switch
LIFTGROUP 1
SHEETMASTER

Switch
LIFTGROUP 2
SB / SC / SE

6-36

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster is supported in ToPs 300.

TRUMALIFT SB/SC/SE are supported in ToPs 300.

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

4.

Recording material data

You must enter the materials which you wish to process into the
database.
Stored Information

The data for the processing of mild steel, special steel and
aluminium alloys are normally included.

The whole material data is recorded on one single mask:


Material

Data blocks for the materials which are already entered in the
database are displayed in the selection window.
The following information is issued as soon as you have selected a
data block in the selection window:

Function button
MATERIALIDENT

S354E61.DOC

Material ID:
Tensile strength
Specific gravity
Dimensions:
Material size: X and Y dimension
Material thickness: Z dimension
Remarks in plain text
Material group

You can scroll to the beginning of the data list in the selection
window using this function button.

Module DATA

6-37

Modifying, deleting and creating


material data
Record material data

Function button MODIFY

Procedure:
1. Select a data block in the selection window. Data is entered in
the input fields.
2. Modify the data.
3. Finish your alterations by clicking the MODIFY function button.

Deleting material data

function button DELETE

Procedure:
1. Select a data block in the selection window. Data is entered in
the input fields.
2. Select the DELETE function button. This data block no longer
appears in the selection window.

Entering new material in the


database

Function button CREATE:

1st possibility:
1. Input the new values into the entry fields.
2. Select the CREATE function button.
A new data block is added to the existing data blocks in the
selection window.

2nd possibility:
This option is mainly used to save you the bother of writing.
1. Select an existing data block in the selection window. Data are
entered in the input fields.
2. Modify the data (at least the material ID number).
3. Select the CREATE function button.

6-38

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

5.

Laser tables

The laser tables in ToPs contain the application parameters (data)


which optimize laser machining. The database contains the
application parameters for machining:
Mild steel (St37)
Special steel (1.4301) and
Aluminium alloys (ALMg3, AlMgSi1)
The application parameters are determined and issued by our
process development department.

You will also find these application parameters in the data


collection for your machine.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-39

5.1

Structure of laser tables

A laser table in ToPs contains all technology data for the processing of a material type and sheet thickness.
It corresponds to a data block in the database and is composed as
follows:

The data for the machining operation is determined depending on


the

table no.
machine (machine group)
laser power
material
material thickness:
lens focal length
cutting gas. One or more sets of rules are also assigned.

Control system

Control system

SINUMERIK 840D

BOSCH CC...

Piercing

Piercing

General cutting

Cutting

Cut contour

Vaporization

Vaporization

Marking

Marking

Center marking

Center marking

Comment:

Microweld

Process rules

Comment:

6-40

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

5.2

Laser table numbers

The numbers in the laser tables are consecutive, 4-digit numbers.


Number range of TRUMPF

The number range from 1000 - 4999 is reserved for the laser tables
created by TRUMPF.

Your number range

The number range from 5000 - 9999 is reserved for the laser tables
you create.

Important: The numbers of the laser tables created by TRUMPF


are rewritten each time the software is updated. For this reason,
you should not change the tables. If you wish to change a table,
assign a new table number from the number range available to
you (5000 - 9999). This is the only way to ensure that your table is
not overwritten when the software is updated. Recommended
procedure: Copy an existing laser table. Change the number and
the values which must be changed (managing laser tables see>
DATA module).

Data collection

In the data collection you received with your machine, the laser
tables are stored under the same number as in the database.

Updating the data collection

The data collections are updated by TRUMPF at regular intervals.


The data collection contains a summary of the table numbers in
which data has been changed and information on the
improvements expected from the change. You have the option of
deciding whether to accept our recommendations and change and
expand your present database.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-41

5.3

Recording laser table data: Masks

The complete data block of a laser table is recorded with masks.


Module
DATA

Laser

Select the main function LASER in the initial mask.


Laser tables already contained in the database can be displayed in
the selection window.
Select a laser table to be checked, modified or deleted. The mask
header is filled out.

Function buttons
MODIFY
CREATE
COPY
DELETE

Function button
CONTINUE

6-42

A sub-mask is opened when one of the function buttons in the mask


footer.Execute the desired actions.

Selecting CONTINUE opens a sub-mask in which data for e.g.


piercing, cutting etc. can be called up.
See Description "Sub-masks".

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Sub-masksOverview
Overview of sub-masks

Laser data: Overview of sub-masks, BOSCH control system

Fig. 19558

Each function button with color identification leads to a sub-mask,


the function buttons of which vary according to the machine
selected:
Machines with BOSCH CC...
control systems

Machines with control system


SINUMERIK 840D:

Function button PIERCING

Function button PIERCING

Function button CUTTING

Function button GENERAL CUTTING

Function button VAPORIZE

Function button CUTTING CONTOUR

Function button MARKING

Function button VAPORIZE

Function button CENTER MARKING

Function button CENTER MARKING

Function button COMMENTARY

Function button CENTER MARKING

Function button RULES

Function button MICROWELD

----

Function button COMMENTARY

The sub-masks for the function buttons are described in the


following pages, depending on the machine control system.
For a description and details of individual parameters of a
laser table please refer to the respective data collection for
your machine.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-43

Masks for machines with BOSCH CC...


control systems
Defining piercing data

Function button PIERCING


Which parameters should be valid?

Defining cutting data

Which application parameters apply for piercing with reduced


and full laser power?
"Piercing time"
"Ramp cycle number"
"rel. piercing distance"
"Blow-out time"
"Piercing gas pressure"
"Setting value"
Which gas should be used for piercing?
at reduced laser power
at full laser power

Function button CUTTING


Which parameters should be valid?

6-44

Module DATA

Which application parameters will be used for cutting small,


medium and large contours?
"Laser power (watts)?"
"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Kerf"
"Time delay"
"Cutting gas pressure"
"Gas change time"
Cutting speed to be used for the reduced approach?
"Reduced gas pressure"
"Reduced laser power"
"Reduced gating frequency"
Which cutting gas to use?
Gas to be used for the approach?

S354E61.DOC

Defining vaporizing data

Function button VAPORIZE


Which parameters should be valid?

Defining marking data

Function button MARKING


Which parameters should be valid?

S354E61.DOC

"Laser power (watts)?"


"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Kerf"
"Time delay"
"Cutting gas pressure"
"Gas change time"
"Vaporizing nozzle distance": Distance from material upper
edge to nozzle?
"Gas type": Which gas should be used for vaporizing?

"Laser power (watts)"


"Gating frequency"
"cutting speed"
"Kerf"
"Time delay"
"Cutting gas pressure"
"Gas change time"
"Positioning height" for marking?
The positioning height for material thicknesses 3 mm is
8 mm
For material thicknesses > 3 mm it is 30 mm. These
positioning heights are approached automatically if a 0
(zero) is entered in the mask.
"Nozzle distance": Enter distance of nozzle from sheet.
0: The nozzle distance entered in the "Commentary" mask is
evaluated.
"Gas type": Select the gas to be used for marking.

Module DATA

6-45

Defining centre marking


data

Function button CENTER MARKING


Which parameters should be valid?

Enter commentary on laser


table

Function button COMMENTARY


A commentary on your laser table is entered in this mask.

Assigning rules to the laser


tables

"Laser power (watts)?"


"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Kerf"
"Time delay"
"Cutting gas pressure"
"Gas change time"
"Piercing time"
"Ramp cycle number"
"Piercing height"
"Blow-out time"
"Nozzle distance": Distance of nozzle from sheet?
0: The nozzle distance entered in the "Commentary" mask is
evaluated.
"Gas type": Which gas should be used for center marking?

Cutting head number: Enter the number of the cutting head.


Which nozzle distance is permissible for cutting at "normal"
laser power and at "reduced" laser power?
Which focus position is permitted?
Nozzle and lens identification number?
"Creation date": When was this table created?
"Processed by" Who created this table?
"Note": In addition it is possible to enter short pieces of information in plain text, e.g. to explain the laser table contents.

Function button RULES


Rules: Which rules should be assigned to the laser table?

For which rules should this table apply?

A check is made whether the gas pressure entered in the rules


corresponds to the gas pressure in the laser table. If the system
finds no correspondence, it notifies you with an error message.

6-46

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Masks for machines with SINUMRIK 840D


Defining piercing data

Function button PIERCING


Which parameters should be valid?

Defining general
cutting data

Function button GENERAL CUTTING


Which parameters should be valid?

Defining contour
cutting data

"Setting value": The position of the focus in relation to the


nozzle tip. Value set at the cutting head.
"Corner cool-off time": How long?
At what acceleration should work take place: normal, reduced
or high?
Should the approach be at reduced cutting speed?
Should punch hole be cut at reduced speed?
Switch plasma sensor on or off?
"Threshold value 1"
"Threshold value 2"
"Gas type": Which cutting gas should be used?

Function button CUTTING CONTOUR


Which parameters should be valid?

S354E61.DOC

"Setting value" The position of the focus in relation to the nozzle


tip. Value set at the cutting head.
"Time SPRINT LAS":
Which application parameters apply for piercing with reduced
and normal laser power?
"Piercing time"
"Ramp cycle number"
"Nozzle distance"
"Blow-out time"
"Piercing gas pressure"
"Spray oil"
Which gas should be used for piercing?

Which application parameters (reduced or normal) apply for


cutting small, medium and large contours?
"Kerf"
"Setting value" The position of the focus in relation to the
nozzle tip. Value set at the cutting head.
"Laser power (watts)"
"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Nozzle distance"
"Cutting gas pressure"

Module DATA

6-47

Defining vaporizing data

Function button VAPORIZE


Which parameters should be valid?

Defining marking data

Function button MARKING


Which parameters should apply?

Defining centre
marking data

Module DATA

"Setting value": The position of the focus in relation to the nozzle


tip. Value set at the cutting head.
"Laser power (watts)?"
"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Nozzle distance": Distance of nozzle from sheet?
0: The nozzle distance entered in the "Commentary" mask is
evaluated.
"Gas pressure"
"Gas type"

Function button CENTER MARKING


Which parameters should apply to the center marking of a
geometry or point?

6-48

"Setting value": The position of the focus in relation to the nozzle


tip. Value set at the cutting head.
"Vaporisation time"
"Laser power (watts)"
"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Vaporizing nozzle distance": Distance of material upper edge
from nozzle for vaporizing?
"Gas pressure"
"Gas type"

"Setting value": The position of the focus in relation to the


nozzle tip. Value set at the cutting head.
"Laser power (watts)?"
"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Nozzle distance": Distance between nozzle and sheet?
0: The nozzle distance entered in the "Commentary" mask is
evaluated.
"Time delay"
"Cutting gas pressure"
"Piercing time"
"Ramp cycle number"
"Gas type"

S354E61.DOC

Defining Microweld
process data

Function button MICROWELD


Microweld is a process by which parts are connected to the sheet
by welding points.
Which parameters should be valid?

Assigning commentary to
laser table

"Setting value": The position of the focus in relation to the


nozzle tip. Value set at the cutting head.
"Time"
"Ramp cycle number"
"Nozzle distance": Distance between nozzle and sheet?
0: The nozzle distance entered in the "Commentary" mask is
evaluated.
"Gas pressure"
"Gas type"

Function button COMMENTARY


In this mask, a commentary on your laser table is entered and the
assignment of rules to the laser table defined.

"Nozzle type"
The nozzles are differentiated by shape. Depending on the
material and material thickness, different nozzle types are used.
0: no entry
1: Nozzle type 1
2: Nozzle type 2

"Cutting head number"


Gas flushing between cutting and piercing? Time value in [s].
Gas flushing between piercing and cutting? Time value in [s].
"Processed by" Who created this table?
"Creation date": When was this table created?
"Alteration date": When was this table altered?
"Note": In addition it is possible to enter a short piece of
information in plain text, e.g. to explain the laser table contents.

In the right mask area: assignation of rules to laser table:

For which rules should this table apply? Enter the number of
the rules.

A check is made whether the gas pressure entered in the rules


corresponds to the gas pressure in the laser table. If the system
finds no correspondence, it notifies you with an error message.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-49

5.4

Modifying, deleting and creating laser


tables: Procedure

The procedure is always the same for creating, deleting and


modifying long data blocks (see Overview of the various masks).
The procedure is explained step by step for a laser table as an
example.

Modifying data blocks


Modifying data blocks
Functions

Module
DATA
Laser

Function button
MODIFY

Steps:
1. Start the DATA module.

2. Select data range to be accessed: laser tables


3. Select data block: Click in the selection window with the
mouse. The data are entered in the mask header and in the
sub-masks.
4. Modifying data in mask header: Select function button MODIFY.
The sub-mask is opened.

Function buttons
MODIFY
BACK
Function button
CONTINUE

6. Select function button CONTINUE in the initial mask to open the


sub-masks.

Function button
MODIFY

7. Conclude working in the respective sub-mask with MODIFY and


transfer the data modifications to the existing data block. Call up
the subsequent sub-masks one by one.

Function button
RETURN

6-50

5. Conclude working in the sub-mask with MODIFY and select


initial mask again with BACK.

8. Finally select the initial mask again.

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Creating new data blocks


Creating new data blocks
Functions

Steps:
1. Start the DATA module.

Data

Laser

2. Select data range to be accessed:


3. Select data block: Click in the selection window with the
mouse. The data are entered in the mask header and in the
sub-masks.

Function button
CREATE

4. Creating new data in the mask header: select the CREATE


function button. The sub-mask is opened.

Funktionsknpfe
CREATE

5. Conclude working in the sub-mask with CREATE and select


initial mask again with BACK.

BACK
Function button
CONTINUE
Function button
MODIFY

7. Carry out work in the sub-mask and save it and conclude with
MODIFY. the modifications are accepted in the existing data
block. Call up the subsequent sub-masks one by one.

Function button
BACK

S354E61.DOC

6. Select function button CONTINUE in the initial mask to open


the sub-masks.

8. Finally select the initial mask again.

Module DATA

6-51

Copying and modifying data blocks


Copying data blocks
Functions
Module
DATA

Laser

Steps:
1. Start the DATA module.

2. Select data range to be accessed:


3. Select data block: Click in the selection window with the
mouse. The data are entered in the mask header and in the
sub-masks.

Function button
COPY

4. Modifying data in mask header: select function button COPY.


The sub-mask is opened.

Function button
READ

5. Select this function button to read in the marked data. At least


the following data entries must be modified in the sub-masks.
Data range:
Laser table

Number

Machine data

Name

Material data

Identnumber

Rules

Name (Number)

Function buttons
CONTINUE
BACK
Function button
CONTINUE

7. Select function button CONTINUE in the initial mask to open


the sub-masks.

Function button
MODIFY

8. Conclude working in the respective sub-mask with MODIFY


and transfer the data modifications to the existing data block.
Call up the subsequent sub-masks one by one.

Function button
BACK

6-52

6. Conclude working in the sub-mask with COPY and select initial


mask again with BACK.

9. Finally select the initial mask again.

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Deleting data block


Deleting data block
Functions
Module
DATA
Laser

Steps:
1. Start the DATA module.

2. Select data range to be accessed:


3. Select data block: Click in the selection window with the
mouse. The data are entered in the mask header and in the
sub-masks.

Function button
DELETE
Function buttons
DELETE
BACK

S354E61.DOC

4. Select function button DELETE. The sub-mask is opened.

5. Remove data block with DELETE and select initial mask again
with BACK.

Module DATA

6-53

6.

Rules

On selection of the RULES function in the main menu, the subfunctions DATA, SYSTEM, PUNCHING and MACHINE will be offered.

6.1

Rule data for laser machining

A rule group is a collection of rules according to which decision


processes are to be carried out. A rule group is integrated in ToPs
which contains all the information for determining the laser
machining operation. Rule group information is stored in the
database and designated the knowledge base. Interpretation is
done with the specified rules of the part geometry and the
machining operation is assigned in the TECHNOLOGY module.
By means of the rules specified in the rule group, ToPs recognises
which type of contour is being used, the corner to start at, where to
create a looping and much more.

Module
DATA

Data stored in the database.


Rule groups from TRUMPF are already stored in the database.
They are valid for the machining of

Rule group

mild steel (St37),


special steel (1,4301) and
aluminum alloys (AlMg3, AlMgSi1).

Data

6-54

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

6.2

Structure of rule groups

The data block of a rule group is determined according to the


following scheme:

The data for the machining operation is determined depending on the

rule group name (number)


material
material thickness:
machine (machine group)
"Gas pressure".

General conditions: General specifications


Small/medium/large contour
Piercing
Approach
Cutting
Moving away
Positioning
Rounding
Looping
Vaporization

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-55

6.3

Rule group name

The name of the rule group can consist of various characters:


letters, numerals or a combination of both. Maximum length of the
name: 5 characters.
Your rule groups

The first character of you rule group name must be a "K".


Examples:

Rule groups from TRUMPF

The rule groups which we have already stored in the database are
characterized by the fact that their first character is not a "K".
Examples:

K4711
KPR1
K0001

60371
60372
60373
...
60704

Important: The rule groups created by TRUMPF are rewritten each


time the software is updated. For this reason, you should not
change these rule groups. If you wish to change a rule group,
assign a name which starts with "K". This is the only way to
ensure that your rule group is not overwritten when the software is
updated. Recommended procedure: Copy an existing rule group.
Change the number and the values which must be changed.
The names of our rule groups, which are already contained in the
database, are formed according to the following scheme:
Four characters + code number
5001x

The code number indicates which general conditions apply to this


rule group.
Function button GENERAL 1

6-56

Module DATA

The general connditions are summarized in a mask


( see: DATA module: Record process rules data. Masks) with
commentatry under a key word. The code number facilitates
selection of a rule group.
The code number has the following meanings:

S354E61.DOC

Code numbersand key


words

Corner: (Round)
(corners are rounded)

Corner: Looping
(corners become sharp)

Corner: (Not round / No looping)


(Corners are smoothed)

Film / Round
Sheet is covered with film,
corners are rounded)

Example: The rule group with the name 60373 creates neither
loops nor roundings.

6.4

Record process rules data: Masks

The complete data block of a rule group is recorded with the


following masks:
Module
DATA

Rule group
Data

Function buttons
MODIFY
CREATE
COPY
DELETE
Function button
CONTINUE

S354E61.DOC

In the initial mask

The rule groups stored in the database are displayed in the


selection window.
Select the rule group whose data is to be checked, modified or
deleted.
The sub-mask is opened. Execute the desired actions.

An overview of the sub-masks which can be opened is displayed.

Module DATA

6-57

Sub-masks
Overview of sub-masks

Sub-masks are displayed for the following function buttons


(=switches with colour coding):

Function button SMALL CONTOUR


Function button MEDIUM CONTOUR
Function button LARGE CONTOUR

Function button PIERCING

Function button APPROACH

Function button CUTTING

Function button MOVE AWAY

Function button POSITIONING

Function button ROUND

Function button LOOPING

Recording general data


(part 1)

Function button GENERAL 1


Function button GENERAL 2
Function button GENERAL 3

Function button VAPORIZE

Function button GENERAL 1


Make the following definitions:

6-58

Module DATA

Keywords can be entered in the remarks field. In rule groups


issued by TRUMPF, the keywords are entered according to the
code numbers.
How shoudl open contours be treated? Define contour size.
Define contour size. Which contours count as small medium or
large contours?
Medium contours - laser tables
The medium contour size defined here is treated as a small
contour during assignment of the laser tables.
Should the parts be positioned?
"Overshoot height"
Should corners primarily be rounded or should a looping be
produced?
"Corner cool-off time"
"Precutting distance"
"Precutting speed"
Should SprintLas be used for cutting?
Should SprintLas be used for marking?
Should work be done basically with or without acceleration
programming?
Enter absolute X and Y acceleration values.

S354E61.DOC

Notes on acceleration programming:


Acceleration programming is based on the functions G06 and G07.
Application: Acceleration programming is primarily used with
Aluminium (4-6 mm) and Edelstahl (4-10 mm). Acceleration
programming for these materials primarily means: Reduction of
acceleration (m/s2). Reduction counts for the complete contour but
is particularly effective however in corners and during approach.

Corners: No further special corner treatment with rounding or


looping is necessary.Corners are cut with sharp edges by
reduction.
Approach flag:Contours which had to be approached in an arc
without acceleration programming can be approached linearly.

Effect: The function is generated automatically, independently of


the contour size and effects all contours of the sheet.

Recording general
data (part 2)

Function button GENERAL 2


Make the following definitions:

Processing type "Cutting" withi texts: Should text elements be


cut: YES or NO? If yes, to which contour size should they be
assigned?
Precondition: Texts to be cut must be displayed in "white".
Select a text type which makes cutting sensible (e.g."bold").
The following rules apply to the processing of vector texts:
Approach flages and move-away flags. Piercing is directly
on the contour.
It is not possible to reorder a process interactively. This may
lead to uncontrolled scrap (depending on the font used).
The cutting of vector texts is always set to NO as default in the
delivered rule groups.

S354E61.DOC

Processing type "Marking" with texts: Should text elements be


marked: YES or NO? If yes, to which contour size should they
be assigned?
SMALL is set as default.
Processing type "Marking" with contours: Should contours be
marked: YES or NO? If yes, to which contour size should they
be assigned?
SMALL is set as default.
Marking: Should vaporization occur before marking: YES or
NO?

Module DATA

6-59

Processing type "Center marking of a point": Should the point


be center marked: YES or NO? If yes, which contour size
should be set as basic? SMALL is set as default.
Should vaporization occur before center marking: Yes or
No?
Representation of center marking:
How should the symbol for center marking be displayed:as
a point, circle, square or circle?
Which dimensions should the selected symbol have?

Module DATA

ToPs automatically calculates which contours cannot be


processed during processign definition. These parts can be
specially marked by ToPs. This marking is issued in the NC
program.

6-60

Processing type "Center marking of a symbol": How should the


symbol be center marked: as a point or as two circles with
different diameters?

How should unprocessable contours be treated?


"Marking": All contours which cannot be processed should
be assigned to the marking processing type.
"Contour line": Mark entire contour line.
"Center of gravity standard": Mark standard contours
(rectangle, circle, oblong hole) at center of gravity.
"Center of gravity irregular": Mark irregular contours at
center of gravity.
"Center marking": Center mark contours at center of gravity.
This processing type has priority over marking at center of
gravity if both functions are active.

S354E61.DOC

Recording general
data (part 3)

Function button GENERAL 3


Make the following definitions:

Should contours be machined with or without common parting


cuts?
Which areas should be approached at reduced speed?
How long should the overlapping cut be?

Initial blank processing: Define approach path for reduced


approach.

Sheet parting cut Define approach path for reduced approach.

Microweld process:
Length for reduced approach
Length for overlapping cut
Length for preparatory cut
Offset to the contour
Type of execution:soft or hard.

Contour piercing

Function button SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE CONTOUR


Function button PIERCING
Make the following definitions:

S354E61.DOC

Should piercing occur or not?


How should piercing occur?
Ramp mode with reduced or full laser power?
Fast piercing?
Should piercing be with or without a measuring cycle for
ascertaining material thickness?
What spatter circle radius should be set? Safety area in which
no contour which might be damaged may lie. This safety area
is automatically taken into account by the collision checking.
Work with or without height regulation?

Module DATA

6-61

Contour approach

Function button SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE CONTOUR,


Function button APPROACH
Make the following definitions:

Should approach occur or not?


How should approach occur?
FULL: at full laser power?
REDUCED: at reduced laser power?
Which limit values apply for the approach path?
The approach path must be smaller than the selected web
width.
Which limit values apply for the approach radius?
Should precise stop, track slope, distance regulation and feed
forward operate during the approach?
By what percentage should the cutting of the straight part of the
approach path be reduced?
"Angle of approach" Which angle applies for the inner or outer
contour?
Note: Entering the angle determines the contour type to which
this definition should apply - inner contour or outercontour.

Input (Examples)
0

Effect
Move-away flag with 90 produced (1)

20

Move-away flag with 110 (90+20) produced (2)

-20

Move-away flag with 70 (90-20) produced (3)

Fig. 9097

Automatic production of approach and move-away flagsat straight


contours at an angle.
This setting can be made dependent on contour size. Example:
Process small contours with approach and move-away flags at an
angle; approach large cotours normally.

Approaching circles
Setting an approach flag for circular contours at any angle.
Use: Flexible formation of approach flags for circles. Example: In
order to position the approach flag of a circle which is approached
from outside in the scrap, the circle is approached at an angle.
Procedure: This definition is made in the internal system rule group
and automatically applies to all circles.

6-62

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Example:

Approaching a circle

Fig. 9099

Approach strategy
Make the following definitions:
Should a corner, element, a corner/element or element/
corner be approached?
Select a function button. Then the function button CONTINUE.
In the auxiliary mask define:
Approaching an element:
Should approach be in the form of a line or of a line/arc?
Which form should be preferred for approaching?
Which minimum and maximum limit values apply to the
elements to be approached?
Approaching a corner:
Should approach be in the form of a line or of a line/arc?
Angle of the corner?
Length of the element before and after the corner?

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-63

Contour cutting

Function button SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE CONTOUR,


Function button CUTTING
Make the following definitions:

Should cutting occur or not?


Should cutting be at reduced or normal speed?
Cutting with or without precision stop?
Should precise stop, track slope, distance regulation and feed
forward operate during cutting?
Cutting with or without track correction?
The parameter "Max. nozzle extension" has no significance.

Producing micro-Joints
Micro-Joints are located between the approach and move-away
flags.
Definition:
Should micro-joints be produced on outer contours: Yes or No?
Should micro-joints be produced on outer contours: Yes or No?
What length should the micro-joints have?
Beam end before contour end Should the laser beam be turned
off before the end of the contour?

Application: Micro-Joints are used


to reduce the risk of collision for small parts.Small parts are
inclined to tip; fixture by micro-joints can avoid tipping.
to simplify the removal of small parts (parts remain hanging on
the sheet).

Procedure: Make settings in the DATA module.

APPROACH mask: Enter angle of approach.


MOVE-AWAY mask: Enter move-away angle.
CUTTING mask: The special information for micro-joints is
entered in this mask.

Effect: Micro-Joints are set automatically when processing is


generated.
There are many possibilities for the formation of micro-joints:
Different forms of approach and move-away flags, no approach
flag, no move-away flag, length of the micro-joint web.

Recommendation: It makes sense if the approach and move-away


flags are created at an angle. The approach and move-away flags
should run linearly.

6-64

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Length of the micro-joints

Micro-Joint

Fig. 9109

Example: To determine the position of the micro-joint, it is advisable


to define the geometry element to be approached via the
assignment of line type.

Controlling micro-joint position by line type

Moving away from the


contour

Fig. 9110

Function button SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE CONTOUR,


Function button MOVE AWAY
Rules can be defined for withdrawing from the contour: Make the
following definitions:

S354E61.DOC

Should an outer contour or an inner contour be moved away


from or not?
"Distance": Safety distance from contours which must not be
damaged. This safety area is automatically taken into account
by the collision checking.
"Angle of withdrawal": Which angle applies for the inner or
outer contour?
How should withdrawal occur: From a corner or from an
element? Moving away is linked to the type and manner of
approach. Example: If approach was to a corner, moving away
must also be from a corner.
Which limit values apply for the move-away path?
The move-away path must be smaller than the selected web
width.

Module DATA

6-65

Which limit values apply for the move-away radius?

Note: Entering the angle determines the contour type to which


this definition should apply - inner contour or outercontour.
Basic rule: Entering positive angle details produces an acute
angle; negative angle details a blunt angle.
Input (Examples)

Effect

Move-away flag with 90 produced (1)

20

Move-away flag with 110 (90+20) produced (2)

-20

Move-away flag with 70 (90-20) produced (3)

Fig. 9098

Defining positioning
between the contours

How should withdrawal occur?


with precision stop?
with path slope?
with distance regulation?
with Feed Forward?

Function button SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE CONTOUR,


Function button POSITIONING
Make the following definitions:
Should positioning occur between two contours to be cut?
Recommendation: Always select YES here.
Which overshoot height is permitted?

6-66

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Registering corner rounding

Function button SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE CONTOUR,


Function button ROUND
Make the following definitions:

Should rounding occur or not?


which corners should be rounded?
inner corners?
outer corners?
Inner and outer corners?
Type of rounding:
rounding or
working with corner cooling? Determine time for corner
cooling.
Which limit values apply for rounding?

Rounding

S354E61.DOC

Fig. 4750

Minimum (2) and maximum (1) rounding radius? (If the


radius is to be kept exactly, the minimum must correspond
to the maximum radius.)
Minimum (3) and maximum (4) deviation? This gives the
tolerance range (5) for a rounding.
Angle of corner to be rounded?
Minimum and maximum length range of the element before
and after the corner to be rounded?

Module DATA

6-67

Producing loops

Function button SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE CONTOUR,


Function button LOOPING
Make the following definitions:

Should looping be carried out?


Form of looping: pointed or with radius?
Which limit values apply for the generation of loopings?

Looping

Vaporizing contours

Fig. 4751

Looping radius (3)?


Length of entire looping (4)?
The length of the looping must be smaller than the defined
web width for nesting.
Angle area of the corner at which looping is to be
generated?
Length of the geometry element before the looping (1)?
Length of the geometry element after the looping (2)?

Function button SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE CONTOUR,


Function button VAPORIZE
Make the following definitions:

6-68

Module DATA

Should vaporization occur or not?


Should the entire contour or just the piercing point be
vaporized?

S354E61.DOC

6.5
Module
DATA

System-internal rules

This function is designed to be used exclusively by TRUMPF


Software Support and is therefore protected by a password.

Process rules
System

6.6
Process rules

Punching

This function is protected by a password.


There are rules stored in the punching rules which relate to
punching technology.

6.7
Process rules

Machine

S354E61.DOC

Punching rules

Machine rules

This function is protected by a password.


There are rule data stored in the rules for machines which relate to
the machine.

Module DATA

6-69

7.

Assignment: Laser tables - Rule group

Group TC4, mild steel St37


Rule group

Sheet
thickness

1500W

2200W

5"

5"

[mm]
60371
60372
60373

1.0

1978

1998

60381
60382
60383

1.5

1979

1999

60391
60392
60393

2.0

1980

2000

60401
60402
60403

2.5

1981

2001

60411

3.0

1982

2002

60421

4.0

1983

2003

60431

5.0

1984

2004

60441

6.0

1985

2005

60451

8.0

1986

2006

Sheet
thickness
[mm]

1500W

2200W

5"

5"

60501
60502

1.0

1987

2007

60511
60512

1.5

1988

2008

60521
60522

2.0

1989

2009

60531
60532

2.5

1990

2010

60541

3.0

1991

2011

60551

4.0

1992

2012

60561

5.0

2013

60861

6.0

2014

Group TC4, special steel 1.4301


Rule group

6-70

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Group TC4, Aluminium alloy AlMg3


Rule group

Sheet
thickness

1500W

2200W

5"

5"

[mm]
60661
60662

1993

2015

60671
60672

1.5

1994

2016

60681
60682

2.0

1995

2017

60691
60692

2.5

1996

2018

60701

3.0

1997

2019

60711

S354E61.DOC

1.0

4.0

2020

Module DATA

6-71

8.

Output of database contents:


Laser tables, Rule group

Output functions are integrated in the DATA module with which


database contents can be converted into a list format and output to
a printer or a file.

Output of data to from the


database

Function button OUTPUT


In the mask, specify:

Reading in data

Which table number or rule group number should be output?


Select output form: File, printer or display?
FILE: A file is produced with the following format: (Number.lis).
This file can be read by various editors.
PRINTER: The data are sent to the connected printer and
output as a list.The HPGL file produced is deleted automatically
after the print procedure. The familiar Windows mask is
displayed, as for other print procedures.
DISPLAY: The data are displayed on the screen.

Function button READ IN


Reading in laser tables from the control system and outputting them
to a file or to the printer.

6-72

Module DATA

Enter file name (as the program is in the control system, e.g.:
P4711.LST)
Output form: File or printer?
FILE: A file is produced with the following format:
(Number.lis). This file can be read by various editors.
PRINTER: The data are sent directly to the printer and
output as a list.

S354E61.DOC

Example (Printout of a rule group):


-- Laser --

RULE GROUP Rule group name 60393

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Conversion date
: Mon, 07 December 1998
14:13
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Machine type
TC4
Material
St37-20
Material thickness [mm]
2.000000
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Contour size
| small
| medium
| large
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Vaporization
| No
No
No
Type
| Contour
Contour
Contour
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Piercing
| Yes
Yes
Yes
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Meas. cycle
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Spatter circle radius [mm]
| 0.10
0.30
0.30
Piercing Type
| reduced
reduced
reduced
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cutting
| Yes
Yes
Yes
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cutting type
| normal
normal
normal
Precision stop
| No
No
No
Distance regulation
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Path slope
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Feed Forward
| No
No
No
Path correction
| No
No
No
max. nozzle extension
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Outer Contour with Microjoint
| No
No
No
Inner Contour with Microjoint
| No
No
No
Microjoint Length [mm] outer
| 0.40
0.40
0.40
Microjoint Length [mm] inner
| 0.40
0.40
0.40
Beam off before contour end Y/N
| No
No
No
Beam off before contour end L = [mm] | 0.00
0.00
0.00
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Rounding
| No
No
No
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Round corner
| inner/outer
inner/outer
inner/outer
Type
| Round
Round
Round
Radius [mm] min
| 0.50
0.50
0.50
Radius [mm] max
| 0.50
0.50
0.50
Deviation [mm] min
| 0.01
0.01
0.01
Deviation [mm] max
| 11.00
11.00
11.00
Angle [degreees] min
| 5.00
5.00
5.00
Angle [degrees] max
| 175.00
175.00
175.00
Length of element before corner min | 2.00
2.00
2.00
Lengt of element before corner max
| 99999.99
99999.99
99999.99
Length of element after corner min
| 2.00
2.00
2.00
Lengt of element after corner max
| 99999.99
99999.99
99999.99
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------outer contour move-away
| No
No
No
inner contour move-away
| No
No
No
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Distance [mm]
| 0.50
0.50
0.50
Move-away angle [degrees] outer
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Move-away angle [degrees] inner
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Form corner
| Line
Line
Line
Form Element
| Line/arc
Line/arc
Line/arc
Length [mm] min
| 2.00
2.00
2.00
Length [mm] max
| 2.00
2.00
2.00
Radius [mm] min
| 0.15
0.30
0.30
Radius [mm] max
| 0.15
0.30
0.30
Precision stop
| No
No
No
Path slope
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Distance regulation
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Feed Forward
| No
No
No
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-73

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Contour size
| small
| medium
| large
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Looping
| No
No
No
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Form
| Radius
Radius
Radius
Radius [mm] min
| 0.30
0.20
0.20
Radius [mm] max
| 2.50
2.50
2.50
Length [mm] min
| 5.00
2.00
2.00
Length [mm] max
| 5.00
5.00
5.00
Angle [degreees] min
| 5.00
5.00
5.00
Angle [degrees] max
| 120.00
120.00
120.00
Length of element before looping min | 0.10
0.10
0.10
Length of element before looping max | 99999.99
99999.99
99999.99
Length of element after looping min | 0.10
1.00
0.10
Length of element after looping max | 99999.99
99999.99
99999.99
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Positioning
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Overshoot height [mm]
| 20.00
20.00
20.00
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Approach
| Yes
Yes
Yes
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Type
| full
full
full
Precision stop
| No
No
No
Distance regulation
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Path slope
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Feed Forward
| No
No
No
Reduction [%]
| 95.00
95.00
95.00
Precut
| No
No
No
Strategy
| Corner/Element Corner/Element Corner/Element
Approach angle [degrees] outer
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Approach angle [degrees] inner
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Length [mm] min
| 0.40
2.65
2.65
Length [mm] max
| 2.90
4.50
4.50
Radius [mm] min
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Radius [mm] max
| 0.00
0.25
0.25
Form Element
| Line/arc
Line/arc
Line/arc
Form preferred
| Line
Line
Line
Length [mm] min
| 3.00
5.00
5.00
Length [mm] max
| 10000.00
10000.00
99999.99
Form Corner
| Line
Line
Line
Angle [degrees] min
| 30.00
30.00
30.00
Angle [degrees] max
| 145.00
145.00
145.00
Length of element before corner min | 3.00
5.00
5.00
Length of element before corner max | 10000.00
10000.00
99999.99
Length of element after corner min
| 3.00
5.00
5.00
Length of element after corner max
| 10000.00
10000.00
99999.9
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Comment
Positioning parts
Overshoot height [mm]
open contour

Corner:No round - no looping


Yes
20.00
large

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Contour area [mm2]


| small
| medium
| large
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------min
| 0.78
0.78
28.26
max
| 28.26
28.26
99999.99
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cornern priority
Round
Corner cooling time [s]
0.50
Precut length [s]
0.00
Precut speed [%]
0.00
Starting corner
bottom left
Working direction
in Y
Acceleration programming
X value [m/s2]
Y value [m/s2]

No
0.00
0.00

Cutting with Sprint Las


Marking with Sprint Las

No
No

6-74

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| Contour size


| Vaporization
Type
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cutting
Text
| No
Marking
Text
| small
Cutting
Contour
| small
No
Center marking
Point
| small
No
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Center marking
Symbol
Circle
Dimension [mm]
0.60
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Non-processable contours
| Contour line | Center of gravity | Center of gravity
|
| standard
| any
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Marking
| Yes
No
No
Center marking
|
Yes
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-75

9.

NC Output

When the function NC-OUTPUT is selected from the main menu,


two sub-functions are offered.

TIMES function
CUSTOMER CYCLES function
CYCLES function
HEADER DATA function

9.1
Module
DATA

Modifying processing times

In the DATA module, select the function NC OUTPUT.

NC output
Times

Modifying processing times for NC cycles


Function button
NC CYCLES

There is a stored time in the database for every NC cycle. The


individual times for NC cycles can be modified.

Procedure:
Select the desired NC cycle. NC cycle and time will be
displayed.
Enter the new time in the "Time (can be modified)" input field.
Confirm your alteration by clicking on the MODIFY function
button at the foot of the mask.

6-76

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

Calculating processing times for


NC functions
Function button
NC MANAGEMENT

There is a stored time in the database for every NC function.


Individual times for NC functions can be modified in the
management of NC functions.

Procedure:

S354E61.DOC

Select the desired NC function. The designation of the NC


function, the address letter and the address value as well as the
time will be displayed.
Enter the new time in the "Time (can be modified)" input field.
Confirm your entry by clicking on the MODIFY function button at
the foot of the mask.

Module DATA

6-77

9.2
Module
DATA

NC output

Customer cycles

Self-definition of NC cycles

When you select the function NC OUTPUT, CUSTOMER


CYCLES, a mask is opened.
Specify:

"Cycle name": Enter the name of the cycle in the input field
"NC cycle".
The cycle name must not contain any umlauts or accents.
These symbols will not be displayed during processing.
Enter the NC text in the lines given below the input field
"NC cycle".

Input rules:

Every line must start with the character @ and terminate with a
semicolon ;.
Example 1: @TC_SUCTION_ON;
Example 2: @G04F3;
Entries written between apostrophes will not be subject to the
check routine. These entries will always be output.
Example: MSG Manual removal
Entries written without apostrophes, will be subject to the
check routine.
The system checks:
whether the function is stored in the system and
whether the function is already active in the NC text.

Properties
The cycle can have the following properties:
NONE: No properties are assigned to the cycle.
REMOVAL: The cycle shall have the property of a removal.
This is e.g. the case if you define a removal in the cycle.
This information is important for optimizing, as processing
operations with removal must be put at the end of a
processing sequence.

6-78

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

NC-Cycle total time: how much time will the NC cycle take?
Input the time in [s].

Store your entries by means of the function STORE in the mask


footer. The cycle will be stored under the cycle name defined and
the cycle name will be inserted in the scroll window on the left.
This NC cycle will be at your disposal under the given cycle name
for defining machining (TECHNOLOGY module).

The mask footer contains further functions which can be activated:


DELETE: deleting customer cycles
COPY: copying existing customer cycles. You can copy
existing customer cycles in order to edit them. Store the
modified cycles under a new name.

Calling up self-defined cycle

In the screen menu for the control function EXTRAS in the


TECHNOLOGY module, you can call up self-defined cycles and
select them through NC FUNCTIONS, FREE CYCLE.

9.3

Cycles

This function is protected by a password.


All necessary NC cycles are stored here for creating an executable
NC program in ToPs.

9.4

Header data

This function is protected by a password.


All data necessary for the output of header data in the NC program
for the TC 600L (with control system SINUMERIK 840D) are stored
here.

S354E61.DOC

Module DATA

6-79

10.
User

Editor

Working with user settings

With the function USER you, as the user, have the option of:

carrying out "User settings" via the sub-function EDITOR, i.e.


selecting a defined editor or setting a new editor

or

Paths:

performing "Management of computer names and their paths"


via the PATHS sub-function.

Each sub-function offers you a mask which supports you when


making settings.
The following editors are available:

STD_EDITOR: Editor via system


LST_EDITOR: Editor fpr NC programs
EIN_EDITOR: Editor for processing plans

At the moment, only the entry "trumpf" is valid as "USER".

6-80

Module DATA

S354E61.DOC

1.
Index card "Version"

Displaying software version

The first index card enables the viewing of the version and revision
number of the installed ToPS software.

Displaying software version

2.
Index card "Database"

Fig. 19561

Displaying database version

You will receive details of the actual database by selecting the


"Database" index card.

database name with version number


Path specification

Example: ToPs 300 Version: 3.00

7-2

INFO module

S354E71.DOC

3.
"Language" index card

Modifying language setting

This index card displays a language selection in the form of radio


buttons.
You can choose between the following languages:
German
English
French
Spanish
Italian
Dutch
Kanji (this display cannot be applied with Windows user
interfaces used in Europe).
Czech

Modifying language settings

S354E71.DOC

Fig. 19562

INFO module

7-3

4.
Index card "File
management"

File management

Files stored on the hard disk can be deleted with the aid of this
index card.

Procedure:

Select the index card.


The following mask is opened:

Deleting files

Fig. 19563

Click on the DELETE function button.


The file selection mask is opened. You will be shown all of the
files (radio button: *.* is active).
Select the file which is to be deleted. The file name will be
entered into the "File name" indicator window.
Confirm your choice with OK.
Confirm deletion of the file. The file is deleted from the
directory.
It makes sense to check and manage your files at regular
intervals: Delete the files which you no longer need.

Another option for part management is offered by ToPs via


the function selection FILE, LOAD, index card "part management" see: the description "Standard masks, part management" in this manual):

7-4

INFO module

S354E71.DOC

1.

Automation Components in ToPs 300

1.1

Supported Automation Components in


ToPs 300

The following automation components are supported by ToPs 300:


Automation Components

Designation in

Lifting
grip

Machine

200

yes

TC 200R

1000

yes

TC 120R, TC 500R

medium 1250

yes

TC 240, TC 240L, TC 240R,


TC 260, TC 260L, TC 500R

1300

no

TC 500R

1306

no

TC 600L

1600

no

TC 500R

1606

no

TC 600L

medium 1300

no

TC 260, TC 260L

large

no

TC 260, TC 260L

260_1250

TC 260, TC 260L

260_1500

TC 260, TC 260L

500_1300

TC 500R

500_1306

TC 600L

500_1600

TC 500R

500_1606

TC 600L

TRUMASORT L

TC 260, TC 500R, TC 600L

Storage cart

TC 260, TC 500R, TC 600L

Shifting cart

TC 260

Double cart

TC 500R, TC 600L

TRUMASORT R4

TC 500R, TC 600L

TRUMASORT S (single-row)

TC 260

sheet
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

small

large
TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC

TRUMAGRIP

ToPs 300

1600

The palletizing is additionally supported by an unloading platform.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-3

Important!

First activate the automation components in the Data Module in


accordance with their sequence on your machine. Once this is
done, the automation components can then be programmed in the
Technology Module. The complete data (default values) are stored
in the data base.
Please note: If your data do not correspond to those in the
data base, then you must use the masks to make the data
conform!

8-4

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

1.2

Brief Overview: Which data need to


be activated where?

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
DATA
Module
Machines

Function button
CONFIGURATION

Set the configuration of machine in the Data Module.

Procedure
Select the following in the sequence given:
Select basic machine
DATA 2

LIFT SELECTION

LIFT SELECTION

Function button
DATA

MODIFY

Loading: Select TRUMALIFT


SheetMaster
Unloading: Select TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster
Save modified data

Select basic machine


Select TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER

DATA 1

Establish general lift data

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 2

Establish general lift data

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 3

Establish data for loading

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 5

Establish data for unloading

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 6

Establish data for unloading

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 8

Establish data for grip disposal

MODIFY

Save modified data


Select basic machine

DATA 1

Establish stop pin data

S354E81.DOC

STOP PIN DATA


MODIFY

Save modified data

Automation Components

8-5

TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC
DATA
Module
Machines

Function button
CONFIGURATION

Establish the configuration of machine in the Data Module.

Procedure
Select the following in sequence:
Select basic machine

DATA 2

LIFT SELECTION

LIFT SELECTION

MODIFY

Loading:
Select TRUMALIFT SB/SC
Unloading:
Select TRUMALIFT SE/SC
Save modified data

Loading with TRUMALIFT SB


Function button
DATA

LIFT GROUP 2
SB / SE / SC

Select basic machine


Select TRUMALIFT SB for
loading

DATA 1

Establish general lift data

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 2

Establish general lift data

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 3

Establish data for loading

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 4

Code for material detector

MODIFY

Save modified data


Select basic machine

8-6

STOP PIN DATA


DATA 1

Automation Components

Establish stop pin data

S354E81.DOC

Unloading with TRUMALIFT SE


Function button
DATA

LIFT GROUP 2
SB/SE/SC

Select basic machine


Select TRUMALIFT SE for
unloading

DATA 1

Establish general lift data

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 2

Establish general lift data

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 5

Establish data for unloading

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 6

Establish data for unloading

MODIFY

Save modified data

Loading and unloading with TRUMALIFT SC


Function button
DATA

LIFT GROUP 2
SB / SE / SC

Select basic machine


Select TRUMALIFT SC for
loading and unloading

DATA 1

Establish general lift data

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 2

Establish general lift data

MODIFY

DATA 3

Save modified data


Establish data for loading

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 4

Enter code for material detector

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 5

Establish data for unloading

MODIFY

Save modified data

DATA 6

Establish data for unloading

MODIFY

Save modified data

STOP PIN DATA

DATA 1

Establish stop pin data

MODIFY

Save modified data

Select basic machine

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-7

TRUMAGRIP

DATA
Module
Machines

Function button
CONFIGURATION

Set the fixed configuration of machine in the Data Module.

Procedure
Select the following in the sequence given:
Select basic machine
DATA 2

GRIP SELECTION

Select TRUMAGRIP

MODIFY

Save modified data

GRIP

Select basic machine


Select TRUMAGRIP

DATA 1

Establish grip disposal

Function button
DATA

MODIFY

Save modified data

TRUMASORT R4 or TRUMASORT S
DATA
Module
Machines

Function button
CONFIGURATION

Set the fixed configuration of machine in the Data Module.

Procedure
Select the following in sequence:

DATA 1

SORT R4/S /
DEFLECTOR

Select TRUMASORT R4 or
TRUMASORT S

8-8

Select basic machine


"Sort/Double Cart"

MODIFY

Save modified data

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

TRUMASORT L, Unloading Platform,


Shifting Cart, Double Cart, Storage Cart
DATA
Module:
Machines

Function button
DATA

Set the fixed configuration of machine in the Data Module.

Procedure
Select the following in sequence:
Select basic machine

UNLOADING AREA

DATA 1

Palletizing: Establish units and


pallets

"Units"

CREATE OR

Establish TRUMASORT L or
unloading platform or shifting cart
or double cart or storage cart in the
next mask by selecting Create
Create a new unit

MODIFY OR

Modify a unit that already exists

DELETE

Delete an existing unit and all the


pallets connected to it

"Pallets"

MODIFY OR

Modify an existing pallet

S354E81.DOC

CREATE OR

Define the pallets belonging to the


selected unit with Create
Create a new pallet

DELETE

Delete an existing pallet

Automation Components

8-9

1.3

Function Buttons Frequently Used

Function button
MODIFY

Modifying data: The modified data contained in the mask are


stored to the data base.
The number of data blocks in the data base and in the selection
window remains the same.

Function button
CREATE

Creating a data block: A completely new data block is created. As


a rule, the entries in the mask header are made with the aid of an
option mask. All the other data fields remain temporarily empty
until they are also filled with the aid of sequence masks.
A new data block is added to the already-existing data blocks in
the data base and in the selection window.

Function button
DELETE

Deleting a data block: An already-existing data block is completely


deleted.
One data block less will be included in the selection window and in
the data base.

Function button
RETURN

Function button
CONTINUE

8-10

Return to the summary mask, if you are in a sequence mask,


or
return to the entry mask, if you are in an option mask.

Continue: Activate sequence masks.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

2.

Configuring Automation Components


in the DATA Module

You must establish the individual settings for the automation components of your machine in the DATA Module.
Using as examples the machines TC 600L Type 1 (operation:
SINUMERIK 840D) and TC 260 Type 1 (operation: Bosch CC 300),
this chapter will describe the default settings for the automation
components of these machines.

2.1
Machines
Configuration

Establishing Configuration of Machine

You can establish the configuration of your machine in the submenu


CONFIGURATION.
Choose your machine type from the selection list.
Using the function button CONTINUE will bring you to the
configuration of machine submenu DATA 1 and DATA 2.

Selecting TRUMASORT
Function button
DATA 1

Choose from the list "Sort/Double Cart" one of the two


determinations:

S354E81.DOC

Which sorting installation is available?


NONE
SORT R4/S/DEFLECTOR
Select the function button, if you are unloading small parts
through the flap or the chute of the machine into a
TRUMASORT R4 or a TRUMASORT S. With the TC 2000R,
the deflector is configured using this function button.

Automation Components

8-11

MACHINES, CONFIGURATION, DATA 1, "Sort/Double Cart"

Fig. 20163

The other function buttons in the list "Sort/Double Cart" have


no significance. The unloading platform and the automation
components TRUMASORT L, shifting cart, storage cart and
double cart are configured through selection of the function
button UNLOADING AREA under MACHINES, DATA.

8-12

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Establishing Automatic Loading and


Unloading
Function button
DATA 2

Select the following determinations for your automation components from the lists "Grip", "Loading", "Unloading":

MACHINES, CONFIGURATION, DATA 2

Fig. 20164

"Loading": Which TRUMALIFT is available for loading the


machine?
MANUAL: No lift is available.
LIFT SELECTION: Select a lift for loading your machine
from the field list of the sequence mask.

S354E81.DOC

"Grip": Which TRUMAGRIP is available for sheet skeleton


unloading?
NONE (The sheet skeleton is manually removed, either
with lift suction cups or with the lift grip).
GRIP SELECTION: Select TRUMAGRIP from the list field
of the sequence mask.

"Unloading": Which TRUMALIFT is available for unloading the


units?
MANUAL: No lift is available.
LIFT SELECTION: Select lift for unloading the units from
the list field of the sequence mask.

Automation Components

8-13

2.2
Machines
Data

Establishing Machine Data

You can establish the data of your automation components in the


submenu DATA.
Select your machine type from the selection list.
Selecting the function button CONTINUE will bring you to the
submenu DATA. The following function buttons (switches with
color recognition) are available for the configuration of the
automation components:

GRIP
UNLOADING AREA
SUCTION CUP DATA
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC

MACHINES, DATA and sequence masks

Fig. 20165

The stop pin must be tested again after each new


TRUMALIFT configuration.
If your machine is equipped with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster,
TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC or has been modified ex works for a
later connection to the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300 or
1600, then stop pin 2 must be activated: STOP PIN DATA,
DATA 1
( see Chapter 6: "Recording of Machine Data, Modifying
Stop Pin Data").

8-14

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Configuring Unloading with TRUMAGRIP


Function button
GRIP, DATA 1

TRUMAGRIP is for the extraction of remainder sheets and sheet


skeletons. Select from the list field of the option mask the "grip
type" of your machine or define a new grip type using the function
button CREATE. Confirm your choice with OK.

For your information:


ToPs 300 contains the following allocations for TRUMALIFT and
TRUMAGRIP:
Machine

TRUMALIFT

TRUMAGRIP

SheetMaster 1250 (Lifting grip) SC/ SE 1300


SC/ SE 1600

260_1250
260_1500

SheetMaster 1000 (Lifting grip) SheetMaster 1250 (Lifting grip) SheetMaster 1300

500_1300

SheetMaster 1600

500_1600

SheetMaster 1306

500_1306

SheetMaster 1606

500_1606

The entries and switch settings of the option mask, "Grip data" and
function button DATA 1 correspond to the default settings for the
selected TRUMAGRIP.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"Position (operators view)":


Position of the TRUMAGRIP (operator stands before the
machine): RIGHT or LEFT.

"Grip name": The grip name is displayed.

"Name of drawing": The name of the drawing is displayed.

"Traversing speed"*):
How quickly should the TRUMAGRIP proceed? Enter the
speed in [m/min].

"Traversing acceleration"*):
With which acceleration should the TRUMAGRIP proceed?
2
Determination of acceleration in [m/s ].

*) not supported in this version of ToPs 300

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-15

"Standard Y pos.tr.guide rail"


In which Y position is the guide rail located during remainder
sheet extraction?

"Retract from clamp in DY":


Traversing path in Y direction, in order to move the remainder
sheet or the sheet skeleton from the clamp area.

"Number of Grippers (max. 2)"

Important!

"Transfer Position in X":


At which X position is the TRUMAGRIP to extract the
remainder sheet?
negative value: Grip is to the right (operator stands before
the machine):
positive value: Grip is to the left (operator stands before
the machine).

"1st gripper position in X", "1st gripper position in Y"


"2nd gripper position in X", "2nd gripper position in Y":
X and Y positions at which the two grippers are located.

TRUMAGRIP position right (operator stands before the machine):


all X positions are negative.
TRUMAGRIP position left (operator stands before the machine):
all X positions are positive.

8-16

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Establishing Palletizing in the Unloading Area


Function button
UNLOADING AREA,
DATA 1

Units and the accompanying pallets are configured in the


unloading area.

MACHINES, DATA, UNLOADING AREA ("Palletizing"), Data 1

Fig. 20166

Definition of a unit:
A unit takes up a group of pallets. It can be mobile or stationary. All
pallets on all unloading platforms belong to one unit, for example.
The following are available for selection as units.
Unloading platform
TRUMASORT L
Storage cart
Shifting cart
Double cart

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-17

Definition of the Pallets:


A pallet is a site at which lift items can be placed. A pallet can be,
for example, a designated area, a European standard pallet or a
scrap bucket.
Pallets must always be referred to according to unit.

Definition of the unloading area:


More than one unit can be present in the unloading area of a
machine. For example: unloading platform for stationary pallets
and a TRUMASORT L for mobile pallets.
The function button UNLOADING AREA can be selected only
when a lift type for unloading has already been configured
under MACHINES, CONFIGURATION, DATA 2, "Unloading".

You can modify, create or delete data regarding units and pallets.
The function buttons MODIFY, CREATE and DELETE are available
for the list of the units and the list of the pallets assigned to them.

8-18

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Defining Units
Select a Unit (bar marked with black).
The function buttons can now be selected.
Units:
Function button MODIFY

To view or modify the data of a selected unit.


"Number (ID)" and "Type" cannot be modified in this mask. In this
example of an unloading platform, the entry can be modified in the
field "Remark". All other function buttons are disabled.
Different function buttons and entry fields are enabled for the
mobile units TRUMASORT L, storage cart, shifting cart and double
cart.
Carry out the entries as described in the following section (Units:
function button CREATE).

View or modify the selected unit

S354E81.DOC

Fig. 20167

Automation Components

8-19

Units:
Function button CREATE

Create a new unit and enter the data connected with it.

Creating a new unit

Fig. 20168

Carry out the following entries:

"Number ID"
Enter a specific number for the unit. The following rules apply
for assigning numbers:
Each number (per unit) can be assigned only once for
each machine.
Number 0: Reserved for the unloading platform.
For that reason, only one unloading platform
can exist per machine.
For machines whose control systems are programmed with
M-functions and U-addresses (TC 500R, for example), the
following applies:
Number 2: first TRUMASORT L (L2) or double cart.
Number 3: second TRUMASORT L (L3) or double cart.
The Number (ID) in ToPs 300 must conform with the number of the TRUMASORT at the machine control (only in the
case of U-addresses).

For machines with control systems of the SINUMERIK 840D


type - tabular output in the NC text (TC 600L, for example), the
following applies:
Numbers 1 to 4: can be assigned freely to TRUMASORT L
and/or double carts.
Recommendation: Numbers 2 and 3 to be assigned as with
TC 500R.

8-20

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

"Type"
Click onto the arrow symbol in the display field and select
desired unit (unloading platform, TRUMASORT L storage cart,
shifting cart, double cart).

"Remark"
Enter an appropriate text into the entry field. The remark(s) will
be shown in the TECHNOLOGY Module in the palletizing
designation of the unit and in the processing information
(Function button INFO; registration list palletizing information).
Recommendation: Enter a text that is informative.

"NC output: Y in Positions"


For units that can be positioned in the Y direction:
Presentation of the Y value in millimeters; typical for TRUMASORT L:
switch position NO
or
Presentation of the Y value as a position number, i.e. Y values
are fixed, predefined positions; typical for double carts: switch
position YES.
All other entry fields of this mask area are enabled. The entries
will allow the calculation of the position values to be more
closely specified in millimeters.
For non-mobile units (unloading platform), the switch is to be
set at NO.

"Starting position"
Enter Y value of the first position in [mm].
The pallet position in Y must concur with the starting position
in Y. If you enter pallets for this unit later, you must be careful
that the given starting position is within the pallet range. The
Y position of the pallet must be selected accordingly.

S354E81.DOC

"Starting number"
Enter the number of the first position (usual value: 1).
"Ending number"
Enter the number of the final position (usual value: 19).

Automation Components

8-21

Important!

"Distance between positions"


Enter the Y distance between two adjacent positions in [mm].
Examples: Y = 60 mm between TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300
and double cart or storage cart.
Y = 75 mm between TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1600
and double cart or storage cart.
"Upper/lower carriage identical"
This function button can be selected only for double carts.
Switch position YES:
Upper and lower carriages are identical. Pallets need be
entered only for the upper carriage. The pallets for the lower
carriage are created automatically.

For TC 600L with operating version < 6.0: It is required that the
switch position be set at YES.
Switch position NO:
Pallets must be entered for both upper and lower carriages.
Number and size of the pallets can be different for upper and
lower carriages.

Example:
Double cart with positions 1 to 19 (starting number 1, ending
number 19) and a distance between positions of 60 mm. The
starting position (starting number 1) is located for Y = 60 mm.
The pallet position is at Y = 0 mm.

Example: UNIT, CREATE, double cart

8-22

Automation Components

Fig. 20171

S354E81.DOC

If a pallet position of Y = 0 is defined for a starting position of Y = 60 mm,


then the lift (Y lift zero position) will move to the position of Y = 60 mm
from pallet edge.
If the lower edge of the raised lift items coincides with the Y lift zero
position, then the lift items will be unloaded precisely at the starting
position a rare event. In other cases, the unloading position will
not coincide exactly with the starting position ( see Fig. 20232).
3

1
60 mm

1
2
3

Starting number 1
Starting position Y = 60 mm
Lift items
Ending number 19

4
5

Double cart (upper carriage)


Pallet with pallet position
Y = 0 mm

Positions: Double cart (upper carriage), pallet and lift items

Units:
Function button DELETE

Fig. 20232

The selected unit and all the data connected with it are deleted.

When a unit is deleted, all pallets are simultaneously deleted


that were assigned to that unit. Pallets always possess an
unambiguous connection to a particular unit!

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-23

For your understanding


Definition of terms:
Lift items

Lift items are items (for example finished parts, scrap, sheet skeletons, residual strips) that are taken up and unloaded using a lift.
Each unloading of a lift corresponds to one lift item.

Stack item

A stack item can be made up of one or more identical lift items


(for example finished parts).
Stack items are identical when the following conditions are met:
the geometries of the lift items are identical,
the sheet thicknesses of the lift items are identical,
the lift items are all raised up in the same manner by the
lift. Example: For all finished parts with identical geometry,
the lift fixes each time upon the same place of the finished
part.

Stack

8-24

A stack corresponds to the total of all lift items that are stacked at
one position. All the lift items of a stack must be made up of the
same kind of stack item. For example, only identical finished parts
can make up a stack.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Defining Pallets
Prerequisite:
First select the unit (bar marked with black), upon which pallets are
to be placed.
Select a pallet (bar marked with black).
The function buttons MODIFY and DELETE can be used.

Pallets:
Function button MODIFY

Viewing or modifying the data of a selected pallet.

Viewing or modifying a selected pallet

Pallets:
Function button CREATE

Create a new pallet and enter the data connected with it.
Carry out the following entries:

S354E81.DOC

Fig. 20169

"Pallet number (ID)"


Enter an unambiguous number for the pallet. The following
rules exist for assigning numbers:
The numbers must be unambiguous for the entire unloading
area of the machine. When assigning pallet numbers, it is
possible that pallets already existing in connection with
other units must be taken into consideration.

Automation Components

8-25

For machines whose control systems are programmed with


M-functions and U-addresses (TC 500R, for example), the
following applies:
The numbers can be freely assigned, but must be
unambiguous.
For machines with control systems of the SINUMERIK 840D
type - tabular output in the NC text (TC 600L, for example), the
following applies:
The numbers of the pallets in ToPs must correspond to the
numbering of the pallets of the control system.

"Remark"
Text can be entered freely into the entry field. The remark will
be displayed in the TECHNOLOGY Module in the palletizing
designation of the unit and in the processing information
(Function button INFO; message list palletizing information).
Recommendation: Enter a text that is informative.

8-26

Automation Components

"Stack item"
Click the arrow in the display field and select one of the
following stack item types:
Finished part
only finished parts may be loaded on the selected pallet.
Scrap
only scrap may be loaded on the selected pallet.

S354E81.DOC

Sheet skeleton
only sheet skeletons may be loaded on the selected pallet.
Mixed
all stack item types may be loaded on the selected pallet.
The restriction to finished parts/ scrap/ sheet skeleton holds
for automatic palletizing. When done interactively, a finished
part could be unloaded onto a scrap pallet, for example.

Creating a new pallet. Example: TC 600L with an unloading platform

S354E81.DOC

Fig. 20170

Automation Components

8-27

"Position X, Y"
The position of the pallet datum point in reference to the punch
midpoint is illustrated in the following drawing.
The reference edge of the pallet has in each case the smallest
distance to the punching head.
3
X

+X
Y

+Y

-X
+Y

1
2

Pallet left-hand lift


Pallet datum point

3
4

Punching head midpoint


Pallet datum point

Pallet right-hand lift

Position of the pallet datum point in reference to the punching head midpoint
(operator view)

Enter the X- and Y position as follows:

8-28

Automation Components

Lift (Example TRUMALIFT SheetMaster) is positioned to


the left of the machine. The operator stands before the
machine.
Position of pallets
X-value: positive
Y-value: positive.
Lifts (Example TRUMALIFT SC/SE) is positioned to the
right of the machine. The operator stands before the
machine.
Position of pallets
X-value: negative
Y-value: positive.

S354E81.DOC

If the pallets lie on units which are programmed into


positions in Y-direction, then the Y-position of the pallet must
be made to correspond with the first programmable Yposition of the unit.

"Dimension X, Y"
Dimensions of the pallet in X- and Y-directions. The values are
to be entered as positives.

"Under table"
Switch position YES:
The pallet is located entirely or partially under the machine
table.
The machine table must first be moved to the rear when
unloading is done onto a pallet "under table". This causes an
increase of the machine time.
Switch position NO:
The pallets are located outside of the machine table.

"Fixed Position"
Switch position YES:
All stacks upon this pallet were assembled upon the same
position. Application example for this setting: Scrap bucket.
Switch position NO:
There is no fixed position on this pallet for items to be stacked.

"Position X, Y": In cases where "Fixed Position" YES was


selected:
Establish a fixed position upon which lift items is to be
unloaded, based upon the pallet datum point.
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster:
The lower left-hand corner of the rectangle surrounding the lift
items comes to rest upon the fixed position. Coordinates: +X +Y.
TRUMALIFT SC, SE:
The lower right-hand corner of the rectangle surrounding the lift
items comes to rest upon the fixed position.
Coordinates: +X +Y.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-29

4
3
5
+Y

+Y

1
+X
1
2

3
4

Pallet datum point


Fixed Position +X, +Y based upon
the pallet datum point: Lower lefthand corner (surrounding rectangle)
of the lift items
- with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
Pallet
Lift items

+X
5
6

Rectangle surrounding the lift items


Fixed Position +X, +Y based
upon the pallet datum point:
Lower right-hand corner (surrounding rectangle) of the lift items
- with TRUMALIFT SC, SE.

Pallet with pallet datum point and fixed position (from the ToPs viewpoint)

"Max. Stack Height"


Maximum height of stacks that can be placed upon this pallet.
If zero is entered as the maximum stack height, then no
stack can be assembled at this position.

"Cart Number"

Prerequisite:
A cart number can be established only if a double cart is
present with different upper and lower carriages.
Click onto the arrow symbol in the display field and select
upper or lower carriage upon which the pallet is to rest.
In the case of double carts with identical upper and lower
carriages, pallets will be assigned to only one carriage. The
pallets upon the identical second carriage will be automatically
created by the system.

"Pallets"
Function button DELETE

8-30

The selected pallet is deleted.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Establishing Suction Cup Data


Function button
SUCTION CUP DATA

Select your "Lift type" in the list field found in the option mask, or
define a new lift type using the function button CREATE. Confirm
your choice with OK.

MACHINES, DATA, SUCTION CUP DATA, "Lift type"

Function button
SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 1

Fig. 20172

Suction cup loader:


The default values of the suction cup loader are dependent upon
the lift type. They are entered into the mask by the system itself.
The entries are modified in accordance with the default values and
not in accordance with your configuration.
The entries in SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 1 and SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 2 are identical for all TRUMALIFT
SheetMasters and TRUMALIFT.
The entries in DATA 1 and DATA 2 differ for TRUMALIFT SB/SE.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-31

Machines, Data, Suction cup data, Data 1

Fig. 20173

Choose from the list field a suction cup (line marked with black).
The data are transferred to the entry fields. The modifications
undertaken in the entry fields will not be saved until you click upon
the function button MODIFY.

"Suction cup type": Which type of suction cup is being referred


to?
CARRIER = Type 1
Carrier suction cups are suction cups that attach
themselves firmly through vacuum suction to the metal
sheets and then transport them during loading and
unloading procedures.

SWIVEL = Type 2
Swivel cups enable an exact loading of the sheet metal
using the machines workpiece clamps during loading.
STRIPPER = Type 3
Within the range of the stripper cup, the topmost sheet
panel is made to buckle during lifting. This causes the
sheet panels to be separated.

"Vacuum": YES, NO. *)

*) This is not supported in this version of ToPs

8-32

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

"Sheet sensing"
Does this suction cup have a sensor for sheet sensing?: YES,
NO.

"Max. number programmable": What is the maximum number


of suction cups that can be programmed for loading?

"Suction cup No.": Enter the sequence number of the suction


cup. In the case of coupled cups, the sequential number will be
repeated, corresponding to the quantity of the coupled suction
cups.
Example: Three suction cups are coupled to one another. The
sequential suction cup number is four. The suction
cup number four is assigned to each one of the three
cups.

"Coupled cup No.": What is the number of the coupled suction


cup?
Example: Three suction cups are coupled to one another. The
sequential number is four. The suction cup number
four is assigned to each one of the three cups. Each
of the three cups is assigned a coupled cup number
(one, two or three).
Couple cup number zero means: The cup is not
coupled.

"X-pos.": Which position does the suction cup have within the
suction frame in the X-direction?
Enter the X-dimension in [mm].

"Y-pos.": Which position does the suction cup have within the
suction frame in the Y-direction?
Enter the Y-dimension in [mm].

"Max. diam.": What is the diameter of the suction cup?


Enter diameter in [mm]

"Min. diam.": The cup continues to possess the maximum


carrying capacity down to this diameter.
Enter diameter in [mm]

S354E81.DOC

"Kind of suction cup": Which kind of suction cup is assigned to


the selected suction cup type?
STANDARD
COUPLED
Coupled suction cups are carrier cups which are activated
together with other cups. Coupled cups cannot be
activated individually.

"Carr. capac.": What is the maximum carrying capacity of the


cup?
Enter the carrying capacity in [N].

Automation Components

8-33

Function button
SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 2

Unloading cups:
The default values of the suction cup unloader are dependent upon
the lift type. They are entered into the mask by the system itself.
The entries are modified in accordance with the default values and
not in accordance with your configuration.
The entries in SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 1 and SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 2 are identical for all TRUMALIFT
SheetMasters and for TRUMALIFT SC.
The entries in DATA 1 and DATA 2 differ for TRUMALIFT
SB/SE.

MACHINES, DATA, SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 2

Fig. 20174

The mask description SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 2 can be found


under: Function button SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 1.

8-34

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Configuring TRUMALIFT SheetMaster


Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER

The Lift group 1 SheetMaster contains different lifts, depending


upon the machine selected. These lifts are equipped for the
unloading of sheet skeletons and remainder sheets with and
without gripping devices. Machines with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
having no gripping devices for unloading of sheet skeletons can be
provided with an additional TRUMAGRIP (option). see Chapter:
Configuring Unloading with TRUMAGRIP.
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

Lifting grip

TRUMAGRIP

200

yes

no

1000

yes

no

1250

yes

no

1300

no

yes

1600

no

yes

1306

no

yes

1606

no

yes

LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, "Lift type"

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

Fig. 20175

8-35

Select your "Lift type" in the list field found in the option mask, or
define a new lift type using the function button CREATE. Confirm
your choice with OK.
On the left-hand side of the nearby TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
pedestal there is a type plate (true for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
after January 1995). This contains data concerning the
machine number, production year and production version
number of your TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
The program version number is important for entry in ToPs
300 (LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 1, "Name of
Lift"), because the number contains the original delivery
configuration of the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. Example:
SM 1606 V 105.

Type plate: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

8-36

Automation Components

Fig. 17198

S354E81.DOC

Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 1

"General Lift data" of your TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.

LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 1 "General lift data"

Fig. 20176

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"NC output format": Direct or preparatory?

S354E81.DOC

"Position (operator view)": Is the lift positioned to the left or to


the right of the machine?
Operator view: You are standing in front of the machine.
TRUMALIFT SheetMasters are always positioned to the left of
the machine!

"Sheet thickness detector":


How does the testing procedure function that determines
whether just one sheet has been taken up for loading?
MANUAL
A sheet thickness detector (double sheet detector) is present
that cannot be programmed. There is no sheet thickness
detector present.
MECHANICAL
Applies to all TRUMALIFT SheetMasters: The sheet thickness is checked with an armature probe.
INDUCTIVE
The sheet thickness is checked inductively. The sheet thickness detector is programmable.

Automation Components

8-37

"Name of Lift": The name of the lift corresponds to the program


version number on the type plate (only for TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster after 1/95 see Fig. 17198).

"Name of drawing": The name of the drawing is displayed.


A drawing of the lift is available for displaying the TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster in ToPs 300. The names of the drawings are
contained in the directory "\TRUMPF\TOPS_ZCH\*.*".

"Max. carrying capacity": What is the maximum allowable


weight in [kg] that the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster is allowed to
transport?

"Max. sheet thickness": Sheet thickness is displayed in [mm].

"Min. sheet dimension in X", "Min. sheet dimension in Y"


"Max. sheet dimension in X", "Max. sheet dimension in Y":
Minimum and maximum sheet dimensions that can be
transported by the lift are displayed. Should one of the four
limitations not be observed, then manual loading will be
generated.

"X-dim. sheet edge-Lift zero pt":


X-dim. measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the zero point
of the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.

8-38

"Prepare loading at end of program":


Is a new sheet to be brought forward, before the machine is
finished with the sheet processing?
NOT POSSIBLE
The preparatory loading is not possible in any case and is
organized with this setting as the standard. The corresponding option in the TECHNOLOGY Module is not enabled.
NO
The preparatory loading is possible, but should not be
preselected. The option YES/NO can nevertheless be
selected in the TECHNOLOGY Module.
YES
The preparatory loading is possible and should be
preselected. The option YES/NO can nevertheless be
selected in the TECHNOLOGY Module.

"X-dim. sheet edge-Lift ref. pt.":


X-dim. measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the reference
point of the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 2

Additional "General lift data" regarding your TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.

LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 2 "General lift data"

Fig. 20177E

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"X-offset value zero pt. of suction carriage / tool center"


Offset value is displayed in [mm].

"Safety offset in addition to X offset":


The safety offset value in [mm] which is to be calculated is
displayed.
The X offset value is the measurement of the distance that the
sheet edge is to be moved away from the stop pin or the tool
center during loading before the speed is reduced.

"Are speed, acceleration and sheet thickness programmable?":


YES, NO *).

*) The position of the switch is not taken into consideration for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-39

Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 3

Data for "Loading" with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.

LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 3 "Loading"

Fig. 20178

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"NC output format": STEPS or %.

"NC output speed" STEPS:


Each speed step is assigned to a specific speed in [m/min].

"NC output Acceleration" STEPS:


Each acceleration step is assigned to a specific acceleration in
2
[m/s ].

Step
1

10

20

30

50

80

8-40

% of maximum speed,
% of maximum acceleration

100

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

"X dimension waiting position": Waiting position in [mm] while


loading in the X-direction?

"Max.sht thickn. stripping": What is the maximum sheet thickness in [mm] that the sheet panel can have and still be able to
be stripped?
During stripping, each sheet is separated with the aid of a
stripper suction cup. If the sheet is too thick, the suction power
will not be enough to bend the sheet up. In this case, the
stripper suction cup is not activated.

"X dim. sheet edgemachine":


Corresponds to the pick-up position of the loading sheet.
Enter the X-dimension for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].

Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 5

"Y dim. sheet edgemachine":


Corresponds to the offset of the loading stack when measured
from the lift zero position.
Enter the Y-dimension for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].

Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.

LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 5 "Unloading"

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

Fig. 20179

8-41

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"Number of carrier cups", "Number of coupled cups": How


many carrier and coupled cups does the lift have?

"NC output format": STEPS or %.

"NC output speed":


"NC output acceleration": in STEPS or %.
see LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 3 in this
Chapter.

"1st dropping height in Z":


Statement of minimum height for the regular dropping of parts
onto units which are located under the machine table. The 1st
dropping height corresponds to the value of the maximum
dropping height ( see DATA 6, "Max. dropping height" in this
Chapter). A "soft dropping" or "depositing" is not possible for
the area under the machine table *).

"DY- retract from clamp":


Indicate the length of the Y-traverse path required to move a
part out of the clamp area.

"Traversing speed":
With which speed in [m/min] should the traverse motion for
release from the clamp be executed?

*) not supported in this version of ToPs 300.

8-42

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 6

Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.

LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 6 "Unloading"

Fig. 20180

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"Max. dropping height" is the height for "Regular dropping".


The lift drops the items from the maximum height when
"Regular dropping" has been selected in the TECHNOLOGY
Module.

"Lift stroke Y": Traverse path for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster


when unloading after laser processing (only for TC 600L).

"Software limit switch laser X axis": Measurement < 0, to which


the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster can travel when the laser is
activated.

S354E81.DOC

"Min. dropping height" is the height for "Soft dropping". The lift
drops the items from this height when "Soft dropping" has been
selected in the TECHNOLOGY Module.

"Min. traverse pos.Y punching": Minimum position for traversing in


Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster during punching.

Automation Components

8-43

"Min. traverse pos.Y laser": Minimum position for traversing in


Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster during laser
processing.

"Last punching stroke fr. Lift": Function button YES/NO.


The machine triggers the last stroke once the TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster has reached the position for unloading the item.
Machine-specific presetting:
For TC 600L: Function button to YES.
For all other machines: Function button to NO.

Important!

Machine-specific default settings:


For TC 600L: Function button to YES.
For TC 500R: Function button at YES is possible
For all other machines: Function button to NO.

Important!

8-44

"Last stroke after sucking": YES/NO.


YES: This setting ensures that a part is not separated out
before the suction cup has attached itself onto that part. This
allows a safe extraction of the part.

Automation Components

"Safety offset in addition to X offset":


Value in [mm], which is to be calculated as a safety offset at
the minimum X-pick-up position.
Default for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster: 0 mm
Default for TRUMALIFT SE,SC: 1 mm.

S354E81.DOC

Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 8

"Unloading using grippers on the Lift"


Data for unloading with grippers on the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.

LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 8


"Unloading using grippers on the Lift"

Fig. 20181

Example: TC 500R Type 2 with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250.

The entries of the mask correspond to the default settings for the
selected TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"1st gripper position in X", "1st gripper position in Y", "2nd


gripper position in X", "2nd gripper position in Y": Enter the Xand Y-positions for each lifting grip.

S354E81.DOC

"Number of Grippers (max. 2)"


The TRUMALIFT SheetMasters 1000 and 1250 are equipped
with a maximum of two grippers.
The default versions of the TRUMALIFT SheetMasters 1300,
1600, 1306 and 1606 are not equipped with lifting grips.
Skeleton sheets can be extracted using TRUMAGRIP.

"Retract from clamp in DY":


Enter the traverse direction in Y-direction, in order to draw
back the opened clamp.

Automation Components

8-45

"Min.Y-position tr. guide rail"


At which Y-position is the sheet skeleton to be transferred to
the Lifting grip?

8-46

"Transfer position Lift in X"


At which X-position is the sheet skeleton to be taken up by the
Lifting grip?

Enter "X position of sheet skeleton".


What is the unloading position of the sheet skeleton when it is
extracted with the Lifting grip?

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Basic Data in ToPs 300 - Overview


Data Sheets

The following data sheets are information sheets for your personal
use. They are for securing the data for your TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
Each data sheet contains a drawing and data regarding the automation components.
The drawing shows the machine installations with automation
components, as it is realized in ToPs 300. The drawings present
the viewpoint found when standing in front of the machine.

Basic Data in the


DATA Module

S354E81.DOC

In the drawing, the basic data are made visible which are used in
the Data Module masks.
The values can be determined using the data found in the
operators manual. In doing so, take note of whether the measurements refer to the Lift reference point (this can be a suction cup or
a screw) or to the NC reference point (machine zero point).

Automation Components

8-47

Data Sheet for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250: Loading

Basic Data for Loading: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 with TC 500R


In parentheses: Alternate Data for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250
with TC 260

8-48

Automation Components

Fig. 9227

S354E81.DOC

Data sheet for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250: Unloading

Basic data for unloading: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 with TC 500R


In parentheses: Alternate Data for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250
with TC 260

S354E81.DOC

Fig. 9228

Automation Components

8-49

Data sheet for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300 and


TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1306: Loading and Unloading
Front view (upper illustration) and view from above (lower
illustration)

Basic data for loading and unloading: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300


and TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1306

Fig. 11523

For legend, see next page

8-50

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Legend for Fig. 11523:


1

Machine

Support table

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300 and TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1306

Loading stack (on pallet)

Unloading platform

European standard pallets

Finished parts stack

Unloading area under table

Tool center (punching)

11

Max. stack height unloading (European standard pallet + finished parts stack)

12

Max. dropping height (1st Z dropping height)

13

Min. dropping height (2nd Z dropping height)

14

Min. distance between stacks

15

Max. loading stack height (pallet + loading stack)

16

X-coordinates Lift reference point

17

Y-value: tool center to sheet edge


(Y-value: sheet edge-machine; loading)
Max. X-sheet dimension
(X-pallet dimension; loading)
Max. Y-sheet dimension
(Y-pallet dimension; loading)
X-dimension: sheet edge-lift zero position

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Distance X-coordinate reference point to the sheet edge (loading)


(X-dimension: sheet edge-lift reference point)
Unloading area outside the machine table
(X-pallet dimension; unloading)
Y-dimension pedestal
(Y-pallet dimension; unloading)
Distance tool center to sheet edge; loading
(X-dimension: sheet edge-machine; loading)
Beginning of unloading area outside the machine table
(X-offset: pallet-machine; unloading)
X-dimension: Waiting position during loading

27 *)

Beginning of unloading area within machine table


(X-position scrap, 1st X-dropping area)
28
End of unloading area within machine table
(2nd X-dropping area)
sheet skeleton extraction**)

*) for TRUMASORT R4: 1800 mm


**) Addition: Sheet skeleton unloading takes place, depending upon the size, at positions which are 725
S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-51

Data sheet for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1600 and


TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1606: Loading and Unloading
Front view (upper illustration) and view from above (lower
illustration)

Basic data for loading and unloading: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1600


and TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1606

Fig. 11524

For legend, see next page

8-52

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Legend for Fig. 11524:


1

Machine

Support table

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1600 and TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1606

Loading stack (on pallet)

Unloading platform

European standard pallets

Finished parts stack

Unloading area under table

Tool center (punching)

11

Max. stack height unloading (European standard pallet + finished parts stack)

12

Max. dropping height (1st Z-dropping height)

13

Min. dropping height (2nd Z-dropping height)

14

Min. distance between stacks

15

Max. stack height loading (pallet + loading stack)

16

X-coordinates reference point Lift

17

Y-dimension: Tool center to sheet edge


(Y-dimension: sheet edge-machine; loading)
Max. X-sheet dimension
(X-pallet dimension; loading)
Max. Y-sheet dimension
(Y-pallet dimension; loading)
X-dimension: sheet edge-lift zero position

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Distance X-coordinates reference point to the sheet edge (loading)


(X-dimension: sheet edge-lift reference point)
Unloading area outside the machine table
(X-pallet dimension; unloading)
Y-dimension pedestal
(Y-pallet dimension; unloading)
Distance tool center to sheet edge; loading
(X-dimension: sheet edge-machine; loading)
Beginning of unloading area outside the machine table
(X-offset: pallet-machine; unloading)
X-dimension: Waiting position during loading

27 *)

Beginning of unloading area within machine table


(X-position scrap, 1st X-dropping area)
28
End of unloading area within machine table
(2nd X-dropping area)
sheet skeleton extraction **)

*) for TRUMASORT R4: 1800 mm


**) Addition: Sheet skeleton unloading takes place, depending upon the size, at positions which are 725
S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-53

Problems and Supports


Problem

Solution

Sheet hits against stop pin during loading. Pick-up position of the loading stack does not coincide with the real position of the
loading stack.
Modify U16 with dimension A.
Correct the position of the loading stack.
Modify U18 with dimension E.
Grip unloading with SM 1250 leads to
error message from the machine.

Grip extraction position lies within the triggering range for emergency shut-off of
the lift control.
Modify the G-Parameters of the U12.
Correct triggering range.

Grip unloading with SM 1250 in ToPs 300


leads to following error message from the
machine: "Gripper cannot reach left/right
sheet edge by ...mm". Even when the
transverse rail travels as far as the end of
the crossing, the SM is still unable to
reach the sheet edge with the gripper.

Modify loading position [DATA] [MACHINES] [DATA] [CLAMP] [DATA 8].

Suction cups, which are on the machine


in complete contact with the metal sheet,
are not activated in the NC program.

Check suction cup position in the data base.

Clamp disposal does not function on the


machine with the SM 1250 Gripper
grasps empty space.

Correct U12 Parameters through reduction of the G variables.

Lift cannot separate the metal sheets


individually.

Use fanning magnet.

Reposition.
In the case of the TC 500R, with 2500 mm working range, a test can be made
to determine if it would suffice to have the grip positions in the data base
slightly altered (as a rule, a secure gripping of the sheet edge is also possible
when the grippers advance 5 mm less closely to the sheet). For this, the
dimensions of the 1st and 2nd X grip position can be reset from 2045 to 2040
in [DATA] [MACHINES] [DATA] [LIFT GROUP 1] [DATA 8]. This should be
attempted in any case!
Correct the position of the loading stack.
Modify U16 with dimension A (stripper suction cup 25 is activated only below
predefined sheet thicknesses [default: 2 mm]).
Check 1st and 2nd dimensions of X-grip position in [DATA] [MACHINES]
[DATA] [LIFT GROUP 1] [DATA 8].
Ensure that the stripper suction cup 25 lies on the sheet and that it is activated.
For sheets with smaller spread in Y, the stripper suction cup must also be
displaced (in the data base as well). The best position is in the outermost righthand sheet corner (operators view) across from the fanning magnets.
Place small distancing pieces between the sheets on the sheet loading stack.
These must however extend far enough out of the sheet stack that they fall to
the side of the stack when the sheets are removed from above (otherwise the
pieces will be transported on the machine table!).

8-54

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Problem

Solution

After the finished parts stack has reached


an approximate height of 10-20 mm, the
lift comes to a stop during depositing of
the next finished part.

No suction cup with an unloading sheet bero6) was used in the NC Program for
unloading the finished part (these suction cups are marked in the data base
under [DATA] [MACHINES] [DATA] [SUCTION CUP DATA] [DATA 2] with the
switch "Sheet sensing").
Unloading sheet bero is defective on the suction cup.

During loading / unloading, one or more


suction cups draws air and emits a highpitched whistle.

Check suction cup position in the data base / on the lift.


Check the position of the loading stack.
Check NC program.
Check C and D dimensions.

6) Sheet beros are sensors for registering the deflection of the suction cups upwards after they touch the ground. The
SM 1250, SM 1300 and SM 1600 possess three suction cups with one sheet bero, whereby two are responsible for
unloading, and one for loading.
S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-55

Configuring TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC


TRUMALIFT SB for loading, TRUMALIFT SE for unloading and
TRUMALIFT SC for loading and unloading have no gripping device
for sheet skeleton extraction.
They can be additionally equipped with a TRUMAGRIP (Option).
see Chapter: Configuring Unloading with TRUMAGRIP.
TRUMALIFT

TRUMAGRIP

Lifting grip

possible
SB

yes

no

SE

yes

no

SC

yes

no

Loading and Unloading with TRUMALIFT SC


Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC

The Lift group 2 SB/SE/SC contains different lift types, depending


upon the selected machine. Select your TRUMALIFT SC in
accordance with your configuration of machine.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC

8-56

Automation Components

Fig. 20192

S354E81.DOC

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 1

"General lift data" of your TRUMALIFT SC.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, Data 1, "General lift data"

Fig. 20193

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SC.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"NC output format": Direct or preparatory? Only direct is


possible.

S354E81.DOC

"Position (operators view)": Is the lift positioned to the left or to


the right of the machine? Operators view: You are standing in
front of the machine.
TRUMALIFT SC: ON THE RIGHT

"Sheet thickness detector":


How does the testing procedure function that determines
whether just one sheet has been taken up for loading?
MANUAL
A sheet thickness detector (double sheet detector) is
present that cannot be programmed. There is no sheet
thickness detector present.
MECHANICAL
Only SheetMaster: The sheet thickness is checked with an
armature probe.
INDUCTIVE
Applies to all TRUMALIFT SheetMasters: The sheet thickness is checked inductively. The sheet thickness detector
is programmable.

Automation Components

8-57

"Name of Lift": The lift name is displayed.

"Name of drawing": The name of the drawing is displayed.


A drawing of the lift is available for displaying the TRUMALIFT SC
in ToPs 300. The names of the drawings are contained in the
directory "\TRUMPF\TOPS_ZCH\*.*".

"Max. carrying capacity": What is the maximum allowable


weight in [kg] that the TRUMALIFT SC is allowed to transport?

"Max. sheet thickness": Sheet thickness is displayed in [mm].

"Min. sheet dimension in X", "Min. sheet dimension in Y"


"Max. sheet dimension in X", "Max. sheet dimension in Y":
Minimum and maximum sheet dimensions that can be
transported by the lift are displayed. Should one of the four
limitations not be observed, then manual loading will be
generated.

"X-dim. sheet edge-Lift zero pt":


X-dimension measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the
zero point of the TRUMALIFT SC

8-58

"Prepare loading at end of program":


Is a new sheet to be brought forward, before the machine is
finished with the sheet processing?
NOT POSSIBLE
The preparatory loading is not possible in any case and is
organized with this setting as the default. The
corresponding option in the TECHNOLOGY Module is not
enabled.
NO
The preparatory loading is possible, but should not be
preselected. The option YES/NO can nevertheless be
selected in the TECHNOLOGY Module.
YES
The preparatory loading is possible and should be
preselected. The option YES/NO can nevertheless be
selected in the TECHNOLOGY Module.

"X-dim. sheet edge-Lift ref. pt.":


X-dimension measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the
reference point of the TRUMALIFT SC.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 2

Additional "General lift data" regarding your TRUMALIFT SC.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 2, "General lift data"

Fig. 20194

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SC.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"X-offset zero pt of suction carriage / tool center"


Offset value is displayed in [mm].

"Safety offset in addition to X-offset":


The calculated safety offset value in [mm] which is to be
subtracted is displayed.
The X-offset value is the measurement of the distance that the
sheet edge is to be moved away from the stop pin or the tool
center during loading before the speed is reduced.

S354E81.DOC

"Are speed, acceleration and sheet thickness programmable?":


YES, NO.
Default setting: NO.
YES for a TASC 100 Lift operation.

Automation Components

8-59

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 3

Data for "Loading" with TRUMALIFT SC.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 3, "Lift data"

Fig. 20195

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SC.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"NC output format": STEPS or %. Fixed setting: STEPS.

"NC output speed" STEPS (only with TASC 100 Lift operation):
Each speed step is assigned to a specific speed in [m/min].

"NC output acceleration" STEPS (only with TASC 100 Lift


2
operation): A specific acceleration in [m/s ] is assigned to each
acceleration step.

Step
1

10

20

30

50

80

8-60

% of maximum speed,
% of maximum acceleration

100

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

"X-value waiting position": Waiting position in [mm] while


loading in the X-direction?

"Max.sht thickn. stripping": What is the maximum sheet


thickness in [mm] that the sheet panel can have and still be
able to be stripped?
During stripping, each sheet is separated with the aid of a
stripper suction cup. If the sheet is too thick, the suction power
will not be enough to buckle the sheet. In this case, the stripper
suction cup is not activated.

"X-dim. sheet edgemachine":


Corresponds to the pick-up position of the loading sheet.
Enter the X-dimensions for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 4

"Y-dim. sheet edgemachine"


Corresponds to the offset of the loading stack when measured
from the lift zero position.
Enter the Y-dimensions for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].

"Code for material detector"


The inductive double sheet detector (code for material detector) is
supported. The measured values can be entered into the memory
storage positions 0 to 99 in the data base.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 4, "Code for material detector"

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

Fig. 20196

8-61

Proceed as follows:

"Material" Function button SELECTION: An option mask appears.


Choose a material from the selection list. Except for the
"Material code", the values are entered automatically into the
DATA 4 mask.

"Material code": Enter the material code. The values between


0 and 99 must correspond to the storage positions of the
machine operating system. You have already reserved the
storage positions in the machine control. Number 0 stands for:
no measurement.

For your information:


You assign the values 1 to 99 as follows:
Carry out a measurement with the double sheet detector
and the desired material (for example St37-20).
Store the measurement result in one of the storage
positions 1 - 99 in the machine control.
"1" for St37-20, for example.
Enter this number as "Material code" in ToPs 300.
Once you have entered all the data including the material code,
click upon the function button CREATE. The data is taken up in the
list under the entry fields.

8-62

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Function button
LIFT GROUP SB/SE/SC,
DATA 5

Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SC.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 5, "Unloading"

Fig. 20197

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SC.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"Number of carrier cups", "Number of coupled cups": How


many carrier and coupled cups does the Lift have?

"NC output format": STEPS or %. Fixed setting: STEPS.

"NC output speed":


"NC output acceleration": in STEPS or %.
see LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 3 in this Chapter.

"1st dropping height in Z"*):

*) The value has no significance for TRUMALIFT SC/SE.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-63

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 6

"DY - retract from clamp":


Indicates the length of the Y-traverse path required to move a
part out of the clamp area.
"Traversing speed":
With which speed in [m/min] should the traverse motion for
retraction from the clamp be executed?

Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SC.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 6, "Unloading"

Fig. 20198

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SC.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"Max. dropping height" is the height for "Regular dropping".

Lift stroke in Y: Traverse path for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster


when unloading after laser processing (only for TC 600L).

8-64

"Min. dropping height" is the height for "Soft dropping".

"Software limit switch laser X-axis": Dimension > 0, to which


the TRUMALIFT SC can travel while the laser is activated.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

"Min. traverse pos.Y laser": Minimum position for traversing in


Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SC during laser processing.

"Last punching stroke fr. Lift": Function button YES/NO.


Fixed setting: NO.

"Last stroke after sucking": YES/NO.


Fixed setting: NO.

S354E81.DOC

"Min. traverse pos.Y punching": Minimum position for traversing in


Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SC during punch processing.

"Safety offset in addition to X-offset":


Value in [mm], which is to be calculated as a safety offset at
the minimum X-pick-up position.
Default for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster: 0 mm
Default for TRUMALIFT SE, SC: 1 mm.

Automation Components

8-65

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 8

"Grip disposal on the Lift"

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 8, "Grip disposal on the Lift"

Fig. 20199

Make no entries in this mask! TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC possess


no Lifting grips.

8-66

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Loading with TRUMALIFT SB


Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC

The Lift group 2 SB/SE/SC contains different lift types, depending


upon the selected machine. Select your TRUMALIFT SB in accordance with your configuration of machine.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, "Lift type"

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 1

"General Lift data" of your TRUMALIFT SB.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 1, "General lift data"

S354E81.DOC

Fig. 20182

Automation Components

Fig. 20183

8-67

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SB.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"NC output format": Direct or preparatory? Only direct is


possible.

"Sheet thickness detector":


How does the testing procedure function that determines
whether just one sheet has been taken up for loading?
MANUAL
A sheet thickness detector (double sheet detector) is
present that cannot be programmed. There is no sheet
thickness detector present.
MECHANICAL
Applies to all TRUMALIFT SheetMasters: The sheet thickness is checked with an armature probe.
INDUCTIVE
Applies to all TRUMALIFT SBs: The sheet thickness is
checked inductively. The sheet thickness detector is programmable.

"Prepare loading at end of program":


Is a new sheet to be brought forward, before the machine is
finished with the sheet processing?
NOT POSSIBLE
The preparatory loading is not possible in any case and is
organized with this setting as the default. The
corresponding option in the TECHNOLOGY Module is not
enabled.
NO
The preparatory loading is possible, but should not be
preselected. The option YES/NO can nevertheless be
selected in the TECHNOLOGY Module.
YES
The preparatory loading is possible and should be
preselected. The option YES/NO can nevertheless be
selected in the TECHNOLOGY Module.

"Name of Lift": The Lift name is displayed.

8-68

"Position (operators view)": Is the lift positioned to the left or to


the right of the machine? Operators view: You are standing in
front of the machine.
TRUMALIFT SB: LEFT.

"Name of drawing": The name of drawing is displayed.


A drawing of the lift is available for displaying the TRUMALIFT
SB in ToPs 300. The names of the drawings are contained in
the directory "\TRUMPF\TOPS_ZCH\*.*".

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

"Max. sheet thickness": Sheet thickness is displayed in [mm].

"Min. sheet dimension in X", "Min. sheet dimension in Y"


"Max. sheet dimension in X", "Max. sheet dimension in Y":
Minimum and maximum sheet dimensions that can be
transported by the lift are displayed. Should one of the four
limitations not be observed, then manual loading will be
generated.

"X-dim. sheet edge-Lift zero pt":


X-dim. measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the zero point
of the TRUMALIFT SB.

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 2

"Max. carrying capacity": What is the maximum allowable


weight in [kg] that the TRUMALIFT SB is allowed to transport?

"X-dim. sheet edge-Lift ref. pt.":


X-dim. measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the reference
point of the TRUMALIFT SB.

Additional "General lift data" regarding your TRUMALIFT SB.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 2, "General lift data"

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

Fig. 20184

8-69

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SB.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"X-offset zero pt of suction carriage / tool center"


Offset value is displayed in [mm].

"Safety offset in addition to X-offset":


The safety offset value in [mm] which is to be calculated is
displayed.
The X-offset value is the measurement of the distance that the
sheet edge is to be moved away from the stop pin or the tool
center during loading before the speed is reduced.

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 3

"Are speed, acceleration and sheet thickness programmable?":


YES, NO.
Default setting: NO.
YES for a TASC 100 Lift operation.

Data for "Loading" with TRUMALIFT SB.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 3, "loading"

8-70

Automation Components

Fig. 20185

S354E81.DOC

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SB.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"NC output format": STEPS or %. Fixed setting: STEPS.

"NC output speed" STEPS (only with TASC 100 Lift operation):
A specific speed is assigned to each speed step in [m/min].

"NC output speed" STEPS (only with TASC 100 Lift operation):
A specific acceleration is assigned to each acceleration step in
2
[m/s ].

Step

% of maximum speed,
% of maximum acceleration

10

20

30

50

80

100

"X-value waiting position": Waiting position in [mm] while


loading in the X-direction?

"Max.sht thickn. stripping": What is the maximum sheet


thickness in [mm] that the sheet panel can have and still be
able to be stripped?
During stripping, each sheet is separated with the aid of a
stripper suction cup. If the sheet is too thick, the suction power
will not be enough to buckle the sheet. In this case, the stripper
suction cup is not activated.

"X-dim. sheet edgemachine":


Corresponds to the pick-up position of the loading sheet.
Enter the X-dimension for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].

S354E81.DOC

"Y-dim. sheet edgemachine":


Corresponds to the offset of the loading stack when measured
from the lift zero position.
Enter the Y-dimension for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].

Automation Components

8-71

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 4

"Code for material detector"


The inductive double sheet detector (code for material detector) is
supported. The measured values can be entered into the memory
storage places 0 to 99 in the data base.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 4, "Code for material detector"

Fig. 20186

Proceed as follows:

8-72

"Material" Function button SELECTION: An option mask


appears. Choose a material from the selection list. Except for
the "Material code", the values are entered automatically into
the DATA 4 mask.
"Material code": Enter the material code. The values between
0 and 99 must correspond to the storage positions of the
machine operating system. You have already reserved the
storage positions in the machine control. Number 0 stands for:
no measurement.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

For your information:


You assign the values 1 to 99 as follows:
Carry out a measurement with the double sheet detector
and the desired material (for example St37-20).
Store the measurement result in one of the storage
positions 1 - 99 in the machine control.
"1" for St37-20, for example.
Enter this number as "Material code" in ToPs 300.
Once you have entered all the data including the material code,
click upon the function button CREATE. The data is taken up in the
list under the entry fields.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-73

Unloading with TRUMALIFT SE


Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC

The Lift group 2 SB/SE/SC contains different lift types, depending


upon the selected machine. Select your TRUMALIFT SE in accordance with your configuration of machine.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 1

"General Lift data" of your TRUMALIFT SE

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 1, "General lift data"

8-74

Fig. 20187

Automation Components

Fig. 20188

S354E81.DOC

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SE.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"NC output format": Direct or preparatory? Only direct is


possible.

"Sheet thickness detector":


How does the testing procedure function that determines
whether just one sheet has been taken up for loading?
MANUAL
A sheet thickness detector (double sheet detector) is
present that cannot be programmed. There is no sheet
thickness detector present.
MECHANICAL
Only SheetMaster: The sheet thickness is checked with an
armature probe.
INDUCTIVE
Applies to all TRUMALIFT SEs: The sheet thickness is
checked inductively. The sheet thickness detector is
programmable.

"Prepare loading at end of program":


Is a new sheet to be brought forward, before the machine is
finished with the sheet processing?
NOT POSSIBLE
The preparatory loading is not possible in any case and is
organized with this setting as the default. The
corresponding option in the TECHNOLOGY Module is not
enabled.
NO
The preparatory loading is possible, but should not be
preselected. The option YES/NO can nevertheless be
selected in the TECHNOLOGY Module.
YES
The preparatory loading is possible and should be
preselected. The option YES/NO can nevertheless be
selected in the TECHNOLOGY Module.

S354E81.DOC

"Position (operators view)": Is the lift positioned to the left or to


the right of the machine? Operators view: You are standing in
front of the machine.
TRUMALIFT SE: On the RIGHT

"Name of Lift": The lift name is displayed.

Automation Components

8-75

"Max. carrying capacity": What is the maximum allowable


weight in [kg] that the TRUMALIFT SE is allowed to transport?

"Max. sheet thickness": Sheet thickness is displayed in [mm].

"Min. sheet dimension in X", "Min. sheet dimension in Y"


"Max. sheet dimension in X", "Max. sheet dimension in Y":
Minimum and maximum sheet dimensions that can be transported by the lift are displayed. Should one of the four limitations
not be observed, then manual loading will be generated.

"X-dim. sheet edge-Lift zero pt":


X-dim. measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the zero point
of the TRUMALIFT SE.

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 2

"Name of drawing": The name of drawing is displayed.


A drawing of the lift is available for displaying the TRUMALIFT SE
in ToPs 300. The names of the drawings are contained in the
directory "\TRUMPF\TOPS_ZCH\*.*".

"X-dim. sheet edge-Lift ref. pt.":


X-dim. measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the reference
point of the TRUMALIFT SE.

Additional "General lift data" regarding your TRUMALIFT SE.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 2, "General lift data"

8-76

Automation Components

Fig. 20189

S354E81.DOC

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SE.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"X-offset zero pt of suction carriage / tool center"


Offset value is displayed in [mm].

"Safety offset in addition to X-offset":


The safety offset value in [mm] which is to be calculated is
displayed.
The X-offset value is the measurement of the distance that the
sheet edge is to be moved away from the stop pin or the tool
center during loading before the speed is reduced.

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 5

"Are speed, acceleration and sheet thickness programmable?":


YES, NO.
Default setting: NO.
YES for a TASC 100 Lift operation.

Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SE.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 5, "Unloading"

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

Fig. 20190

8-77

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SE.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"Number of carrier cups", "Number of coupled cups": How


many carrier and coupled cups does the lift have?

"NC output format": STEPS or %. Fixed setting: STEPS.

"NC output speed":


"NC output acceleration": in STEPS or %.
see LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 3 in this Chapter.

"1st dropping height in Z"*):

"Retract from clamp in DY":


Indicate the length of the Y-traverse path required to move a
part out of the clamp area.

"Traversing speed":
With which speed in [m/min] should the traverse motion for
release from the clamp be executed?

*) The value has no significance for TRUMALIFT SC/SE.

8-78

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 6

Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SE.

LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 6, "Unloading"

Fig. 20191

The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the


default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SE.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:

"Max. dropping height" is the height for "Regular dropping".

Lift travel in Y: Traverse path for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster


when unloading after laser processing (only for TC 600L).

"Software limit switch laser X-axis": Measurement > 0, to which


the TRUMALIFT SE can travel when the laser is activated.

"Min. traverse pos.Y-punching": Minimum position for traversing in


Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SE during punch processing.

"Min. traverse pos.Y-laser": Minimum position for traversing in


Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SE during laser processing.

S354E81.DOC

"Min. dropping height" is the height for "Soft dropping".

"Last punching stroke fr. Lift": Function button YES/NO.


Fixed setting: NO.

Automation Components

8-79

8-80

"Last stroke after sucking": YES/NO.


Fixed setting: NO.
"Safety offset in addition to X-offset":
Value in [mm], which is to be calculated as a safety offset at
the minimum X-pick-up position.
Default for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster: 0 mm
Default for TRUMALIFT SE, SC: 1 mm.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Lift Parameters: Application in ToPs 300


The lists appearing on the following pages are for clarification purposes and for your information, to show how the various U parameters
arise in ToPs 300 during the programming of TRUMALIFT.
Take this information into consideration when you modify
data in ToPs 300.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-81

The sheet is not valid for NC-Codes corresponding to


DIN V4001!

Abbreviations used:
Tctr.:
SCO:
SCRP:
SCZP:
SM:

tool center
Suction carriage origin
Suction carriage reference point
Suction carriage zero point
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

Variable

Meaning

Mask in the DATA Module,


Description in the mask field

X-dimension loading sheet edge to suction carriage


origin

SM Data 3: "X-dim. sheet edge - machine"

X-offset value between Tctr. and suction carriage


origin

SM Data 2: "X-offset zero pt of suction carriage -- tool


center"

X-dimension loading sheet edge to suction carriage


zero point 1)

SM Data 1: "X-dim. sheet edge - Lift zero pt"

X-dimension loading sheet edge to suction carriage


reference point (NC datum point) 2)

SM Data 1: "X-dim. sheet edge - Lift ref. pt."

"Safety offset in addition to X-offset"

SM Data 2: "Safety offset in addition to X-offset"

X-unloading position of the sheet skeleton stack with


grip disposal

SM Data 8: "X position of sheet skeleton"

X-transfer position of the sheet skeleton on the SM

SM Data 8: "Transfer position Lift in X"

X-position scrap

SM Data 6: "X-pos. - scrap

X-offset of the unloading area of the finished part


pallet to the SCO

SM Data 5: "X-offset pallet - machine"

X-unloading position of the sheet skeleton stack with


suction cup disposal

SM Data 8: "X-position of sheet skeleton"

X-position for which the SM should wait before loading "X-dimension waiting position"

1) This value is only an imaginary calculation value and can be seen only in the suction cup reference drawing.
2) This value is only an imaginary calculation value and can be seen only in the suction cup reference drawing. This point
was once identical with suction cup 25, but in the meantime a screw on the lift frame is used for this. The NC output is
a reference to this point on the lift frame.

8-82

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Loading
parameters

Remark

Variable

Example

U16

Pick-up position Lift

A+B+C

800+200+80 U1601080
e.g. TC 260 with SM 1250

U18

Transfer position at the


machine

B+D+E

200+80+20 U1800300
e.g. TC 260 with SM 1250

U17

Waiting position SM

2760 U1702760
for example, SM 1300 and 1600

Unloading
parameters

Remark

Variable

Example

U123)

Finished part

B+D-C

200+80-50 U1200230
Example for TC 260 with SM1250

U134)

Finished part

RW5)+D+J+B-C

70+80+3650+200-50 U1303950
Example for TC 260 with SM1250

U12

Scrap

B+D-C

200+80-50 U1200230
Example for TC 260 with SM1250

U13

Scrap

B+D+H-C

200+80+4155-50 U1304380
Example for TC 260 with SM1250

U12

Sheet skeleton with


gripper

G+B+D-C

355+200+80-50 U1200585
Example for TC 260 with SM1250

U13

Sheet skeleton with


gripper

F+D+B-C

4615+80+200-50 U1304840
Example for TC 260 with SM1250

U12

Sheet skeleton with


suction cup

B+D-C

200+80-50 U1200230
Example for TC 260 with SM1250

U13

Sheet skeleton with


suction cup

D+K+B-C

80+4155+200-50 U1304380
Example for TC 260 with SM1250

The underlined variables are linearly independent, i.e., they


appear in no other equations. They are therefore suited for
specific modifications of the corresponding U parameters.

3) U12 determines the pick-up position of the Lift.


4) U12 determines the unloading position of the Lift.
5) This value has been included in the regulations and serves as a safety distance surrounding the finished parts stack.
This also prevents the sheet thickness detector from colliding with a previous finished parts stack. Because this
distance is measured from every stack, the result is a distance between stacks of 2 * 70 mm.
S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-83

3.

TECHNOLOGY Module: Configuring


Loading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

Workpiece sheet loading does not have to be programmed


separately.
It is carried out automatically with the definition of a new sheet if:
2 is the number of stop pins selected (standard preliminary
choice) in the DATA Module. DATA Module, MACHINES, DATA,
STOP PIN DATA, "contact data", DATA 1.
the sheet to be loaded lies within the predefined boundaries.
DATA Module, MACHINES, DATA, LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER,
"Lift data", DATA 1.
The loading operation proceeds parallel with the unloading operation, if "Prepare loading" was selected for the preceding sheet.
When loading is done by a TRUMALIFT SheetMaster, make
sure you select appropriate clamp positions to eliminate the
chance of collision between the clamps and the punching
head during sheet transfer.
The determinations you have made in the DATA Module are
of significance for loading and unloading with the Lift in the
TECHNOLOGY Module.

8-84

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

4.

TECHNOLOGY Module: Configuring


Unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

Removal of finished parts and scrap can be configured either on


the single part or on the sheet. Extraction of sheet skeletons and
cutouts, however, can be defined only in sheet mode.
Removing parts:
configuring in the sheet mode
or in the single part mode

No distinction is made between configuration of removing in the sheet


mode or in the single part mode. The functions are identical. The
functions for the unloading are called up using the main menu bar:
Function SINGLE PART

Function PROCESSING

Single part processing

Sheet processing

Procedure in Overview
Prerequisites

The prerequisites necessary in order to be able to configure


unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster:
In the DATA Module: Check the systems configuration. Have all
data been set in accordance with your configuration of
machine?
The lift processing that is to be defined needs the drawing as a
basis. Single parts or cutouts must be available as drawings.
The procedure for defining processing with unloading is always the
same - regardless of whether you are defining the processing for a
single part or on the sheet.
You must configure unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. You
determine where the processing with unloading procedure is to be
set.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-85

Execution

Unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster is configured in a way


similar to that of unloading via flap/chute:

Step 1:
Step 2:

Configure the processing of the geometry elements in the part,


excluding the unloading of the part.

Step 3:

Select unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. At this point,


change over in the menu to manual punch or laser processing.
Select the LIFT control function.
Pick processing, where the last stroke is to be.

Step 4:

Place the suction frame over the part and establish position for
unloading.

Step 5:

Define the sheet layout.


or
In case parts are already on the sheet, transfer the processing
configuration onto the available parts.

Step 6:

Execute sheet optimization.

Step 7:

Define palletizing for the parts:


Select Function NC PROGRAM, PALLETIZING.

Step 8:

8-86

Load single part(s) or sheet.

Generate the NC program.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

4.1

Configuring Unloading

The first stage of unloading a part with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster


consists of configuring the unloading position; the second stage of
unloading the part consists of establishing its palletizing.

Prerequisite:
The drawings of the single parts or the drawing of the nested sheet
have been loaded.
Sheet skeletons or residual strips can also be removed without
geometric references. For description, see: "Configuring Removal
with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster without Geometry Reference"

Step 1

Load parts or sheet.


Select the function FILE, LOAD. Load the parts or sheet in the
Data manager.

Step 2

Establishing processing.
The processing can be configured either automatically or manually.

Select function SINGLE PART (for single part mode) or Function PROCESSING (for sheet mode).
The menu for either PUNCHING or LASER PROCESSING is
displayed.

Select the function START when using automatic processing.


The check box for "part unloading" should not be activated. A
processing proposal is generated by the system.

Changing over to manual operation after automatic processing


definition: Select MANUAL. The menu for the operating functions for manual processing are displayed.

Step 3

Select TRUMALIFT SheetMaster for unloading.


Select the LIFT control function. Configure unloading in the corresponding Menu.

Function LIFT, PARAMETER

Function PARAMETER: Using this function, you select the basic


conditions for the NC output for unloading with the TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-87

A mask is opened:
Select the output mode, speed and acceleration for unloading with
the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. Confirm your choice with OK. The
mask closes.

Establishing the parameters for unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

Fig. 20465

Output mode "immediate" is required for: TRUMALIFT


SheetMaster: 200, 1000, 1250 and TRUMALIFT SC, SE.
The unloading parameters are displayed immediately before
the lift processing.

Output mode "time-optimized": Immediately after the unloading,


the unloading parameters for the next unloading are displayed.
This output mode shortens the processing time.
Note: The feasibility of this NC output mode depends on which
version of machine control system you have.

8-88

Automation Components

Mode of speed in which the NC output is to proceed?


Speed in steps: Selection of a defined speed for NC output in [%].
A certain speed value in [m/min] is assigned to each speed
step:
Step 1 is equivalent to 10 % of maximum speed
Step 2 is equivalent to 20 % of maximum speed
Step 3 is equivalent to 30 % of maximum speed
Step 4 is equivalent to 50 % of maximum speed
Step 5 is equivalent to 80 % of maximum speed
Step 6 is equivalent to 100 % of maximum speed

S354E81.DOC

Output mode of acceleration for loading and unloading


workpieces with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster?
Acceleration in steps: Selection of a defined acceleration in
steps. A certain acceleration value in [m/s] is assigned to each
acceleration step:
Step 1 is equivalent to 10 % of maximum acceleration
Step 2 is equivalent to 20 % of maximum acceleration
Step 3 is equivalent to 30 % of maximum acceleration
Step 4 is equivalent to 50 % of maximum acceleration
Step 5 is equivalent to 80 % of maximum acceleration
Step 6 is equivalent to 100 % of maximum acceleration
The mode of the NC output for speed and acceleration
proceeds in % with the TC 600L, in steps with the other
machines.

Step 4
Function LIFT, SET

Configure the position for unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.


In the auxiliary mask you define:

Setting the position of the Lift

S354E81.DOC

Fig. 20466

What is to be unloaded: a finished part, a scrap part or a sheet


skeleton? For a sheet skeleton, establish with what the sheet
skeleton is to be unloaded:
Suction cups (always possible)
Grippers (only with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 200, 1000,
1250)

Automation Components

8-89

Check box "Open clamps": If the part lies in the clamp area,
then the clamps should be opened, so that the part can be
removed with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
or
Check box "Open clamp group 1", "Open clamp group 2",
"Open clamp group 3": Clamps can for example be opened in
groups with the TC 260 or also individually with the TC 500R,
TC 600L.

Check box " Last stroke after sucking": In order that the part
being removed does not slide away with the TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster, the possibility also exists of having the part be
first stabilized by the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster and then not
executing the final stroke until afterwards.

After confirmation of the mask, the Lift is displayed with the suction
cups. You can move the Lift with the help of the mouse. Configure
the final position for unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster:
Click onto Processing.
As a result, a stroke will be placed on the unloading position on the
processing.

Step 5

Configure the sheet layout


or
If a sheet layout is already present, then transfer the preset
processing to all the parts of the sheet.

8-90

Laying out the sheet.


Select the sheet mode using SINGLE Function TRANSFER
SINGLE PART TO SHEET. Confirm the mask with OK.
Select the LAYOUT function.
The screen menu for sheet layout will be displayed. Configure
a simple or an area-wide versatility.
Sheet layout has already been done.
Transfer the processing of the individual parts onto the parts of
the sheet using function TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET.
Select settings and confirm the mask with OK.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Step 6

Execute sheet optimization.

Functions SHEET OPTIMIZATION, AUTOMATIC, GENERATE,


START:
With automatic optimization, you choose the parameters for
the optimization process using an index card. The system
creates a recommendation for you which you can accept or
make manual modifications to the processing sequence.

Step 7

Select the main function OPTIMIZATION. The menu for


SHEET OPTIMIZATION will be displayed.

Functions SHEET OPTIMIZATION, MANUAL, INTERACTIVE:


With the aid of the Menu function for operating function
INTERACTIVE, you can now modify the processing sequence.

Configuring palletizing of the parts following unloading using the


TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
You will find the functions for this in the menu for NC generation.
Select the following: Function NC PROGRAM in the main menu.
You have available to you in the screen menu the operating
function PALLETIZING with the relevant menu functions.
The functions for palettizing are thoroughly described on the
following pages. see: "Configuring Palletizing: Depositing Parts
with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster"

Step 8

Generating NC program.
Once all the parts are deposited, you have carried out all the steps
and can now generate the NC program.

S354E81.DOC

Select functions GENERATE, START.


You establish the desired parameters with the help of the index
card. The NC program is generated as soon as you close the
mask with OK. You can display or print the generated NC text.

Automation Components

8-91

Adjusting the Suction Cups


Prerequisite: Unloading with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster has
been selected.
Effect: The suction cups can be placed over the part with the help
of the mouse. At the same time, the functions for ADJUST are
activated.

Functions ADJUST,
SUCTION CUP

This function can be used to select or change the suction cup


choice. The diverse types of suction cups can be recognized by
their size and the number of circles. The colour indicates if the
suction cup is activated for unloading of that part or not. You can
recognize which suction cup is being used by looking at the suction
cup number.

Selecting suction cup

Fig. 20467

here: Presentation of the suction plate

8-92

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Criterion for suction selection from a suction cup group on


the suction plate:
When a suction cup of one suction cup group is selected, then all
of the suction cups of that suction group are either activated or
deactivated. Reason: The suction cups of a suction cup group are
coupled to one another.

At least one suction cup of that group must be positioned on


the sheet.

When a 3-way or a 9-way suction cup group is selected (carrier


suction cup 18 mm), a maximum total of 5 individual suction
cups can be activated, to which no vacuum is attached.

When the suction cups on a suction plate are selected, then up


to a maximum of 50 individual suction cups need have no
vacuum attached to them.

No selected suction cup may be positioned on the sheet


skeleton or upon another part.

A suction cup may lay over a breakthrough.

Only the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300, 1306, 1600 and


1606 can be equipped with a suction plate (Option).

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-93

Representation of a suction cup


The suction cups are displayed as circles (line type: solid/dotted) in
different colors.

Suction cup plate: The suction cup plate is displayed completely with all suction cup groups. The suction cup groups are
marked with numbers.
Example:
A suction plate receives 291 carrier suction cups 18 mm
(Display: simple circle), which are combined into 37 suction
cup groups (Display: broken lines).

Circle display: Suction cups outside the suction cup plate


simple circle, small: Carrier suction cup 47 mm
simple circle, large: Carrier suction cup 120 mm
double circle, large: Pivot suction cup 110 mm
triple circle: Stripper suction cup 110 mm

Color
red circle: Suction cup is active.
yellow circle: The cup is not active.

Number: Number of the suction cup

For further information regarding TRUMALIFT SheetMaster


see: "Operating Manual TRUMALIFT SheetMaster".

8-94

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Moving the Lift or the Part


If it is necessary to move the part and the Lift, then you
should proceed according to the following sequence of steps:
Move 1st part (Part position), move 2nd Lift (Lift position).
Background: To move a part cancels out Lift movements that
have already taken place.
Function ADJUST,
PART POSITION

If a part is located at a position in the sheet which is unfavorable


for unloading with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster, it must be moved
to a better position.
Parts can be moved freely for this, if the sheet thickness allows it.

Important!

The function "PART POSITION" may not be utilized with the


TC 600L (NC older than V6.0)!

Procedure:
Select the function.
The TRUMALIFT SheetMaster appears on the mouse symbol.
By moving the Lift, you change the position of the part relative
to the Lift. The movement of the Lift (the part will be moved!)
can be defined at will in X- or Y-direction.
Click on the new unloading position. The TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster will be repositioned.
Confirm the selected position with OK.
Display of the movement of the part is not possible in ToPs.
To illustrate the action, the Lift is moved instead. You should,
however, be aware that in actual fact you are programming a
movement of the part. This has to do with a machine
function which is displayed in the programming system.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-95

For your information:

1
2
3
4

Suction cup
Sheet panel
Part that is unloaded
Programmed path

Moving the part: Defining the path

The path around which the part


is moved

Side spacing
Fig. 9150

Moving parts cut from thin sheet metal may adversely affect
process reliability. For example, the sheet may be pushed
over the part and the latter not be moved at all.
The following is to be considered when choosing a suction
cup: one part is moved around a defined path, without the
width of the side spacing being taken into consideration.
That means that the part is actually moved only along the
path that remains once the side spacing has been
subtracted from the defined path

8-96

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Selecting Lift Strips (only with


TRUMALIFT SC or SE)
Function ADJUST,
LIFT POSITION

Moving the Lift: The defined position of the Lift relative to the part is
modified.
You can use this function to move the position of the Lift. The Lift
can be moved only horizontally (in X-direction) and up to the
position of the punching head.

Procedure:

The Lift appears on the mouse symbol (cross) and can be


repositioned with the help of the mouse.

Functions LIFT STRIPS,


STRIP 2 and STRIP 1

Select the functions ADJUST, LIFT POSITION:

Select OK to confirm the new position.

Two lift strips are available to you with machines which are
equipped with a TRUMALIFT SC or SE. You can move these strips
in the framework of the programming.
The functions are not enabled with other Lifts.

Procedure:

Select unloading with TRUMALIFT SC: Select functions MANUAL,


LIFT, SET.

The lift is displayed with the suction cups and is to be moved


with the cursor. Now the Functions LIFT STRIPS, STRIP 2 and
STRIP 1 are activated for you.

Select the desired strip which you would like to move and thus
use for unloading the part.

Confirm the position with OK.

When programming, observe the following points:

S354E81.DOC

No automatic test of Y > 40 mm or 190 mm, if Lift strip 1 is


extended to position 1 or 2 during pickup.

Automation Components

8-97

No automatic test of the Lift position if Lift strip 1 is extended to


190 mm and the machine TC 260L is working in laser mode
(suction cup 4 must not move closer than 321 mm from the
vacuum carriage zero point).

No movement of the Lift strips between loading and depositing


is possible.

Moving the scrap skeleton during unloading of the suction cups is


possible, in order to be able to move the scrap skeleton to Y190 mm,
for example (so that Lift strip 1 can be moved).

8-98

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

4.2

Functions NC PROGRAM,
PALLETIZING, START

Menu Function START

Defining Palletizing: Depositing Parts


with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

During palletizing, all parts (finished parts, scrap parts or sheet


skeleton) that are removed using the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
are unloaded upon a defined position. The positions must be
defined in advance in the DATA Module. Only the procedure itself
is programmed in the TECHNOLOGY Module.
Configuring automatic palletizing

Display of automatic palletizing

Fig. 20468

If unloading is defined for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster without


reference to geometry (for example, sheet skeleton), then
you must enter the size of the lift items in an additional step.
For a detailed description see: "Configuring Lift Removal
without Geometry Reference".
The automatic palletizing proceeds as a rule in the following steps:
1st Step:

Enter stack items on a list and adjust their data to


conform.

2nd Step: Establish or modify settings for die automatic palletizing.


3rd Step: Execute automatic palletizing. The result will be displayed on the monitor screen.
4th Step: Modify manually, in order to adjust to the automatic
palletizing ( see: "Modifying Palletizing Manually").

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-99

Establishing data regarding


stack items

Select the functions PALLETIZING, START.


Next, enter the data for the stack items in the sequence mask. One
line of stack item data corresponds to one stack item.

Establishing stack item data

8-100

Automation Components

Fig. 20469

S354E81.DOC

All the stack items are listed in the selection window. Select one of
the stack items. The corresponding data are displayed in the
display fields. In addition, the geometry of the lift items is shown in
one of the preview windows.
Data in the preview window:

"Mode": Finished part, scrap or sheet skeleton. You have already


determined this configuration when you set the unloading
configuration with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. You cannot
modify this determination.

"Stack mode": How are the lift items belonging to this stack
item to be unloaded?
Select one of the possibilities from below in the mask:
"depositing mandatory": All lift items must be unloaded;
regular dropping is not possible.
"depositing optional": As far as it is possible, the lift items
will be deposited. In order to avoid collisions, individual lift
items can also be dropped.
"soft dropping": All lift items will be dropped from a reduced
height from the lift.
"regular dropping": All lift items will be dropped from a
maximum height from the lift.

"Height": Maximum height of the stack of lift items in [mm]. The


stack height is calculated by multiplying the maximum total of
the lift items in the stack by the sheet thickness.

"Number": Maximum number of lift items that a stack is able to


contain.

"Sheet thickness": Sheet thickness of the lift items in the stack.


This sheet thickness might possibly not conform to the sheet
metal sheet thickness, due to malformations, for example.

In the lower area of the mask, you can also establish the following:

"Name": Establishing name for the lift items.


"Remark": Enter remark regarding the lift items.

In this ToPs version, Name and Remark are automatically inserted


in connection with the name of the drawing. Modifications that you
undertake here last only as long as the ongoing ToPs session
itself. This information is not stored when ToPs is closed.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-101

The geometry of the lift items is shown in the preview window.


In addition, the size of the parts (surrounding rectangle of the parts
geometry) and the offset are displayed. The offset value in the Xand Y-directions, from the point of view of the datum point of the lift
items (lower left-hand corner of the surrounding rectangle) to the
drawing zero position of the Lift, is the one designated as the
offset.

1
1
2

Offset
Lift zero position (drawing zero
position)

3
3

rectangle surrounding the stacked


item

Offset of one stacked item

Fig. 20472

End the determinations and modifications in the mask using the


function button CONTINUE.

Function button CONTINUE

Establishing configuration for automatic palletizing


An additional sequence mask is opened, in which you can
establish parameters for palletizing, based upon four index cards.

8-102

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Index card "Strategy"

Establishing strategy for stack formation.

Establishing strategies for stack formation

Fig. 20462

In the mask, specify:

"Arrangement of stack items": How are the lift items sorted


upon the stack?
Is it permissible that finished parts and scrap parts come to
lie upon the same pallet
or
should the finished items and the scrap parts lie separate
upon different pallets?
Select the desired radio button.
The selection of the switch with color recognition is useful only
if you have also configured the palletizing mode "mixed" in the
DATA Module.

S354E81.DOC

"Number of identical sheets": Entries in this entry field are not


utilized in this version of ToPs. The palletizing is always carried
out for just one sheet.

"Stack growth": Only the switch "Successive filling" can be


selected in this version.
For this configuration, one stack is filled first, with a second
stack begun then only as needed.

Automation Components

8-103

8-104

Automation Components

"Dealing with collisions during stacking":


Collisions between the Lift and already existing stacks can
occur when lift items are to be unloaded by the lift. A collision
avoidance must be executed in such cases. Select the strategy
that is to be applied.
"Modify stacking mode": The mode with which the part is to
be stacked is changed from "depositing" to "soft dropping",
insofar as this is permissible (predetermination with stack
item). If "depositing mandatory" is determined, then no
alteration of the stack mode can be undertaken. A new
stack will be formed.
"New stack": In order to avoid collisions, a new stack will
be formed in every case. It should be noted with this
strategy that more space is taken up on the pallets.

S354E81.DOC

Index card "Stack item"

Establishing definitions for stack items.

Index card "Stack item" Establishing definitions.

Fig. 20463

Specify:

S354E81.DOC

"Finished part" How may the finished part be stacked?


Switch "Mixed": Mixtures of different finished parts may be
stacked on the same pallet.
Switch "Sorted": Only one type of finished part may be
stacked upon a pallet.
"Scrap" and "Sheet skeleton": Where should scrap and sheet
skeleton be unloaded?
Switch "Fixed position": Scraps or sheet skeletons should
be stacked upon pallets for which a fixed position has been
configured. If no pallets with fixed positions were
configured in the DATA Module, then this switch is not
enabled.
Switch "Pallet": Scraps or sheet skeletons should be
stacked upon pallets for which no fixed position has been
configured. Prerequisite: Pallets must be configured in the
DATA Module that accept these lift items.

Automation Components

8-105

Selection window with the symbol (arrow)


"Finished part under table", "Scrap under table", "Sheet
skeleton under table": With which priority should pallets that lie
under the machine table be filled with parts?

Prerequisites:
Pallets under table must be possible with the particular
machine: only TC 500R and TC 600L.
"Under table" must be configured in the DATA Module under
Palletizing.

8-106

Automation Components

"Not admitted": Do not use the pallets under table for the
particular kind of stack item (finished part, scrap, sheet
skeleton).
"Privileged": Use the pallets under table for one particular
kind of stack item in preference to all others.
"Reserve": Use the pallets under table only when there is
no more space available on another pallet for the particular
kind of stack item.

S354E81.DOC

Index card "Parameters"

Establishing parameters for pallet sequence and stacking on the


pallet.

Establishing parameters

Fig. 20464

This switch is of importance only for Trumasort L or with


Double cart. With unloading platform, positioning can be done
only in X-direction.

Specify:

S354E81.DOC

"Pallet sequence": In which sequence should the pallets be


used, when more than one is needed?
Switch "X before Y": The next pallet is sought first in the Xdirection (positioning movement of the Lift), and then
afterwards in the Y-direction (positioning movement of the
Trumasort L or double cart). Pallets that are near to the
punching head will be preferred over those that are not so
near to it.
Switch "Y before X": The next pallet is sought first in the Ydirection, then afterwards then in the X-direction. Pallets
that are near to the punching head will be preferred over
those that are not so near to it. This switch is of importance
only for Trumasort L or with Double cart. With unloading
platform, positioning can be done only in X-direction.
Switch "as in data base": The sequence of the pallets
corresponds to their numbering as was established in the
DATA Module.

Automation Components

8-107

"Stacking on the pallet": How should the sequencing of several


stacks on the pallet be carried out?
This switch is of no significance for the unloading platform.

8-108

Automation Components

Switch "X before Y": The stacks will be first unloaded in


continuous X-direction, afterwards in Y-direction.
Switch "Y before X": The stacks will be first unloaded in
continuous Y-direction, afterwards in X-direction.

S354E81.DOC

Index card "Double cart"

Establishing cart selection.


This index card can be selected only when a double cart has been
configured for the particular machine in the unloading area (Data
Module).
Specify for the double cart the following:

"Cart choice": How should the two carts be selected?


Switch "free": Upper and lower carriages will be treated as
two independent unloading units. Stacks can be distributed
freely onto both carriages with Automatic / Palletizing and
also with Manual / Modify.
Switch "automatic": Stacks will be formed only on the
upper carriage. If a stack reaches the maximum possible
height for the double carriage, then the the double carriage
operation will automatically replace the upper carriage with
the lower carriage. Once the maximum height is reached
for the lower carriage, then the changeover can be made
back to the upper carriage (that has been emptied in the
meantime). From the viewpoint of palletizing, this method
leads to stacks that have no limitations regarding stacking
height.

The automatic carriage choice is only possible where identical capacities for upper and lower carriages are available
for the double cart. For this, the corresponding switch must
be set in the DATA Module for configuration of the double
cart.
The free choice of carts is not supported by the older double
cart operating systems. Inform yourself in advance regarding
the possibilities of your double cart. If in doubt, always activate the automatic cart choice. For this, always configure
double carts with identical upper and lower carriages.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-109

Display of the palletizing result upon the monitor screen


After you have established all the parameters for automatic
palletizing, confirm your entries in the mask with OK.
The system creates for you a stack layout with unloading area,
based upon the specifications. The machine and sheet drawings
will be replaced by palletizing graphics on the monitor screen:
The following colors will be used in the display:
Color

Explanation

Cyan
(Light Blue)

Drawing of the pallets

White

Drawing of the units, as rectangle surrounding all


the related pallets (including border for improved
differentiation from the pallet drawings).
For units whose Y-dimensions are programmed as
positions, the positions are shown as broken white
auxiliary lines.

Yellow

Stacks which can take up even more lift items.


More lift items can be stacked on these stacks.

Green

Stacks that can take on no more lift items (full


stacks).

Red

Stack that presents an error, for example; collision,


stack lies outside of a pallet.

If a stack is shown in the color red, it can be due to the following


causes:

Collision of the Lift with another stack: If lift items are being
unloaded, then it is possible that the Lift will collide with
another already-existing higher stack. Remedy: Use regular
drop with the lift item instead of depositing it, or move the
stack.

8-110

Collision of the stack with another stack: The surrounding rectangles of the two stacks fail to maintain the minimum distance
of 10 mm between them. Remedy: Increase distance between
stacks.

Stack could not be unloaded upon any pallet. It will then be


marked under the unloading area. Remedy: Position the stack
manually upon an unoccupied pallet place or restart the
automatic palletizing with modified parameters.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

4.3

Modifying Palletizing Manually

In case not all of the lift items were put into place without any
collisions during automatic palletizing, or if the created layout does
not meet expectations, then you can modify the palletizing result
manually. In addition, you can have information and settings
regarding stack item displayed.
Start automatic stack formation. In the menu field for the PALLETIZING
operating function there are other menu functions available.

Screen menu for palletizing

S354E81.DOC

Fig. 20470

Automation Components

8-111

Moving the Stack


Functions
STACK INTERACTION, MOVE

Moving a stack that is already present.

Procedure:

Click onto the stack that is to be moved.


The mouse cursor must be located within the rectangle
surrounding the selected stack. The drawing of the stack to be
moved as well as the drawing of the Lift now both hang onto
the mouse cursor.
In doing so, the mouse cursor displays the datum point of the
stack. This is the lower left-hand corner of the rectangle
surrounding the stack.

Establish a new position on a pallet.


The stack will be unloaded as soon as you have clicked the
target position with the left-hand mouse button. If this is a valid
position, the stack will be unloaded on the new position and a
collision calculation will be carried out. If the moving of the
stack leads to collisions, these will be displayed. You must
configure a new position upon a pallet.

Rules governing stack placement

8-112

Automation Components

The datum point of the stack (mouse cursor) must be located


within a pallet (cyan-colored rectangles) during placement of
the stack. The stack will be assigned to this pallet through
positioning, even when the largest part of the stack surface is
lying upon another pallet.

S354E81.DOC

A stack may overlap the pallet edge, but it must always lie
completely within a unit, i.e., within the rectangle surrounding
all of the pallets of that unit.
The white line which presents the units shows a certain
distance to the rectangle surrounding all of the pallets of the
unit. This display was deliberately chosen in order to make
the overall display clear.
Exception: Stacks upon the unloading platform may extend
beyond the unit in the monitor screen display, because the
Lift can travel only in X-direction, and the position of the
stack in Y-direction is dependent upon how the lift items was
taken up by the Lift. The stacks are displayed outside the
unloading areas and displaced downwards.

The maximum stack height of the pallet upon which the stack
is to be unloaded must be greater than the actual height of the
stack that is to be moved.

If one of these conditions is not met, then the stack will not be
unloaded. The Lift drawing continues to remain visible on the
mouse cursor and a different, correct position can be clicked.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-113

Automatic Correction of the Placement


Position
Correction of the stack position is carried out automatically,
depending upon which pallet or which unit a stack is unloaded.
Pallet upon an unloading
platform

Here the Lift can only travel to the Y-position 0 (zero). The Y-position
of the stack is corrected in this way in order that the Y-position 0
(zero) is generated for the Lift.
Example: The lift items is separated out with a rectangular 76 x 5 mm
stamp. The part will not be pushed out. The offset of the LIft consists of -2.5 mm (= half of the stamp width) in Y-direction for this
stack item. The Y-position of the stack is corrected on the unloading platform by +2.5 mm, no matter which Y-position is selected.

Pallet with fixed position

When a stack is to be unloaded upon a pallet with a fixed position,


the stack position is always corrected to match the position on this
pallet configured in the DATA Module.

Pallet upon a unit where the


Y-values are programmed
as positions

Stacks cannot be positioned using freely-chosen Y-values upon


these pallets, because the Lift must always be unloaded precisely
above one of the possible positions.
It is not the stack which engages with these auxiliary lines,
but the Lift itself.
Due to reasons of collision safety, the correction is carried out as a
rule in the direction of larger Y-values. As an aid to orientation, the
possible positions are displayed as white auxiliary lines in the
palletizing drawing.
The conditions described above must also be observed
during automatic correction of placement position, otherwise
the stack cannot be unloaded. see: "Rules Governing
Stack Placement".

8-114

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Merging Stacks
Functions STACK
INTERACTION, MERGE

Using this interaction, the lift items from one stack can be
transferred over to another stack.

Procedure:

Identify the "source stack", i.e. the stack that contains the lift
items that are to be transferred.
The Lift drawing is shown with the stack drawing on the mouse
cursor.

Identify the "target stack", i.e. the stack that is to receive the lift
items that are to be transferred.
As many lift items as possible will now be transferred from the
source stack to the target stack. If all of the lift items can be
transferred, then the source stack will be deleted afterwards.

At the end of the interaction, a collision calculation will be carried


out and possible collisions will be shown using red stack displays,
for example when the Lift unloads upon the now higher target
stack.

Rules for merging two stacks

The maximum stack height of the target stack may not be


exceeded. The stack height of the target stack can be limited
by configuring a limited maximum stack height for the stack
item or by having the stack be located upon a pallet for which a
limited maximum stack height has already been configured.

If the target stack is already full, then no lift items from the
source stack can be transferred to the target stack.

S354E81.DOC

Only those stacks can be merged that contain identical kinds of


stack items. That means that no stacks can be formed that
contain different kinds of stack items.

If the capacity of the target stack is not sufficient to accept all


the lift items of the source stack, then precisely that number of
lift items will be transferred that brings the target stack to just
its maximum stack height. In this case, the number of the
transferred lift items will be displayed in a report list.

Automation Components

8-115

Unloading the Stack


Functions STACK
INTERACTION, STACK

The type of placement of all lift items of a stack can be modified


using this interaction.
After clicking upon the stack to be modified, the following mask
appears:

Unloading the stack

Fig. 20471

Some information regarding the selected stack and its stack items
are displayed in the mask. You can modify only the stacking mode.

"soft dropping": All lift items of the stack will be dropped from a
reduced height. For this there is no more risk of collision.

8-116

"depositing": All lift items of the stack will be unloaded.


Warning - risk of collision: Changing the stack mode to
"depositing" can lead to the Lift possibly placing items upon
another, already-existing stack. If collisions occur, then the
stack will be displayed in red.

"regular dropping": All lift items of the stack will be dropped


from the maximum possible height.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

It can happen that different lift items on the same stack show
different placement modes, following automatic palletizing. This
situation will be displayed in the text field of the stack mode with
the text "mixed".

Rule
Modifying the stack mode from "depositing" to "soft dropping" or
"regular dropping" is not possible, if the preliminary stack mode for
the stack item has been set at "depositing mandatory".
If the stack mode is nevertheless to be modified, then the
preliminary stack mode settings for the stack items must be
changed beforehand to at least "depositing optional".

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-117

Eliminating Stacks
Functions STACK
INTERACTION, ELIMINATE

Should collisions occur following the execution of interactions, then


these should be eliminated.
The elimination of collisions is carried out only through modification
of the stack mode of individual lift items, and not through the
displacement of stacks.
As a result of this, only collisions of the type "Lift with stack" can be
eliminated, and not collisions of the type "Stack with stack".
If a collision cannot be eliminated, then check to see whether the
lift items affected are not in a stack that has been assigned the
preliminary stack mode "depositing mandatory". In this case, it will
be displayed in a corresponding information list.

Requesting Information regarding a Stack


Function INFORMATION,
STACK

With the help of this function, you can request information


regarding a stack.

Procedure:

Identify the stack by clicking the desired stack with the lefthand mouse button.

The mask which is displayed corresponds to the mask of the


functions STACK INTERACTION, STACK. The information will
be displayed. However, you cannot make any changes in the
data of the stack.

Information in the mask:

"Number": Current number of lift items upon the stack.

"Height": Designation of the current height of the stack.

"Position upon pallet (x,y)": The coordinates of the stack datum


point (lower left-hand corner of the surrounding rectangle) in
relation to the pallet datum point (lower left-hand corner of the
pallet).

8-118

"Name" and "Remark": Name of the stack item that was


unloaded on the stack, and relevant remark.

"Stacking mode": stack mode of all lift items in the stack. If


"mixed" is displayed, than that means that some of the lift
items of the stack have been stacked differently.

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

Modifying Settings for Stack Items


Functions SETTINGS,
STACK ITEM

These menu functions allow for modification of stack item data.


The following mask that opens corresponds to the mask for "Stack
item data", that is displayed at the start of palletizing.

Procedure:

Select the desired stack item in the selection window. The data
will be shown in the display windows in the lower mask area.

Enter the desired modifications.


The existing stacks will be tested in accordance with the
modified stack item data for collisions. The result of this testing
will be graphically displayed. Stacks with collisions receive the
color red. The stack positions remain the same.
When the maximum number of lift items for the stack is
changed for this stack item, you must take care that the
number may not become smaller than the largest number of lift
items in already-existing stacks of this stack item. In other
words, this modification does not permit the distribution of one
stack into two smaller stacks.
If you wish to have a distribution of a stack into two smaller
stacks, then you must restart the automatic palletizing using
the functions PALLETIZING, START. Enter the modified
number of lift items in the stack in the mask for "Stack item
data ".
A new palletizing will be calculated by the system and
displayed on the monitor screen.

S354E81.DOC

Automation Components

8-119

4.4

Defining Removal with TRUMALIFT


SheetMaster without Geometry Reference

No geometry with processing serves as a basis for defining unloading position for the unloading of such things as sheet skeletons or
residual strips with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
In such cases, the sizes of the lift items cannot be automatically
determined by the system.
Nevertheless, you can also have parts removed without geometric
references with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. Note the following
procedures:

Procedure:
Follow the instructions in the command line.

At the beginning of the automatic palletizing using the functions


PALLETIZING, START, you will be separately required to enter
the size of the lift items.

The processing of the unloading position will be displayed in


the colour magenta.

Afterwards, click upon the lower left-hand corner of the


rectangle surrounding the lift items, and then the upper righthand corner of the surrounding rectangle. Alternate method:
For simplicitys sake, you can also click upon any two
diagonally-opposed corners of the surrounding rectangle.

If the sizes of all lift items are defined accordingly, without


reference to geometry, then the system will inform you in an
information box that you can start the automatic palletizing
procedure anew.

Select functions PALLETIZING, START. The masks already


described will open.
Lift items without geometric reference will be symbolized by a
rectangle with drawn-in diagonals in the monitor screen display
for palletizing.

The data which are communicated by clicking upon the


surrounding rectangle will not yet be stored in the format
TMT ("Tafel mit Bearbeitung": Sheet with Processing) in this
version of ToPs 300. These data must therefore be
reestablished after leaving palletizing and after a restart of
the automatic palletizing.
If one does not leave palletizing, then the automatic palletizing can be restarted as often as necessary. The geometry
information is requested only once.

8-120

Automation Components

S354E81.DOC

4.5

Ending Palletizing

Palletizing is ended when

the function Generate is selected in the operating field


or
a function in the Main Menu bar is selected.
Exception: Not with the functions FILE SAVE, FILE SAVE ALL
and FILE PRINT.
Attention: When leaving palletizing, the layout on the monitor
screen changes as follows: the drawing for palletizing is
deleted and the sheet drawing is displayed again. The layout
of a palletizing that has already been carried out can not be
displayed again in this version. Only the automatic palletizing
can be restarted.

Recommendation:

S354E81.DOC

Before you leave palletizing, print the drawing for the generated
palletizing. Select for this the functions FILE, PRINT, MONITOR.

Automation Components

8-121

Deutschland
Germany
Allemagne

Brasilien
Brazil
Brsil

Frankreich

*
(
(
*
(
(
*

TRUMPF GmbH + Co.,


Maschinenfabrik Stuttgart

TRUMPF Maskin AB

Johann-Maus-Strae 2

Schweden

D-71254 Ditzingen
(07156) 303-0

Sude

Sweden

int. 0049 / 7156-303-0

TRUMPF Maquinas Ltda.


Avenida Juru, 150 - Alphaville

Schweiz

06455-010 Barueri-Sao Paulo

Switzerland

(011) 421-5331

Suisse

int. 0055 / 11-421-5331


TRUMPF S.A.R.L.

Aleforsvgen 5
Box 606

(
(
*
(
(
*

S-441 17 Alingss
(0322) 639100
int. 0046 / 322-639100
TRUMPF Maschinen AG
Ruessenstrae 8
CH-6341 Baar
(041) 7696-666
int. 0041 / 41-7696-666
TRUMPF Pte Ltd

Bote Postale 50239

Singapur

France

86, Alle des Erables

Singapore

02-28/29 German Centre

France

Paris Nord II
F-95956 Roissy - Charles de
Gaulle Cedex

Singapour

Singapur 609916

(
(
Grobritannien

(
(

(01-48) 17 80-40
int. 0033 / 1-48 1780-40
TRUMPF Ltd.
President Way

Spanien

Great Britain

Airport Executive Park

Spain

Grande-Bretagne

Luton, Beds. LU2 9NL

Espagne

Italien
Italy
Italie

Japan

(
(
*
(
(
*

Malaysia

(
(
*

TRUMPF Homberger S.R.L.


Via Malta 2/1

Tschech. Republik

I-16121 Genova

Czech Republic

(010) 5765350

Tchquie

int. 0039 / 010-5765350


TRUMPF Corporation
1-18-2 Hakusan

USA
United States

Yokohama 226

Etats-Unis

(045) 931-57 10
int. 0081 / 45-931-57 10
TRUMPF Pte Ltd.
No. 74, 1st floor

Malaysia

Jalan SS 15/4D

Malaisie

Subang Jaya

(
(
sterreich
Austria
Autriche

*
(
(

(
(

5627780
int. 0065 / 5627780
TRUMPF Maquinaria, S.A.
Avenida de Valdelaparra, 13
E-28100 Alcobendas (Madrid)
(91) 6573662
int. 0034 / 91- 6573662

int. 0044 /1582-725-335

Midori-ku

Japan
Japon

(01582) 725-335

25 International Business Park

47500 Petaling Jaya


(037) 343889
int. 0060 / 37343889
TRUMPF Maschinen Austria
GmbH & Co. KG
Industriepark 24
A-4061 Pasching
(07221) 603-0
int. 0043 / 7221-603-0
Stand 15. Mrz 1999

*
(
(
*
(
(

TRUMPF Praha spol.s.r.o.


Stetkova 18
140 00 Prag 4
(02) 42 33 29
int. 00420 / 2 42 33 29
TRUMPF Inc.
Farmington Industrial Park
Farmington, CT 06032
(860) 677-9741
int. 001 / 860-677-9741

Update information

ToPs 300
Version 3.10

Update information

ToPs 300
Version 3.10

Edition: 08/2000

Ordering information

Please state the title of the document, the language required,


and the date of issue.
TRUMPF Maschinen GmbH & Co. KG
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
D-71254 Ditzingen
Tel. (0 71 56) 3 03-0
Fax (0 71 56) 3 03-5 40
Internet: http://www.trumpf.com
e-mail: docu.501@de.trumpf.com

This document was drawn up in the Technical Documentation of TRUMPF


Maschinen GmbH + Co. KG.
All rights to this documentation, especially the rights of reproduction and distribution
as well as that of translation are retained by TRUMPF Maschinen GmbH + Co. KG,
also in the event of notifications of protective privilege. Without previous written
consent of TRUMPF Maschinen GmbH + Co. KG, no part of the documentation, no
matter in which form, may be reproduced, processed, copied or distributed using
electronic systems. Errors and technical changes excepted.
TRUMPF Maschinen GmbH + Co. KG
TRUMPF Maschinen GmbH + Co. KG is not liable for any errors in this
documentation. Liability for direct and indirect damage or injury resulting from the
delivery or use of this documentation is excluded, in so far as this is legally
permissible.

The most important innovations

Working with the


processing samples

Complex processing of contours can be defined and saved as


machine- and material-dependent processing samples.
Th